इति स्वात्मारामयोगीन्द्रविरचितायां हठप्रदीपिकायां प्रथमोपदेशः ॥
iti svātmārāmayogīndraviracitāyāṃ haṭhapradīpikāyāṃ prathamopadeśaḥ //
श्रीआदिनाथाय नमोऽस्तु तस्मै
येनोपदिष्टा हठयोगविद्या ।
विराजते प्रोन्नतराजसौध-
मारोढुमिच्छोरधिरोहिणीव ॥
śrīādināthāya namo’stu tasmai
yenopadiṣṭā haṭhayogavidyā /
virājate pronnatarājasaudha-
m āroḍhum icchor adhirohiṇīva //
In his commentary {Jyotsnā} on Haṭhapradīpikā 1.1 Brahmānanda first states that the author Svātmārāma starts appropriately with a maṅgala, a verse of adoration addressing Ādinātha, i.e. Śiva, but in accordance with his non-sectarian approach leaves room for a second interpretation of the word as Viṣṇu. A sentence later this is contradicted by his explanantion that Ādinātha, who first taught Yoga, taught it to Pārvatī, which limits the scope to Śiva. The reading °rājasaudham in the third verse quarter is well attested by the manuscripts, including α1. However, the most common reading in manuscripts on the lower branches of the stemma is °rājayogam, which was accepted by Brahmānanda in Jyotsnā 1.1 (see below). It apears that some scribes have made a concerted effort to replace words like saudha, vidyā and mārga with yoga in the opening verses of the text (see also 1.1d and 1.3b), even at the expense of the poetic imagery. In light of the variants, which have lead to our critical edition, Brahmānanda’s choices and interpretation of the second half cannot be upheld. This is Brahmānanda’s version and the relevant portion of his commentary:
गुरुं नत्वा शिवं साक्षाद्ब्रह्मानन्देन तन्यते
हठप्रदीपिकाज्योत्स्ना योगमार्गप्रकाशिका
इदानींतनानां सुबोधार्थमस्याः
सुविज्ञाय गोरक्षसिद्धान्तहार्दम्
मया मेरुशास्त्रिप्रमुख्याभियोगात्
स्फुटं कथ्यते 'त्यन्तगूढो 'पि भावः
हकारः कीर्तितः सूर्यष्ठकारश्चन्द्र उच्यते
सूर्यचन्द्रमसोर्योगाद्धठयोगो निगद्यते
guruṃ natvā śivaṃ sākṣād brahmānandena tanyate
haṭhapradīpikājyotsnā yogamārgaprakāśikā
idānīṃtanānāṃ subodhārtham asyāḥ
suvijñāya gorakṣasiddhāntahārdam
mayā meruśāstripramukhyābhiyogāt
sphuṭaṃ kathyate 'tyantagūḍho 'pi bhāvaḥ
hakāraḥ kīrtitaḥ sūryaṣ ṭhakāraś candra ucyate
sūryacandramasor yogād dhaṭhayogo nigadyate
sadādināthāya namo ’stu tubhyaṃ
yenopadiṣṭā haṭhayogavidyā |
virājate pronnatarājayogam
āroḍhum icchor adhirohiṇīva ||
ādīśvarāya praṇamāmi tasmai
yenopadiṣṭā haṭhayogavidyā |
virājate pronnatarājayogam
āroḍhum icchor adhirohiṇīva ||
प्रणम्य श्रीगुरुं नाथं स्वात्मारामेण योगिना ।
केवलं राजयोगाय हठविद्योपदिश्यते ॥
praṇamya śrīguruṃ nāthaṃ svātmārāmeṇa yoginā /
kevalaṃ rājayogāya haṭhavidyopadiśyate //
भ्रान्त्या बहुमतध्वान्ते राजमार्गमजानताम् ।
हठप्रदीपिकां धत्ते स्वात्मारामः कृपाकरः ॥
bhrāntyā bahumatadhvānte rājamārgam ajānatām /
haṭhapradīpikāṃ dhatte svātmārāmaḥ kṛpākaraḥ //
Most witnesses (including α2) have rājayogam ajānatām (`for those ignorant of Rājayoga’) in 1.3b. The reading rājamārgam ajānatām (α1and α3), “for those unable to find the royal highway”, is more appropriate to the metaphor of being lost in darkness. As Brahmānanda notes, the compound kṛpākaraḥ can be understood as one who is compassionate (kṛpā + kara) or one who is a mine (i.e., a rich source) of compassion (kṛpā + ākara). In the Devanagari transmission, the kṣa of kṣamākaraḥ probably arose as a mistake for kṛ.
ज्ञानभूमिः शुभेच्छाख्या प्रथमा समुदाहृता
विचारणा द्वितीया स्यात्तृतीया तनुमानसा
सत्त्वापत्तिश्चतुर्थी स्यात्ततो 'संसक्तिनामिका
परार्थाभाविनी षष्ठी सप्तमी तुर्यगा स्मृता इति
jñānabhūmiḥ śubhecchākhyā prathamā samudāhṛtā
vicāraṇā dvitīyā syāt tṛtīyā tanumānasā
sattvāpattiś caturthī syāt tato 'saṃsaktināmikā
parārthābhāvinī ṣaṣṭhī saptamī turyagā smṛtā iti
bhrāntyā bahumatadhvānte rājayogam ajānatām |
kevalaṃ rājayogāya haṭhavidyopadiśyate ||
rājayogam ] rājamārgam P,T,t1
हठविद्यां हि मत्स्येन्द्रगोरक्षाद्या विजानते ।
स्वात्मारामोऽथवा योगी जानीते तत्प्रसादतः ॥
haṭhavidyāṃ hi matsyendragorakṣādyā vijānate /
svātmārāmo’thavā yogī jānīte tatprasādataḥ //
The word athavā (‘or’) is well attested but difficult to construe here. Brahmānanda understands it as conjunction (athavāśabdaḥ samuccaye), and this is how we have interpreted it. The variant mahāyogī in ε1and other manuscripts (G5, J4, J11 and Ko) is probably an attempt to remove the difficulty of understanding athavā. One could emend to tathā in light of the attested reading yathā (C7) but this would be a bold intervention given the weight of evidence supporting ’thavā.
(1.4)
हिरण्यगर्भो योगस्य वक्ता नान्यः पुरातनः
नास्ति बुद्धिरयुक्तस्य न चायुक्तस्य भावना
न चाभावयतः शान्तिरशान्तस्य कुतः सुखम्
स्वातन्त्र्यसत्यत्वमुखं प्रधाने
सत्यं च चिद्भेदमभेदवाक्यैः
व्यासो निराचष्ट न भावनाख्यं
योगं स्वयं निर्मितब्रह्मसूत्रैः
अपि चात्मप्रदं योगं व्याकरोन्मतिमान्स्वयम्
भाष्यादिषु ततस्तत्राप्याचार्यप्रमुखैर्मतः
मतो योगो भगवता गीतायामधिको 'न्यतः
कृतः शुकादिभिस्तस्मादत्र सन्तो 'तिसादराः
इति
वेदेषु यज्ञेषु तपःसु चैव
दानेषु यत्पुण्यफलं प्रदिष्टम्
अत्येति तत्सर्वमिदं विदित्वा
योगी परं स्थानमुपैति चाद्यम्
(1.4)
hiraṇyagarbho yogasya vaktā nānyaḥ purātanaḥ
nāsti buddhir ayuktasya na cāyuktasya bhāvanā
na cābhāvayataḥ śāntir aśāntasya kutaḥ sukham
svātantryasatyatvamukhaṃ pradhāne
satyaṃ ca cidbhedam abhedavākyaiḥ
vyāso nirācaṣṭa na bhāvanākhyaṃ
yogaṃ svayaṃ nirmitabrahmasūtraiḥ
api cātmapradaṃ yogaṃ vyākaron matimān svayam
bhāṣyādiṣu tatas tatrāpy ācāryapramukhair mataḥ
mato yogo bhagavatā gītāyām adhiko 'nyataḥ
kṛtaḥ śukādibhis tasmād atra santo 'tisādarāḥ
iti
vedeṣu yajñeṣu tapaḥsu caiva
dāneṣu yat puṇyaphalaṃ pradiṣṭam
atyeti tat sarvam idaṃ viditvā
yogī paraṃ sthānam upaiti cādyam
haṭhavidyāṃ hi gorakṣamatsyendrādyā vijānate |
ātmārāmo ’pi jānīte śrīnivāsas tathā svayam ||
श्रीआदिनाथमत्स्येन्द्रशाबरानन्दभैरवाः ।
चौरङ्गीमीनगोरक्षविरूपाक्षबिलेशयाः ॥
śrīādināthamatsyendraśābarānandabhairavāḥ /
cauraṅgīmīnagorakṣavirūpākṣabileśayāḥ //
In Śaiva texts which predate the Haṭha corpus, Mīnanātha and Matsyendra are one and the same, but they are differentiated in later Tibetan and Indian lists of siddhas (Mallinson 2019: 273 n.35). Two manuscripts of the α and δ groups have the variant reading °virūpākṣaḥ savālikaḥ (J5 and V19) for °virūpākṣabileśayāḥ. In another α manuscript, N3, savālikaḥ was corrected to savālmikaḥ, perhaps in an effort to restore a name similar to Vālmīki, the celebrated author of the Rāmāyaṇa.
śrīādināthamatsyendraśābarānandabhairavāḥ |
śāraṅgīmīnagorakṣavirūpākṣabileśayāḥ ||
मन्थानभैरवो योगी सिद्धबुद्धश्च कन्थडिः ।
गोरण्टकः सुरानन्दः सिद्धपादश्च चर्पटिः ॥ *
manthānabhairavo yogī siddhabuddhaś ca kanthaḍiḥ /
goraṇṭakaḥ surānandaḥ siddhapādaś ca carpaṭiḥ // *
The α manuscripts have goraṇṭaka, and several other manuscript groups have pauraṇṭaka. We are yet to find the name goraṇṭaka in other Sanskrit texts but it may be a Sanskrit rendering of Goraṇṭakuḍu, which is the name of a disciple of Gorakṣanātha in the Navanāthacaritramu (Jones 2017: 194 n.3). The spelling koraṇṭaka is attested in the Haṭhābhyāsapaddhati, and it is reasonably well attested by manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā, as well as those of the Haṭharatnāvalī (which also has gonandaka). The compound siddhapāda could be a respectful affix. However, it seems unlikely here because the name would cross the pāda break.
manthānabhairavo yogī siddhabuddhaś ca kandalī |
korandakaḥ surānandaḥ siddhipādaś ca carpaṭī ||
korandakaḥ ] gonandaka P,T,J,n1,n4
manthānabhairavo yogī siddhabuddhaś ca kanthaḍī |
koraṇṭakaḥ surānandaḥ siddhapādaś ca carpaṭī ||
काणेरी पूज्यपादश्च नित्यनाथो निरञ्जनः ।
कपाली बिन्दुनाथश्च काकचण्डीश्वराह्वयः ॥
kāṇerī pūjyapādaś ca nityanātho nirañjanaḥ /
kapālī bindunāthaś ca kākacaṇḍīśvarāhvayaḥ //
It is possible that pūjyapāda could be a respectful affix to the name Kāṇerī. The variant dhvaninātha may have resulted from a transposition of the first two syllables of nityanātha. The α group supports kākacaṇḍīśvaro gayaḥ but we have not been able to find evidence for a Siddha called Gaya.
karoṭiḥ pūjyapādaś ca nityanātho nirañjanaḥ |
kapālī bindunāthaś ca kākacaṇḍīśvarāhvayaḥ ||
kaṇerī pūjyapādaś ca nityanātho nirañjanaḥ |
kapālī bindunāthaś ca kākacaṇḍīśvaro gajaḥ |
अल्लमप्रभुदेवश्च घोडाचोली च टिण्टिणी ।
भालुकी नागबोधश्च खण्डकापालिकस्तथा ॥
allamaprabhudevaś ca ghoḍācolī ca ṭiṇṭiṇī /
bhālukī nāgabodhaś ca khaṇḍakāpālikas tathā //
The name Allamaprabhudeva (sometimes Allama Prabhu Deva or Allama Prabhudeva in secondary literature) is frequently transmitted as allamaḥ prabhu-devaḥ (cf. α2), as though it were two names. However, manuscripts α1, α3 and others (e.g., V3, V8, V13, V16, V22, N24, N26 and Jyo) do not have the visarga and write it as one name (i.e., allamaprabhudevaś ca). This is also the case in some manuscripts of the Haṭharatnāvalī (P,T,t1 in Gharote 2009: 35 n. 8). The names Nāgabodha, Nāgabodhi, Naradeva, Nāgadeva all seem possible in 1.8c. The reading nāgabodhaś ca is attested across several primary groups of manuscripts. The α1 and α2 reading of siddhaḥ kāpālikas is an exception among the manuscripts and seems too vague to be referring to someone within a lineage. However, Khaṇḍa-kāpālika is well attested by the manuscripts (including α3) and this name appears in other literature. Examples include Kathāsaritsāgara 121.5 ff. (check??), Bṛhatkathāmañjarī 10.45 (check??) and Vajrapāṇi’s Laghutantraṭīkā, p.45 (vīrāḥ khaṇḍakāpālikādayaś caturviṃśatiḥ). It may be a derogatory name for a Kāpālika, coined perhaps by an outsider and connoting something like a defective Kāpālika in the sense of a ‘part-time’ Kāpālika. Alternatively, it could simply refer to one who uses a broken skull as a bowl.
allamaḥ prabhudevaś ca naiṭacūṭiś ca ṭiṇṭiṇiḥ |
bhālukir nāgabodhaś ca khaṇḍakāpālikas tathā ||
allamaḥ prabhudevaś ] allamaprabhudevaś P,T,t1
āllamaḥ prabhudevaś ca ghoḍācolī ca ṭhiṇṭhinī |
bhālukir nāgadevaś ca khaṇḍī kāpālikas tathā ||
इत्यादयो महासिद्धा हठयोगप्रभावतः ।
खण्डयित्वा कालदण्डं ब्रह्माण्डेषु चरन्ति ते ॥
ityādayo mahāsiddhā haṭhayogaprabhāvataḥ /
khaṇḍayitvā kāladaṇḍaṃ brahmāṇḍeṣu caranti te //
The reference to brahmāṇḍa (‘the world’) implies liberation-in-life (jīvanmukti) and physical immortality.
योगेश्वराणां गतिमाहुरन्तर्
बहिस्त्रिलोक्याः पवनान्तरात्मनामिति.
yogeśvarāṇāṃ gatim āhur antar
bahistrilokyāḥ pavanāntarātmanām iti.
ityādayo mahāsiddhāḥ haṭhayogaprasādataḥ |
khaṇḍayitvā kāladaṇḍaṃ brahmāṇḍe vicaranti te ||
ityādayo mahāsiddhā rasabhogaprasādataḥ |
khaṇḍayitvā kāladaṇḍaṃ trilokyāṃ vicaranti te |
ūrdhvaṃretaḥprabhāvena sanakādyā maharṣayaḥ |
khaṇḍayitvā kāladaṇḍaṃ yathecchaṃ viharanti te || 24 ||
संसारतापतप्तानां समाश्रयमठो हठः ।
अशेषयोगजगतामाधारकमठो हठः ॥
saṃsāratāpataptānāṃ samāśrayamaṭho haṭhaḥ /
aśeṣayogajagatām ādhārakamaṭho haṭhaḥ //
The α group omits the second hemistich of this verse, but this was probably the result of eyeskip (i.e., °maṭho haṭhaḥ is repeated). Both °jagatām and °yuktānām are well attested by the collated manuscripts. We have adopted °jagatāṃ because it makes good sense with ādhārakamaṭhah in light of the cosmological notion that the tortoise supports all the worlds. This reading may not have been understood by some and was changed in other witnesses to °yuktānām, which was adopted by Brahmānanda in Jyotsnā 1.10.
saṃsāratāpataptānāṃ samāśrayahaṭho haṭhaḥ |
aśeṣayogajagatām ādhārakamaṭho haṭhaḥ ||
हठविद्या परं गोप्या योगिनां सिद्धिमिच्छताम् ।
भवेद्वीर्यवती गुप्ता निर्वीर्या तु प्रकाशिता ॥
haṭhavidyā paraṃ gopyā yogināṃ siddhim icchatām /
bhaved vīryavatī guptā nirvīryā tu prakāśitā //
Either the singular or plural of yogin could be read here. The singular is well attested among the testimonia, but the manuscript transmission favours the plural.
जिताक्षाय शान्ताय सक्ताय मुक्तौ
विहीनाय दोषैरसक्ताय भुक्तौ
अहीनाय दोषेतरैरुक्तकर्त्रे
प्रदेयो न देयो हठश्चेतरस्मै
विध्युक्तकर्मसंयुक्तः कामसङ्कल्पवर्जितः
यमैश्च नियमैर्युक्तः सर्वसङ्गविवर्जितः
कृतविद्यो जितक्रोधः सत्यधर्मपरायणः
गुरुशुश्रूषणरतः पितृमातृपरायणः
स्वाश्रमस्थः सदाचारो विद्वद्भिश्च सुशिक्षितः
ब्राह्मणक्षत्रियविशां स्त्रीशूद्राणां च पावनम्
शान्तये कर्मणामन्यद्योगान्नास्ति विमुक्तये
दृष्टे तथानुश्रविके विरक्तं विषये मनः
यस्य तस्याधिकारो 'स्मिन्योगे नान्यस्य कस्यचित्
इहामुत्रविरक्तस्य संसारं प्रजिहासतः
जिज्ञासोरेव कस्यापि योगे 'स्मिन्नधिकारिता
नैतद्देयं दुर्विनीताय जातु
ज्ञानं गुप्तं तद्धि सम्यक्फलाय
अस्थाने हि स्थाप्यमानैव वाचां
देवी कोपान्निर्दहेन्नो 'चिराय
jitākṣāya śāntāya saktāya muktau
vihīnāya doṣair asaktāya bhuktau
ahīnāya doṣetarair uktakartre
pradeyo na deyo haṭhaś cetarasmai
vidhyuktakarmasaṃyuktaḥ kāmasaṅkalpavarjitaḥ
yamaiś ca niyamair yuktaḥ sarvasaṅgavivarjitaḥ
kṛtavidyo jitakrodhaḥ satyadharmaparāyaṇaḥ
guruśuśrūṣaṇarataḥ pitṛmātṛparāyaṇaḥ
svāśramasthaḥ sadācāro vidvadbhiś ca suśikṣitaḥ
brāhmaṇakṣatriyaviśāṃ strīśūdrāṇāṃ ca pāvanam
śāntaye karmaṇām anyad yogān nāsti vimuktaye
dṛṣṭe tathānuśravike viraktaṃ viṣaye manaḥ
yasya tasyādhikāro 'smin yoge nānyasya kasyacit
ihāmutraviraktasya saṃsāraṃ prajihāsataḥ
jijñāsor eva kasyāpi yoge 'sminn adhikāritā
naitad deyaṃ durvinītāya jātu
jñānaṃ guptaṃ tad dhi samyak phalāya
asthāne hi sthāpyamānaiva vācāṃ
devī kopān nirdahen no 'cirāya
haṭhavidyā paraṃ gopyā yoginā siddhim icchatā |
bhaved vīryavatī guptā nirvīryā ca prakāśitā ||
haṭhavidyā ... icchatā ] om. III–XII, XIV
tathā haṭhapradīpikāyām—
haṭhavidyā paraṃ gopyā yoginā siddhim icchatā |
bhaved vīryavatī guptā nirvīryā tu prakāśiteti ||
सुराज्ये धार्मिके देशे सुभिक्षे निरुपद्रवे ।*
एकान्तमठिकामध्ये स्थातव्यं हठयोगिना ॥
surājye dhārmike deśe subhikṣe nirupadrave /*
ekāntamaṭhikāmadhye sthātavyaṃ haṭhayoginā //
The term maṭhikā occurs in narrative literature and yoga texts in the sense of a small hut. For example, in the Kathāsaritsāgara (12.9.14, 29–30), maṭhikā refers to the small hut built in a cremation ground by a young Brahmin who makes as his bed the ashes of the dead girl he had hoped to marry. In several other stories (Kathāsaritsāgara 6.6.132, 10.5.89, 12.25.35), maṭhikā is the term used for the hut of an ascetic. In an elaborate description of the huts (maṭhikā) used for Haṭhayoga, the author of the Haṭhābhyāsapaddhati states that the dimensions of the hut are four fore-arm lengths (hasta) high and wide, and it can be made of various materials, such as red earth, ashes, plaster and so on (Birch and Singleton 2019: 17–18). In the Jyotsnā and printed editions of the Haṭhapradīpikā, including one by Digambara and Kokaje (1970: 6), this verse has the additional hemistich, dhanuḥpramāṇaparyantaṃ śilāgnijalavarjite. This hemistich derives from the Gorakṣaśataka (32cd), which has °paryante instead of °paryantaṃ. It stipulates that the hut should be built in a place measuring up to a bow length and free from rocks, fire and water. None of the early manuscripts has this hemistich, which suggests that it was added at a later time. Nonetheless, it appears in over a dozen manuscripts that were consulted for this edition. These manuscripts are not close to an early hyp-archetype of the text.
वासे बहूनां कलहो भवेद्वार्ता द्वयोरपि
vāse bahūnāṃ kalaho bhaved vārtā dvayor api
surāṣṭre dhārmike deśe subhikṣe nirupadrave |
ekāntamaṭhikāmadhye sthātavyaṃ haṭhayoginā ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
surājye dhārmike deśe subhikṣe nirupadrave |
ekānte maṭhikāmadhye sthātavyaṃ haṭhayoginā ||
अल्पद्वारमरन्ध्रगर्तपिठरं नीचायतं
सम्यग्गोमयसान्द्रलिप्तममलं निःशेषबाधोज्झितम् ।
बाह्ये मण्डपवेदिकूपरुचिरं प्राकारसंवेष्टितं
प्रोक्तं योगमठस्य लक्षणमिदं सिद्धैर्हठाभ्यासिभिः ॥
alpadvāram arandhragartapiṭharaṃ nīcāyataṃ
samyaggomayasāndraliptam amalaṃ niḥśeṣabādhojjhitam /
bāhye maṇḍapavedikūparuciraṃ prākārasaṃveṣṭitaṃ
proktaṃ yogamaṭhasya lakṣaṇam idaṃ siddhair haṭhābhyāsibhiḥ //
The syntax of this verse is problematic. One would expect the features of the hut, which are listed in the first three quarters of the verse, to be in the nominative case. Then, the words idaṃ lakṣaṇaṃ in the fourth quarter would refer back to them. However, the compounds in the first three verse-quarters appear to qualify lakṣaṇa as though they were adjectives, and this seems to have been the way the verse was composed. The manuscripts preserve many different readings at the end of the compound beginning with arandhragarta°. We have adopted piṭaka, which usually means ``a basket’’ but can also mean ``a boil or blister," because it is well attested and might here refer to bumps on the floors or walls that would make them uneven. Another possibility is °piṭharaṃ, which can have the sense of potsherds and would here mean that the hut should be free of rubbish on the floor. One would expect a word for a defect in a hut that is similar to, but not the same as, cracks (randhra) and holes (garta). For this reason, the reading °vivaraṃ looks like a patch, as its meaning does not add anything to °randhragarta°. The reading °viṭapaṃ (`the young branch of a tree or creeper’) attested in some manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā is difficult to construe in this context unless it was intended to refer to creepers or branches that might invade or encroach upon the hut. Manuscripts of several groups, namely β, ε and η, have °bādhojjitaṃ, whereas δ and the Yogacintāmaṇi have the more easily understood reading of °jantūjjhitaṃ (‘free from creatures’). The α group is split on this, with G4 (bodhojhitaṃ) closer to °bādhojjitaṃ and N3 (jyaṃtyūpsitaṃ and J5 (jaṃtūṣṇitaṃ) closer to °jantūjjhitaṃ. We have adopted the more unusual reading of °bādhojjitaṃ with the support of a similar description of a hut in Suśrutasaṃhitā 6.17.67 (gṛhe nirābādhe).
मन्दिरं रम्यविन्यासं मनोज्ञं गन्धवासितम्
धूपामोदादिसुरभि कुसुमोत्करमण्डितम्
मुनितीर्थनदीवृक्षपद्मिनीशैलशोभितम्
चित्रकर्मनिबद्धं च चित्रभेदविचित्रितम्
कुर्याद्योगगृहं धीमान्सुरम्यं शुभवर्त्मना
दृष्ट्वा चित्रगतांश्छान्तान्मुनीन्याति मनः शमम्
सिद्धान्दृष्ट्वा चित्रगतान्मतिरभ्युद्यमे भवेत्
मध्ये योगगृहस्याथ लिखेत्संसारमण्डलम्
श्मशानं च महाघोरं नरकांश्च लिखेत्क्वचित्
तान्दृष्ट्वा भीषणाकारान्संसारे सारवर्जिते
अनवसादो भवति योगी सिद्ध्यभिलाषुकः
पश्यंश्च व्याधितान्जन्तून्नतान्मत्तांश्चलद्व्रणात्
mandiraṃ ramyavinyāsaṃ manojñaṃ gandhavāsitam
dhūpāmodādisurabhi kusumotkaramaṇḍitam
munitīrthanadīvṛkṣapadminīśailaśobhitam
citrakarmanibaddhaṃ ca citrabhedavicitritam
kuryād yogagṛhaṃ dhīmān suramyaṃ śubhavartmanā
dṛṣṭvā citragatāṃś chāntān munīn yāti manaḥ śamam
siddhān dṛṣṭvā citragatān matir abhyudyame bhavet
madhye yogagṛhasyātha likhet saṃsāramaṇḍalam
śmaśānaṃ ca mahāghoraṃ narakāṃś ca likhet kvacit
tān dṛṣṭvā bhīṣaṇākārān saṃsāre sāravarjite
anavasādo bhavati yogī siddhyabhilāṣukaḥ
paśyaṃś ca vyādhitān jantūn natān mattāṃś caladvraṇāt
suśobhanaṃ maṭhaṃ kuryāt sūkṣmadvāraṃ tu nirvraṇaṃ ||
suṣṭhu liptaṃ gomayena sudhayā vā prayatnataḥ |
matkuṇair maśakair bhūtair varjitaṃ ca prayatnataḥ ||
dine dine susammṛṣṭaṃ sammārjanyā hy atandritaḥ |
vāsitaṃ ca sugandhena dhūpitaṃ guggulādibhiḥ ||
malamūtrādibhir vargair aṣṭādaśabhir eva ca |
varjitaṃ dvārasampannaṃ vastrāvaraṇam eva vā ||
alpadvāram arandhragartaghaṭitaṃ nāpy uccanīcāyitam |
samyaggomayasāndraliptavimalaṃ niḥśeṣajantūjjhitam |
bāhye maṇḍapakūpavediracitaṃ prākārasaṃveṣṭitam |
proktaṃ yogamaṭhasya lakṣaṇam idaṃ siddhair haṭhābhyāsibhiḥ ||
°vimalaṃ ] L, mavilaṃ N
alpadvāram arandhragartapiṭharaṃ nātyuccanīcāyataṃ
samyaggomayasāndraliptavimalaṃ niḥśeṣabādhojjhitaṃ |
bāhye maṇḍapavedikūparuciraṃ prākārasaṃveṣṭitam
proktaṃ yogamaṭhasya lakṣaṇam idaṃ siddhair haṭhābhyāsibhiḥ |||
°piṭharaṃ ] piṭakaṃ J,n2, peṭakaṃ N
एवंविधे मठे स्थित्वा सर्वचिन्ताविवर्जितः ।
गुरूपदिष्टमार्गेण योगमेव समभ्यसेत् ॥
evaṃvidhe maṭhe sthitvā sarvacintāvivarjitaḥ /
gurūpadiṣṭamārgeṇa yogam eva samabhyaset //
मरुज्जयो यस्य सिद्धस्तं सेवेत गुरुं सदा
गुरुवक्त्रप्रसादेन कुर्यात्प्राणजयं बुधः
वेदान्ततर्कोक्तिभिरागमैश्च
नानाविधैः शास्त्रकदम्बकैश्च
ध्यानादिभिः सत्करणैर्न गम्यश्
चिन्तामणिर्ह्येकगुरुं विहाय
आचार्याद्योगसर्वस्वमवाप्य स्थिरधीः स्वयम्
यथोक्तं लभते तेन प्राप्नोत्यपि च निर्वृतिम्
गुरुप्रसादाल्लभते योगमष्टाङ्गसंयुतम्
शिवप्रसादाल्लभते योगसिद्धिं च शाश्वतीम्
यस्य देवे परा भक्तिर्यथा देवे तथा गुरौ
तस्यैते कथिता ह्यर्थाः प्रकाशन्ते महात्मनः
marujjayo yasya siddhas taṃ seveta guruṃ sadā
guruvaktraprasādena kuryāt prāṇajayaṃ budhaḥ
vedāntatarkoktibhir āgamaiś ca
nānāvidhaiḥ śāstrakadambakaiś ca
dhyānādibhiḥ satkaraṇair na gamyaś
cintāmaṇir hy ekaguruṃ vihāya
ācāryād yogasarvasvam avāpya sthiradhīḥ svayam
yathoktaṃ labhate tena prāpnoty api ca nirvṛtim
guruprasādāl labhate yogam aṣṭāṅgasaṃyutam
śivaprasādāl labhate yogasiddhiṃ ca śāśvatīm
yasya deve parā bhaktir yathā deve tathā gurau
tasyaite kathitā hy arthāḥ prakāśante mahātmanaḥ
evaṃvidhaṃ guruṃ labdhvā sarvacintāvivarjitaḥ
sthitvā manohare deśe yogam eva samabhyaset
evaṃvidhe maṭhe sthitvā sarvacintāvivarjitaḥ |
gurūpadiṣṭamārgeṇa yogam eva sadābhyaset ||
evaṃvidhe maṭhe sthitvā sarvacintāvivarjitaḥ |
gurūpadiṣṭamārgeṇa yogam eva sadābhyaset ||
अत्याहारः प्रयासश्च प्रजल्पोऽनियमग्रहः ।
जनसङ्गश्च लौल्यं च षड्भिर्योगो विनश्यति ॥
atyāhāraḥ prayāsaś ca prajalpo’niyamagrahaḥ /
janasaṅgaś ca laulyaṃ ca ṣaḍbhir yogo vinaśyati //
Since many scribes do not use an avagraha we cannot be sure whether to understand niyamagrahaḥ in pāda b as having a negative prefix. Although yama and niyama are not included in the Haṭhapradīpikā as auxiliaries of Haṭhayoga, verse 2.14 implies that niyama is necessary at least in the early stages of establishing a practice. Furthermore, verse 3.82 suggests that a yogi who does not practice niyama might obtain success in yoga through the practice of vajrolī. Ambiguity over the role of yama and niyama in Haṭhayoga may explain why two verses on ten yamas and ten niyamas were inserted in some manuscripts after the next verse (1.16). The additional verses derive from either the Śāradātilakatantra (25.7–8) or the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā (1.38, 1.53). In the Jyotsnā, Brahmānanda reads niyamāgraha and takes it as though āgraha was implied, which yields the meaning of ‘over-insistence on rules’, and he relates it to extreme ascetic practice.
atyāhāraḥ prayāsaś ca prajalpo niyamagrahaḥ |
janasaṅgaś ca laulyaṃ ca ṣaḍbhir yogaḥ praṇaśyati ||
atyāhāraḥ prayāsaś ca prajalpo niyamagrahaḥ |
janasaṅgaṃ ca laulyaṃ ca ṣaḍbhir yogo vinaśyati ||
niyamagrahaḥ ] niyamāgrahaḥ N,J
atyāhāraḥ prayāsaś ca prajalpo niyamāgrahaḥ |
janasaṃgaś ca laulyaṃ ca ṣaḍbhir yogo vinaśyati ||
śītodakena prātaḥsnānanaktabhojanaphalāhārādirūpaniyamasya grahaṇaṃ niyamagrahaḥ |
niyamāgrahaḥ vakṣyamāṇaniyamāparipālanaṃ
उत्साहात्साहसाद्धैर्यात् तत्त्वज्ञानाच्च निश्चयात् ।
जनसङ्गपरित्यागात्षड्भिर्योगः प्रसिध्यति ॥
utsāhāt sāhasād dhairyāt tattvajñānāc ca niścayāt /
janasaṅgaparityāgātṣaḍbhir yogaḥ prasidhyati //
α and several other groups of manuscripts have tattvajñānāc ca darśanāt or something very similar in the second pāda of the verse, but darśana by itself is problematic: a vision of what? The early sources of this verse, in particular the Śivadharmottara, indicate that the second verse quarter read as santoṣāt tattvadarśanāt, which makes much better sense of the word darśana (i.e., ‘seeing the truth’). However it seems likely that before the time of Svātmārāma other versions of this verse were circulating in which santoṣāt was not found, niścayāt had moved from the first to second verse quarter, tattvadarśanāt had become tattvajñānāt and sāhasāt was introduced. It should also be noted that the word tattva could have a more specific meaning in the Haṭhapradīpikā (4.45–46) as Svātmārāma states that it is a synonym of samādhi. In other yoga texts, it can sometimes refer to the practices of yoga (e.g. tritattva in Amṛtasiddhi 13.12, 14.2--3) or, more generally, to the highest reality or truth (e.g. Amanaska 1.2, 1.20–21, 2.17, etc.).
utsāho niścayo dhairyaṃ santoṣas tattvadarśanam |
kratūnāṃ copasaṃhāraḥ ṣaṭsādhanam iti smṛtam |
utsāhān niścayād dhairyāt santoṣāt tattvadarśanāt |
muner janapadatyāgād ṣaḍbhir yogaḥ prasiddhyati |
utsāhān niścayād dhairyāt saṃtoṣāt tattvaniścayāt |
muner janapadatyāgāt ṣaḍbhir yogaḥ prasidhyati ||
utsāhān niścayād dhairyāt saṃtopāt tattvadarśanāt |
muner janapadatyāgāt ṣaḍbhir yogaḥ prasidhyati ||
utsāhāt sāhasād dhairyāt tatvajñānād viniścayāt |
janasaṅgaparityāgāt ṣaḍbhir yogaḥ prasidhyati ||
utsāhān niścayād dhairyāt tattvajñānārthadarśanāt |
bindusthairyān mitāhārāj janasaṅgavivarjanāt |
nidrātyāgāj jitaśvāsāt pīṭhasthairyād anālasāt
gurvācāryaprasādāc ca ebhir yogas tu sidhyati ||
niścayād ] niścalād- P,T
अहिंसा सत्यमस्तेयं ब्रह्मचर्यं क्षमा धृतिः ।
दयार्जवं मिताहारः शौचं चैव यमा दश ॥ (βω and δ3)
ahiṃsā satyam asteyaṃ brahmacaryaṃ kṣamā dhṛtiḥ /
dayārjavaṃ mitāhāraḥ śaucaṃ caiva yamā daśa // (βω and δ3)
तपः संतोषमास्तिक्यं दानमीश्वरपूजनम् ।
सिद्धान्तश्रवणं चैव ह्री मतिश्च जपो हुतम् ॥ (βω)
tapaḥ saṃtoṣam āstikyaṃ dānam īśvarapūjanam /
siddhāntaśravaṇaṃ caiva hrī matiś ca japo hutam // (βω)
अथासनानि । (ε1 and ε3)
हठस्य प्रथमाङ्गत्वाद् आसनं पूर्वमुच्यते ।
तत्कुर्यादासनं स्थैर्यमारोग्यं चाङ्गपाटवम् ॥*
athāsanāni / (ε1 and ε3)
haṭhasya prathamāṅgatvād āsanaṃ pūrvam ucyate /
tat kuryād āsanaṃ sthairyam ārogyaṃ cāṅgapāṭavam //*
The reading of aṅgapāṭavam is attested among many of the early manuscripts, including the main one of the α group. Although this compound rarely appears in other yoga texts, a similar term śarīrapāṭava occurs in the Śivasaṃhitā (2.35) as one of the benefits bestowed by digestive fire (vaiśvānarāgni), which indicates that the word pāṭava was used in relation to the body and the benefits of yoga. The compound aṅgapāṭava seems to imply the optimal functioning of the body. The variant reading, aṅgalāghava (‘lightness of the limbs’ or ‘dexterity’) is more common in yoga texts and similar formulations occur even in works known to Svātmārāma, such as the Dattātreyayogaśāstra (śarīralaghutā) and the Amanaska ([...] laghutvaṃ ca śarīrasyopajāyate). It is likely that the less common term aṅgapāṭavam was changed to the more widely used notion of aṅgalāghava, perhaps early on in the transmission, as the latter is attested by manuscripts in several early groups (i.e., β, γ and δ).
आसनं कुम्भकं चित्रं मुद्राख्यं करणं तथा
अथ नादानुसन्धानम्
āsanaṃ kumbhakaṃ citraṃ mudrākhyaṃ karaṇaṃ tathā
atha nādānusandhānam
haṭhasya prathamāṅgatvād āsanaṃ pūrvam ucyate |
tat kuryād āsanasthairyam ārogyaṃ cāṅgalāghavaṃ ||
haṭhasya prathamāṅgatvād āsanaṃ darśyate mayā |
tat kuryād āsanaṃ sthairyam ārogyaṃ cāṅgapāṭavam ||
वसिष्ठाद्यैश्च मुनिभिर्मत्स्येन्द्राद्यैश्च योगिभिः ।
अङ्गीकृतान्यासनानि कथ्यन्ते कानिचिन्मया ॥
vasiṣṭhādyaiś ca munibhir matsyendrādyaiś ca yogibhiḥ /
aṅgīkṛtāny āsanāni kathyante kānicin mayā //
On the historical implications of these two traditions of postural practice in early Haṭhayoga, see Mallinson 2016 (119–122) and Birch 2018 (45–46).
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
vasiṣṭhādyaiś ca munibhir matsyendrādyaiś ca yogibhiḥ |
aṅgīkṛtāny āsanāni vakṣyante kānicin mayā ||
vasiṣṭhādyaiś ca munibhir matsyendrādyaiś ca yogibhiḥ ||
aṃgīkṛtāny āsanāni lakṣyante kāni cin mayā ||
जानूर्वोरन्तरे सम्यक्कृत्वा पादतले उभे ।
ऋजुकायः समासीनः स्वस्तिकं तत्प्रचक्षते ॥
jānūrvor antare samyakkṛtvā pādatale ubhe /
ṛjukāyaḥ samāsīnaḥ svastikaṃ tat pracakṣate //
One might wonder how the soles of the feet could be placed between the knees and thighs. Brahmānanda explains that the region of the shank near the knee should be understood by the word ‘knee’ in this verse (atra jānuśabdena jānusaṃnihito jaṅghāpradeśo grāhyaḥ jānusaṃnihito jaṅghāpradeśaḥ). This is consistent with the earliest known description of svastikāsana in the Pātañjalayogaśāstravivaraṇa (2.46), which states that the big toe of one foot is tucked in between the shank and thigh of the other so it is not seen (dakṣiṇaṃ pādāṅguṣṭhaṃ savyenorujaṅghena parigṛhyādṛśyaṃ kṛtvā tathā savyaṃ pādāṅguṣṭhaṃ dakṣiṇenorujaṅghenādṛśyaṃ parigṛhya yathā ca pārṣṇibhyāṃ vṛṣaṇayor apīḍaṇaṃ tathā yenāste tat svastikam āsanam). For a discussion of svastikāsana in the Pātañjalayoga tradition, see Maas 2018: 68–69. The descriptions of svastikāsana in early Śaiva Tantras do not mention the inserting of the toes between the knees and thighs (see Goodall 2004: 348–350, fn. 371).
ऊरुजङ्घान्तराधाय प्रपदे जानुमध्यगे
योगिनो यदवस्थानं स्वस्तिकं तद्विदुर्बुधाः इति
ūrujaṅghāntar ādhāya prapade jānumadhyage
yogino yad avasthānaṃ svastikaṃ tad vidur budhāḥ iti
jānūrvor antare samyak kṛtvā pādatale ubhe |
ṛjukāyo viśed yogī svastikaṃ tat pracakṣate ||
jānūrvor antaraṃ samyak kṛtvā pādatale ubhe |
ṛjukāyas tathāsīnaḥ svastikaṃ tat pracakṣate ||
jānūrvor antare samyak kṛtvā pādatale ubhe
ṛjukāyaḥ sukhāsīnaḥ svastikaṃ tat pracakṣate
yājñavalkyaḥ—
jānūrvor antare samyak kṛtvā pādatale ubhe |
ṛjukāyaḥ samāsīnaḥ svastikaṃ tat pracakṣate ||
atha svastikāsanam---
jānūrvor antaraṃ samyak kṛtvā padatale ubhe ||
ṛjukāyasamāsīnaḥ svastikaṃ tat pracakṣate ||
सव्ये दक्षिणगुल्फं तु पृष्ठपार्श्वे नियोजयेत् ।
दक्षिणेऽपि तथा सव्यं गोमुखं गोमुखं यथा ॥
savye dakṣiṇagulphaṃ tu pṛṣṭhapārśve niyojayet /
dakṣiṇe’pi tathā savyaṃ gomukhaṃ gomukhaṃ yathā //
This posture first appears in some Vaiṣṇava Saṃhitās that predate the Haṭhapradīpikā, including the Ahirbudhnyasaṃhitā and the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā, which is likely to have been the source of this verse. The position of the ankles is the same in all the source texts. The Ahirbudhnyasaṃhitā adds that the hands are crossed behind the back and hold the big toes. For illustrations of six possible positions of the arms and hands, see Gharote, Jha, Devnath, Sakhalkar 2006: 111–113.
ubhayor gulphayoḥ kṛtvā pṛṣṭhapārśvāv ubhāv api ||
vyutkrameṇātha pāṇibhyāṃ vinyastābhyāṃ vigṛhya ca |
pṛṣṭhagābhyāṃ padāṅguṣṭhāv etad gomukham ucyate ||
savye dakṣiṇagulphaṃ tu pṛṣṭhapārśve niveśayet |
dakṣiṇe ’pi tathā savyaṃ gomukhaṃ tat pracakṣate ||
savye dakṣiṇagulphaṃ tu pṛṣṭhapārśve niveśayet
dakṣiṇe ’pi tathā savyaṃ gomukhaṃ gomukhaṃ yathā
savye dakṣiṇagulphaṃ tu pṛṣṭhapārśve niveśayet |
dakṣiṇe ’pi tathā savyaṃ gomukhaṃ gomukhaṃ yathā ||
atha gomukhāsanam---
savye dakṣiṇagulphaṃ tu pṛṣṭhapārśve niyojayet ||
dakṣiṇe ’pi tathā savyaṃ gomukhaṃ gomukhāsanam ||
एकं पादमथैकस्मिन्विन्यस्योरुणि संस्थितम् ।
इतरस्मिंस्तथा चोरुं वीरासनम्इतीरितम् ॥
ekaṃ pādam athaikasmin vinyasyoruṇi saṃsthitam /
itarasmiṃs tathā coruṃ vīrāsanam itīritam //
Although most witnesses have tathā in 1.21a, the word atha has been accepted because it is attested by G4 (α group) and V1 (η group), the sources and the testimonia. It appears to be verse filler here rather than indicating a temporal sequence of actions. Svātmārāma borrowed the verse on vīrāsana from the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā, the redactor of which appears to have adapted its first hemistich from a description of this posture in the Śāradātilakatantra. This would explain the rather strange syntax of the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā’s version, in which adhaḥ kṛtvā was changed to athaikasmin, and tathetaram became ca saṃsthitam. It seems that saṃsthitaṃ must be understood with ūruṃ in the third pāda in the sense of saṃsthāpya (i.e., ‘having placed’). Different versions of vīrāsana are found in earlier Tantras, such as the Kiraṇatantra (58.9), Hemacandra’s Yogaśāstra and commentaries on the Pātañjalayogaśāstra. For a discussion of some of these sources, see Maas 2018: 66–68.
ekaṃ pādam athaikasmin vinyasyorau ca saṃsthitam |
itarasmiṃs tathaivoruṃ vīrāsanam itīritam ||
ekaṃ pādam adhaḥ kṛtvā vinyasyorau tathetaram ||
ṛjukāyo viśed yogī vīrāsanam itīritam |
ekaṃ pādam athaikasmin vinyasyoruṇi saṃsthitam |
itarasmiṃs tathā coruṃ vīrāsanam udāhṛtam ||
ekaṃ pādam athaikasmin vinyasyoruṇi saṃsthitaḥ |
itarasmiṃs tathā coruṃ vīrāsanam udāhṛtam ||
atha vīrāsanam---
ekaṃ pādam athaikasmin vinyased ūruṇi sthiram ||
itarasmiṃs tathā coruṃ vīrāsanam itīritam ||
sthiram ] sthitam T
गुदं निरुध्य गुल्फाभ्यां व्युत्क्रमेण समाहितः ।
कूर्मासनं भवेदेतदिति योगविदो विदुः ॥
gudaṃ nirudhya gulphābhyāṃ vyutkrameṇa samāhitaḥ /
kūrmāsanaṃ bhaved etad iti yogavido viduḥ //
In the first quarter of the verse, the witnesses are split between nirudhya (‘having blocked’), nibadhya (‘having bound’), niyamya (‘having restrained’) and niṣpīḍya (‘having pressed’). The source, the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā, and two manuscripts of the β and γ groups support nirudhya whereas one α manuscript (J5) and the testimonia support niyamya and another α manuscript (G4) has niṣpīḍya. In terms of blocking or closing the anus by sitting on the ankles, nirudhya makes good sense, and niṣpīḍya (`having pressed the anus with both ankles’) is also possible. ??The word vyutkrameṇa appears to describe the position of the ankles. Its basic meaning is ‘against the normal direction,’ which would suggest that the ankles are turned out or crossed rather than placed together naturally. If the yogi is in a kneeling-type position, turning the feet out would bring the ankles together, blocking the perineal area. See Yoga Mīmāṃsā, vol 8, no. 2, pp. 29–30 for a discussion of vyutkrameṇa and the position of the ankles in kūrmāsana, and vol 8, no. 2, Figures 3–6 for photographs of a practitioner performing this āsana.
gudaṃ nirudhya gulphābhyāṃ vyutkrameṇa samāhitaḥ |
kūrmāsanaṃ bhaved etad iti yogavido viduḥ ||
gudaṃ nipīḍya gulphābhyāṃ vyutkrameṇa samāhitaḥ |
etat kūrmāsanaṃ proktaṃ yogasiddhikaraṃ param ||
gudaṃ niyamya gulphābhyaṃ vyutkrameṇa samāhitaḥ |
kūrmāsanaṃ bhaved etad iti yogavido viduḥ ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām
gudaṃ niyamya gulphābhyāṃ vyutkrameṇa samāhitaḥ |
kūrmāsanaṃ bhaved etad iti yogavido viduḥ || iti kūrmāsanam ||
पद्मासनं सुसंस्थाप्य जानूर्वोरन्तरे करौ ।
निवेश्य भूमौ संस्थाप्य व्योमस्थः कुक्कुटासनम् ॥
padmāsanaṃ susaṃsthāpya jānūrvor antare karau /
niveśya bhūmau saṃsthāpya vyomasthaḥ kukkuṭāsanam //
The names kurkuṭa and kurkkuṭa in some manuscripts are variant spellings of kukkuṭa attested in the Pañcatantra (M-W).
padmāsanaṃ samāsthāya jānūrvor antare karau |
bhūmau niveśya saṃsthāpya vyomasthaṃ kukkuṭāsanam ||
[niveśya bhūmau – mss. la, va, śa]
kukkuṭāsanam
padmāsanam adhiṣṭhāya jānvantaraviniḥsṛtau |
karau bhūmau niveśyaitad vyomasthaṃ kukkuṭāsanam ||
padmāsanaṃ tu saṃyojya jānūrvor antare karau |
niveśya bhūmau saṃsthāpya vyomasthaṃ kukkuṭāsanam ||
atha kukkuṭāsanam---
padmāsanaṃ susaṃsthāpya jānūrvor antare karau |
niveśya bhūmau saṃsthāpya vyomasthaḥ kukkuṭāsanam ||
padmāsanaṃ tu saṃyojya jānūrvor antare karau |
niveśya bhūmau saṃsthāpya vyomasthaṃ kukkuṭāsanam ||
iti kukkuṭāsanam ||
कुक्कुटासनबन्धस्थोदोर्भ्यां संबध्य कन्धराम् ।
शेते कूर्मवदुत्तान एतदुत्तानकूर्मकम् ॥
kukkuṭāsanabandhasthodorbhyāṃ saṃbadhya kandharām /
śete kūrmavad uttāna etad uttānakūrmakam //
The oldest dated manuscript, η1, has kukkuṭāsanavat kṛtvā, which is a simpler alternative to the widely attested reading kukkuṭāsanabandhasthaḥ (including α2 and α3), which we have accepted. Since there is no known source for this verse other than the Haṭhapradīpikā, it appears that the reading of η1 was an isolated attempt to simplify the syntax.
kukkuṭāsanabandhastho dorbhyāṃ saṃbadhya kandharām |
bhavet kūrmavad uttānam etad uttānakūrmakam ||
kukkuṭāsanabandhastho dorbhyāṃ sambadhya kandharām ||
śete kūrmavad uttānam etad uttānakūrmakam || 74 ||
kukkuṭāsanabandhastho dorbhyāṃ sambadhya kandharām |
śete kūrmavad uttānam etad uttānakūrmakam ||
iti uttānakūrmāsanam ||
पादाङ्गुष्ठौ तु पाणिभ्यां गृहीत्वा श्रवणावधि ।
धनुराकर्षणं कृत्वा धनुरासनमुच्यते ॥
pādāṅguṣṭhau tu pāṇibhyāṃ gṛhītvā śravaṇāvadhi /
dhanurākarṣaṇaṃ kṛtvā dhanurāsanam ucyate //
Since the word ākarṣaṇa in one form or other is so well attested in the third verse quarter, the reading dhanurākarṣaṇaṃ kṛtvā, which is in ε2, as well as the principal testimonia (i.e., the Yogacintāmaṇi and Haṭharatnāvalī), fits the overall syntax of the verse. However, it is curious that kṛṣṭaṃ (for kṛtvā) is well attested in some groups of manuscripts because it seems redundant with ākarṣaṇaṃ. However, the following reading in Godāvaramiśra’s Yogacintāmaṇi (f. 40r) makes sense of kṛṣṭaṃ and might indeed be the original version of the verse: dhanurākarṣavat kṛṣṭaṃ dhanurāsanam ucyate. A different version of dhanurāsana is described in the Haṭhayogasaṃhitā. On the two versions of dhanurāsana, see Hargreaves and Birch 2017. One manuscript of the Haṭhapradīpikā (ms. no. 30051, f. 2v), which was consulted but not collated for this edition, has a scribal comment stating that dhanurāsana should be done continuously (anavarata) on the left and right sides (tatra ekam dhanurākarṣaṇāsanam āsanaṃ savyāpasavyapādahastābhyām [abhy]ased anavaratam). This would make dhanurāsana a dynamic practice as shown in this video.
pādāṅguṣṭhau ca pāṇibhyāṃ gṛhītvā śravaṇāvadhi |
dhanurākarṣaṇaṃ kṛtvā dhanurāsanam īritam ||
atha dhanurāsanam---
pādāṅguṣṭhau tu pāṇibhyāṃ gṛhītvā śravaṇāvadhi ||
dhanurākarṣaṇaṃ kṛtvā dhanurāsanam ucyate ||
ākarṣaṇaṃ kṛtvā ] ākarṣaṇākṛṣṭaṃ P,T,t1
pādāṅguṣṭhau tu pāṇibhyāṃ gṛhītvā śravaṇāvadhi |
dhanurākarṣaṇaṃ kṛtvā dhanurāsanam īritam ||
iti dhanurāsanam ||
dhanurāsanam |
prasārya pādau bhuvi daṇḍarūpau
karau ca pṛṣṭhe dhṛtapādayugmau |
kṛtvā dhanustulyavivarttitāṅgaṃ
nigadyate vai dhanurāsanaṃ tat || 25 ||
वामोरुमूलार्पितदक्षपादं
जानोर्बहिर्वेष्टितदक्षदोष्णा ।
प्रगृह्य तिष्ठेत्परिवर्तिताङ्गः
श्रीमत्स्यनाथोदितमासनं स्यात् ॥
vāmorumūlārpitadakṣapādaṃ
jānor bahirveṣṭitadakṣadoṣṇā /
pragṛhya tiṣṭhet parivartitāṅgaḥ
śrīmatsyanāthoditam āsanaṃ syāt //
In the second verse quarter, most of the manuscript groups have a compound with °doṣṇā at the end, as seen also in the Yogacintāmaṇi, Haṭharatnāvalī and Yuktabhavadeva. The instrumental ending (`with the hand’) works well with the gerund (pragṛhya) in the third verse quarter and the object (°dakṣpādaṃ) in the first quarter. This reading indicates that the right foot is held by the hand of the arm that is wrapped around the outside of the left leg, which would be the right hand (°dakṣadoṣṇā) rather than the left (°vāmadoṣṇā), as shown in Figure 1. One manuscript of α (G4) and most manuscripts of the Haṭharatnāvalī have °dakṣapādo in the first pāda. This reading yields the same meaning as the adopted one if read with °vāmapādaṃ in the second. However, G4 and manuscripts of the Haṭharatnāvalī read °vāmadoṣṇā, which is not good because it leaves the gerund without an object. The version of this verse in Jyotsnā (1.26), which is supported by some manuscripts in two important groups, β and η, has two objects of the gerund, namely the left and right feet, without an instrumental or conjuctive particle. In his commentarial remarks, Brahmānanda proposes that the left foot is grasped by the right hand and the right foot by the left foot, as seen in Figure 2.
vāmorumūlārpitadakṣapādaṃ jānvor bahirveṣṭitadakṣadoṣṇā |
pragṛhya tiṣṭhet parivartitāṅgaḥ śrīmatsyanāthoditam āsanaṃ syāt ||
atha matsyendrāsanam---
vāmorumūlārpitadakṣapādo jānvor bahirveṣṭitadakṣadoṣṇā |
pragṛhya tiṣṭhet parivartitāṅgaḥ śrīmatsyanāthoditam āsanaṃ syāt~||
°dakṣapādo ] °dakṣapādaṃ P, °dakṣapādau t1
vāmorumūlārpitadakṣapādaṃ jānvor bahirveṣṭitadakṣadoṣṇā |
pragṛhya tiṣṭhan parivartitāṅgaḥ śrīmatsyanāthoditam āsanaṃ syāt ||
मत्स्येन्द्रपीठं जठरप्रवृद्ध-
प्रचण्डरुङ्मण्डलखण्डनास्त्रम् ।
अभ्यासतः कुण्डलिनीप्रबोधं
दण्डस्थिरत्वं च ददाति पुंसाम् ॥
matsyendrapīṭhaṃ jaṭharapravṛddha-
pracaṇḍaruṅmaṇḍalakhaṇḍanāstram /
abhyāsataḥ kuṇḍalinīprabodhaṃ
daṇḍasthiratvaṃ ca dadāti puṃsām //
The manuscript readings for the compound beginning with jaṭhara diverge significantly and include jaṭharapravṛddha°, jaṭharaprabuddha°, jaṭharapradīpta° and jaṭharapracaṇḍa°. As descriptive compounds, none of these makes good sense in regard to Matsyendra’s seat. Since the stomach or abdomen (jaṭhara) is the first member of this compound, it seems more likely that it qualifies the terrible diseases (pracaṇḍarug) that are mentioned in the next verse quarter, as suggested by the reading jaṭharapravṛddha°, which is attested by η2 and the Yogacintāmaṇi and suggested by γ1and δ1(jaṭharapravuddh°). In 1.27d, the compound daṇḍasthiratvaṃ (`steadiness of the spine’) is attested by all the important manuscript groups and testimonia, so it was likely original. However, the Jyotsnā (1.27d) has candrasthiratvaṃ (`steadiness of the moon’), and this reading is well-attested in many manuscripts that are lower on the stemma. Brahmānanda understands steadiness here as `the absence of flow’ (sthiratvaṃ kṣaraṇābhāvaṃ), a reference to the moon retaining its nectar.
matsyendrapīṭhaṃ jaṭharapravṛddha-
pracaṇḍaruṅmaṇḍalakhaṇḍanāstram |
abhyāsataḥ kuṇḍalinīprabodhaṃ
daṇḍe sthiratvaṃ pradadāti puṃsām ||
°pravṛddha ] N : °pravṛddhiṃ L
matsyendrapīṭhaṃ jaṭharapradīptaṃ
pracaṇḍarugmaṇḍalakhaṇḍanāstram |
abhyāsataḥ kuṇḍalinīprabodhaṃ
daṇḍasthiratvaṃ ca dadāti puṃsām ||
°pradīptaṃ ] pravṛttaṃ T,t1 °pravṛttaḥ N,n1,n3,J
matsyendrapīṭhaṃ jaṭharapracaṇḍa-
ruṅmaṇḍalakhaṇḍanakhaṇḍanāstram |
abhyāsataḥ kuṇḍalinīprabodhaṃ
daṇḍasthiratvaṃ ca dadāti puṃsām ||
matsyendrapīṭhaṃ jaṭharaprabuddhaṃ
pracaṇḍaruṅmaṇḍalakhaṇḍanāstram |
abhyasataṃ kuṇḍalinīprabodhaṃ
daṇḍasthiratvaṃ ca dadāti puṃsām ||
प्रसार्य पादौ भुवि दण्डरूपौ
दोर्भ्यां पदाग्रद्वितयंगृहीत्वा ।
जानूपरिन्यस्तललाटदेशो
वसेदिदं पश्चिमतानमाहुः ॥
prasārya pādau bhuvi daṇḍarūpau
dorbhyāṃ padāgradvitayaṃgṛhītvā /
jānūparinyastalalāṭadeśo
vased idaṃ paścimatānam āhuḥ //
The reading dorbhyāṃ padāgradvitayaṃ is well attested but is somewhat strange because dos usually means `the arm’ rather than the hands. The variant dvābhyāṃ karābhyāṃ dvitayaṃ, “with both hands”, appears to be an attempt to remove dorbhyāṃ, but it introduces the problem of the toes not being mentioned.
prasārya caraṇadvandvaṃ parasparasusaṃyutam |
svapāṇibhyāṃ dṛḍhaṃ dhṛtvā jānūpari śiro nyaset ||
prasārya pādau bhuvi daṇḍarūpau
dvābhyāṃ ca pādadvitayaṃ gṛhītvā |
jānūpari nyastalalāṭadeśo
’bhyased idaṃ paścimatānam āhuḥ ||
atha paścimatānāsanam---
prasārya pādau bhuvi daṇḍarūpau
dorbhyāṃ padāgradvitayaṃ gṛhītvā |
jānūpari nyastalalāṭadeśo
vased idaṃ paścimatānam āhuḥ ||
dorbhyāṃ padāgradvitayaṃ ] dvābhyāṃ karābhyāṃ dvitayaṃ n1,n3
prasārya pādau bhuvi daṇḍarūpau
dorbhyāṃ ca pādadvitayaṃ gṛhītvā |
jānūpari nyastalalāṭapaṭṭo
nyased idaṃ paścimatānam āhuḥ ||
इति पश्चिमतानमासनाग्र्यं
पवनं पश्चिमवाहिनं करोति ।
उदयं जठरानलस्य कुर्या-
दुदरे कार्श्यमरोगतां च पुंसाम् ॥
iti paścimatānam āsanāgryaṃ
pavanaṃ paścimavāhinaṃ karoti /
udayaṃ jaṭharānalasya kuryā-
d udare kārśyam arogatāṃ ca puṃsām //
The use of the word paścima to mean the central channel is found at Yogabīja 95 (paścimamārgataḥ), 108 (paścime pathi), 117 (paścimadvāramārgeṇa) and 121 (paścimaṃ). Cf.~the usages of paścima-mārga in Dattātreyayogaśāstra 140 and Śivasaṃhitā 3.110 (from which this verse is likely to be derived). Brahmānanda understands paścima as referring to the Suṣumṇā (Jyotsnā 1.29): paścimavāhinaṃ paścimena paścimamārgeṇa suṣumṇāmārgeṇa vahatīti paścimavāhī.
āsanāgryam idaṃ proktaṃ jaṭharānaladīpanam |
dehāvasādaharaṇaṃ paścimottānasaṃjñakam ||
ya etad āsanaṃ śreṣṭhaṃ pratyahaṃ sādhayet sudhīḥ |
vāyuḥ paścimamārgeṇa tasya saṃcarati dhruvam ||
iti paścimatānam āsanāgryaṃ
pavanaṃ paścimavāhinaṃ karoti |
udayaṃ jaṭharānalasya kuryād
udare kārśyam arogitāṃ ca puṃsām ||
iti paścimatānam āsanāgryaṃ
pavanaṃ paścimavāhinaṃ karoti |
udayaṃ jaṭharānalasya kuryād
udare kārśyam arogatāṃ ca puṃsām ||
धरामवष्टभ्य करद्वयेन
तत्कूर्परस्थापितनाभिपार्श्वः ।
उच्चासनो दण्डवदुत्थितः खे
मायूरमेतत्प्रवदन्ति पीठम् ॥
dharām avaṣṭabhya karadvayena
tat kūrparasthāpitanābhipārśvaḥ /
uccāsano daṇḍavad utthitaḥ khe
māyūram etat pravadanti pīṭham //
The source of this verse is unknown, but it has the same elements as the two verses in the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā (1.76–77), which are themselves derived from earlier Vaiṣṇava sources. The compound uccāsanaḥ in the third verse quarter seems to approximate in a somewhat vague way the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā’s reading samunnataśiraḥpādaḥ. In the second verse quarter, the pronoun in tatkūrpare refers to the two hands (karadvaya). This is stated more explicitly (i.e., hastayoḥ kūrparau) in Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā 1.76c and Yogayājñavalkya 3.15c.
karatale bhūmau saṃsthāpya kūrparau nābhipārśvayor nyasya nataśirāḥ (unnataśirāḥ) pādau ḍaṇḍavad vyomni saṃsthito mayūrāsanam iti ||
avaṣṭabhya dharāṃ samyak talābhyāṃ hastayor dvayoḥ ||
kūrparau nābhipārśve ca sthāpayitvā mayūravat |
samunnamya śiraḥpādau mayūrāsanam iṣyate ||
mayūrāsanam
niveśya kūrparau samyaṅ nābhimaṇḍalapārśvayoḥ |
avaṣṭabhya bhuvaṃ pāṇitalābhyāṃ vyomni daṇḍavat ||
avaṣṭabhya dharāṃ samyak talābhyāṃ ca karadvayam |
hastayoḥ kūrparau cāpi sthāpayan nābhipārśvayoḥ ||
samunnataśiraḥpādo daṇḍavad vyomni saṃsthitaḥ |
mayūrāsanam etad dhi sarvapāpavināśanam ||
ca karadvayam ] karayor dvayoḥ
avaṣṭabhya dharāṃ samyak talābhyāṃ tu karadvayoḥ |
hastayoḥ kūrparau cāpi sthāpayan nābhipārśvayoḥ ||
samunnataśiraḥpādo daṇḍavad vyomni saṃsthitaḥ |
mayūrāsanam etat tu sarvapāpapraṇāśanam ||
dharām avaṣṭabhya punaḥ karābhyāṃ
tatkūrpare sthāpitanābhipārśvaḥ |
tadāsane daṇḍavad utthitaḥ khe
mayūram etat pravadanti santaḥ ||
atha mayūram
dharām avaṣṭabhya karadvayena
tatkūrpare sthāpitanābhipārśvaḥ |
uccāsano daṇḍavad utthitaḥ khe
mayūram etat pravadanti pīṭham ||
हरति सकलरोगानाशु गुल्मोदरादी-
नभिभवति च दोषानासनं श्रीमयूरम् ।
बहुकदशनभुक्तं भस्म कुर्यादशेषं
जनयति जठराग्निं जारयेत्कालकूटम् ॥
harati sakalarogān āśu gulmodarādī-
n abhibhavati ca doṣān āsanaṃ śrīmayūram /
bahukadaśanabhuktaṃ bhasma kuryād aśeṣaṃ
janayati jaṭharāgniṃ jārayet kālakūṭam //
harati sakalarogān āśu gulmodarādīn
abhibhavati ca doṣān āsanaṃ śrīmayūram |
bahukadaśanabhuktaṃ bhasma kuryād aśeṣam
janayati jaṭharāgniṃ jārayet kālakūṭam ||
harati sakalarogān āśu gulmodarādīn
abhibhavati ca doṣān āsanaṃ śrīmayūram ||
bahukadaśanabhuktaṃ bhasma kuryād vicitram
janayati jaṭharāgniṃ jīryate kālakūṭam ||
उत्तानं शववद्भूमौ शयनं तु शवासनम् ।
सर्वासनश्रान्तिहरं चित्तविश्रान्तिसाधनम् ॥
uttānaṃ śavavad bhūmau śayanaṃ tu śavāsanam /
sarvāsanaśrāntiharaṃ cittaviśrāntisādhanam //
uttānaśavavad bhūmau śayanaṃ coktam uttamam ||
uttānaṃ śavavad bhūmau śavāsanam idaṃ smṛtam |
śavāsanaṃ śrāntiharaṃ cittaviśrāntisādhanam ||
athāntimaṃ śavāsanam
prasārya hastapādau ca viśrāntyā śayanaṃ tathā |
sarvāsanaśramaharaṃ śayitaṃ tu śavāsanam ||
śavāsanaṃ hṛtkupitavātagranthivibhedakam |
sarvāsanaśrāntijit hṛtśramaghnaṃ yogisaukhyadam ||
uttānaṃ śavavad bhūmau śayanaṃ tu śavāsanam |
śavāsanaṃ śrāntiharaṃ cittaviśrāntikārakam ||
iti śavāsanam ||
चतुराशीत्यासनानि शिवेन कथितानि तु ।
तेभ्यश्चतुष्कमादाय सारभूतं ब्रवीम्यहम् ॥
caturāśītyāsanāni śivena kathitāni tu /
tebhyaś catuṣkam ādāya sārabhūtaṃ bravīmy aham //
The word tu is often used to introduce a new posture, but in this case seems to be a verse filler. In the first and third verse quarters, Svātmārāma appears to have rewritten Śivasaṃhitā 3.96 to include the information that it was Śiva (śivena) who taught the eighty-four āsanas, whereas in the source Śiva is himself speaking. Svātmārāma also changes the meaning of the second half of the verse, as the Śivasaṃhitā states that Śiva picked out the four best postures and taught them, whereas in the Haṭhapradīpikā it reads as though Svātmārāma himself is responsible for picking out the four best postures and teaching them. There are other instances in the Haṭhapradīpikā where Svātmārāma borrows a verse with a first person verb (e.g., 3.43, 4.2). However, in this instance, he may have intended to indicate that he chose the four postures coming after this verse (i.e., siddha, padma, siṃha and bhadra) because the Śivasaṃhitā follows 3.96 with teachings on the postures called siddha, padma, paścimottāna and svastika. Another possibility is that Svātmārāma borrowed 1.33–1.34 from an unknown source that contained a dialogue that was different to that of Śivasaṃhitā, as indicated by sakhe in 1.34.
आसनानि च तावन्ति यावन्त्यो जीवजातयः
एतेषामखिलान्भेदान्विजानाति महेश्वरः
चतुराशीतिलक्षाणि एकैकं समुदाहृतम्
ततः शिवेन पीठानां षोडशोनं शतं कृतमिति.
āsanāni ca tāvanti yāvantyo jīvajātayaḥ
eteṣām akhilān bhedān vijānāti maheśvaraḥ
caturāśītilakṣāṇi ekaikaṃ samudāhṛtam
tataḥ śivena pīṭhānāṃ ṣoḍaśonaṃ śataṃ kṛtam iti.
caturaśīty āsanāni santi nānāvidhāni ca |
tebhyaś catuṣkam ādāya mayoktāni bravīmy aham ||
caturāśītilakṣānām ekaikaṃ samudāhṛtaṃ |
ataḥ śivena pīṭhānāṃ ṣoḍaśonaṃ śataṃ kṛtam ||
caturāśītilakṣānām ekaikaṃ samudāhṛtaṃ |
ataḥ śivena pīṭhānāṃ ṣoḍaśonaṃ śataṃ kṛtam ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
caturaśīty āsanāni śivena kathitāni vai |
tebhyaś catuṣkam ādāya sārabhūtaṃ bravīmy aham ||
caturaśīty āsanāni śivena kathitāni tu |
tebhyaś catuṣkam ādāya sārabhūtaṃ bravīmy aham ||
सिद्धं पद्मं तथा सिंहं भद्रं चेति चतुष्टयम् ।
श्रेष्ठं तत्रापि च सखे तिष्ठ सिद्धासने सदा ॥
siddhaṃ padmaṃ tathā siṃhaṃ bhadraṃ ceti catuṣṭayam /
śreṣṭhaṃ tatrāpi ca sakhe tiṣṭha siddhāsane sadā //
It is likely that the original version of this verse contained the vocative with the imperative form of the verb (sakhe tiṣṭha). There are other instances where Svātmārāma included a verse with the vocative (e.g., 4.10, 4.12, 4.20, 4.72, 4.86, 4.88) as though the text were a dialogue. Other versions of this verse are transmitted by some manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā, in which the vocative and imperative verb have been removed. In these cases, the sukhe and sukham is difficult to construe because the context suggests that the intended meaning was that one should always sit in siddhāsana (as opposed to the other three āsanas), rather than the prescription to always sit in a comfortable siddhāsana.
siddhaṃ padmaṃ tathā bhadraṃ siṃhaṃ ceti catuṣṭayam |
śreṣṭhaṃ tatrāpi vai padmaṃ tiṣṭhet siddhāsane sadā ||
siddhaṃ padmaṃ tathā siṃhaṃ bhadraṃ ceti catuṣṭayam |
śreṣṭhaṃ tatrāpi ca tathā tiṣṭhet siddhāsane sadā ||
tathā ] satve P, sakhe T,t1
अथ सिद्धासनम् । (α1, γ1 and η2)
योनिस्थानक°मङ्घ्रिमूलघटितं कृत्वा दृढं विन्यसे-
न्मेढ्रे पादमथैकमेकहृदयोधृत्वा समं विग्रहम् ।
स्थाणुः संयमितेन्द्रियोऽचलदृशा पश्यन् भ्रुवोरन्तरं
एतन्मोक्षकपाटभेदजनकं सिद्धासनं प्रोच्यते ॥
atha siddhāsanam / (α1, γ1 and η2)
yonisthānaka°m aṅghrimūlaghaṭitaṃ kṛtvā dṛḍhaṃ vinyase-
n meḍhre pādam athaikam ekahṛdayodhṛtvā samaṃ vigraham /
sthāṇuḥ saṃyamitendriyo’caladṛśā paśyan bhruvor antaraṃ
etanmokṣakapāṭabhedajanakaṃ siddhāsanaṃ procyate //
The adopted reading ekahṛdayo is supported by two manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā (J2 and M1) and is close to the α reading ekahṛdaye, which is also attested by the six-chapter Viveka-mārtaṇḍa and the Yoga-cintāmaṇi, .. which attributes this verse to an unkown work called the Pavanayogasaṅgraha. In this case, ekahṛdayaḥ would perhaps qualify the yogi as having a mind focused on one thing. The second verse quarter has many variations in the Haṭhapradīpikā manuscripts, as well as in the manuscripts of the sources and testimonia. α1 has athaikam ekahṛdaye dhṛtvā and most of the collated witnesses have athaikam eva hṛdaye dhṛtvā. The repetition of eka appears to be a dittographical error and hṛdaye does not make sense without an object of dhṛtvā (i.e., having held what on the chest?). In the adopted reading athaikam āsyahṛdaye dhṛtvā, which is attested by η1, the oldest dated manuscript, the compound āsyahṛdaye can be understood with the gerund dhṛtvā and ekam in the sense of `having held the face and chest together.’ This alludes to the practice of the Jālandhara lock, in which the chin is placed on the chest. This meaning is more clearly seen in the Jyotsnā’s version of the second verse quarter, hṛdaye kṛtvā hanuṃ susthiram (`having put the jaw firmly on the chest’). The compound āsyahṛdaye is supported by other manuscripts, such as N10, P1, P6 and J16 and the variants asyahṛdaye and asyahṛdayaṃ also occur (e.g., J7, J12, A1, V4, V18, V16, P8 and P9). The other well-attested reading, athaikaṃ eva niyataṃ, was an attempt to fix the problem of hṛdaye by replacing it with niyatam, which must be read with meḍhre pādam athaikaṃ (`having fixed one foot on the penis’). But niyatam is redundant here because of vinyaset in the first pāda.
yonisthānakam aṅghrimūlaghaṭitaṃ kṛtvā dṛḍhaṃ vinyasen
meḍhre pādam athaikam āsyahṛdaye dhṛtvā samaṃ vigraham |
sthāṇuḥ saṃyamitendriyo ’caladṛśā paśyan bhruvor antaraṃ
etan mokṣakapāṭabhedajanakaṃ siddhāsanaṃ procyate ||
7a °mūlaghaṭitaṃ ] °mulaghaṭanaṃ A • vinyasen ] GHT; vinyase VA, vinyaset Y
7b meḍhre ] meṃḍhre A • athaikam āsyahṛdaye ] H; athaikadeśahṛdayo V, athaikam eva niyataṃ AGBGPk, athaikam eva niṣataṃ GL, athaikam eva hṛdayaṃ GP, athaikaṃ ekahṛdayo T, athaikam ekahṛdayaḥ Y • dhṛtvā ] VGBT; kṛtvā GLGPGPkY
7c paśyed ] TH; paśyan VAGHSTvl, paśyad Y • antaraṃ ] VAGPkGLT; antare GBGP
7d hy etan ] H; caitan VAGBGLGPT, etan GPkHS, tv etat Y • °janakaṃ ] °navidhau A, °jananaṃ GB, °nakaraṃ Y • procyate ] idaṃ bhavet Y (unm.) ?? check
pavanayogasaṃgrahe—
yonisthānakam aṅghrimūlaghaṭitaṃ kṛtvā dṛḍhaṃ vinyasen
meḍhre pādam athaikam ekahṛdayaḥ kṛtvā samaṃ vigraham |
sthāṇuḥ saṃyamitendriyo ’caladṛśā paśyed bhruvor antaraṃ tv
etan mokṣakapāṭabhedanakaraṃ siddhāsanaṃ procyate ||
tatra siddhāsanam
yonisthānakam aṅghrimūlaghaṭitaṃ kṛtvā dṛḍhaṃ vinyasen
meḍhre pādam athaikam eva niyataṃ kṛtvā samaṃ vigraham |
sthāṇuḥ saṃyamitendriyo ’caladṛśā paśyan bhruvor antaraṃ
caitan mokṣakapāṭabhedajanakaṃ siddhāsanaṃ procyate ||
yonisthānakam ] yonidvārakam P,T. niyataṃ ] hṛdaye T,t1,n2. °kapāṭa° ] °kavāṭa° P,T,t1
मतान्तरे तु ।
मेढ्रादुपरि विन्यस्य सव्यगुल्फं तथोपरि ।
गुल्फान्तरं च निक्षिप्य सिद्धासनमिदं भवेत् ॥
पूर्वोक्तमेव मत्संमतम् । (α1, β1, β2, γ1, ε1, ε2 and ε3)
matāntare tu /
meḍhrād upari vinyasya savyagulphaṃ tathopari /
gulphāntaraṃ ca nikṣipya siddhāsanam idaṃ bhavet //
pūrvoktam eva matsaṃmatam / (α1, β1, β2, γ1, ε1, ε2 and ε3)
Svātmārāma’s introductory and following remarks to verse 1.36 indicate that he preferred the siddhāsana of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa over the version taught as muktāsana in the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā and Yogayājñavalkya.
meḍhrād upari nikṣipya gulphaṃ tathopari |
gulphāntaraṃ vinikṣipya muktāsanam idaṃ smṛtam ||
meḍhrād upari nikṣipya savyaṃ gulphaṃ tathopari |
gulphāntaraṃ ca nikṣipya muktāsanam idaṃ tu vā ||
tathā |
meḍhrād upari vinyasya savyaṃ gulphaṃ tathopari |
gulphāntaraṃ tu vinyasya siddhāsanam idaṃ bhavet ||
matāntare tu
meḍhrād upari niḥkṣipya savyaṃ gulphaṃ tathopari |
gulphāntaraṃ ca niḥkṣipya siddhāḥ siddhāsanaṃ viduḥ ||
एतत्सिद्धासनं प्राहुरन्ये वज्रासनं विदुः ।
मुक्तासनंवदन्त्येके प्राहुर्गुप्तासनं परे ॥
etat siddhāsanaṃ prāhur anye vajrāsanaṃ viduḥ /
muktāsanaṃvadanty eke prāhur guptāsanaṃ pare //
etat siddhāsanaṃ prāhuḥ padmāsanam atho viduḥ |
guptāsanaṃ vadanty eke prāhur vajrāsanaṃ pare |
ke cin muktāsanaṃ prāhur idam āsanam uttamam ||
etat siddhāsanaṃ prāhur anye vajrāsanaṃ viduḥ |
muktāsanaṃ vadanty eke prāhur guptāsanaṃ pare ||
siddāsanambunu, gondaru vajrāsanambaniyu |
gondaru muktāsanambaniyu, gondadu gulbāsanam ||
kondaru siddāsanamani
kondaru vajrāsanamani koniyādudurī
pondaga dīnini mariyoka
kondaru guptāsamanu kondru mahātmā
यमेष्विव मिताहारमहिंसां नियमेष्विव ।
मुख्यं सर्वासनेष्वेकं सिद्धाः सिद्धासनं विदुः ॥
yameṣv iva mitāhāram ahiṃsāṃ niyameṣv iva /
mukhyaṃ sarvāsaneṣv ekaṃ siddhāḥ siddhāsanaṃ viduḥ //
laghvāhāras tu teṣv eko mukhyo bhavati nāpare |
ahiṃsā niyameṣv eko mukhyo bhavati nāpare || 33 ||
niyameṣu mitāharo yathāhịmsā yameṣv iva |
mukhyaṃ sarvāsaneṣv evaṃ siddhāsanaṃ idaṃ viduḥ |
चतुराशीतिपीठेषु सिद्धमेव सदाभ्यसेत् ।
द्वासप्ततिसहस्रेषु सुषुम्णामिव नाडिषु ॥
caturāśītipīṭheṣu siddham eva sadābhyaset /
dvāsaptatisahasreṣu suṣumṇām iva nāḍiṣu //
It is odd to have suṣumṇām as the object of the verb abhyaset. This reading is well attested by manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā and is also found in the Yogacintāmaṇi, which attributes it to the Yogasāramañjarī. Perhaps, the second hemistich was added somewhat haphazardly by Svātmārāma, and then others have tried to make sense of it by changing suṣumnām iva nāḍiṣu to nāḍīnāṃ malaśodhanam, which occurs in the Jyotsnā (1.39). The reading nāḍīnāṃ malaśodhanam/e is probably a patch as no other texts say that siddhāsana clears the channels. However, the idea of purifying the channels can be found in other contexts (e.g., Kumbhakapaddhati 120) and may hark back to an earlier notion of flushing (cālana) the channels (e.g., Amṛtasiddhi 11.6).
caturaśītipīṭheṣu siddhāsanaṃ samabhyaset |
dvāsaptatisahasreṣu suṣumṇām iva nāḍiṣu ||
caturāśītapīṭheṣu siddham eva samabhyaset |
dvisaptatisahasreṣu suṣumnām iva nāḍiṣu ||
maṇḍalā dṛśyate siddhiḥ kuṇḍalyabhyāsayoginaḥ |
dvisaptatisahasrāṇāṃ nāḍīnāṃ malaśodhanam ||
dvāsaptati sahāsrāṇāṃ nāḍīnāṃ malaśodhanam |
yatheṣṭaṃ dhāraṇaṃ vāyor vikārābhāva eva ca ||
आत्मध्यायी मिताहारी यावद्द्वादशवत्सरम् ।
सदा सिद्धासनाभ्यासाद्योगी निष्पत्तिमाप्नुयात् ।
श्रमदैर्बहुभिः पीठैः किं स्यात्सिद्धासने सति ॥
ātmadhyāyī mitāhārī yāvad dvādaśavatsaram /
sadā siddhāsanābhyāsād yogī niṣpattim āpnuyāt /
śramadair bahubhiḥ pīṭhaiḥ kiṃ syāt siddhāsane sati //
The notion of āsanas causing fatigue (śrama) was mentioned earlier in the verse on the corpse pose (1.32).
ātmadhyāyī mitāhārī yāvad dvādaśavatsaram |
sadā siddhāsanābhyāsād yogī niṣpattim āpnuyāt |
śramadair bahubhiḥ pīṭhaiḥ kiṃ syāt siddhāsane sati ||
ātmadhyāyo mitāhārī yāvad dvādaśavatsaram |
sadā siddhāsanābhyāsād yoganiṣpattim āpnuyāt ||
śramadair bahubhiḥ pīṭhair alaṃ siddhāsane sati |
प्राणानिले सावधानं बद्धे केवलकुम्भके ।
उत्पद्यते निरायासात्स्वयमेवोन्मनी यथा ॥
prāṇānile sāvadhānaṃ baddhe kevalakumbhake /
utpadyate nirāyāsāt svayam evonmanī yathā //
prāṇānile sāvadhāne baddhe kevalakumbhake |
utpatsyate nirāyāsāt svayam evonmanī yathā ||
तथैकस्मिन्नेव दृढं बद्धे सिद्धासने सदा ।
बन्धत्रयमनायासात् स्वयमेवोपजायते ॥
tathaikasminn eva dṛḍhaṃ baddhe siddhāsane sadā /
bandhatrayam anāyāsāt svayam evopajāyate //
It seems likely that dṛḍhaṃ (rather than dṛḍhe) was originally intended in 1.42a because dṛḍhataraṃ, which is not ambiguous, is used in 1.48a to qualify how padmāsana should be adopted, and dṛḍhaṃ complements sāvadhānaṃ in 1.41a.
पार्ष्णिभागेन सम्पीड्य योनिमाकुञ्चयेद्गुदम्
pārṣṇibhāgena sampīḍya yonim ākuñcayed gudam
athaikasminn eva dṛḍhaṃ baddhe siddhāsane sadā |
bandhatrayam anāyāsāt svayam evopajāyate ||
नासनं सिद्धसदृशं न कुम्भः केवलोपमः ।
न खेचरीसमा मुद्रा न नादसदृशो लयः ॥ *
nāsanaṃ siddhasadṛśaṃ na kumbhaḥ kevalopamaḥ /
na khecarīsamā mudrā na nādasadṛśo layaḥ // *
The reading na kumbhasadṛśo ’nilaḥ (`no breath like a retention’) is the lectio difficilior and attested by two early witnesses (η1 and η2) and is possibly original. However, the α manuscripts and several other important witness groups have the adopted reading kumbhaḥ kevalopamaḥ, as well as the Yogacintāmaṇi and some manuscripts of the Haṭharatnāvalī, suggesting that this reading, which makes much better sense, was in the transmission at an early stage.
nāsanaṃ siddhasadṛśaṃ na kumbhasadṛśaṃ balam |
na khecarīsamā mudrā na nādasadṛśo layaḥ ||
nāsanaṃ siddhasadṛśaṃ na kumbhaḥ kevalopamaḥ |
na khecarīsamā mudrā na nādasadṛśo layaḥ ||
nāsanaṃ siddhasadṛśaṃ na kumbhaḥ kevalopamaḥ ||
na khecarīsamā mudrā na nādasadṛśo layaḥ ||
kumbhaḥ kevalopamaḥ ] kumbhasadṛśo ’nilaḥ N,n1,n2,n3,J
अथ पद्मासनम् ।
वामोरूपरि दक्षिणं च चरणं संस्थाप्य वामं तथा
याम्योरूपरि पश्चिमेन विधिना धृत्वा कराभ्यां दृढम् ।
अङ्गुष्ठौ हृदये निधाय चिबुकं नासाग्रमालोकये-
देतद्व्याधिविनाशकारि यमिनां पद्मासनं प्रोच्यते ॥
atha padmāsanam /
vāmorūpari dakṣiṇaṃ ca caraṇaṃ saṃsthāpya vāmaṃ tathā
yāmyorūpari paścimena vidhinā dhṛtvā karābhyāṃ dṛḍham /
aṅguṣṭhau hṛdaye nidhāya cibukaṃ nāsāgram ālokaye-
d etad vyādhivināśakāri yamināṃ padmāsanaṃ procyate //
vāmorūpari dakṣiṇañ ca caraṇaṃ saṃsthāpya vāmaṃ tathā
yāmyorūpari paścimena vidhinā dhṛtvā karābhyāṃ dṛḍham |
aṅguṣṭhau hṛdaye nidhāya cibukaṃ nāsāgram ālokayed
etad vyādhivikārahāri yamināṃ padmāsanaṃ procyate || 8 ||
8a saṃsthāpya ] vinyasya T
8b yāmyorūpari paścimena vidhinā dhṛtvā ] VT; dakṣorūpari tasya bandhanavid- hau dhṛtvā A, dakṣorūpari paścimena vidhinā dhṛtvā GPGPkY, tasyaivoparitaś ca vandhanavid- hiṃ kṛtvā GB , tato dakṣorūpari tasya vaṃdhanavidhau pṛṣṭhe GL (unm.) • dṛḍhaṃ ] dṛḍha∗ ṃ ∗ V
8c ālokayed ] ālokayan GB
8d etad ] antar° T • °vikārahāri yamināṃ ] VAT; °vikāranāśanakaraṃ GPk Y, °vikārakaṃdadamanaṇ GB , °vināśakāri yamināṃ GL GP, °vighātahāri yamināṃ Tvl • °nāśanakaraṃ G
haṭhayoge—
vāmorūpari dakṣiṇaṃ hi caraṇaṃ saṃsthāpya vāmaṃ tathā
dakṣorūpari paścimena vidhinā dhṛtvā karābhyāṃ dṛḍham |
aṅguṣṭhau hṛdaye nidhāya civukaṃ nāsāgram ālokayet
etad vyādhivikāranāśanakaraṃ padmāsanaṃ procyate ||
vāmorūpari dakṣiṇaṃ ca caraṇaṃ saṃsthāpya vāmaṃ tathā
yāmyorūpari paścimena vidhinā dhṛtvā karābhyāṃ dṛḍham |
aṅguṣṭhau hṛdaye nidhāya cibukaṃ nāsāgram ālokayed
etad vyādhivināśakāri yamināṃ padmāsanaṃ procyate ||
मतान्तरे ।
उत्तानौ चरणौ कृत्वा ऊरुसंस्थौ प्रयत्नतः ।
ऊरुमध्ये तथोत्तानौ पाणी कृत्वा ततो दृशौ ॥
matāntare /
uttānau caraṇau kṛtvā ūrusaṃsthau prayatnataḥ /
ūrumadhye tathottānau pāṇī kṛtvā tato dṛśau //
The syntax of this verse as we have presented it is incomplete: at its end pavanaṃ śanaiḥ, `the breath gradually’, is left hanging. In the source text, the Dattātreyayogaśāstra, the following verse completes the syntax with pūrayed, “one should inhale”. Either Svātmārāma chose to leave the verse hanging (the following verse in the Dattātreyayogaśāstra adds nothing about the form of the posture, which is the topic here) or the verse that completes the syntax fell out, perhaps because of a scribal error that happened early in the transmission. In the Dattātreyayogaśāstra verses 36 and 37 both end with pavanaṃ śanaiḥ, the repetition of which may have caused an eyeskip. The manuscript readings with vakṣa sthāpayet (J7, V3, J8, J10, J17 and N17) or something similar (V1 and W4) do not offer a solution to the incomplete syntax so do not indicate that Svātmārāma rewrote Dattātreyayogaśāstra 36 so that he could omit Dattātreyayogaśāstra 37. In the absence of evidence that Svātmārāma included Dattātreyayogaśāstra 37 or wrote a coherent version of Haṭhapradīpikā 1.46, we have made sense of pavanaṃ śanaiḥ by adding “[draw in]” in our translation. Brahmānanda’s comment on the statement, `having raised the root of the uvula with the tongue’ (rājadantamūlaṃ ca jihvayā uttabhya) in 1.46 is worth noting. In the context of Haṭhayoga, one would assume this statement to be referring to a type of khecarīmudrā, in which the tongue lifts the root of the uvula, here called the `royal tooth’ (rājadanta, on the meaning of which see Mallinson 2007: 209 n. 258). However, Brahmānanda understands it differently (synonyms omitted for clarity): Pushing against both roots of the front teeth on the left and right with the tongue [ldots ] — this fixation of the tongue has to be understood from the mouth of the teacher. rājadantānāṃ daṃṣṭrāṇāṃ savyadakṣiṇabhāge sthitānāṃ mūle ubhe mūlasthāne jihvayā uttambhya ūrdhvaṃ stambhayitvā | gurumukhād avagantavyo ’yaṃ jihvābandhaḥ | Brahmānanda appears to have had in mind a probably older rule for meditation postures, according to which the tongue rests near the front teeth. One example of this is in Svacchandatantra (4.365f.), which teaches a meditation pose called divyaṃ karaṇam , in which the tongue is to rest at the tip of the teeth (dantāgre jihvām ādāya). Other Tantric texts have this or similar rules, in which the tongue is supposed to rest either on the teeth or the palate, early examples being the Mṛgendrāgama, yogapāda 19 (dantāgre jihvām ādāya) and Mataṅgapārameśvaratantra, yogapāda 2.27 (tālumadhyagatenaiva jihvāgreṇa). Placing the tongue where it does not disturb the meditation seems quite appropriate for a `normal’ meditative practice. * When the context is haṭhayogic physiology, placing the tongue at the uvula, which is the source of `nectar’, is more appropriate. Confusingly, yogic terminology includes many names for the uvula, and among these especially the term rājadanta may give rise to confusion, since, as we have seen, the tongue might also in some yoga systems be placed at the front teeth. Furthermore, the haṭhayogic khecarīmudrā has been described in manifold ways. Usually the tongue is said to be inserted into the cavity above the palate but in some cases it is placed at the uvula. Thus the tenth-century Mokṣopāya (V.55.14c) says that the tongue rests at the `source of the palate’ (tālumūlatalālagnajihvā) and the commentary, the Saṃsārataraṇi, on the parallel passage in Laghuyogavāsiṣṭha V.6.155, which reads tālumūlāntarālagnajihvā°, explains that this means that the tongue is to be placed in the middle of the two regions of the palate, and that this is the nabhomudrā, alias `khecarī’ (tālumūlāntarālagnajihvamūlaḥ tālumūlayoḥ kākudamūladeśayoḥ āntare lagnam ālagnam jihvāmūlam yasyety anena nabhomudrā darśitā | yā hi khecarı̄ty ucyate). A little later in the Mokṣopāya (V.78.24ab) it is made clear that one should reach the uvula, `at the root of the palate’ (tālumūlagatāṃ yatnāj jihvayākramya ghaṇṭikām). In view of this background we must conclude that the author of the Jyotsnā was probably not aware of the yogic meaning of rājadanta and has tried his best to make sense of the passage, echoing the idea of the two roots of the palate (although his text is not talking about the palate), but then referring to the instruction of the teacher for practical details, probably noticing that his literal interpretation is somewhat opaque. In addition to his commentary on 1.46 (translated above), Brahmānanda’s comments on rājadantasthajihvāyām at 3.22 indicate that he thought the rājadanta refers to the front teeth (kutaḥ?yato dantānāṃ rājāno rājadantā rājadanteṣu tiṣṭhatīti rājadantasthāḥ, rājadantasthā cāsau jihvā ca tasyāṃ rājadantasthajihvāyāṃ bandhaḥ, taduparibhāgasya sambandhaḥ śastaḥ).
uttānau caraṇau kṛtvā ūrusaṃsthau prayatnataḥ |
ūrumadhye tathottānau pāṇī kṛtvā tato dṛśau ||
nāsāgre vinyased rājadantamūlaṃ ca jihvayā |
uttabhya cibukaṃ vakṣasy āsthāpya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ ||
yathāśaktyā samākṛṣya pūrayed udaraṃ śanaiḥ |
yathāśaktyaiva paścāt tu recayet pavanaṃ śanaiḥ ||
uttānau caraṇau kṛtvā ūrusaṃsthau prayatnataḥ |
ūrumadhye tathottānau pāṇī kṛtvā tu tādṛśau ||
nāsāgre vinyased dṛṣṭiṃ rājadantaṃ ca jihvayā |
uttambhya cibukaṃ vakṣe saṃsthāpya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ ||
yathāśaktyā samākṛṣya pūrayed udaraṃ śanaiḥ |
yathāśaktyaiva paścāt tu recayed anirodhataḥ ||
dattātreyaḥ—
uttānau caraṇau kṛtvā ūrusaṃsthau prayatnataḥ |
ūrumadhye tathottānau pāṇī kṛtvā tato dṛśau ||
nāsāgre vinyased rājadantamūlaṃ tu jihvayā |
uttabhya civukaṃ vakṣasy utthāpya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ ||
yathāśaktyā samākṛṣya pūrayed udaraṃ śanaiḥ |
yathāśaktyaiva paścāt tu recayet pavanaṃ śanaiḥ ||
dattātreyo ’pi
uttānau caraṇau kṛtvā ūrvoḥ saṃsthāpya yatnataḥ |
ūrumadhye tathottānau pāṇī kṛtvā tato dṛśau ||
nāsāgre vinyased rājadantamūlaṃ ca jihvayā |
uttabhya cibukaṃ vakṣaḥ saṃsthāpya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ ||
नासाग्रे विन्यसेद्राजदन्तमूलं च जिह्वया ।
उत्तभ्य चिबुकं वक्षस्यास्थाप्यपवनं शनैः ॥*
nāsāgre vinyased rājadantamūlaṃ ca jihvayā /
uttabhya cibukaṃ vakṣasy āsthāpyapavanaṃ śanaiḥ //*
इदं पद्मासनं प्रोक्तं सर्वव्याधिविनाशनम् ।
दुर्लभं येन केनापि धीमता लभ्यते भुवि ॥
पश्चादुक्तमेव मत्संमतम् ।
idaṃ padmāsanaṃ proktaṃ sarvavyādhivināśanam /
durlabhaṃ yena kenāpi dhīmatā labhyate bhuvi //
paścād uktam eva matsaṃmatam /
In this context, the word durlabham is somewhat ambiguous as to whether the posture is hard to perform or hard to acquire (the more usual meaning). In commenting on durlabham in Jyotsnā 2.74, Brahmānanda glosses it as duṣprāpam, which means `difficult to attain’ and `inaccessible.’ The comment added to this verse by Svātmārāma indicates that he prefers the following version of padmāsana, which derives from the Vivekamārtaṇḍa, rather than the one he has borrowed from the Dattātreyayogāśāstra.
idaṃ padmāsanaṃ nāma sarvavyādhivināśanam |
durlabhaṃ yena kenāpi dhīmatā labhyate bhuvi ||
38a nāma ] P; ∗ma T, proktaṃ cett.
38d dhīmatā ] dhīmatāṃ A • bhuvi ] yadi M1, hi vai A
idaṃ padmāsanaṃ proktaṃ sarvavyādhivināśanam |
durlabhaṃ yena kenāpi dhīmatā labhyate param ||
idaṃ padmāsanaṃ proktaṃ sarvavyādhivināśanam |
durlabhaṃ yena kenāpi dhīmatā labhyate bhuvi ||
idaṃ padmāsanaṃ proktaṃ sarvavyādhivināśanam |
durlabhaṃ yena kenāpi dhīmatā labhyate bhuvi ||
कृत्वा संपुटितौ करौ दृढतरं बद्ध्वा तु पद्मासनं
गाढं वक्षसि संनिधाय चिबुकं ध्यानं च तच्चेतसि ।
वारं वारमपानमूर्ध्वमनिलं प्रोच्चालयन् पूरितं
मुञ्चन्प्राणमुपैति बोधमतुलं शक्तिप्रभावान्नरः ॥
kṛtvā saṃpuṭitau karau dṛḍhataraṃ baddhvā tu padmāsanaṃ
gāḍhaṃ vakṣasi saṃnidhāya cibukaṃ dhyānaṃ ca tac cetasi /
vāraṃ vāram apānam ūrdhvam anilaṃ proccālayan pūritaṃ
muñcan prāṇam upaiti bodham atulaṃ śaktiprabhāvān naraḥ //
The text at end of the second verse quarter is uncertain. Later witnesses, including Brahmānanda, have dhyāyaṃś ca but none of the early ones has this reading. We are taking dhyānaṃ with sannidhāya, but this renders tat problematic because it has no clear referent. In the source text, the Vivekamārtaṇḍa, tat appears to refer to the mokṣadvāra broken by kuṇḍalinī, which is mentioned in the previous verse. The two participles proccālayan and muñcan imply that the two things are happening at the same time, which is surprising but perhaps possible.
पश्चादुक्तमेव मत्स्येन्द्रमतम्
paścād uktam eva matsyendramatam
kṛtvā saṃpuṭitau karau dṛḍhataraṃ baddhvātha padmāsanaṃ
gāḍhaṃ vakṣasi sannidhāya cibukaṃ dhyānaṃś ca tac cetasi |
vāraṃ vāram apānam ūrdhvam anilaṃ proccālayan pūritaṃ
muñcan prāṇam upaiti bodham atulaṃ śaktiprabhāvān naraḥ ||
36a °puṭitau ] GL GP GPk U; ghaṭitau VAGB T • baddhvātha ] VTvl U; baddhvā tu AGBH, dhyānaṃ tu GL, dhyāyes ta° GP, dhyātvā ca GPk, baddhvā ca T • padmāsanam ] VGBTU; tac cepsitaṃ GL, °taś cepsitaṃ GP, tat prekṣitam GPk
36b dhyāyaṃś ] TH; dhyānaṃ VAGU • °cetasi ] °cetasaṃ A
36c proccālayan ] ∗∗ T; pro cc ālayan V, prodvārayaṃ A, proccālayet GB, proccārayet GLGPk, prollāsayet GP, proccārayan U • pūri- taṃ ] prerayaṃ A
36d muñcan prāṇamupaiti bodhamatulaṃ śak- tiprabhāvān naraḥ ] U; prāṇaṃ muṃcati bodham eti śanakaiḥ proktaprabhāvād ataḥ V, pāṇaṃ muṃcati bodham eti śanakaiḥ śaktiḥ prabhāvād ataḥ A, prāṇaṃ muṃcati yāti bodham amalaṃ śaktipradhānoditaḥ GB, muṃcan prāṇam upaiti bodham atulaṃ śaktiprabhāvād ataḥ GLGP, muñcan prāṇam upaiti bodham atulaṃ śaktiprabodhān naraḥ GPk, prāṇaṃ muñcati bodhameti śanakai (ścu?śśa)[sic] ktiprabodhān naraḥ T, muñcan prāṇam upaiti bodham akhilāṃ śaktiṃ prabhāvād ataḥ Tvl
tathā ca granthāntare—
kṛtvā saṃpuṭitau karau dṛḍhataraṃ badhvā ca padmāsanam
gāḍhaṃ vakṣasi saṃnidhāya civukaṃ dhyānaṃ ca tac cetasi |
vāraṃ vāram apānam ūrdhvam anilaṃ protsārayet pūrayet
prāṇaṃ muñcati bodham eti niyataṃ śaktiprabodhodayāt ||
kṛtvā saṃpuṭitau karau dṛḍhataraṃ baddhvā tu padmāsanam
gāḍhaṃ vakṣasi sannidhāya cibukaṃ dhyānaṃ ca tac cetasi |
vāraṃ vāram apānam ūrdhvam anilaṃ proccārayet pūritam
muñcat prāṇam upaiti bodham atulaṃ śakteḥ prabhāvān naraḥ ||
proccārayet ] proccālayat P,T,t1,n2
पद्मासनस्थितो योगी नाडीद्वारेषु पूरयन् ।
मारुतं धारयेद्यस्तुस मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥
padmāsanasthito yogī nāḍīdvāreṣu pūrayan /
mārutaṃ dhārayed yas tusa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //
It is not unusual to read pūrayan with the locative as seen in this verse (cf. pūrayen mukhe in Amaraugha 21d). γ1’s reading of niyatam (instead of dhārayed) in the third verse quarter explains the passive verbs in other witnesses. The passive verbs do not make sense with yas tu. The passive verbs meaning to take in the breath (e.g., pīyate) may have been adopted to remove the reference to holding the breath because a breath retention is not mentioned in the previous verse describing padmāsana (only inhalation and exhalation). In the third verse quarter, α1 reads māruto mriyate yas tu, which does not make sense, but if one accepts pūrayet in the second verse quarter, one could emend α’s reading to māruto mriyate yasya, which makes good sense (i.e., `the yogi whose breath dies is undoubtedly liberated’). In the same vein, α2 also has the plausible reading mārutaṃ mārayet yas tu. The Jyotsnā (1.49) has nāḍīdvāreṇa instead of nāḍīdvāreṣu, and Brahmānanda interprets it as the opening of the central channel (suṣumnāmārgeṇa). This yields the idea of filling up the central channel (as opposed to other channels), which is described in the Yogabīja (94–95).
padmāsanasthito yogī nāḍīdvāreṣu pūrayan |
mārutaṃ dhārayed yas tu sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ ||
padmāsane sthito yogī nāḍīdvāreṣu pūrayet |
pūritaṃ dhrīyate yas tu sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ ||
padmāsanasthito yogī nāḍīdvāreṣu pūrayan |
mārutaṃ kumbhayan yas tu sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ ||
अथ सिंहासनम् ।
गुल्फौ च वृषणस्याधः सीवन्याः पार्श्वयोः क्षिपेत् ।
दक्षिणे सव्यगुल्फं तु दक्षगुल्फं तु सव्यके ॥
atha siṃhāsanam /
gulphau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipet /
dakṣiṇe savyagulphaṃ tu dakṣagulphaṃ tu savyake //
gulphau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipet |
dakṣiṇaṃ savyagulphena dakṣiṇenetaretaram ||
hastau jānau ca saṃsthāpya svāṅgulīś ca prasārya ca |
vyāttavaktro nirīkṣeta nāsāgraṃ susamāhitaḥ ||
siṃhāsanaṃ bhaved etat pūjitaṃ yogibhiḥ sadā |
gulpau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipet |
dakṣiṇaṃ savyagulphena dakṣiṇena tathetaram ||
hastau ca jānvoḥ saṃsthāpya svāṅgulīś ca prasārya ca |
vyāttavaktro nirīkṣet nāsagraṃ susamāhitaḥ ||
siṃhāsanaṃ bhaved etat pūjitaṃ yogibhiḥ sadā |
gulphau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipet |
dakṣiṇaṃ savyagulphena vāmaṃ dakṣiṇagulphataḥ ||
hastau ca jānvoḥ saṃsthāpya svāṅgulīś ca prasārya ca |
nāsāgraṃ ca nirīkṣeta bhavet siṃhāsanaṃ hi tat ||
gulphau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipet |
dakṣiṇaṃ savyagulphena dakṣiṇena tathetaram ||
hastau jānūpari sthāpya svāṅgulīḥ saṃprasārya ca |
vyāttavaktro nirīkṣeta nāsāgraṃ susamāhitaḥ |
siṃhāsanaṃ bhaved etat pūjitaṃ yogibhiḥ sadā |
atha siṃhāsanam
gulphau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipet |
dakṣiṇe savyagulphaṃ ca dakṣiṇe tu tathetaram ||
hastau tu jānvoḥ saṃsthāpya svāṅgulīḥ samprasārya ca |
vyāttavaktro nirīkṣeta nāsāgraṃ tu samāhitaḥ ||
siṃhāsanaṃ bhaved etat sevitaṃ yogibhiḥ sadā |
bandhatritayasaṃsthānaṃ kurute cāsanottamam ||
हस्तौ च जान्वोः संस्थाप्य स्वाङ्गुलीः संप्रसार्य च ।
व्यात्तवक्त्रो निरीक्षेत नासाग्रं सुसमाहितः ॥
hastau ca jānvoḥ saṃsthāpya svāṅgulīḥ saṃprasārya ca /
vyāttavaktro nirīkṣeta nāsāgraṃ susamāhitaḥ //
Spreading the fingers and keeping the mouth wide open mimic a lion, and this is depicted in some iconography of Yoganarasiṃha (for example, Yoga Narasimha, Vishnu’s Man-Lion Incarnation, Samuel Eilenberg Collection, Bequest of Samuel Eilenberg, 1998, Accession Number: 2000.284.4. https://www.metmuseum.org/art/collection/search/39251). As far as we are aware, there is no source for the hemistich (1.52cd) mentioning the three locks, so it may have been composed by Svātmārāma or borrowed from a lost work.
सिंहासनं भवेदेतत्पूजितं योगिभिः सदा ।
बन्धत्रितयसन्धानं कुरुते चासनोत्तमम् ॥
siṃhāsanaṃ bhaved etat pūjitaṃ yogibhiḥ sadā /
bandhatritayasandhānaṃ kurute cāsanottamam //
अथ भद्रासनम् ।
गुल्फौ च वृषणस्याधः सीवन्याः पार्श्वयोः क्षिपेत् ।
सव्यगुल्फं तथा सव्ये दक्षगुल्फं तु दक्षिणे । (β2, γ1 and χ)
पार्श्वपादौ च पाणिभ्यां दृढं बद्ध्वा सुनिश्चलम् ॥
atha bhadrāsanam /
gulphau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipet /
savyagulphaṃ tathā savye dakṣagulphaṃ tu dakṣiṇe / (β2, γ1 and χ)
pārśvapādau ca pāṇibhyāṃ dṛḍhaṃ baddhvā suniścalam //
We have understood pārśvapāda as a ekadeśitatpuruṣa meaning the side of the foot, like agrapāda, the toes. Manuscripts of two early groups, β and γ, as well as the Jyotsnā (1.53), include an additional hemistich specifying that the left ankle is placed on the left side and the right ankle on the right (savyagulphaṃ tathā savye dakṣagulphaṃ tu dakṣiṇe). This hemistich appears to have been added to make it clear that the ankles are not crossed in bhadrāsana, unlike the previous pose, siṃhāsana.
gulphau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipan |
pārśvapādau ca pāṇibhyāṃ dṛḍhaṃ baddhvā suniścalam |
bhadrāsanaṃ bhaved etat sarvavyādhiviṣāpaham ||
gulphau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipet
pārśvapādau ca pāṇibhyāṃ dṛḍhaṃ baddhvā suniścalam
bhadrāsanaṃ bhaved etat sarvavyādhiviṣāpaham
gulphau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipet |
pārśvapādau ca pāṇibhyāṃ dṛḍhaṃ badhvā suniścalaḥ |
bhadrāsanaṃ bhaved etat sarvavyādhiviṣāpaham |
atha bhadrāsanam
gulphau ca vṛṣaṇasyādhaḥ sīvanyāḥ pārśvayoḥ kṣipet |
pārśvapādau ca pāṇibhyāṃ dṛḍhaṃ baddhvā suniścalam ||
bhadrāsanaṃ bhaved etat sarvavyādhiviṣāpaham ||
भद्रासनं भवेदेतत् सर्वव्याधिविषापहम् ।
गोरक्षासनमित्याहुरिदं वै सिद्धयोगिनः ॥
इत्यासनानि । (δ2)
bhadrāsanaṃ bhaved etat sarvavyādhiviṣāpaham /
gorakṣāsanam ity āhur idaṃ vai siddhayoginaḥ //
ity āsanāni / (δ2)
एवमासनबन्धेषु योगीन्द्रो विजितश्रमः ।
अथाभ्यसेन्नाडिशुद्धिं मुद्रादिपवनक्रियाम् ॥
evam āsanabandheṣu yogīndro vijitaśramaḥ /
athābhyasen nāḍiśuddhiṃ mudrādipavanakriyām //
The second hemistich can be interpreted in different ways. One possibility is to understand nāḍiśuddhiṃ as a bahuvrīhi qualifying mudrādipavanakriyām in the sense that the yogi should practise the breathing techniques by way of the relevant mudrās and locks (taught in the third chapter), from which purification of the channels arise. Alternatively, one could separate mudrādi from pavanakriyām and understand three different techniques here, namely, the practice of purifying the channels (perhaps by the alternative nostril method mentioned at the beginning of the second chapter), the mudrās and the breathing techniques of prāṇāyāma. The absence of a conjunctive particle, such as ca, makes the second interpretation less likely. The version of this verse in the Yogacintāmaṇi (cited in the testimonia) was changed to make it clear that nāḍiśuddhi and pavanakriyā with mudrās, are two distinct things.
evam āsanabandheṣu yogīndro vijitaśramaḥ |
abhyasen nāḍiśuddhiṃ ca mudrayā pavanakriyām || iti ||
evam āsanabandhastho yogīndro vigataśramaḥ |
athābhyasen nāḍiśuddhiṃ mudrādipavanakriyām ||
nāḍiśuddhiṃ ] em., nāhiśuddhi ms. no. 2244
क्रियायुक्तस्य सिद्धिः स्याद्अक्रियस्य कथं भवेत् ।
न शास्त्रपाठमात्रेण योगसिद्धिः प्रजायते ॥ (β2, βω, η2 and χ) *
kriyāyuktasya siddhiḥ syādakriyasya kathaṃ bhavet /
na śāstrapāṭhamātreṇa yogasiddhiḥ prajāyate // (β2, βω, η2 and χ) *
1.55*1–2 are omitted from the α, γ, δ and ε groups, so it is likely these verses were not in the earliest versions of the Haṭhapradīpikā. In fact, it appears that both were added (perhaps initially as marginal notes) to elaborate on the word kriyā in 1.55d. Both verses are similar to verses from the Dattātreyayogaśāstra (cited as the source). However, only the first half of Dattātreyayogaśāstra 47 is given in these later versions of the Haṭhapradīpikā, resulting in a near-nonsensical hemistich. Also, the syntax of 1.55.2ef is corrupt. One has to emend to deyā to make sense of it. These verses (except 1.55.2ef) appear in the Jyotsnā (1.65–66), but towards the end of chapter one.
kriyāyuktasya siddhiḥ syād akriyasya kathaṃ bhavet ||42 ||
na śāstrapāṭhamātreṇa kā cit siddhiḥ prajāyate |
na veṣadhāraṇaṃ siddheḥ kāraṇaṃ na ca tatkathā |
kriyaiva kāraṇaṃ siddheḥ satyam eva tu sāṃkṛte || 46 ||
śiśnodarārthaṃ yogasya kathayā veṣadhāriṇaḥ |
anuṣṭhānavihīnās tu vañcayanti janān kila || 47 ||
42c °yuktasya ] °yuktaḥsya W1, °yuktaḥ sa PT • siddhiḥ ] siddhi M1M2, siddhaḥ P
43a na śāstra° ] śāstrasya PT • °mātreṇa ] °rūpeṇa M1A
46a na ] sa° BB- BP • °dhāraṇaṃ ] °dhāriṇāṃ AM2, °dhāriṇaṃ JVYSS • siddheḥ ] sidhyai M1, siddhiḥ A, siddhi° β, kiṃ cit Y
46b om. M AM (eye-skip) • kāraṇaṃ na ] kāraṇa∗nn∗a T SS 12 • na ] tañ β • kathā ] W1VHPYCMK; katham PTβ, tathā JW2DYŚPT
46c kriyaiva ] PTβW1VYCMPTKYSS; om. M1AM2, kṛpaiva JDYŚ, kṛyaiva W2 • siddheḥ ] siddhiḥ JYSS
46d satyam ] satvam YSS • eva ] PTW1W2VDYŚK; etad M1AM2YCM, ekaṃ J, etan HP, etat PTYSS, etac β • tu sāṃkṛte ] dhi sāṃkṛte M1AM2YCM, na saṃśayaḥ HP, ca sāṃkṛte β
47a śiśno° ] siśno° JW2 47a °ārthaṃ yogasya ] °āś ca yogāś ca P, ⊔⊔ yogasya T, °ārthaṃ yogaś ca AM2, °ārthayogaś ca β
47b kathayā veṣadhāriṇaḥ ] W1W2DYŚYCMK; katheyaṃ veṣadhāriṇaḥ PTYSS, kasyeyaṃ veṣyadhāriṇaḥ M1, katheyaṃ veṣadhāriṇāṃ AM2, kaṃd- hāyāṃ yogadhāraṇaḥ BBBP, kathayan yogadhāraṇaḥ BA, kathaṃ yā veṣadhāriṇī J1, kathaṃ vā veṣadhāriṇī J2, kathaṃ ye veṣadhāriṇaḥ V, kathaṃ vā veṣadhāriṇaḥ PT
47c anuṣṭhāna° ] anuṣṭhānā° M1, annapāna° PT • °vihīnās tu ] svayaṃ nityaṃ M1, °vihīnāś ca AM2
47d janān ] janāḥ M1βV, janāt J, janā W1 • kila ] sadā M1AM2, iha YSS • vañcayanti janān kila ] vañcayaty akhilān janān YCM
न वेषधारणं सिद्धेः कारणं न च तत्कथा ।
क्रियैव कारणं सिद्धेः सत्यमेतन्न संशयः ।
शिश्नोदररतायेह न देया वेषधारिणः ॥ (β2, βω, η2 and χ)
na veṣadhāraṇaṃ siddheḥ kāraṇaṃ na ca tatkathā /
kriyaiva kāraṇaṃ siddheḥ satyam etan na saṃśayaḥ /
śiśnodararatāyeha na deyā veṣadhāriṇaḥ // (β2, βω, η2 and χ)
मयि बोधाम्बुधौ स्वच्छे तुच्छोऽयं विश्वबुद्बुदः ।
प्रलीन उदितो वेति विकल्पपटलः कुतः ॥ (Δ)
mayi bodhāmbudhau svacche tuccho’yaṃ viśvabudbudaḥ /
pralīna udito veti vikalpapaṭalaḥ kutaḥ // (Δ)
Verse 1.55.3 is only found in manuscripts of the δ group. It is very difficult to find a reason why this verse should be inserted here. It is apparently a muktaka that would befit an accomplished spiritual poem more than an instructional manual, like the Haṭhapradīpikā, even here, in what appears as a sort of miscellaneous section at the end of a chapter. In this verse, the lyrical subject wonders about why the mind is still able to doubt, despite its insight into the nature of reality. The reader might wonder how this illusionist verse could be understood to fit our Yoga text. We can only speculate that perhaps the scribe of the hyparchetype of the δ manuscripts was fond of it. The source is, as far as we can say, the Śāntiśataka of the Kashmirian poet Sillana or Silhaṇa, The manuscripts of the Svātmopalabdhiśataka give the name as Sillana, the mostly Bengali manuscripts of the Śāntiśataka read Śilhaṇa, as does Aufrecht in his Catalogus Catalogorum, 1891 (for further details see Hanneder, forthcoming). Sillana cannot be dated with any certainty but predates the Haṭhapradīpikā by a few centuries. The edition of the Śāntiśataka – where a hundred original verses had to be identified – places the verse in question into an appendix of doubtful stanzas (see Karl Schönfeld: Das Śāntiśataka. Leipzig: Harrassowitz 1910, p. 90 [A9]). However, the editor did not provide a compelling reason to regard it as unoriginal except only the fact that it is not transmitted in all manuscripts. What prevents further investigation of the matter is the lack of Kashmirian manuscripts for the Śāntiśataka and its compilatory character: one quarter of the material is identical with Bhartṛhari’s Vairāgyaśataka. A still superficial glance at Sillana’s Svātmopalabdhiśataka gives the impression that our verse would fit there, but not so much in the Śāntiśataka. Perhaps its first citation is in Advayavajra’s Tattva-ratnāvalī (24). While these are only preliminary observations the verse is likely not original to the Haṭhapradīpikā.
bodhāmbhodhau mayi svacchaṃ tac chāyam viśvabuddhayaḥ |
udito vā pralīno vā na vikalpāya kalpate ||
mayi bodhībudho svasthe tucho yaṃ viśvabudbudaḥ |
malīna udito vetti vikalpāvasaraḥ kutaḥ ||
śiśnodararatāya hi na deyaṃ veṣadhāriṇe ||
mayi bodhyaṃ buddhau svacche tad dheyaṃ viśvabudbudam ||
“śiśnodararatāyaitan na deya" etat yogajñānam etena śiśnodararatas tyājyo nanv etanmate tyājyapadārtho ’prasiddha iti śaṃkāṃ nirasyati mayi iti svacche bodhasvarūpasamudre budbudatulyasya viśvasya heyatvād iti bhāvaḥ
श्रुतिप्रतीतिः स्वगुरुप्रतीतिः
स्वात्मप्रतीतिर्मनसोऽपि रोधः ।
एतानि सर्वाणि समुच्चितानि
मतानि धीरैरिह साधनानि ॥ (Δ)
śrutipratītiḥ svagurupratītiḥ
svātmapratītir manaso’pi rodhaḥ /
etāni sarvāṇi samuccitāni
matāni dhīrair iha sādhanāni // (Δ)
Verse 1.55.4 is in some of the δ manuscripts and is quoted in Yogacintāmaṇi with attribution to the Haṭhapradīpikā. The reading in the Yogacintāmaṇi `cessation of mind’ (manonirodhaḥ) is better than manaso ’pi bodhaḥ (the δ reading) in a yogic context.
haṭhapradīpikāyām--
śrutipratītiś ca gurupratītiḥ svātmapratītiś ca manonirodhaḥ |
etāni sarvāṇi samuccitāni matāni dhīrair iha sādhanāni ||
आसनं कुम्भकं चित्रंमुद्राख्यं करणं तथा ।
अथ नादानुसन्धानमभ्यासानुक्रमो हठे ॥
āsanaṃ kumbhakaṃ citraṃmudrākhyaṃ karaṇaṃ tathā /
atha nādānusandhānam abhyāsānukramo haṭhe //
This verse was omitted from η1, the oldest dated manuscript. The omission is probably deliberate as that manuscript does not have chapter four, which teaches nādānusandhāna. The numbering in η1 suggests that its exemplar had this verse. The term kumbhaka is almost always masculine but appears in this verse as a neuter in the majority of manuscripts of the important groups. This verse is similar to 1.65, which has mudrādikaraṇāni ca, so perhaps it was through confusion with 1.65 that the same reading is found in some witnesses of 1.56. It seems that the four auxiliaries (aṅga) of Haṭhayoga are being referred to in the singular (hence āsanaṃ), whereas in 1.65 the plural is used (i.e., pīṭhāni). Therefore, the reading citraṃ [...] karaṇaṃ tathā is likely original for this verse.
haṭhapradīpikāyām--
āsanaṃ kumbhakaṃ citraṃ mudrākhyaṃ karaṇaṃ tathā |
atha nādānusandhānam abhyāsānukrameṇa ca ||
ब्रह्मचारी मिताहारी योगी योगपरायणः ।
अब्दादूर्ध्वं भवेत्सिद्धो नात्र कार्या विचारणा ॥
brahmacārī mitāhārī yogī yogaparāyaṇaḥ /
abdād ūrdhvaṃ bhavet siddho nātra kāryā vicāraṇā //
The readings tyāgī and yogī are both well attested in Haṭhapradīpikā 1.57b. The confusion between the two appears to have started early in the transmission of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa. The occurrence of tyāgī in Vivekamārtaṇḍa 37 may be a dittographical type of mistake because the word tyāgī is in the previous hemistich of that work. But it is more difficult to determine whether Svātmārāma used a manuscript of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa with tyāgī or yogī in verse 37. Since the best α manuscript has yogī, as well as η1 and many others, we have tentatively adopted it bearing in mind that it was changed early in the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā, most likely by a scribe who knew the reading of tyāgī in a manuscript of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa.
brahmacārī mitāhārī yogī yogaparāyaṇaḥ |
abdād ūrdhvaṃ bhavet siddho nātra kāryā vicāraṇā ||
brahmacārī mitāhārī tyāgī yogaparāyaṇaḥ |
abdād ūrdhvaṃ bhavet siddho nātra kāryā vicāraṇā ||
brahmacārī mitāhārī tyāgī yogaparāyaṇaḥ ||
abdād ūrdhvaṃ bhavet siddho nātra kāryā vicāraṇā ||
tyāgī ] yogī P,T,t1
सुस्निग्धमधुराहारश्चतुर्थांशविवर्जितः ।
भुज्यते शिवसंप्रीत्यै मिताहारः स उच्यते ॥
susnigdhamadhurāhāraś caturthāṃśavivarjitaḥ /
bhujyate śivasaṃprītyai mitāhāraḥ sa ucyate //
This verse probably derives from the ‘original’ Gorakṣaśataka (12c–13b). It is also found, but reworked to be about the mitāhārī, in Nowotny’s Gorakṣaśataka (55), which is an extended recension of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa. The expression `lacking a fourth part’ caturthāṃśavivarjitaḥ) is somewhat vague but probably refers to the idea of leaving a quarter of one’s stomach empty, which is stated more clearly in the Dharmaputrikā 1.51-52:
ṣaḍrasopetasuṣnigdhasvādusāndrasugandhinā |
udarasyārdhabhāgan tu bhojanena prapūrayet ||
pānīyena caturbhāgaṃ taccheṣaṃ śūnyam iṣyate |
vāyos sañcāraṇānārtham āhāraniyamaḥ smṛtaḥ ||
annena kukṣer dvāv aṃśau pānenaikaṃ prapūrayet |
āśrayaṃ pavanādīnāṃ caturtham avaśeṣayet ||
द्वौ भागौ पूरयेदन्नैस्तोयेनैकं प्रपूरयेत्
वायोः सञ्चरणार्थाय चतुर्थमवशेषयेतिति
dvau bhāgau pūrayed annais toyenaikaṃ prapūrayet
vāyoḥ sañcaraṇārthāya caturtham avaśeṣayet iti
susnigdhamadhurāhāraś caturthāṃśavivarjitaḥ ||
bhujyate śivasaṃprītyai mitāhāraḥ sa ucyate |
tad uktaṃ haṭhapradīpikāyām--
susnigdhamadhurāhārāś caturthāṃśavivarjitaḥ |
bhujyate śivasamprītyai mitāhāraḥ sa ucyate ||
susnigdhamadhurāhāraś caturthāṃśavivarjitaḥ |
bhuñjate śivasaṃprītyā mitāhārī sa ucyate ||
कट्वम्लतीक्ष्णलवणोष्णहरीतशाक-
सौवीरतैलतिलसर्षपमत्स्यमद्यम् ।
आजादिमांसदधितक्रकुलत्थकोल-
पिण्याकहिङ्गुलशुनाद्यमपथ्यमाहुः ॥
kaṭvamlatīkṣṇalavaṇoṣṇaharītaśāka-
sauvīratailatilasarṣapamatsyamadyam /
ājādimāṃsadadhitakrakulatthakola-
piṇyākahiṅgulaśunādyam apathyam āhuḥ //
On the meaning of uṣṇa (1.59a) in relation to food, Meulenbeld writes (1974: 254 fn. 13): Cakra mentions as a variant: katvamlalavaṇakṣāra (pungent, acid, saline and caustic). Cakra remarks that the term `hot’ (uṣṇa) denotes hot on touch when it occurs the first time, and hot with regard to potency when it occurs for the second time. The compound °harītaśāka° in 1.59a is spelt °haritaśāka° in other works. The spelling °harīta was probably adopted for metrical reasons. In some Nighaṇṭus, °haritaśāka° is glossed as horseradish (śigru). Rājanighaṇṭu 7.26
śigrur haritaśākaś ca śākapattraḥ supattrakaḥ |
śigruko haritaśākaś ca mato vai mūlapatrakaḥ |
añjanaṃ yāmunaṃ kṛṣṇaṃ nādeyaṃ mecakaṃ tathā
srotojaṃ dṛkpradaṃ nīlaṃ sauvīraṃ ca suvīrajam ||
lavaṇaṃ sarṣapaś cāmlam uṣṇaṃ rūkṣaṃ ca tīkṣṇakam|
haṭhapradīpikāyām--
kaṭvamlatīkṣṇalavaṇoṣṇaharītaśāka-
sauvīratailatilasarṣapamatsyamadyam |
ajādimāṃsadadhitakrakulatthakola-
piṇyākahiṅgulaśunādyam apathyam āhuḥ ||
kaṭvamlatīkṣṇalavaṇoṣṇaharītaśākaṃ
sauvīratailatilasarṣapamatsyamadyam |
ajādimāṃsadadhitakrakulatthakodra-
piṇyākahiṅgulaśunādyam apathyam āhuḥ ||
atha varjyāni –
kaṭvamlatīkṣṇalavaṇoṣṇa haritaśāka-
sauvīratailatilasarṣapamatsyamadyam ||
ajāvimāṃsadadhitakrakulatthakola-
piṇyākahiṃgulaśunādyam apathyam āhuḥ || 28 ||
भोजनमहितं विद्यात्पुनरप्युष्णीकृतं रूक्षम् ।
अतिलवणमम्लपृक्तंकदशनशाकोत्कटं दुष्टम् ॥
bhojanam ahitaṃ vidyāt punar apy uṣṇīkṛtaṃ rūkṣam /
atilavaṇam amlapṛktaṃkadaśanaśākotkaṭaṃ duṣṭam //
We have not found any conclusive evidence for the meaning of tilapiṇḍa. Brahmānanda glosses it as piṇyāka (on the meaning of which see the notes for the previous verse). The meaning of the compound kadaśanaśākotkaṭaṃ is not clear. Brahmānanda understands it as a list (dvandva) consisting of kadaśana, śāka and utkaṭa, which he defines as bad food, prohibited vegetables and pepper, respectively. There are various possible meanings of utkaṭa. According to some Nighaṇṭus, the word utkaṭā can mean pepper (e.g., Rājanighaṇṭu 5.16 pārvatī śailajā tāmrā lambabījā tathotkaṭā) and, according to Monier Williams, utkaṭa can refer to Saccharum Sara and utkaṭā also to Laurus Cassia (cinnamon). However, utkaṭa can be an adjective that means ‘abounding in’ at the end of a compound. Since this verse consists of many adjectives describing food that is unwholesome, it is likely that kadaśanaśākotkaṭaṃ was intended as an adjectival tatpuruṣa, in which case it means ‘[food] full of vegetables’ śākotkaṭa that are `bad food’ or, perhaps, `bad eating’ (kadaśana) in the sense of hard to chew.
अथ वर्ज्यानि वक्ष्यामि योगविघ्नकराणि च
लवणं सर्षपं चाम्लमुष्णं तीक्ष्णं च रूक्षकम्
अतीव भोजनं त्याज्यमतिनिद्रातिभाषणमिति.
त्यजेत्कट्वम्ललवणं क्षीरभोजी सदा भवेतिति
atha varjyāni vakṣyāmi yogavighnakarāṇi ca
lavaṇaṃ sarṣapaṃ cāmlam uṣṇaṃ tīkṣṇaṃ ca rūkṣakam
atīva bhojanaṃ tyājyam atinidrātibhāṣaṇam iti.
tyajet kaṭvamlalavaṇaṃ kṣīrabhojī sadā bhavet iti
bhojanam ahitaṃ vidyāt punar uṣṇīkṛtaṃ tathā |
atilavaṇaṃ sapalaṃ vā prasitaṃ śākotkaṭaṃ varjyam ||
bhojanam ahitaṃ vidyāt punar uṣṇīkṛtaṃ rūkṣaṃ |
atilavaṇādikayuktaṃ kadaśanaśākotkaṭaṃ duṣṭaṃ ||
तथा हि गोरक्षवचनम् । (α1, β2, βω, γ1, η1 and η2)
* वर्जयेद्दुर्जनप्रान्तं वह्निस्त्रीपथसेवनम् ।
प्रातःस्नानोपवासादिकायक्लेशविधिं तथा ॥
tathā hi gorakṣavacanam / (α1, β2, βω, γ1, η1 and η2)
* varjayed durjanaprāntaṃ vahnistrīpathasevanam /
prātaḥsnānopavāsādikāyakleśavidhiṃ tathā //
Manuscripts from the α, β and ε groups have the reading durjanaprāntaṃ (1.61a), which is the lectio difficilior in relation to durjanaprītiṃ (`the friendship of wicked people’). We have understood durjanaprānta in line with Brahmānanda’s gloss in Jyotsnā 1.64, `dwelling near bad people’ (durjanasamīpavāsa).
haṭhadīpikāyām—
varjayed durjanaprītiṃ vahnistrīpathasevanam |
prātaḥsnānopavāsādi kāyakleśādikaṃ tathā ||
tathā ca gorakṣavacanam---
varjayed durjanaprītivahnistrīpathasevanam |
prātaḥsnānopavāsādi kāyakleśādikaṃ tathā ||
°prīti°] °prāntaṃ P, prāptaṃ T,t1. kāyakleśādikaṃ ] kāyakleśavidhiṃ P,T.
varjayed durjanaprītiṃ vahnistrīpathasevanam |
prātaḥsnānopavāsādikāyakleśavidhiṃ tyajet ||
गोधूमशालियवषष्टिकशोभनान्नं
क्षीराज्यमण्डनवनीतसितामधूनि ।
शुण्ठीपटोलकफलादि च पञ्चशाकं
मुद्गादि दिव्यमुदकंच यमीन्द्रपथ्यम् ॥
godhūmaśāliyavaṣaṣṭikaśobhanānnaṃ
kṣīrājyamaṇḍanavanītasitāmadhūni /
śuṇṭhīpaṭolakaphalādi ca pañcaśākaṃ
mudgādi divyam udakaṃca yamīndrapathyam //
In 1.62b, maṇḍa, which is supported by α, β and γ, is more likely than khaṇḍa (`candied sugar’) because it fits the context of diary products mentioned in this compound (i.e., kṣīra, ājya and navanīta). The term navanīta is discussed in Suśrutasaṃhitā, sūtrasthāna, 45.92 as follows: Fresh butter (navanīta) is light soft, sweet, astringent, slightly sour, cold, intellect-promoting, appetiser, cordial, checking, aphrodisiac, non-burning, pacifies pitta and vāta and alleviates wasting, cough, wound, consumption, piles and facial paralysis [...] (trans. Sharma 2018 vol. 1: 434). The word sitā is one of many words for ground sugar. Meulenbeld (1974: 507) comments that sitā is `very white and looks like gravel.’ Thw term paṭola can refer to at least two different gourds. Meulenbeld (1974: 569) compiled a list of six possibilities, including Trichosanthes dioica Roxb. (`pointed gourd’), Trichosanthes cucumerina Linn (`snake gourd’). Nadkarni (1954: 863, 518) has two entries on paṭola: item Snake gourd is common in Bengal and cultivated in Northern India and Punjab. The unripe fruit of this climbing plant is generally used as a culinary vegetable and is very wholesome, specially suited for the convalescent. item Smooth luffa is a hairy climbing herb extensively cultivated in several parts of India. The fruit is edible. Medicinally it is described as `cool, costive, demulcent, producive of loss of appetite and excitive of wind, bile and phlegm. Sharma (1982: 156) adds that paṭola is a synonym of kulaka and is well known as Trichosanthas dioica Roxb. Brahmānanda glosses paṭola as kośātakī, which is Luffa acutangula Roxb (Meulenbeld 1974: 586), suggesting that he thought it was some sort of luffa. He also mentions the vernacular term paravara for paṭola. Groups of five vegetables (pañcaśāka or śākapañcaka) have been defined in various yoga texts, but such grouping of vegetables does not seem to occur outside of literature on yoga. The earilest reference to a group of five vegetables known to us is the sixteenth-century Yuktabhavadeva 4.22, which attributes the verse to the Śivayoga. The same verse is also quoted in Jyotsnā 1.65 with attribution to a medical source (vaidyaka):
sarvaśākam acākṣuṣyaṃ cākṣuṣyaṃ śākapañcakam |
jīvantī vāstumatsyākṣī meghanādaḥ punarnavāḥ || iti ||
pañcaśākas tu–
kṣīraparṇī ca jīvantī matsyākṣī ca punarnavā
meghanādaś ceti budhaiḥ pañcaśākaḥ prakīrtitaḥ || iti ||
bālaśākaṃ kālaśākaṃ tathā paṭolapatrakam |
pañcaśākaṃ praśaṃsīyād vāstūkaṃ hilamocikāṃ ||
divyodakaṃ kharāri syād ākāśasalilaṃ tathā |
vyomodakaṃ cāntarikṣajalaṃ ceṣvabhidhāhvayam ||
सर्वशाकमचाक्षुष्यं चाक्षुष्यं शाकपञ्चकम्
जीवन्तीवास्तुमत्स्याक्षीमेघनादपुनर्नवाः इति.
sarvaśākam acākṣuṣyaṃ cākṣuṣyaṃ śākapañcakam
jīvantīvāstumatsyākṣīmeghanādapunarnavāḥ iti.
godhūmaśāliyavaṣāṣṭikaśobhanānnaṃ
kṣīrājyamaṇḍanavanītasitāmadhūni |
śuṇṭhīpaṭolakaphalādikapañcaśākaṃ
mudgādi cālpam udakaṃ ca munīndrapathyam ||
godhūmaśāliyavaṣaṣṭikaśobhanānnaṃ
kṣīrājyamaṇḍanavanītasitāmadhūni |
śuṇṭhīpaṭolaphalapatrajapañcaśākaṃ
mudgādidivyam udakaṃ ca yamīndrapathyam ||
°phalapatraja° ] phalādika N,n1,J. yamīndra° ] yatīndra° N,n1,J
tathā ca śivayoge-
godhūmaśāliyavaṣāṣṭikaśobhanānnaṃ
kṣīrājyakhaṇḍanavanītasitāmadhūni ||
śuṇṭhīpaṭolakaphalādi ca pañcaśāka-
mudgādidivyam udakaṃ ca munīndrapathyam ||
सर्वशाकमचाक्षुष्यं चाक्षुष्यं शाकपञ्चकं ।
जीवन्ती वास्तु मत्स्याक्षी मेघनादः पुनर्नवा ॥ (γ1)
sarvaśākamacākṣuṣyaṃ cākṣuṣyaṃ śākapañcakaṃ /
jīvantī vāstu matsyākṣī meghanādaḥ punarnavā // (γ1)
क्षीरपर्णी च जीवन्ती मत्स्याक्षी च पुनर्नवा ।
मेघनादश्च पञ्चैते शाकनाम प्रकीर्तिता स्मल्ल्(सिच्) ॥ (βω and ε3)
kṣīraparṇī ca jīvantī matsyākṣī ca punarnavā /
meghanādaś ca pañcaite śākanāma prakīrtitā small (sic) // (βω and ε3)
मृष्टंसुमधुरं स्निग्धं गव्यं धातुप्रपोषणम् ।
मनोऽभिलषितं योग्यं योगी भोजनमाचरेत् ॥
mṛṣṭaṃsumadhuraṃ snigdhaṃ gavyaṃ dhātuprapoṣaṇam /
mano’bhilaṣitaṃ yogyaṃ yogī bhojanam ācaret //
The variants of 1.63a all seem possible: mṛṣṭaṃ, miṣṭaṃ and iṣṭaṃ. The last is made somewhat redundant by mano ’bhilaṣitaṃ in 163c. Both mṛṣṭaṃ (α and η) and miṣṭaṃ (β and γ) are well attested by manuscripts of important groups and there is hardly any difference in their meaning in this context. We have adopted mṛṣṭaṃ as it is supported by the α group.
piṣṭaṃ sumadhuraṃ snigdhaṃ gavyaṃ dhātuprapoṣaṇam |
mano’bhilaṣitaṃ yogyaṃ yogī bhojanam ācaret || iti ||
śreṣṭhaṃ samadhuraṃ snigdhaṃ gavyaṃ dhātuprapoṣaṇam |
manobhilaṣitaṃ yogyaṃ caturthāṃśavivarjitam |
śivārpitaṃ ca naivedyaṃ yogī bhojanam ācaret ||
śreṣṭhaṃ sumadhuraṃ snigdhaṃ gavyaṃ dhātuprapoṣaṇam |
mano’bhilaṣitaṃ yogyaṃ yogī bhojanam ācaret ||
युवा वृद्धोऽतिवृद्धो वा व्याधितो दुर्बलोऽपि वा ।
अभ्यासात्सिद्धिमाप्नोति सर्वयोगेष्वतन्द्रितः ॥
yuvā vṛddho’tivṛddho vā vyādhito durbalo’pi vā /
abhyāsāt siddhim āpnoti sarvayogeṣv atandritaḥ //
η1, the oldest dated manuscript, has a different reading for the last verse quarter (164d): sarvaṃ yogī yatendriyaḥ (`the yogi whose senses are restrained wholly succeeds [...]’). Here, sarvaṃ is not easy to construe, and the readings of the α manuscripts and other important groups of Haṭhapradīpikā manuscripts indicate that sarvayogeṣv atandritaḥ was the reading adopted by Svātmārāma, which is more similar to the Dattātreyayogaśāstra’s (i.e., yoge sarvo ’py atandritaḥ).
yuvāvastho ’pi vṛddho vā vyādhito vā śanaiḥ śanaiḥ |
abhyāsāt siddhim āpnoti yoge sarvo ’py atandritaḥ || 40 ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
yuvā bālo ’tivṛddho vā vyādhito durbalo ’pi vā |
abhyāsāt siddhim āpnoti sarvayogeṣv atandritaḥ ||
yuvā bhavati vṛddho ’pi vyādhito durbalo ’pi vā |
abhyāsāt siddhim āpnoti sarvayogeṣv atandritaḥ ||
पीठानि कुम्भकाश्चित्रा दिव्यानि करणानि च ।
सर्वोऽपि च हठाभ्यासो राजयोगफलावधि ॥
pīṭhāni kumbhakāś citrā divyāni karaṇāni ca /
sarvo’pi ca haṭhābhyāso rājayogaphalāvadhi //
pīṭhāni kumbhakāś citrā divyāni karaṇāni ca |
sāṅgo ’pi ca haṭhābhyāso rājayogaphalārthadaḥ ||
अथासने दृढे योगी वशी हितमिताशनः ।
गुरूपदिष्टमार्गेण प्राणायामं समभ्यसेत् ॥
athāsane dṛḍhe yogī vaśī hitamitāśanaḥ /
gurūpadiṣṭamārgeṇa prāṇāyāmaṃ samabhyaset //
The Jyotsnā (2.1) has the plural prāṇāyāmān, which is supported by some manuscripts of the β, γ and ε groups. The plural is possible here as it could refer to the different techniques of retention (kumbhaka) taught later in the chapter. This is how Brahmānanda understands it (prāṇāyāmān vakṣyamāṇān). The variation between singular and plural recurs through this chapter, and we have followed the α readings, which make good sense. In this case, since the verse is introducing the topic of breath control, the more general sense of the singular is appropriate.
atha prāṇāyāmaḥ--
athāsane dṛḍhe yogī vaśī hitamitāśanaḥ |
gurūpadiṣṭamārgeṇa prānāyāmān samabhyaset ||
atha nāḍīśuddhiḥ--
tathā coktaṃ yogacandrikāyām--
athāsane dṛḍhībhūte vaśī hitamitāśanaḥ |
gurūpadiṣṭamārgeṇa prānāyāmān samabhyaset ||
चले वाते चलं सर्वं निश्चले निश्चलं तथा ।
योगी स्थाणुत्वमाप्नोति ततो वायुनिबन्धनात् ॥
cale vāte calaṃ sarvaṃ niścale niścalaṃ tathā /
yogī sthāṇutvam āpnoti tato vāyunibandhanāt //
In the second verse quarter, most of the α, β and γ manuscripts have dṛḍhabandhanaṃ instead of the reading we have adopted, niścalaṃ tathā, which is supported by some β, δ and η manuscripts, and also the source text (i.e. the Vivekamārtaṇḍa) and testimonia. The reading dṛḍhabandhanaṃ appears to be a dittographical error and does not make sense when read with either sarvaṃ (α) or cittaṃ (γ). As noted by Brahmānanda, in addition to its primary meaning of immobility, sthāṇutvam can also mean the state of being Śiva, for whom Sthāṇu is another name. In the fourth verse quarter, most witnesses have something similar to either vāyuṃ nibandhayet and vāyuṃ nirodhayet, which are likely to have arisen through confusion with 2.3d. The reading we have adopted (vāyu-nibandhanāt) makes better sense with the finite verb in the second verse quarter.
cale vāte calaṃ sarvaṃ niścale niścalaṃ tathā |
yogī sthāṇutvam āpnoti tato vāyunibandhanāt ||
71d vāyunibandhanāt ] VT; vāyuṃ nibaṃdhayet A, vāyuṃ nirundhayet G
citte calati saṃsāro ’cale mokṣaḥ prajāyate |
tasmāc cittaṃ sthirīkuryād audāsīnyaparāyaṇaḥ ||
cale vāte calaṃ cittaṃ niścale niścalaṃ tathā |
yogī sthāṇutvam āpnoti tato vāyuṃ nirundhayet ||
tathā ca skandapurāṇe--
cale vāte calaṃ cittaṃ niścalaṃ niścale tathā |
yogī sthāṇutvam āpnoti tato vāyuṃ nirodhayet ||
यावद्वायुः स्थितो देहे तावज्जीवितमुच्यते ।
मरणं तस्य निष्क्रान्तिस्ततो वायुं निरुन्धयेत् ॥
yāvad vāyuḥ sthito dehe tāvaj jīvitam ucyate /
maraṇaṃ tasya niṣkrāntis tato vāyuṃ nirundhayet //
We believe that nirundhayet was probably the original reading and that it was changed to the more correct form of nirodhayet and, in some cases, confused with the final verse quarter of the previous verse and changed to nibandhanāt (α) or nibandhayet (β).
yāvad vāyuḥ sthito dehe tāvaj jīvitam ucyate |
maraṇaṃ tasya niḥkrāntau tato vāyuṃ nirodhayet ||
72a sthito ] sthiro A 72b jīvitam ] VAGBGPT; jīvanam GLGPk 72c niṣkrāntau ] VTA; niḥkrāṃtaṃ GBGP, niṣkrāntis GLGPk 72d vāyuṃ nirodhayet ] T; vāyunibandhanāt V, vāyuṃ nibandhayet ATvl, vāyuṃ nirundhayet G
vyāpārād yasya ceṣṭante śārīrāḥ pañca vāyavaḥ ||
prāṇāpānād ayas te tu bhinnā vṛtter na vastutaḥ |
vṛttiṃ leśān nigadato bharadvāja nibodha me ||
vṛttiḥ praṇayanaṃ nāma yat taj jīvanam ucyate |
yāvad vāyuḥ sthito dehe tāvaj jīvitam ucyate |
maraṇaṃ tasya niṣkrāntis tato vāyuṃ nirodhayet ||
yāvad vāyuḥ sthito dehe tāvad dehaṃ na muñcati |
maraṇaṃ tasya niṣkrāntis tato vāyuṃ nirundhayet ||
मलाकुलासु नाडीषु मारुतो नैव मध्यगः ।
कथं स्यादुन्मनीभावः कायसिद्धिः कथं भवेत् ॥
malākulāsu nāḍīṣu māruto naiva madhyagaḥ /
kathaṃ syād unmanībhāvaḥ kāyasiddhiḥ kathaṃ bhavet //
malākulāsu nāḍīṣu māruto naiva madhyagaḥ |
kathaṃ syād unmanībhāvaḥ kāyasiddhiḥ kathaṃ bhavet ||
शुद्धिमेति यदा सर्वं नाडीचक्रं मलाकुलम् ।
तदैव जायते योगी प्राणसंग्रहणे क्षमः ॥
śuddhim eti yadā sarvaṃ nāḍīcakraṃ malākulam /
tadaiva jāyate yogī prāṇasaṃgrahaṇe kṣamaḥ //
śuddhim eti yadā sarvaṃ nāḍīcakraṃ malākulam |
tadaiva jāyate yogī prāṇasaṃgrahaṇe kṣamaḥ ||
skandapurāṇe--
śuddhim eti yadā sarvaṃ nāḍīcakraṃ malākulam |
tadaiva jāyate yogī kṣamaḥ prāṇanibandhane ||
śuddhim eti yadā sarvaṃ nāḍīcakraṃ malākulam |
tadaiva jāyate yogī prāṇasaṃgrahaṇe kṣamaḥ ||
प्राणाभ्यासं ततः कुर्यान् नित्यं सात्त्विकया धिया ।
यथा सुषुम्णा सुस्वस्था मलाः शोषं प्रयान्ति च ॥
prāṇābhyāsaṃ tataḥ kuryān nityaṃ sāttvikayā dhiyā /
yathā suṣumṇā susvasthā malāḥ śoṣaṃ prayānti ca //
prāṇābhyāsas tataḥ kāryo nityaṃ sattvāsthayā dhiyā |
suṣumnāṃ layate cittaṃ na ca vāyuḥ pradhāvati ||
prāṇāyāmaṃ tataḥ kuryān nityaṃ sāttvikayā dhiyā |
suṣumnā cāntarālasthā malāḥ śoṣaṃ prayānti ca ||
बद्धपद्मासनो योगी प्राणं चन्द्रेण पूरयेत् ।
धारयित्वा यथाशक्त्या पुनः सूर्येण रेचयेत् ॥
baddhapadmāsano yogī prāṇaṃ candreṇa pūrayet /
dhārayitvā yathāśaktyā punaḥ sūryeṇa recayet //
baddhapadmāsano yogī prāṇaṃ candreṇa pūrayet |
dhārayitvā yathāśakti bhūyaḥ sūryeṇa recayet ||
77c yathāśakti ] GT; yathāśaktyā VA 77d bhūyaḥ ] VAG; punaḥ T
baddhapadmāsano yogī prāṇaṃ candreṇa pūrayet |
baddhapadmāsano yogī prāṇaṃ candreṇa pūrayet |
dhārayitvā yathāśakti bhūyaḥ sūryeṇa recayet ||
प्राणं सूर्येण चाकृष्य पूरयेदुदरं शनैः ।
विधिवत्कुम्भकं कृत्वा पुनश्चन्द्रेण रेचयेत् ॥
prāṇaṃ sūryeṇa cākṛṣya pūrayed udaraṃ śanaiḥ /
vidhivat kumbhakaṃ kṛtvā punaś candreṇa recayet //
prāṇaṃ sūryeṇa cākṛṣya pūrayed udaraṃ śanaiḥ |
vidhivat kuṃbhakaṃ kṛtvā punaś candreṇa recayet ||
prāṇaṃ sūryeṇa cākṛṣya pūrayed udaraṃ śanaiḥ |
vidhivat kumbhakaṃ kṛtvā punaś candreṇa recayet||
prāṇaṃ sūryeṇa cākṛṣya pūrayed udaraṃ śanaiḥ |
kumbhayitvā vidhānena bhūyaś candreṇa recayet ||
येन त्यजेत्तेन पीत्वा धारयेदविरोधतः ।
रेचयेच्च ततोऽन्येन शनैरेव न वेगतः ॥
yena tyajet tena pītvā dhārayed avirodhataḥ /
recayec ca tato’nyena śanair eva na vegataḥ //
The meaning of avirodhataḥ (‘without harm/discomfort’) makes better sense in this context than anirodhataḥ (‘without cessation’). One might try to construe anirodhataḥ as ‘without stopping the breath,’ but verse 2.7 clearly states that the breath should be held as long as possible (yathāśakti). According to the apparatus of the critical edition of the Haṭharatnāvalī, avirodhataḥ is well-attested for the parallel hemistich. Furthermore, avirodhata is attested, as well as virodhahīna, in a passage of the Haṭhatattvakaumudī (36.6–9) that appears to have been loosely based on Haṭhapradīpikā 2.7–9:
prāṇāyāme padmapīṭhe svadakṣāṃ-
guṣṭhenādau sanniruddhyendunāḍīm |
vāyuṃ nātidrāk śanair nātiyuktyā
vyākṛṣyordhvaṃ pūrayet svodarānte ||
yathā svaśaktyā laghu dhārayitvā
nāḍyā tataḥ piṅgalayā virecayet |
virodhahīnaṃ viratītamadhyaṃ
hṛdā sthireṇābhyasanaṃ muniś caret ||
yena tyajet tena virodhahīnaṃ
dhṛtvā purānyena virecayec chanaiḥ |
yānty evam abhyāsaratasya puṃsaḥ
sthitiṃ svalakṣye calacittavṛttayaḥ ||
yathāśaktyākṛṣya khagaṃ pūrayed udaraṃ śanaiḥ |
yathāśaktyā dhṛtaṃ paścād recayed avirodhataḥ ||
yathāśaktyāvirodhena tataḥ kuryāc ca kumbham |
punas tyajet piṅgalayā śanair eva na vegataḥ ||
yena tyajet tenāpūrya dhārayed avirodhataḥ ||
85d avirodhataḥ ] anirodhataḥ P
प्राणं चेदिडया पिबेन्नियमितं भूयोऽन्यया रेचयेत्
पीत्वा पिङ्गलया समीरणमथो बद्ध्वा त्यजेद्वामया ।
सूर्याचन्द्रमसोरनेन विधिना बिम्बद्वयं ध्यायतां
शुद्धा नाडिगणा भवन्ति यमिनां मासत्रयादूर्ध्वतः ॥
prāṇaṃ ced iḍayā piben niyamitaṃ bhūyo’nyayā recayet
pītvā piṅgalayā samīraṇam atho baddhvā tyajed vāmayā /
sūryācandramasor anena vidhinā bimbadvayaṃ dhyāyatāṃ
śuddhā nāḍigaṇā bhavanti yamināṃ māsatrayād ūrdhvataḥ //
prāṇaṃ ced iḍayā pibet niyamitaṃ bhūyo ’nyayā recayet
pītvā piṅgalayā samīraṇam alaṃ baddhvā tyajed vāmayā |
sūryācandramasor anena vidhinā bimbadvayaṃ dhyāyatāṃ
śuddhā nāḍigaṇā bhavanti yaminā māsatrayād ūrdhvataḥ ||
haṭhayoge ’pi—
prāṇaṃ ced iḍayā piben niyamito bhūyo ’nyayā recayet
pītvā piṅgalayā samīraṇam atho baddhvā tyajed vāmayā |
sūryācandramasor anena vidhinā bimbadvayaṃ dhyāyatām
śuddhā nāḍigaṇā bhavanti yamināṃ māsatrayād ūrdhvataḥ ||
prāṇaṃ ced iḍayā piben niyamitaṃ bhūyo ’nyayā recayet
pītvā piṅgalayā samīraṇaṃ atho baddhvā tyajed vāmayā |
sūryācandramasor anena vidhinā bimbadvayaṃ dhyāyatāṃ
śuddhā nāḍigaṇā bhavanti yamināṃ māsatrayād ūrdhvataḥ ||
prāṇaṃ ced iḍayā pibet parimitaṃ bhūyo ’nyayā recayet
pītvā piṅgalayā samīraṇam amalaṃ baddhvā tyajed vāmayā |
sūryācandramasor anena vidhinā bimbadvayaṃ dhyāyatām
śuddhā nāḍigaṇā bhavanti yamināṃ māsatrayād ūrdhvataḥ ||
प्रातर्मध्यन्दिने सायमर्धरात्रे च कुम्भकान् ।
शनैरशीतिपर्यन्तं चतुर्वारं समभ्यसेत् ॥*
prātar madhyandine sāyam ardharātre ca kumbhakān /
śanair aśītiparyantaṃ caturvāraṃ samabhyaset //*
This verse is summarizing the following passage in the Dattātreyayogaśāstra (63cd--65ab):
evaṃ prātaḥ samāsīnaḥ kuryād viṃśati kumbhakān || 63 ||
evaṃ madhyāhnasamaye kuryād viṃśati kumbhakān |
evaṃ sāyaṃ prakurvīta punar viṃśati kumbhakān || 64 ||
evam evārdharātre ’pi kuryād viṃśati kumbhakān |
prātar madhyadine sāyam ardharātre ca kumbhakān ||
śanair aśītiparyantaṃ caturvāraṃ samabhyaset ||
prātar madhyaṃ dine sāyam ardharātre ca kumbhakān ||
śanair aśītiparyantaṃ caturvāraṃ samabhyaset ||
कनीयसि भवेत्स्वेदः कम्पो भवति मध्यमे ।
उत्तिष्ठत्युत्तमे प्राणरोधे पद्मासने मुहुः ॥
kanīyasi bhavet svedaḥ kampo bhavati madhyame /
uttiṣṭhaty uttame prāṇarodhe padmāsane muhuḥ //
The manuscript readings diverge greatly in the second hemistich. In the third verse quarter, all of the manuscripts have prāṇa in some form (instead of deha in the Vivekamārtaṇḍa). α and some of the β, ε and η manuscripts seem to be stating that it is padmāsana that rises up again and again in the highest stage of holding the breath (uttiṣṭhaty uttame prāṇarodhe padmāsanaṃ muhuḥ). We have adopted a similar reading but with padmāsane (β2, δ1 and δ3, and η2) because it makes better sense that the yogi rises up while seated in lotus pose. Another version is seen in η2 (and others), which appears to say that the breaths rise up again and again when one is seated in the lotus pose (uttiṣṭhanty uttame prāṇā baddhe padmāsane muhuḥ). However, the verse is about the external signs that might arise in prāṇāyāma rather than internal processes. Such confusion has arisen because the verse was taken from the Vivekamārtaṇḍa without its context, which is a classification of different levels of prāṇāyāma, so Svātmārāma needed to include prāṇarodhe meaning prāṇāyāma in order for the different adjectives to have something with which to agree, and he did so despite the infelicity of prāṇarodhe crossing the pāda break.
प्राणायामस्य मानं तु मात्राद्वादशकं स्मृतम्
नीचो द्वादशमात्रस्तु सकृदुद्ग्धात ईरितः
मध्यमस्तु द्विरुद्घातश्चतुर्विंशतिमात्रकः
मुख्यस्तु यस्त्रिरुद्घातः षट्त्रिंशन्मात्र उच्यते
प्रस्वेदकम्पनोत्थानजनकश्च यथाक्रमम्
आनन्दो जायते चात्र निद्रा घूर्णिस्तथैव च
रोमाञ्चो ध्वनिसंवित्तिरङ्गमोटनकम्पनम्
भ्रमणस्वेदजल्पाद्यं संविन्मूर्च्छा जयेद्यदा
तदोत्तम इति प्रोक्तः प्राणायामः सुशोभन इति
अधमे द्वादश प्रोक्ता मध्यमे द्विगुणाः स्मृताः
उत्तमे त्रिगुणा मात्राः प्राणायामे द्विजोत्तमैः??
प्राणेनोत्सार्यमाणेन अपानः पीड्यते यदा
गत्वा चोर्ध्वं निवर्तेत एतदुद्द्घातलक्षणम्
अङ्गुष्ठाङ्गुलिमोक्षं त्रिस्त्रिर्जानुपरिमार्जनम्
तालत्रयमपि प्राज्ञा मात्रासंज्ञां प्रचक्षते
एकश्वासमयी मात्रा प्राणायामे निगद्यते
जानुं प्रदक्षिणीकुर्यान्न द्रुतं न विलम्बितम्
प्रदद्याच्छोटिकां यावत्तावन्मात्रेति गीयते
अङ्गुष्ठाङ्गुलिमोक्षं च जानोश्च परिमार्जनम्
प्रदद्याच्छोटिकामेकां मात्रा सङ्ख्यायते तदा
प्राणायाम एवाभ्यासक्रमेण वर्धमानः प्रत्याहारधारणाध्यानसमाधिशब्दैरुच्यत इति.
प्राणायामद्विषट्केन प्रत्याहार उदाहृतः
प्रत्याहारद्विषट्केन धारणा परिकीर्तिता
भवेदीश्वरसङ्गत्यै ध्यानं द्वादशधारणम्
ध्यानद्वादशकेनैव समाधिरभिधीयते
यत्समाधौ परं ज्योतिरनन्तं स्वप्रकाशकम्
तस्मिन्दृष्टे क्रियाकाण्डं यातायातं निवर्तते इति
धारणा पञ्चनाडीभिर्ध्यानं स्यात्षष्ठिनाडिकम्
दिनद्वादशकेन स्यात्समाधिः प्राणसंयमादिति च
prāṇāyāmasya mānaṃ tu mātrādvādaśakaṃ smṛtam
nīco dvādaśamātras tu sakṛd udgdhāta īritaḥ
madhyamas tu dvirudghātaś caturviṃśatimātrakaḥ
mukhyas tu yas trirudghātaḥ ṣaṭtriṃśanmātra ucyate
prasvedakampanotthānajanakaś ca yathākramam
ānando jāyate cātra nidrā ghūrṇis tathaiva ca
romāñco dhvanisaṃvittir aṅgamoṭanakampanam
bhramaṇasvedajalpādyaṃ saṃvinmūrcchā jayed yadā
tadottama iti proktaḥ prāṇāyāmaḥ suśobhana iti
adhame dvādaśa proktā madhyame dviguṇāḥ smṛtāḥ
uttame triguṇā mātrāḥ prāṇāyāme dvijottamaiḥ??
prāṇenotsāryamāṇena apānaḥ pīḍyate yadā
gatvā cordhvaṃ nivarteta etad uddghātalakṣaṇam
aṅguṣṭhāṅgulimokṣaṃ tris trir jānuparimārjanam
tālatrayam api prājñā mātrāsaṃjñāṃ pracakṣate
ekaśvāsamayī mātrā prāṇāyāme nigadyate
jānuṃ pradakṣiṇīkuryān na drutaṃ na vilambitam
pradadyāc choṭikāṃ yāvat tāvan mātreti gīyate
aṅguṣṭhāṅgulimokṣaṃ ca jānoś ca parimārjanam
pradadyāc choṭikām ekāṃ mātrā saṅkhyāyate tadā
prāṇāyāma evābhyāsakrameṇa vardhamānaḥ pratyāhāradhāraṇādhyānasamādhiśabdair ucyata iti.
prāṇāyāmadviṣaṭkena pratyāhāra udāhṛtaḥ
pratyāhāradviṣaṭkena dhāraṇā parikīrtitā
bhaved īśvarasaṅgatyai dhyānaṃ dvādaśadhāraṇam
dhyānadvādaśakenaiva samādhir abhidhīyate
yat samādhau paraṃ jyotir anantaṃ svaprakāśakam
tasmin dṛṣṭe kriyākāṇḍaṃ yātāyātaṃ nivartate iti
dhāraṇā pañcanāḍībhir dhyānaṃ syāt ṣaṣṭhināḍikam
dinadvādaśakena syāt samādhiḥ prāṇasaṃyamād iti ca
adhame ca ghano gharmaḥ kampo bhavati madhyame |
uttiṣṭhaty uttame deho baddhapadmāsano muhuḥ ||
87c uttiṣṭhaty uttame deho ] T; uttiṣṭhaty uttamo deho V, uttame nu guṇam āpnoti A, uttame sthāṇum āpnoti GB, uttame sthānam āpnoti GL, uttiṣṭhaṃty uttame prāṇā GP 87d baddhapadmāsano muhuḥ ] VT; tato vāyu nibandhayet A, tato vāyuṃ nirundhayet GBGL, vaddhapadmāsane muhūḥ GP
kanīyasi bhavet svedaḥ kampo bhavati madhyame |
uttiṣṭhaty uttame prāṇarodhe padmāsane muhuḥ ||
kanīyasi bhavet svedaḥ kampo bhavati madhyame |
uttiṣṭhaty uttame prāṇarodhe padmāsanasthitaḥ ||
जलेन श्रमजातेन गात्रमर्दनमाचरेत् ।
दृढता लघुता चापि तेन गात्रस्य जायते ॥
jalena śramajātena gātramardanam ācaret /
dṛḍhatā laghutā cāpi tena gātrasya jāyate //
Śivasaṃhitā 3.46 adds that if this practice is not done, the body’s constituents (dhātus) are lost.
prasvedo jāyate pūrvaṃ mardanaṃ tena kārayet |
tato ’tidhāraṇād vāyoḥ krameṇaiva śanaiḥ śanaiḥ ||
jalena śramajātena aṅgamardanam ācaret |
dṛḍhatā laghutā cāpi tathā gātrasya jāyate || 3.89 ||
svedaḥ saṃjāyate dehe yoginaḥ prathamodyame |
yadā saṃjāyate svedo mardanaṃ kārayet sudhīḥ |
anyathā vigrahe dhātur naṣṭo bhavati yoginaḥ ||
jalena śramajātena gātramardanam ācaret |
dṛḍhatā laghutā cāpi tena gātrasya jāyate ||
अभ्यासकाले प्रथमे शस्तं क्षीराज्यभोजनम् ।
ततोऽभ्यासे दृढीभूते न तादृङ्नियमग्रहः ॥
abhyāsakāle prathame śastaṃ kṣīrājyabhojanam /
tato’bhyāse dṛḍhībhūte na tādṛṅniyamagrahaḥ //
abhyāsakāle prathamaṃ kuryāt kṣīrājyabhojanam
tato’bhyāse sthirībhūte na tādṛṅniyamagrahaḥ 3.43
abhyāsakāle prathame śastaṃ kṣīrādibhojanam |
tato ’bhyāse dṛḍhībhūte na tāvan niyamagrahaḥ ||
abhyāsakāle prathame śastaṃ kṣīrādibhojanam |
tato ’bhyāse dṛḍhībhūte na tādṛṅniyamāgrahaḥ ||
यथा सिंहो गजो व्याघ्रो भवेद्द्वश्यःvaśya (α3)शनैः शनैः ।
तथैव सेवितो वायुर् अन्यथा हन्ति साधकम् ॥
yathā siṃho gajo vyāghro bhavedd vaśyaḥvaśya (α3)śanaiḥ śanaiḥ /
tathaiva sevito vāyur anyathā hanti sādhakam //
The second hemistich of this verse has been rewritten to express the same idea (and simile) as that found in Viveka-mārtaṇḍa 101, but the author of the Viveka-mārtaṇḍa expresses it more clearly.
yathā siṃho gajo vyāghro bhaved vaśyaḥ śanaiḥ śānaiḥ |
anyathā hanti yantāraṃ tathā vāyur asevitaḥ ||
yathā siṃho gajo vyāghro bhaved vaśyaḥ śanaiḥ śanaiḥ |
tathaiva sevito vāyur bhaved vaśyaḥ śanaiḥ śanaiḥ ||
yathā siṃho gajo vyāghro bhaved vaśyaḥ śanaiḥ śanaiḥ |
tathaiva sevito vāyur bhaved vaśyaḥ śanaiḥ śanaiḥ ||
प्राणायामेन युक्तेन सर्वरोगक्षयो भवेत् ।
अयुक्ताभ्यासयोगेन सर्वरोगसमुद्भवः ॥
prāṇāyāmena yuktena sarvarogakṣayo bhavet /
ayuktābhyāsayogena sarvarogasamudbhavaḥ //
prāṇāyāmena yuktena sarvarogakṣayo bhavet |
ayuktābhyāsayogena sarvarogasamudbhavaḥ ||
prāṇāyāmena yuktena sarvarogakṣayo bhavet |
ayuktābhyāsayogena sarvarogasamudbhavaḥ ||
prāṇāyāmena yuktena sarvavyādhikṣayo bhavet |
ayuktābhyāsayogena sarvavyādhisamudbhavaḥ ||
prāṇāyāmena yuktena sarvarogasya saṃkṣayaḥ |
ayuktābhyāsayogena sarvarogasya sambhavaḥ ||
हिक्का श्वासश्च कासश्च शिरःकर्णाक्षिवेदनाः ।
भवन्ति विविधा दोषाः पवनस्य व्यतिक्रमात् ॥
hikkā śvāsaś ca kāsaś ca śiraḥkarṇākṣivedanāḥ /
bhavanti vividhā doṣāḥ pavanasya vyatikramāt //
This verse has parallels in verses on the illnesses caused by incorrect breathing in earlier Śaiva works, two examples of which are: Śivadharmottara 10.124cd–125
hikkāśvāsapratiśyāyaḥ karṇadantākṣivedanāḥ ||
mūkatā jaḍatā kāsaḥ śirorogaḥ śramakṣaraḥ |
ityevamādayo doṣā jāyante vyutkrameṇa tu ||
kaphakoṣṭhe yadā vāyur granthir bhūtvāvatiṣṭhate |
hṛllāsahikkikāśvāsaśiraḥśūlādayo rujāḥ ||
jāyante dhātuvaiṣamyāt tadā kuryāt pratikriyāṃ |
hikkā śvāsaś ca kāsaś ca śiraḥkarṇākṣivedanā |
bhavanti vividhā doṣāḥ pavanasya vyatikramāt ||
hikkā śvāsaś ca kāsaś ca śiraḥkarṇākṣivedanāḥ |
bhavanti vividhā rogāḥ pavanasya vyatikramāt ||
hikkā śvāsaś ca kāsaś ca śiraḥkarṇākṣivedanāḥ |
bhavanti vividhā rogāḥ pavanasya vyatikramāt ||
hikkā śvāsas tathā kāsaḥ śiraḥkarṇākṣivedanā |
bhavanti vividhā rogāḥ pavanasya vyatikramāt ||
युक्तं युक्तं त्यजेद्वायुं युक्तं युक्तं च पूरयेत् ।
युक्तं युक्तं च बध्नीयाद् एवं शुद्धिमवाप्नुयात् ॥
yuktaṃ yuktaṃ tyajed vāyuṃ yuktaṃ yuktaṃ ca pūrayet /
yuktaṃ yuktaṃ ca badhnīyād evaṃ śuddhim avāpnuyāt //
yuktaṃ yuktaṃ tyajed vāyuṃ yuktaṃ yuktaṃ ca pūrayet |
yuktaṃ yuktaṃ ca badhnīyād evaṃ siddhim avāpnuyāt ||
yuktaṃ yuktaṃ tyajed vāyuṃ yuktaṃ yuktaṃ prapūrayet |
yuktaṃ yuktaṃ ca badhnīyād evaṃ siddhim avāpnuyāt ||
yuktaṃ yuktaṃ tyajed vāyuṃ yuktaṃ yuktaṃ ca pūrayet |
yuktaṃ yuktaṃ ca badhnīyād itthaṃ siddhyati yogavit ||
yuktaṃ yuktaṃ tyajed vāyuṃ yuktaṃ yuktaṃ tu pūrayet |
yuktaṃ yuktaṃ tu badhnīyād evaṃ siddhim avāpnuyāt ||
यदा तु नाडीशुद्धिः स्यात् तदा चिह्नानि बाह्यतः ।
कायस्य कृशता कान्तिस्तथा जायेत निश्चितम् ॥
yadā tu nāḍīśuddhiḥ syāt tadā cihnāni bāhyataḥ /
kāyasya kṛśatā kāntis tathā jāyeta niścitam //
The idea that prāṇāyāma is done to purify the channels (nāḍī) can be found in discussions of prāṇāyāma in early Śaiva tantras. For example, the Nayasūtra of the Niśvāsatattvasaṃhitā (4.110) and the Svacchandatantra (7.294cd–7.295ab) specifically refer to purifying the channels by inhaling through the left nostril and exhaling through the right, as stated in the latter:
apasavyena pūryeta savyenaiva virecayet |
nāḍīsaṃśodhanaṃ caitan mokṣamārgapathasya ca ||
yadā tu nāḍiśuddhiḥ syāt tadā cihnāni bāhyataḥ ||
jāyante yogino dehe tāni vakṣyāmy aśeṣataḥ |
śarīralaghutā dīptir jaṭharāgnivivardhanam ||
kṛśatvaṃ ca śarīrasya tadā jāyeta niścitam |
yadā tu nāḍīśuddhiḥ syāt tadā cihnāni bāhyataḥ |
kāyasya kṛśatā kāntir jāyate tasya niścitam ||
yadā nāḍīviśuddhiḥ syāt tadā cintānirākṛtā |
kāyasya kṛśatā kāntis tadā jāyeta niścitam ||
यथेष्टं धारणं वायोर् अनलस्य प्रदीपनम् ।
नादाभिव्यक्तिरारोग्यं जायते नाडिशोधनात्
yatheṣṭaṃ dhāraṇaṃ vāyor analasya pradīpanam /
nādābhivyaktir ārogyaṃ jāyate nāḍiśodhanāt
Similar signs (cihna) arising from the purification of the channels are mentioned in the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā (2.68--69) and subsequent works related to it:
nāḍīśuddhim avāpnoti pṛthak cihnopalakṣitām |
śarīralaghutā dīptir jaṭharāgnivivardhanam ||
nādābhivyaktir ity etac cihnaṃ tacchuddhisūcakam |
yāvad etāni saṃpaśyet tāvad evaṃ samācaret ||
yatheṣṭaṃ dhāraṇāṃ vāyor analasya pradīpanam |
nādābhivyaktir ārogyaṃ jāyate nāḍīśodhanāt ||
yatheṣṭaṃ dhāraṇaṃ vāyor analasya pradīpanam |
nādābhivyaktir ārogyaṃ jāyate nāḍiśodhanāt ||
yatheṣṭaṃ dhāraṇaṃ vāyor analasya pradīpanam |
nādābhivyaktir ārogyaṃ bhaven nāḍīviśodhanāt ||
yatheṣṭaṃ dhāraṇaṃ vāyor analasya pradīpanam |
nādābhivyaktir ārogyaṃ jāyate nāḍīśodhanāt ||
मेदःश्लेष्माधिकः पूर्वं षट्कर्माणि समाचरेत् ।
अन्यस्तु नाचरेत्तानि दोषाणां समभावतः ॥
medaḥśleṣmādhikaḥ pūrvaṃ ṣaṭ karmāṇi samācaret /
anyas tu nācaret tāni doṣāṇāṃ samabhāvataḥ //
Manuscripts of the delta group, as well as η2 and ε3, also have the valid readings of medaḥśleṣmādināśārthaṃ and anyathā in the first and third verse quarters, respectively. This version of the verse states that one should practise the six therapeutic interventions to remove fat, phlegm and the like, otherwise one should not practise them when the humours are in balance. However, the pūrvam (`first’), which is attested in two α manuscripts, as well as manuscripts of the β and γ groups, fits the context of these interventions being preliminary practices for prāṇāyāma.
medaḥśleṣmanivṛtyarthaṃ ṣaṭkarmāṇi samācaret |
anyathā nācaret tāni doṣāṇāṃ samatā yataḥ ||
medaślemādisampūrṇaḥ ṣaṭkarmāṇi samācaret |
anyas tu nācaret tāni doṣāṇāṃ samabhāgikaḥ ||
धौतिर्बस्तिस्तथा नेतिस्त्राटकं नौलिकं तथा ।
कपालभाती चैतानि षट्कर्माणि प्रचक्षते ॥
dhautir bastis tathā netis trāṭakaṃ naulikaṃ tathā /
kapālabhātī caitāni ṣaṭ karmāṇi pracakṣate //
Manuscripts across all the groups contain many different spellings of the names of these techniques. As well as the requirements of the metre, the spellings we have favoured take into account the occurrences of each name in subsequent verses.
haṭhapradīpikāyām-
dhautir bastis tathā netis trāṭakaṃ naulikaṃ tathā |
kapālabhrāntir etāni ṣaṭkarmāṇi pracakṣate ||
atha ṣaṭkarmāṇi | haṭhapradīpikāyām ||
dhautī bastī tathā netī trāṭakaṃ naulikaṃ tathā |
kapālabhātī caitāni ṣaṭkarmāṇi pracakṣate ||
dhautir bastiś ca netiś ca trāṭakaṃ naulikaṃ tathā |
kapālabhāti caitāni ṣaṭkarmāṇi pracakṣate ||
कर्मषट्कमिदं गोप्यं घटशोधनकारकम् ।
विचित्रगुणसन्धायि पूज्यते योगिपुङ्गवैः ॥
karmaṣaṭkam idaṃ gopyaṃ ghaṭaśodhanakārakam /
vicitraguṇasandhāyi pūjyate yogipuṅgavaiḥ //
karmāṣṭakam idaṃ gopyaṃ ghaṭaśodhanakārakam |
kasya cin naiva vaktavyaṃ kulastrīsurataṃ yathā ||
karmaṣaṭkam idaṃ gopyaṃ ghaṭaśodhanakārakam |
vicitraguṇasaṃdhāyi pūjyate yogipuṃgavaiḥ ||
karmaṣaṭkam idaṃ gopyaṃ ghaṭaśodhanakāraṇam |
vicitraguṇasandhāyī kriyate yogibhiḥ sadā ||
तत्र धौतिः ।
चतुरङ्गुलविस्तारं* सिक्तं वस्त्रं शनैर्ग्रसेत् ।
ततः प्रत्याहरेच्चैतदुद्गारं धौतिकर्म तत् ॥
tatra dhautiḥ /
caturaṅgulavistāraṃ* siktaṃ vastraṃ śanair graset /
tataḥ pratyāharec caitad udgāraṃ dhautikarma tat //
The manuscripts contain many different readings for the fourth pāda. α3 and η1 have the term udgāraṃ, which rarely occurs in yoga texts. The basic meaning of udgāra is the act of discharging something from the mouth, which fits the context of dhauti in so far as the cloth swallowed into the stomach is drawn back out through the mouth. Some of the other readings, such as uditaṃ, utthānaṃ, etc., appear to be mistakes or patches that arose possibly because udgāra is not normally neuter but masculine. Many manuscripts have added verse quarters on the length of the cloth (hastapañcadaśena tu) and doing the practice according to the guru’s teachings (gurūpadiṣṭa-mārgeṇa). These additional comments are absent in the α, γ and ε groups. Furthermore, the compound hastapañcadaśena does not seem to fit the syntax of the sentence. The other addition, on the guru’s teaching, is a cliché that is probably being used here as a verse filler.
atha dhautiḥ--
viṃśaddhastapramāṇena dhautavastraṃ sudīrghitam |
caturaṅgulavistāraṃ siktaṃ caiva śanaiḥ graset ||
tataḥ pratyāharec caitad abhyāsād dhautir ucyate |
atha dhautī |
caturaṅgulavistāraṃ siktaṃ vastraṃ śanair graset |
punaḥ pratyāhared etad abhyāsād dhautikarmavit ||
caturaṃgulavistāraṃ siktaṃ vastraṃ śanair graset |
tataḥ pratyāharec caitad ākṣālaṃ dhautikarma tat ||
atha dhautī |
mṛdulaṃ dhavalaṃ śuddhaṃ caturaṅgulavistṛtam |
tithihastamitāyāmaṃ dhautīvastrasya lakṣaṇam ||
toyasiktaṃ grased vastraṃ ghrāṇābhyāṃ vāyum utsṛjan |
śanaiḥ sanais tu sakalaṃ punaḥ pratyāharec chanaiḥ |
dhautīkarmedam ākhyātaṃ yatra gaṅgādhidaivatam ||
कासश्वासप्लीहकुष्ठं कफरोगाश्च विंशतिः ।
धौतिकर्मप्रभावेन धावन्त्येव न संशयः ॥
kāsaśvāsaplīhakuṣṭhaṃ kapharogāś ca viṃśatiḥ /
dhautikarmaprabhāvena dhāvanty eva na saṃśayaḥ //
The verb dhāvanti is a play on words, using a different root dhāv, “run”, from that of dhauti, which is derived from dhāv, “purify”. Twenty phlegmatic diseases are enumerated in the Carakasaṃhitā, sūtrasthāna 20.17, a chapter on major diseases (mahāroga).
kāsaśvāsaplīhakuṣṭhaṃ kapharogāś ca viṃśatiḥ |
dhautikarmaprabhāvena dhāvanty eva na saṃśayaḥ ||
kāsaśvāsaplīhakuṣṭhaṃ kapharogāś ca vidradhiḥ |
dhautīkarmaprabhāvena prayānty eva na saṃśayaḥ ||
plīhā śvāsaś ca kuṣṭhaṃ ca kapharogāś ca viṃśatiḥ |
dhautikarmaprabhāvena gacchanty eva na saṃśayaḥ ||
kāsasvāsaplīhakuṣṭhādināśam
vahner māndyaṃ viṃśatiḥ śleṣarogān |
dūrīkuryāt karṇabādhir tam uccair
dhautīkarma praditaṃ śaṅkareṇa ||
अथ बस्तिकर्म ।
नाभिदघ्ने जले पायुन्यस्तनालोत्कटासनः ।
आधाराकुञ्चनं कुर्यात् पखालं बस्तिकर्म तत् ॥
atha bastikarma /
nābhidaghne jale pāyunyastanālotkaṭāsanaḥ /
ādhārākuñcanaṃ kuryāt pakhālaṃ bastikarma tat //
The reading pakhālaṃ that we have adopted in the fourth pāda is found in βω and α1 and reflects vernacular usage as found in the old Hindi Aṣṭāṅgayoga of Caraṇadāsa (6.71ab). Some other witnesses have the Sanskritised form prakṣālaṃ, which is very rare in Sanskrit sources, while others have the more common kṣālanaṃ.
nābhidaghne jale sthitvā pāyunāle sthitāṅguliḥ |
cakrimārgeṇa jaṭharaṃ pāyunālena pūrayet ||
vicitrakaraṇīm kṛtvā nirbhītaḥ recayej jalam |
yāvad balaṃ prapūryaiva kṣaṇaṃ sthitvā virecayet ||
ghaṭītrayaṃ na bhoktavyaṃ bastim abhyasatā dhruvam |
nivātabhūmau santiṣṭhed vaśī hitamitāśanaḥ ||
atha vastī |
nābhidaghne jale pāyunyastanālotkaṭāsanaḥ |
ādhārākuñcanaṃ kuryād abhyāsād vastikarmavit ||
nābhidaghne jale pāyau nyastanālotkaṭāsanaḥ |
ādhārā kuñcanaṃ kuryāt kṣālanaṃ bastikarma tat ||
naulīkriyāsusaṃpannas tyaktamūtramalaḥ sudhīḥ |
jānudaghne jale kuryād bastiṃ bastividhānavit ||
गुल्मप्लीहोदरं चापि वातपित्तकफोद्भवाः ।
बस्तिकर्मप्रभावेन वार्यन्ते सकलामयाः ॥
gulmaplīhodaraṃ cāpi vātapittakaphodbhavāḥ /
bastikarmaprabhāvena vāryante sakalāmayāḥ //
We have assumed that the compound gulmaplīhodara is referring generally to swelling (gulma), spleen disorders (plīhan) and stomach diseases (udara). However, the terms gulma and plīhodara can be understood as more specific diseases. In Suśrutasaṃhitā, uttaratantra 42.4, gulma is defined as a movable or immovable round lump (granthi) that might arise between the heart and lower abdomen (basti) and might grow or shrink:
hṛdbastyorantare granthiḥ saṃcārī yadi vā ’calaḥ |
cayāpacayavān vṛttaḥ sa gulma iti kīrtitaḥ ||
gulmaplīhodaraṃ vāpi vātapittakaphādikam |
bastikarmaprabhāvena dhāvanty eva saṃśayaḥ ||
gulmodaraṃ cāpi vātaplīhapittakaphodbhavāḥ |
vastikarmaprabhāvena bādhyante sakalāmayāḥ ||
gulmaplīhodaraṃ cāpi vātapittakaphodbhavāḥ |
bastikarmaprabhāvena naśyanti sakalāmayāḥ ||
yāvan malā vinaśyanti vātapittakaphodbhāvāḥ |
trivāraṃ vā caturvāraṃ kṛtvā bastim virecayet ||
mahojasvī mahajjyotir jaṭharāgnipradīpanam |
gulmaplīhodarādīnāṃ nāśanaṃ sukhavardhanam ||
vātapittakaphottānāṃ doṣāṇāṃ nāśanaṃ paraṃ |
kuṣṭhānāṃ nāśanaṃ cāpi bastisiddhe prajāyate ||
धात्विन्द्रियान्तःकरणप्रसादं
दद्याच्च कान्तिं दहनप्रदीप्तिम् ।
अशेषदोषोपचयं निहन्या-
दभ्यस्यमानं जलबस्तिकर्म ॥
dhātvindriyāntaḥkaraṇaprasādaṃ
dadyāc ca kāntiṃ dahanapradīptim /
aśeṣadoṣopacayaṃ nihanyā-
d abhyasyamānaṃ jalabastikarma //
रसासृङ्मांसमेदो'स्थिमज्जाशुक्राणि धातवः
rasāsṛṅmāṃsamedo'sthimajjāśukrāṇi dhātavaḥ
dhātvindriyāntaḥkaraṇaprasādaṃ
dadyāc ca kāntiṃ dahanapradīptim |
aśeṣadoṣopacayaṃ nihanyād
abhyasyamānaṃ jalabastikarma ||
dhātvindriyāntaḥkaraṇaprasādaṃ
dadhyāc ca kāntiṃ dahanapradīptim |
aśeṣadoṣopacayaṃ nihanyād
abhyasyamānaṃ jalavastikarma ||
dhātvīndrintaḥ karaṇaprabodhaṃ
dadāti kāntiṃ dahanapradīptim |
aśeṣadoṣopacayaṃ nihanyād
abhyasyamānaṃ jalavastikarma ||
tiṣṭhed vaśī mitāhāraḥ sarvāṅgaṃ tena śudhyati |
dhātvindriyāntaḥkaraṇaprasādo dehalāghavam ||
mahojasvī mahajjyotir jaṭharāgnipradīpanam |
उदरगतपदार्थमुद्वमन्ती
पवनमपानमुदीर्य कण्ठनाले ।
क्रमपरिचयवश्यवायुमार्गा-
द्गजकरणीति निगद्यते हठज्ञैः ॥
udaragatapadārtham udvamantī
pavanam apānam udīrya kaṇṭhanāle /
kramaparicayavaśyavāyumārgā-
d gajakaraṇīti nigadyate haṭhajñaiḥ //
Some manuscripts, including η2 and βω, have an alternative reading for the third verse quarter that appears to be explaining the name of the practice. In other words, it is called the elephant technique `because the speed of the breath is like that of water [propelled] by elephants’ (karibhir iva jalasya vāyuvegāt). The syntax of this reading is not so easy to construe with the rest of the verse, which suggests that it was not original. The reading we have adopted (i.e., kramaparicayavaśya...) is attested by manuscripts of the most important groups (α1 and α2, β2, the γ group, etc.) and the same witnesses preserve mārga (rather than vega).
udaragatapadārtham udvamantī
pavanam apānam udīrya kaṇṭhanāle |
kramaparicayatas tu vāyumārge
gajakaraṇīti nigadyate haṭhajñaiḥ || 1.51 ||
udaragatapadārtham udvamantī
pavanamapānam udīrya kaṇṭhanāle |
kramaparicayavaśyavāyumārgā
gajakaraṇīti nigadyate haṭhajñaiḥ ||
udaragatapadārthān udvamed eva nityaṃ
pavanagamanamārgāt kaṇṭhanālapraveśāt ||
kramaparicayavaśyaṃ syāc ca gargādayo hi
gajakaraṇam itīha prahur āryā munīndrāḥ ||
atha gajakaraṇī
śuddhaṃ toyaṃ nārikelodbhavaṃ vā
pītvākaṇṭhaṃ dugdhamiśraṃ jalaṃ vā |
vāraṃ vāraṃ māṇibandhaṃ tu kurvan
nodgāreṇa prakṣiped bhūmibhāge ||
eṣā proktā kaphapittāmayeṣu
medoghnīva kariṇī hastipūrvā ||
अथ नेतिः ।
सूत्रं वितस्तिसुस्निग्धं नासानाले प्रवेशयेत् ।
मुखान्निर्गमयेच्चैषा नेतिः सिद्धैर्निगद्यते ॥
atha netiḥ /
sūtraṃ vitastisusnigdhaṃ nāsānāle praveśayet /
mukhān nirgamayec caiṣā netiḥ siddhair nigadyate //
According to Turner’s Comparative and Etymological Dictionary (1966: 427, entry 7588), the word netī in Hindi refers to the cord of a churning stick and is cognate with the Sanskrit netra. The action of pulling the cord of a churning stick is similar to the way the thread can be pulled back and forth, from side to side, through the nostril and mouth. The reading we have adopted in the third verse quarter (mukhān nirgamayec caiṣā) is well attested but may not be original because the first hemistich has a finite verb and the eṣā must be construed with netiḥ in the fourth verse quarter. The alternative reading mukhanirgamanād eva (η1 and η2) may be original but is difficult to construe and mukhān nirgamayet makes better sense in terms of describing the final part of the practice.
अवाप्ताष्टगुणैश्वर्याः सिद्धाः सद्भिर्निरूपिताः
avāptāṣṭaguṇaiśvaryāḥ siddhāḥ sadbhir nirūpitāḥ
atha netikarma--
ākhupucchākāranibhaṃ sūtraṃ susnigdhanirmitam |
ṣaḍvitastimitaṃ sūtraṃ netisūtrasya lakṣanam || 1.40 ||
nāsānāle praviśyainaṃ mukhān nirgamayet kramāt |
sūtrasyāntaṃ prabaddhvā tu bhrāmayen nāsanālayoḥ |
atha netī |
sūtraṃ vitastisusnigdhaṃ nāsānāle praveśayet |
mukhān nirgamayet sā hi netī siddhair nigadyate ||
sūtraṃ vitastisusnigdhaṃ nāsānāle praveśayet |
mukhān nirgamayed eṣā netiḥ siddhair nigadyate ||
atha netī
mṛdu ślakṣṇaṃ sitaṃ sūtraṃ nāsānāle praveśayet |
mukhān nirgamayed dasrau cintayen netikā smṛtā ||
कपालशोधनी चैव दिव्यदृष्टिप्रदायिनी ।
हनूर्ध्वजातरोगौघं जयत्याशु ससूत्रिका ॥
kapālaśodhanī caiva divyadṛṣṭipradāyinī /
hanūrdhvajātarogaughaṃ jayaty āśu sasūtrikā //
We have adopted the reading caiva in the first verse quarter, which is attested by manuscripts of the β, γ and δ groups and is easy to construe. The α manuscripts have kaṇṭhā and vaṭyā, which may derive from kaṇṭhyā (ε1), but none of these readings makes sense here. η1 and η2 have kāryā, which is unnecessary because of the main verb in the final verse quarter. Most witnesses, including the Jyotsnā, read jatrūrdhva° in the third verse quarter, which is generally understood as `above the collar bones’ or, as Brahmānanda says, the area above the shoulder joints (jatruṇoḥ skandhasandhyor ūrdhvam uparibhāge). On problems concerning the interpretation of jatru, see Meulenbeld 1974: 465. We have adopted the reading of α, hanūrdhva°, ‘above the jaw’, which makes good sense in the context of neti because it is supposed to cleanse the skull (kapāla) or, in other words, the head. Different readings exist for the last verse quarter. η1 has jayati sā tu sūtrikā, which is unmetrical, but the word sūtrikā may have been original because it explains the problematic readings that arose in the other witnesses when attempts were made to replace sūtrikā with neti. The variants with netivit seem implausible because of the epithets in the first hemistich, which require a feminine noun to be understood as the subject of the sentence. The reading netir āśu nihanti ca looks like a patch that was adopted later in the transmission. The reading we have conjectured jayaty āśu tu sūtrikā retains sūtrikā and corrects the metrical fault of η1 by adopting jataty āśu, which is well attested across the stemma.
स्कन्धे भुजशिरो 'ंसो 'स्त्री सन्ंधी तस्यैव जत्रुणी
skandhe bhujaśiro 'ṃso 'strī sanṃdhī tasyaiva jatruṇī
kapālaśodhinī kāryā divyadṛṣṭipradāyinī | [caiva -P]
jatrūrdhvajātarogaghnī jāyate netir uttamā || 1.42 ||
kapālaśodhanī caiva divyadṛṣṭipradīpinī |
jatrūrdhvajātarogaughān jarayaty āśu netivit ||
kapālaśodhinī caiva divyadṛṣṭipradāyinī |
jatrūrdhvajātarogādyaiḥ jayatyeva suniścitam ||
अथ त्राटकम् ।
निरीक्षेन्निश्चलदृशा सूक्ष्मलक्ष्यं समाहितः ।
अश्रुसंपातपर्यन्तमाचार्यैस्त्राटकं मतं ॥
atha trāṭakam /
nirīkṣen niścaladṛśā sūkṣmalakṣyaṃ samāhitaḥ /
aśrusaṃpātaparyantam ācāryais trāṭakaṃ mataṃ //
atha trāṭakam-
nirīkṣya niścaladṛśā sūkṣmalakṣyaṃ samāhitaḥ |
aśrusampātaparyantam ācāryais trāṭakaṃ smṛtam ||
atha trāṭakam |
nirīkṣen niścaladṛśā sūkṣmalakṣyaṃ samāhitaḥ |
aśruprapātaparyantam āryais tat trāṭakaṃ matam ||
atha trāṭakam |
vīkṣeta niścaladṛśā sulakṣyaṃ ca samāhitaḥ |
aśrusampātaparyantam ācāryais trāṭakaṃ smṛtam ||
atha trāṭakam
sūkṣmalakṣye dṛśau sthāpya nirnimeṣaś ciraṃ bhavet |
aśrusampātaparyantaṃ karma trāṭakam īritam ||
मोटकं नेत्ररोगाणां तन्द्रादीनां कपाटकम् ।
यत्नतस्त्राटकं गोप्यं यथा हाटकपेटकम् ॥
moṭakaṃ netrarogāṇāṃ tandrādīnāṃ kapāṭakam /
yatnatas trāṭakaṃ gopyaṃ yathā hāṭakapeṭakam //
The witnesses have many different readings for the first word of this verse. The α manuscripts are split between modaka (α1), mocaka and mohana. Of these, modaka is the most likely, if it is understood as a medicinal pill. However this meaning is rare, even in medical literature, as modaka is generally used to refer to a small sweet. We have adopted moṭakaṃ, which is attested by η1 and δ2, as well as the Yuktabhavadeva. We understand it to mean “destroyer.” Bohtlingk and Roth (s.v.) and Monier-Williams (s.v.) give medicinal pill as a possible meaning of moṭaka (cf. modaka) but it appears that this is mainly an inference drawn only from this verse, where the pill is merely a comparison. Several witnesses have sphoṭanaṃ (‘destroying’), which is also possible. The reading kapāṭakam in the second verse quarter is found in most of the witnesses and testimonia and we have adopted it accordingly. The context indicates that it means “shutter” (in the sense of shutting out something), but we have not found any parallel usages of it in this sense.
sphoṭanaṃ netrarogāṇāṃ tandrādīnāṃ kapāṭakam |
prayatnāt trāṭakaṃ gopyaṃ yathā ratnasupeṭakam ||
moṭanaṃ netrarogānāṃ tandrādīnāṃ kapāṭakam |
etac ca trāṭakaṃ gopyaṃ yathā hāṭakapeṭakam ||
moṭakaṃ sarvarogāṇāṃ tandrādīnāṃ kapāṭanam ||
yatnatas trāṭakaṃ gopyaṃ yathā hāṭakapeṭakam ||
atha trāṭakam
vaṅglāvikaraṇasthe ’sminn antarjyotiḥ prakāśyate |
netrarogās tathā tandrā naśyantīty āha dhūrjatiḥ ||
अथ नौली ।
अमन्दावर्तवेगेन तुन्दं सव्यापसव्यतः ।
नतांसो भ्रामयेदेषा नौली गौडैः प्रशस्यते ॥
atha naulī /
amandāvartavegena tundaṃ savyāpasavyataḥ /
natāṃso bhrāmayed eṣā naulī gauḍaiḥ praśasyate //
It is worth noting that α1 has laulī (instead of naulī) as the name of this practice in verses 2.34–35 and laulikaṃ in 2.22. The vast majority of manuscripts, including α2, and the most important testimonia support naulī or nauliḥ but the names laulika and laulikī do occur in some more recent works, such as the Haṭhayogasaṃhitā (p. 4), Gheraṇḍasaṃhitā (1.12), Yogasārasaṅgraha (pp. 54–55) and Yogakarṇikā (p. 56). The reading gauḍaiḥ is found in only one collated manuscript (η2) but it is close to the readings of two α manuscripts, gaulaiḥ (α1) and golaiḥ (α3), and is also attested by the Haṭharatnāvalī and Yuktabhavadeva. This version of the verse, which is likely original, suggests that it was thought that the name naulī came from the region known today as Bengal. The reading gauḍaiḥ explains many of the mistakes in other manuscripts, such as gaulīḥ, maulaiḥ, etc.
पिचण्डकुक्षी जठरोदरं तुन्दं स्तनौ कुचौ
picaṇḍakukṣī jaṭharodaraṃ tundaṃ stanau kucau
atha nauliḥ--
amandāvartavegena tundaṃ savyāpasavyataḥ |
natāṃso bhrāmayed eṣā nauliḥ gauḍaiḥ praśasyate ||
atha naulī
amandāvartavegena tundaṃ savyāpasavyayoḥ |
natāṃso bhrāmayed eṣā naulī yoge pracakṣate ||
atha naulī
amandāvartavegena tundaṃ savyāpasavyataḥ |
natāṃso bhrāmayed eṣā naulir gauḍaiḥ praśasyate ||
atha naulī
amandāvartavegena jaṭharaṃ dakṣavāmayoḥ |
cālayec chaṃbhunā proktaṃ tatra lakṣmyadhidevatā |
bāhyanaulir iyaṃ proktā jaṭharānaladīpinī ||
तुन्दाग्निसंदीपनपाचनादि-
सन्धायिकानन्दकरी सदैव ।
अशेषदोषामयशोषणी च
हठक्रियामौलिरियं च नौली ॥
tundāgnisaṃdīpanapācanādi-
sandhāyikānandakarī sadaiva /
aśeṣadoṣāmayaśoṣaṇī ca
haṭhakriyāmaulir iyaṃ ca naulī //
α1 and α2, β2, and ε1 have tundāgni° in the first verse quarter. This reading is also supported by all of the manuscripts collated for the published edition of the Haṭharatnāvalī. The compound tundāgni is rare in Sanskrit literature but it was likely used here because the term tunda appears in the previous verse, which explains how naulī is done. The compound tundāgni seems synonymous with udarāgni, jaṭharāgni, śarīrāgni, etc., which are commonly used in yoga texts to refer to the body’s digestive fire. The alternative reading mandāgni° (`sluggish fire’) is reasonably common in contexts of stimulating poor digestion, and may have been introduced early in the transmission to replace the more unusual tundāgni°. Most witnesses and the testimonia have maulir iyaṃ in the fourth verse quarter, which expresses the idea that naulī was thought to be the best of the ṣaṭkarma, and the assonance of naulī and mauli may have been intended. The alternative reading of mūlam iyaṃ in η1 and ε1 would suggest that nauli is necessary for the other practices, which does not seem to be the case because, according to Haṭhapradīpikā 2.21, the ṣaṭkarma are more like therapeutic interventions.
tundāgnisandīpanapācanādisandīpikānandakarī sadaiva |
aśeṣadoṣāmayaśoṣaṇī ca haṭhakriyāmaulir iyaṃ ca nauliḥ ||
mandāgnisaṃdīpanapācanāgnisaṃdhāyikānandakarī tathaiva |
aśeṣadoṣāmayaśoṣinī ca haṭhakriyāmaulir iyaṃ hi naulī ||
mandāgnisandīpanapācanādisandhāvanānandakarī sadaiva |
aśeṣadoṣāmayaśoṣaṇīyaṃ haṭhakriyāmaulir iyaṃ hi nauliḥ ||
mandāgnisandīpanapācanādisandhāyikānandakarī sadaiva |
aśeṣadoṣopacayaśoṣaṇīva haṭhakriyā ’sau jayatīha nauliḥ ||
अथ कपालभाती ।
भस्त्रावल्लोहकारस्य रेचपूरौ ससंभ्रमौ ।
कपालभाती विख्याता कफदोषविशोषिणी ॥
atha kapālabhātī /
bhastrāval lohakārasya recapūrau sasaṃbhramau /
kapālabhātī vikhyātā kaphadoṣaviśoṣiṇī //
The word bhātī is derived from bhastrī (Turner 1966: 537, entry 9424). η2 and other manuscripts have kuryāt savyāpasavyataḥ (‘left and right’) instead of recapūrau sasambhramau. Although one might infer that savyāpasavyataḥ is referring to performing the skull bellows breathing alternately through the left and right nostrils, it appears to be a secondary reading because there is no indication of what is moving to the left and right. Such a method of alternate nostril breathing is explained as a variation of kapālabhāti in the Haṭhayogasaṃhitā (p. 14):
iḍayā pūrayed vāyuṃ recayet piṅgalākhyayā |
piṅgalayā pūrayitvā punaś candreṇa recayet |
pūrakaṃ recakaṃ kṛtvā vegena na tu cālayet ||
atha kapālabhastrikā--
bhastrival lohakārāṇāṃ recapūrasusambhramau |
kapālabhastrī vikhyātā sarvarogaviśoṣaṇī ||
atha kapālabhātī |
bhastreva lohakārāṇāṃ recapūrau sasaṃbhramau |
kapālabhātī vikhyātā kaphadoṣaviśoṣiṇī ||
atha kapālabhātiḥ |
bhastrāval lohakārāṇāṃ recapūrau sasambhramau |
kapālabhātir vikhyātā kaphadoṣaviśoṣiṇī ||
atha bhastrā
lohakārasya bhastreva recapūrau tu vegataḥ ||
punaḥ punaḥ prakurvīta sthiramūrdhnā prayatnataḥ |
sthirabhastreti ca khyāta yogināṃ siddhidāyakā ||
षट्कर्मभिर्गतस्थौल्यकफमेदोमलादिकः ।
प्राणायामं ततः कुर्याद् अनायासेन सिध्यति ॥
ṣaṭkarmabhir gatasthaulyakaphamedomalādikaḥ /
prāṇāyāmaṃ tataḥ kuryād anāyāsena sidhyati //
karmāṣṭabhir gatasthaulyaṃ kaphamedomalādikam |
prāṇāyāmaṃ tataḥ kuryād anāyāsena siddhyati ||
tathā cātmārāmaḥ
ṣaṭkarmanirgatasthaulyakaphamedogadādikaḥ |
prāṇāyāmaṃ tataḥ kuryād anāyāsena sidhyati ||
ṣaṭkarmabhir gatasthaulyaṃ kaphamedomalātigaḥ |
prāṇāyāmaṃ tataḥ kuryād anāyāsena sidhyati ||
प्राणायामैरेव सर्वे प्रशुष्यन्ति मला इति ।
आचार्याणां तु केषांचिदन्यत्कर्म न संमतम् ॥
prāṇāyāmair eva sarve praśuṣyanti malā iti /
ācāryāṇāṃ tu keṣāṃcid anyat karma na saṃmatam //
The plural of prāṇāyāma, which we have translated here as ‘breath-controls’, probably refers to practising multiple repetitions of breath retentions with alternate nostril breathing. Many witnesses lower on the stemma have malāśaya (instead of malā api or malā iti) in the second verse quarter but this usually has the more specific meaning of bowels or bladder and so seems inappropriate in a general statement. The witnesses that have malāśaya also have the verb pra+śudh, which connotes that the place where the impurities accumulate is cleaned (rather than the impurities themselves).
आचिनोति च शास्त्रार्थमाचारे स्थापयेदपि
स्वयमाचरते यस्मादाचार्यस्तेन चोच्यते इति
ācinoti ca śāstrārtham ācāre sthāpayed api
svayam ācarate yasmād ācāryas tena cocyate iti
prāṇāyāmair eva sarvaiḥ praśuṣyanti malā yataḥ iti |
ācāryāṇāṃ tu keṣāṃ cid anya krama na saṃmatam iti ||
prāṇāyāmair eva sarve praśuṣyanti malā iti |
ācāryāṇāṃ tu keṣāñ cid anyat karma na sammatam ||
ब्रह्मादयोऽपि त्रिदशाः पवनाभ्यासतत्पराः । *
अभूवन्नन्तकभयात् तस्मात्पवनमभ्यसेत् ॥ *
brahmādayo’pi tridaśāḥ pavanābhyāsatatparāḥ / *
abhūvann antakabhayāt tasmāt pavanam abhyaset // *
This verse has been rewritten in η2 and the delta group of manuscripts. η2’s reading attempts, somewhat unsuccessfully, to connect this verse more directly to the ṣaṭkarma:
ṣaṭkarmayogam āpnoti pavanābhyāsatatparaḥ |
sumanaskāṃtako bhavya[s] tasmāt pavanam abhyaset ||
brahmādayo ’pi tridaśāḥ pavanābhyāsatatparāḥ |
abhūvan mṛtyurahitā tasmāt pavanam abhyaset ||
brahmādayo ’pi tridaśāḥ pavanābhyāsatatparāḥ |
tena siddhiṃ gatā yoge tasmāt pavanam abhyaset ||
यावद्बद्धो मरुद्देहे यावच्चित्तं निराश्रयम् ।
यावद्वीक्षा भ्रुवोर्मध्ये तावत्कालभयं कुतः ॥*
yāvad baddho marud dehe yāvac cittaṃ nirāśrayam /
yāvad vīkṣā bhruvor madhye tāvat kālabhayaṃ kutaḥ //*
We have adopted the reading vīkṣā in the third verse quarter, which is an emendation of α1 and α2’s vīkṣed. The verb vīkṣed is likely an error as the yāvat clauses appear to have been written as nominal phrases. The reading vīkṣā occurs in the same verse of the six-chapter version of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa (siglum T), which sometimes preserves old readings of that text.
खाद्यते न च कालेन बाध्यते न च कर्मणा
साध्यते न स केनापि योगी युक्तः समाधिना
khādyate na ca kālena bādhyate na ca karmaṇā
sādhyate na sa kenāpi yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā
yāvad baddho marud dehe tāvac cittaṃ nirāśrayam |
yāvad vīkṣā bhruvor madhye tāvat kālabhayaṃ kutaḥ ||
vīkṣā] T; dṛṣṭir cett.
yāvad baddho marud dehe yāvad vṛttau nirāśrayam |
yāvad dṛṣṭir bhruvor madhye tāvat kālabhayaṃ kutaḥ ||
yāvad baddho marud dehe yāvac cittaṃ nirāmayam |
yāvad dṛṣṭir bhruvor madhye tāvat kālabhayaṃ kutaḥ ||
विधिवत्प्राणसंयामैर्नाडीचक्रे विशोधिते ।
सुषुम्णावदनं भित्त्वा सुखाद्विशति मारुतः ॥
vidhivat prāṇasaṃyāmair nāḍīcakre viśodhite /
suṣumṇāvadanaṃ bhittvā sukhād viśati mārutaḥ //
The compound prāṇasaṃyāmaiḥ (‘breath-controls’) should be understood here as a synonym for prāṇāyāmaiḥ as found in 2.38 (on which see the note on this verse).
vidhivat prāṇasaṃyāmaiḥ nāḍicakre viśodhite |
suṣumnāvadanaṃ bhitvā sukhād viśati mārutaḥ ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
vividhaiḥ prāṇasaṃyāmaiḥ nāḍīcakre viśodhite |
suṣumnāvadanaṃ bhitvā sukhād viśati mārutaḥ ||
मारुते मध्यसंचारे मनःस्थैर्यं प्रजायते ।
यो मनःसुस्थिरीभावः सैवावस्था मनोन्मनी ॥
mārute madhyasaṃcāre manaḥsthairyaṃ prajāyate /
yo manaḥsusthirībhāvaḥ saivāvasthā manonmanī //
mārute madhyame jāte manaḥsthairyaṃ prajāyate |
manasaḥ susthirībhāvaḥ saivāvasthā manonmanī ||
mārute madhyasaṃcāre manaḥsthairyaṃ prajāyate |
yo manaḥsusthirībhāvaḥ saivāvasthā manonmanī ||
तत्सिद्धये विधानज्ञश्चित्रान्कुर्वीत कुम्भकान् ।
विचित्रकुम्भकाभ्यासाद्विचित्रां सिद्धिमाप्नुयात् ॥
tatsiddhaye vidhānajñaś citrān kurvīta kumbhakān /
vicitrakumbhakābhyāsād vicitrāṃ siddhim āpnuyāt //
The majority of witnesses, including α2, have a plural subject (vidhānajñāḥ) and verb (kurvanti) in the first hemistich. We have adopted the singular, which is attested by α1, α3 and manuscripts of the Haṭharatnāvalī, because it corresponds with the singular subject of the second hemistich.
जन्मौषधितपोमन्त्रैर्यावत्य इह सिद्धयः
योगेनाप्नोति ताः सर्वा नान्यैर्योगगतिं व्रजेत्
janmauṣadhitapomantrair yāvatya iha siddhayaḥ
yogenāpnoti tāḥ sarvā nānyair yogagatiṃ vrajet
tatsiddhaye vidhānajñaḥ sadā kurvīta kumbhakān |
vicitrakumbhakābhyāsād vicitrāṃ siddhim āpnuyāt ||
tatsiddhaye vidhānajñāś citrān kurvanti kumbhakān |
vicitrakumbhakābhyāsād vicitrāṃ siddhim āpnuyāt ||
सूर्यभेदनमुज्जायी तथा सीत्का च शीतली ।
भस्त्रिका भ्रामरी मूर्छा प्लावनीत्यष्ट कुम्भकाः ॥
sūryabhedanam ujjāyī tathā sītkā ca śītalī /
bhastrikā bhrāmarī mūrchā plāvanīty aṣṭa kumbhakāḥ //
In the fourth verse quarter, only some manuscripts of the ε and γ groups have the adopted reading plāvanīty aṣṭa. The name plāvanī is necessary in this list because most manuscript groups, including α, and the testimonia contain a verse on plāvinīkumbhaka as one of the eight kumbhakas. The alternative reading kevalī/kevalaś, which is supported by the α group and other manuscripts, appears to be a mistake because it is not consistent with the idea of kevalakumbhaka standing outside the category of sahitakumbhaka, as stated in 2.72–75. These witnesses are among those which include a verse on plāvinī later in the chapter.
sūryabhedanam ujjayī tathā sītkāraśītalī |
bhastrikā bhrāmarī mūrcchā kevalaś cāṣṭa kumbhakāḥ ||
sūryabhedanam ujjayī tathā sītkā ca sītalī |
bhastrikā bhrāmarī mūrcchā kevalāś cāṣṭa kumbhakāḥ ||
haṭhayoge—
sūryabhedanam ujjāyī tathā sītkāraśītalī |
bhastrikā bhramarī mūrcchā sahitaṃ cāṣṭa kumbhakāḥ ||
sūryabhedanamujjāyī sītkārī śītalī tathā |
bhastrikā bhrāmarī mūrcchā kevalāś cāṣṭa kumbhakāḥ ||
पूरकान्ते तु कर्तव्यो बन्धो जालन्धराभिधः ।
कुम्भकान्ते रेचकादौ कर्तव्यस्तूड्डियानकः ॥
pūrakānte tu kartavyo bandho jālandharābhidhaḥ /
kumbhakānte recakādau kartavyas tūḍḍiyānakaḥ //
pūrakānte tu kartavyo bandho jālandharābhidhaḥ |
kuṃbhakānte recakādau kartavyoḍḍiyaṇābhidhaḥ |
pūrakānte tu kartavyo bandho jālandharābhidhaḥ |
kumbhakānte recakādau kartavyas tūḍḍiyānakaḥ ||
pūrakānte tu kartavyo bandho jālandharābhidhaḥ |
kumbhakānte recakādau kartavyas tūḍḍiyānakaḥ ||
pūrakānte ca karttavyo bandho jālandharābhidhaḥ |
kumbhakānte recakādau karttavyas tūḍḍiyānakaḥ ||
अधस्तात्कुञ्चनेनाशु कण्ठसंकोचने कृते ।
मध्ये पश्चिमतानेन स्यात्प्राणो ब्रह्मनाडिगः ॥
adhastāt kuñcanenāśu kaṇṭhasaṃkocane kṛte /
madhye paścimatānena syāt prāṇo brahmanāḍigaḥ //
As is clear in the source text, the Gorakṣaśataka, the three techniques alluded to here are mūlabandha, jālandharabandha and uḍḍiyānabandha respectively (on which see chapter three). The stem form brahma is found in various compounds in the text. We understand it to refer to Brahman, the absolute, in all instances other than brahmagranthi, where we take it to mean the deity Brahmā. See Mallinson 2007:205 n.240.
adhastāt kuñcanenaiva kaṇṭhasaṃkocane kṛte |
madhye paścimatāṇena syāt prāṇo brahmanāḍigaḥ ||
adhastāt kuñcanenāśu kaṇṭhasaṅkocane kṛte |
madhye paścimatānena syāt prāṇo brahmanāḍigaḥ ||
adhas tv ākuñcanenāśu kaṇṭhasaṅkocanena ca |
madhye paścimatānena syāt prāṇo brahmanāḍigaḥ ||
adhastāt kuñcanenāśu kaṇṭhasaṅkocane kṛte |
madhye paścimatānena syāt prāṇo brahmanāḍigaḥ ||
adhastāt kuñcanenāśu kaṇṭhasaṃkocane kṛte |
madhye paścimatānena syāt prāṇo madhyanāḍiga ||
adhastāt kuñcanenaiva kaṇṭhasaṃkocanena ca |
madhye paścimatānena syāt prāṇo brahmarandhragaḥ ||
prāṇaḥ prāṇavāyuḥ brahmarandhragaḥ suṣumnāpathacārī syāt | madhyago bhavet |
अपानमूर्ध्वमुत्थाप्य प्राणं कण्ठादधो नयेत् ।
योगी जराविमुक्तः सन् षोडशो वयसा* भवेत् ॥
apānam ūrdhvam utthāpya prāṇaṃ kaṇṭhād adho nayet /
yogī jarāvimuktaḥ san ṣoḍaśo vayasā* bhavet //
apānam ūrdhvam utthāpya prāṇaṃ kaṇṭhād adho nayet |
yogī jarāvimuktaḥ syāt ṣoḍaśo vayasā bhavet ||
apānam ūrdhvam utthāpya prāṇaṃ kaṇṭhād adho nayet |
yogī jarāvimuktaḥ san vayasā ṣoḍaśo bhavet ||
apānam ūrdhvam utthāpya prāṇaṃ kaṇṭhād adho nayet |
yogī jarāvinirmuktaḥ ṣoḍaśo vayasā bhavet ||
तत्र सूर्यभेदनम् ।
आसने सुखदे योगी बद्ध्वा वज्रासनं ततः ।
दक्षनाड्या समाकृष्य बहिःस्थं पवनं शनैः ॥
tatra sūryabhedanam /
āsane sukhade yogī baddhvā vajrāsanaṃ tataḥ /
dakṣanāḍyā samākṛṣya bahiḥsthaṃ pavanaṃ śanaiḥ //
योगाभ्यासक्रमं वक्ष्ये योगिनां योगसिद्धये
उषःकाले समुत्थाय प्रातःकाले 'थवा बुधः
गुरुं संस्मृत्य शिरसि हृदये स्वेष्टदेवताम्
शौचं कृत्वा दन्तशुद्धिं विदध्याद्भस्मधारणम्
शुचौ देशे मठे रम्ये प्रतिष्ठाप्यासनं मृदु
तत्रोपविश्य संस्मृत्य मनसा गुरुमीश्वरम्
देशकालौ च सङ्कीर्त्य सङ्कल्पविधिपूर्वकम्
अनन्तं प्रणमेद्देवं नागेशं पीठसिद्धये
ततो 'भ्यसेदासनानि श्रमे जाते शवासनम्
अन्ते समभ्यसेत्तत्तु श्रमाभावे तु नाभ्यसेत्
करणीं विपरीताख्यां कुम्भकान्पूर्वमभ्यसेत्
जालन्धरस्य दार्ढ्यार्थं कुम्भकेषूपयोगतः
विधायाचमनं कृत्वा कर्माङ्गं प्राणसंयमम्
योगीन्द्रादीन्नमस्कृत्य कौर्माच्च शिववाक्यतः
नमस्कृत्याथ योगीन्द्रान्सशिष्यांश्च विनायकम्
गुरुं चैवाथ मां योगी युञ्जीत सुसमाहितः
बद्ध्वाभ्यासे सिद्धपीठं कुम्भकान्बन्धपूर्वकम्
प्रथमे दश कर्तव्याः पञ्चवृद्ध्या दिने दिने
कार्या अशीतिपर्यन्तं कुम्भकाः सुसमाहितैः
योगीन्द्रैः प्रथमं कुर्यादभ्यासं चन्द्रसूर्ययोः
अनुलोमविलोमाख्यमेतं प्राहुर्मनीषिणः
सूर्यभेदनमभ्यस्य बन्धपूर्वकमेकधीः
उज्जायिनं ततः कुर्यात्सीत्कारीं शीतलीं ततः
भस्त्रिकां च समभ्यस्य कुर्यादन्यान्न वा परान्
मुद्राः समभ्यसेद्बुद्धा गुरुवक्त्राद्यथाक्रमम्
ततः पद्मासनं बद्ध्वा कुर्यान्नादानुचिन्तनम्
अभ्यासं सकलं कुर्यादीश्वरार्पणमादृतः
अभ्यासादुत्थितः स्नानं कुर्यादुष्णेन वारिणा
स्नात्वा समापयेन्नित्यं कर्म सङ्क्षेपतः सुधीः
मध्याह्ने 'पि तथाभ्यस्य किञ्चिद्विश्रम्य भोजनम्
कुर्वीत योगिनां पथ्यमपथ्यं न कदाचन
एलां वापि लवङ्गं वा भोजनान्ते च भक्षयेत्
केचित्कर्पूरमिच्छन्ति ताम्बूलं शोभनं तथा
चूर्णेन रहितं शस्तं पवनाभ्यासयोगिनाम्
इति चिन्तामणेर्वाक्यं स्वारस्यं भजते न हि
केचित्पदेन यस्मात्तु तयोः शीतौष्ण्यहेतुता
भोजनानन्तरं कुर्यान्मोक्षशास्त्रावलोकनम्
पुराणश्रवणं वापि नामसंकीर्तनं विभोः
सायं सन्ध्याविधिं कृत्वा योगं पूर्ववदभ्यसेत्
यदा त्रिघटिकाशेषो दिवसो 'भ्यासमाचरेत्
अभ्यासानन्तरं कार्या सायंसन्ध्या तदा बुधैः
अर्धरात्रे हठाभ्यासं विदध्यात्पूर्ववद्यमी
विपरीतां तु करणीं सायंकालार्धरात्रयोः
नाभ्यसेद्भोजनादूर्ध्वं यतः सा न प्रशस्यते
शुचौ देशे प्रतिष्ठाप्य स्थिरमासनमात्मनः
नात्युच्छ्रितं नातिनीचं चैलाजिनकुशोत्तरम्
yogābhyāsakramaṃ vakṣye yogināṃ yogasiddhaye
uṣaḥkāle samutthāya prātaḥkāle 'thavā budhaḥ
guruṃ saṃsmṛtya śirasi hṛdaye sveṣṭadevatām
śaucaṃ kṛtvā dantaśuddhiṃ vidadhyād bhasmadhāraṇam
śucau deśe maṭhe ramye pratiṣṭhāpyāsanaṃ mṛdu
tatropaviśya saṃsmṛtya manasā gurum īśvaram
deśakālau ca saṅkīrtya saṅkalpavidhipūrvakam
anantaṃ praṇamed devaṃ nāgeśaṃ pīṭhasiddhaye
tato 'bhyased āsanāni śrame jāte śavāsanam
ante samabhyaset tat tu śramābhāve tu nābhyaset
karaṇīṃ viparītākhyāṃ kumbhakān pūrvam abhyaset
jālandharasya dārḍhyārthaṃ kumbhakeṣūpayogataḥ
vidhāyācamanaṃ kṛtvā karmāṅgaṃ prāṇasaṃyamam
yogīndrādīn namaskṛtya kaurmāc ca śivavākyataḥ
namaskṛtyātha yogīndrān saśiṣyāṃś ca vināyakam
guruṃ caivātha māṃ yogī yuñjīta susamāhitaḥ
baddhvābhyāse siddhapīṭhaṃ kumbhakān bandhapūrvakam
prathame daśa kartavyāḥ pañcavṛddhyā dine dine
kāryā aśītiparyantaṃ kumbhakāḥ susamāhitaiḥ
yogīndraiḥ prathamaṃ kuryād abhyāsaṃ candrasūryayoḥ
anulomavilomākhyam etaṃ prāhur manīṣiṇaḥ
sūryabhedanam abhyasya bandhapūrvakam ekadhīḥ
ujjāyinaṃ tataḥ kuryāt sītkārīṃ śītalīṃ tataḥ
bhastrikāṃ ca samabhyasya kuryād anyān na vā parān
mudrāḥ samabhyased buddhā guruvaktrād yathākramam
tataḥ padmāsanaṃ baddhvā kuryān nādānucintanam
abhyāsaṃ sakalaṃ kuryād īśvarārpaṇam ādṛtaḥ
abhyāsād utthitaḥ snānaṃ kuryād uṣṇena vāriṇā
snātvā samāpayen nityaṃ karma saṅkṣepataḥ sudhīḥ
madhyāhne 'pi tathābhyasya kiñcid viśramya bhojanam
kurvīta yogināṃ pathyam apathyaṃ na kadācana
elāṃ vāpi lavaṅgaṃ vā bhojanānte ca bhakṣayet
kecit karpūram icchanti tāmbūlaṃ śobhanaṃ tathā
cūrṇena rahitaṃ śastaṃ pavanābhyāsayoginām
iti cintāmaṇer vākyaṃ svārasyaṃ bhajate na hi
kecit padena yasmāt tu tayoḥ śītauṣṇyahetutā
bhojanānantaraṃ kuryān mokṣaśāstrāvalokanam
purāṇaśravaṇaṃ vāpi nāmasaṃkīrtanaṃ vibhoḥ
sāyaṃ sandhyāvidhiṃ kṛtvā yogaṃ pūrvavad abhyaset
yadā trighaṭikāśeṣo divaso 'bhyāsam ācaret
abhyāsānantaraṃ kāryā sāyaṃsandhyā tadā budhaiḥ
ardharātre haṭhābhyāsaṃ vidadhyāt pūrvavad yamī
viparītāṃ tu karaṇīṃ sāyaṃkālārdharātrayoḥ
nābhyased bhojanād ūrdhvaṃ yataḥ sā na praśasyate
śucau deśe pratiṣṭhāpya sthiram āsanam ātmanaḥ
nātyucchritaṃ nātinīcaṃ cailājinakuśottaram
pavitre nātyuccanīce hy āsane sukhade śubhe |
baddhvā vajrāsanaṃ kṛtvā sarasvatyāś ca cālanam ||
dakṣanāḍyāṃ samākṛṣya bahiṣṭhaṃ pavanaṃ śanaiḥ |
baddhavajrāsano dakṣanāḍyākṛṣyānilaṃ śanaiḥ |
āsane sukhade yogī baddhavajrāsanas tataḥ |
dakṣanāḍyā samākṛṣya bahiḥsthaṃ pavanaṃ śanaiḥ ||
āsane sukhade yogī baddhvā padmāsanaṃ tataḥ |
dakṣanāḍyā samākṛṣya bahiḥsthaṃ pavanaṃ śanaiḥ ||
आ केशाग्रान्नखाग्राच्च निरोधावधि कुम्भयेत् ।
ततः शनैः सव्यनाड्या रेचयेत्पवनं सुधीः ॥
ā keśāgrān nakhāgrāc ca nirodhāvadhi kumbhayet /
tataḥ śanaiḥ savyanāḍyā recayet pavanaṃ sudhīḥ //
An antecedent to the idea of prāṇāyāma affecting the whole body (i.e., as far as the tips of the hair and nails) occurs in the Baudhāyanadharmasūtra (4.1.23):
āvartayet sadā yuktaḥ prāṇāyāmān punaḥ punaḥ |
ā keśāntān nakhāgrāc ca tapas tapyata uttamam ||
haṭhān niruddhaḥ prāṇo ’yaṃ romakūpeṣu niḥsaret |
dehaṃ vidārayaty eṣa kuṣṭhādi janayaty api ||
हठान्निरुद्धः प्राणो 'यं रोमकूपेषु निःसरेत्
देहं विदारयत्येष कुष्ठादि जनयत्यपि
ततः प्रत्यायितव्यो 'सौ क्रमेणारण्यहस्तिवत्
वन्यो गजो गजारिर्वा क्रमेण मृदुतामियात्
करोति शास्तृनिर्देशान्न च तं परिलङ्घयेत्
तथा प्राणो हृदिस्थो'यं योगिनां क्रमयोगतः
गृहीतः सेव्यमानस्तु विश्रम्भमुपगच्छति
haṭhān niruddhaḥ prāṇo 'yaṃ romakūpeṣu niḥsaret
dehaṃ vidārayaty eṣa kuṣṭhādi janayaty api
tataḥ pratyāyitavyo 'sau krameṇāraṇyahastivat
vanyo gajo gajārir vā krameṇa mṛdutām iyāt
karoti śāstṛnirdeśān na ca taṃ parilaṅghayet
tathā prāṇo hṛdistho'yaṃ yogināṃ kramayogataḥ
gṛhītaḥ sevyamānas tu viśrambham upagacchati
ā nakhāgrālakāgrāntaṃ kumbhayitvā yathāsukham |
savyanāḍyā tato mandaṃ recayet pavanaṃ sudhīḥ ||
ā keśāgraṃ nakhāgraṃ ca śirodhāvadhi kumbhakam |
tataḥ śanaiḥ savyanāḍyā recayet pavanaṃ sudhīḥ ||
ā keśād ā nakhāgrāc ca nirodhāvadhi kumbhayet |
tataḥ śanaiḥ savyanāḍyā recayet pavanaṃ sudhīḥ ||
कपालशोधनं वातदोषघ्नं कृमिदोषहम् ।
पुनः पुनरिदं कार्यं सूर्यभेदमुदाहृतं ॥
kapālaśodhanaṃ vātadoṣaghnaṃ kṛmidoṣaham /
punaḥ punar idaṃ kāryaṃ sūryabhedam udāhṛtaṃ //
The compound sūryabheda is metri causa, as the name given in 2.44 and the heading of 2.48 is sūryabhedana. Some witnesses, such as the delta group and V19, have attempted to reinstate the name sūryabhedana. Both °doṣaham and °doṣahṛt are well attested and possible. We have favoured the former because the α reading (doṣajam) appears to be a corruption of it.
kapālaśodhane vāpi recayet pavanaṃ sudhīḥ |
tundasya vātadoṣaghnaḥ kṛmidoṣaṃ nihanti ca ||
punaḥ punar idaṃ kāryaṃ sūryābhedam udāhṛtam |
kapālaṃ śodhanaṃ cāpi recayet pavanaṃ śanaiḥ ||
kapālaṃ ... śanaiḥ ] kapālaśodhanaṃ vātadoṣaghnaṃ kṛmināśanaṃ N,n1,n4.
ālasyaṃ vātadoṣaghnaṃ kṛmikīṭaṃ nihanti ca |
punaḥ punar idaṃ kāryaṃ sūryabhedākhyakumbhakam ||
kapālaśodhanaṃ caitad vātaghnaṃ kṛmidoṣanut ||
kapālaśodhanaṃ vātadoṣaghnaṃ kṛmidoṣahṛt |
punaḥ punar idaṃ kuryāt sūryabhedanam uttamam ||
kapālaśodhanaṃ vātadoṣaghanaṃ kṛmidoṣaham |
punaḥ punar idaṃ kāryaṃ sūryabhedam udāhṛtam ||
अथोज्जायी ।
मुखं संयम्य नाडीभ्याम् आकृष्य पवनं शनैः ।
यथा लगति कण्ठात्तु हृदयावधि सस्वनम् ॥
athojjāyī /
mukhaṃ saṃyamya nāḍībhyām ākṛṣya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ /
yathā lagati kaṇṭhāt tu hṛdayāvadhi sasvanam //
The use of lagati without a locative or direct object (as found in the source text, the Gorakṣaśataka) is supported by the paraphrase of the verse in the Haṭhatattvakaumudī (10.7). Most witnesses (including α) have kaṇṭhāt tu hṛdayāvadhi, which we have understood in the sense of a locative as it specifies the place within the body where the contact occurs.
mukhaṃ saṃyamya nāḍībhyāṃ ākṛṣya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ |
yathā lagati kaṇṭhāt tu hṛdayāvadhi sasvanam ||
kaṇṭhāt tu] kaṇṭhaṃ tu T
mukhaṃ saṃyamya nāḍībhyām ākṛṣya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ |
yathā lagati hṛtkaṇṭhaṃ hṛdayāvadhi svasvanaḥ ||
hṛtkaṇṭhaṃ ] hṛtkaṇṭhe N, n1, n4, J
mukhaṃ saṃyamya nāsābhyāṃ ākṛṣya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ |
yathā lagati kaṇṭhe suḥ hṛdayāvadhi sasvanam ||
mukhaṃ saṃyamya nāḍībhyām ākṛṣya pavanaṃ punaḥ |
yathā lagati hṛtkaṇṭhād dhṛdayāvadhi sasvanaḥ ||
mukhaṃ niyamya nāḍībhyām ākṛṣya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ |
yathā lagati kaṇṭhāt tu hṛdayāvadhi pūraṇam ||
athojjāyī kumbhakaḥ
āsyaṃ saṃyamya nāsāpuṭayugasuṣirābhyāṃ samākṛṣya vāyuṃ
mandaṃ mandaṃ yathāsau lagati galataṭād āhṛdantaḥ saśabdaḥ |
ruddhvā keśān nakhāgrāvadhi pavanam amuṃ recayed vāmanāḍyā
proktojjāyīti kumbhaḥ kaphagadadalano dīpti kṛjjāṭharāgne ||
पूर्ववत्कुम्भयेत्प्राणं रेचयेदिडया ततः ।
श्लेष्मदोषहरं कण्ठे देहानलविवर्धनम् ॥
pūrvavat kumbhayet prāṇaṃ recayed iḍayā tataḥ /
śleṣmadoṣaharaṃ kaṇṭhe dehānalavivardhanam //
In the second hemistich of this verse, many of the readings in the oldest manuscripts, such as dehād analadīptivardhanam (V1), dehānaladīptivivardhanam (J10) and dehe [’]naladīptivivardhanam (P28), are unlikely to be original because both the source and testimonia indicate that Ujjāyī is supposed to remove phlegm from the throat. These versions may have arisen from attempts to remove kaṇṭhe in the third pāda, which was thought to be hanging. It appears that kaṇṭhe dehānalavardhanam is the better reading and it is well attested among the manuscripts (including α).
pūrvavat kumbhayet prāṇaṃ recayed iḍayā tataḥ |
śīrṣotthitānalaharaṃ galaśleṣmaharaṃ paraṃ ||
pūrvavat kumbhayet prāṇaṃ recayed iḍayā tataḥ |
gale śleṣmaharaṃ proktaṃ dehānalavivardhanam ||
pūrvavat kuṃbhayet prāṇān īḍayā recayet tataḥ |
śleṣmadoṣaharaṃ caitad dhāturogavināśanam ||
pūrvavat kumbhayet prāṇaṃ recayed iḍayā tataḥ |
śleṣmadoṣaharaṃ kaṇṭhe dehānalavivardhanam ||
pūrvavat kumbhayet prāṇān recayediḍayā tataḥ |
śleṣmoṣaharaṃ dehānaladīptipravardhanam ||
नाडीजालोदरे धातुगतदोषविनाशनम् ।
गच्छतस्तिष्ठतः कार्यं उज्जाय्य्आख्यं तु कुम्भकम् ॥
nāḍījālodare dhātugatadoṣavināśanam /
gacchatas tiṣṭhataḥ kāryaṃ ujjāyyākhyaṃ tu kumbhakam //
Nearly all the manuscripts have nāḍījalodara°, which does not make sense in this context because jalodara is the disease ascites and °gata° requires a location. This problem is also present in the transmission of the source text for the verse, the Gorakṣaśataka. A solution can be found in some of the manuscripts of the Haṭharatnāvalī, which read nāḍījālodarā° (‘in the network of channels and stomach’). The other problem is °darādhātu°. In spite of Brahmānanda’s efforts to explain it as °dara, ā, and dhātu°, the ā before dhātu° appears to have been inserted metri causa. We have adopted nāḍījālodare (‘inside the network of channels’), which is close to V3 and J10 (nāḍījalodare). It is likely that °jālodare was changed to °jalodara in the transmission because of confusion with the disease of a similar name. For the idea of doṣas being in dhātus see Tantrāloka 28.283cd, where worldly concepts are said to arise from it (dhātudoṣāc ca saṃsārasaṃskārās te ...), but it is also the source of physical disorders (dhātudoṣakṛtaṃ mūrcchā ĪPV on 2.15). The name ujjāyī may be a Prakrit form from uddhmāyī from the verb ud-dhmā, “to blow out”. We thank Diwakar Acharya for this suggestion.
nāḍījalodarādhātugatadoṣavināśanam |
gacchatas tiṣṭhataḥ kāryam ujjāyyākhyaṃ ca kumbhakam ||
nāḍījālodarādhātugatadoṣavināśanam |
nāḍījālodarādhātu° ] nāḍījalodaradhātu° J,P; nāḍījalodaraṃ dhātu° N, n1, n4
gacchatā tiṣṭhatā kāryam ujjāyyākhyaṃ hi kumbhakam ||
dehānaloddīptikaraṃ jalodaravighātakṛt |
gachatā tiṣṭhatā kāryaś cojjāyākhyas tu kumbhakaḥ ||
nāḍījalodaradhātugatadoṣavināśanam |gacchatas tiṣṭhataḥ kāryam ujjāyyākhyaṃ ca kumbhakam ||
nāḍījalodarādhātugatadoṣanivāraṇam |
gacchatā tiṣṭhatā kāryam ujjākhyaṃ kumbhakaṃ tv idam ||
अथ सीत्का ।
सीत्कां दद्यात्सदा वक्त्रे घ्राणे चैव विजृम्भिकाम् ।
एवमभ्यासयोगेन कामदेवो द्वितीयकः ॥
atha sītkā /
sītkāṃ dadyāt sadā vaktre ghrāṇe caiva vijṛmbhikām /
evam abhyāsayogena kāmadevo dvitīyakaḥ //
There is division between śītkāṃ and sītkāṃ in all the manuscript groups of the Haṭhapradīpikā (note that the likely reading in the source texts was hikkāṃ). The result of becoming a second god of love may be connected with the sound sīt, which is said to be made during sex in the Kāmasūtra (2.7.4–19). This verse’s source texts are from Kaula tantric milieus and this is reflected in the result of becoming one with the circle of yoginīs described in the next verse.
cittan dadyāt tu vaktreṇa nāse dadyād vijṛmbhikā[m] |
vācāsiddhir bhavaty eva kāmadevo ’paraḥ priyaḥ ||
hikkā dadyāt sadā vaktre prāyaś caiva vijṛmbhikām |
evam abhyasyamānas tu kāmadevo dvitīyakaḥ ||
hikkāṃ dadyāt sadā vaktre ghrāṇañ caiva vijṛmbhate |
evam abhyāsayogena kāmadevo dvitīyakaḥ ||
sītkāṃ kuryāt tathā vaktre ghrāṇenaiva visarjayet |
evam abhyāsayogena kāmadevo dvitīyakaḥ || 2.16 ||
sītkāṃ dadyāt sadā vaktre ghrāṇe caiva vijṛṃbhitām |
evam abhyasato na kṣuttṛṭ cālasyādi jāyate ||
sītkāṃ kuryāt tathā vaktre ghrāṇenaiva visarjayet |
evam abhyāsayogena kāmadevo dvitīyakaḥ ||
sītkāṃ dadyāt sadā vaktre ghrāṇe caiva vijṛmbhikām |
evam abhyāsayogena kāmadevo dvitīyakaḥ ||
योगिनीचक्रसामान्यः सृष्टिसंहारकारकः ।
न क्षुधा न तृषा निद्रा नैवालस्यं प्रजायते ॥
yoginīcakrasāmānyaḥ sṛṣṭisaṃhārakārakaḥ /
na kṣudhā na tṛṣā nidrā naivālasyaṃ prajāyate //
yoginīgaṇasāmānyā sṛṣṭisaṃhārakārakaḥ |
yoginīguṇasāmānyaḥ sṛṣṭisaṃhārakārakaḥ ||
na kṣudhā na ca tṛṇnidrā naiva murchā prajāyate |
yoginīcakrasaṃsevyaḥ sṛṣṭisaṃhārakārakaḥ |
na kṣudhā na tṛṣā nidrā naivālasyaṃ prajāyate ||
yoginīcakrasaṃsevyaḥ sṛṣṭisaṃhārakārakaḥ |
na kṣudhā na tṛṣṇā nidrā tandrālasyaṃ na jāyate ||
yoginīcakrasāmānyaḥ sṛṣṭisthityantakārakaḥ |
na kṣudhā na tṛṣā nidrā nālasya ca prajāyate ||
भवेत्स्वच्छन्ददेहश्च सर्वोपद्रववर्जितः ।
अनेन विधिना सत्यं योगीन्द्रो भुविमण्डले ॥
bhavet svacchandadehaś ca sarvopadravavarjitaḥ /
anena vidhinā satyaṃ yogīndro bhuvimaṇḍale //
The aiśa compound bhuvimaṇḍale, which is attested at Mañjuśrīmūlakalpa 45.221, is likely the original reading here. The word bhuvi as the first member of a compound is attested elsewhere. The alternative bhūmi° is well-attested and so the change may have happened early in the transmission.
bhavet svacchandadehas tu sarvopadravavarjitaḥ ||
anena vidhinā devi yogīndro bhūmimaṇḍale |
anenaiva vidhānena yogīndro ’vanimaṇḍale |
bhavet svacchandacārī ca sarvāpatparivarjitaḥ ||
bhavet svacchandadehas tu sarvopadravavarjitaḥ |
anena vidhinā satyaṃ yogīndro bhāti bhūtale ||
°dehas tu ] °dehaḥ syāt P; °dehasyāt T,t1
bhavet svachandadehas tu sarvopadravavarjitaḥ |
anena vidhinā yas tu yogīndro bhūmimaṇḍale ||
bhavet svacchandadehaś ca sarvopadravavarjitaḥ |
anena vidhinā satyaṃ yogīndro bhuvimaṇḍale ||
* एवमेव उक्तं च ।
रसनातालुमूलेन यः प्राणं सततं पिबेत् ।
अब्दार्धेन भवेत्तस्य सर्वरोगपरिक्षयः ॥
* evam eva uktaṃ ca /
rasanātālumūlena yaḥ prāṇaṃ satataṃ pibet /
abdārdhena bhavet tasya sarvarogaparikṣayaḥ //
Verse 2.57 seems to be describing an alternative method of sītkā kumbhaka. The introductory phrase evam eva uktaṃ ca suggests that the teaching in this verse is consistent with what preceded it. However, the first version of sītkā appears to be done at the front of the mouth (vaktra), whereas the next version is done at the back of the mouth (see below).The compound rasanātālumūlena is difficult to understand. In his Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā (f.~79r–79v), Sundaradeva says that the external air strikes the root of the tongue and palate and the upper part of the uvula (atra muhū (mūhū codex) rasanātālumūlāhataṃ ghaṇṭikordhvabhāgāhataṃ bahiḥsthavāyuṃ vidhāya pibed ity arthaḥ), which could make the sound sīt. More helpful are the remarks of the commentator of the Yogataraṅgiṇī (2.39). He says that a hole or cavity (vivara) is made by the root of the palate with the help of the tongue. The yogi breathes through it (evaṃ rasanātālumūlena rasanā jihvā tatsahāyabhūtatālumūlena kṛtaṃ yad vivaraṃ, tena kṛtvā yaḥ yogī prāṇam anilaṃ prāṇavāyuṃ pibet pūrayet, tasya yogino ’bdārdhena ṣaṇmāsena sarvarogāṇāṃ nāśaḥ kṣayo bhavet |). The idea of breathing through a hole between the root of the palate and tongue might have been intended by the parallel reading of the Yogacintāmaṇi: rasanā-tālu-yogena (‘by joining the tongue and palate’). We have thus translated rasanā-tālu-mūlena as ‘through the tongue and root of the palate’. It could also imply that the tongue is turned up and back to touch the root of the palate to make a hole that one breathes through (when the breath is taken in through the mouth). The Kumbhaka-paddhati (137ab) states this more clearly:
rasanām unmukhīkṛtya sītkāraṃ kurvatā marut |
rasanāṃ tālumūle yaḥ sthāpayitvā vipaścitaḥ |
pibet prāṇānilaṃ tasya rogāṇāṃ saṃkṣayo bhavet ||
rasanātālumūle tu kṛtvā vāyuṃ pibec chanaiḥ |
ṣaṇmāsād abhyased devi mahārogaiḥ pramucyate ||
rasanātālumūlena yaḥ prāṇam anilaṃ pibet |
abdārdhena bhavet tasya sarvarogaparikṣayaḥ ||
rasanāṃ tālumūle yaḥ sthāpayitvā vipaścitaḥ |
pibet prāṇānilaṃ tasya rogāṇāṃ saṃkṣayo bhavet ||
rasanātāluyogena yaḥ prāṇaṃ satataṃ pibet |
abdārdhena bhavet tasya sarvarogaparikṣayaḥ ||
etad evoktaṃ gorakṣanāthena-
rasanātālumūlena yaḥ prāṇaṃ satataṃ pibete |
abdārdhena bhavet tasya sarvarogaparikṣayaḥ ||
jihvayā tālumūlena prāṇaṃ yaḥ pibati priye |
tasya ṣaṇmāsataḥ sarve rogā naśyanti yoginaḥ ||
अथ शीतली ।
जिह्वया वायुमाकृष्य पूर्ववत्कुम्भकादनु ।
शनैस्तु घ्राणरन्ध्राभ्यां रेचयेदनिलं सुधीः ॥
atha śītalī /
jihvayā vāyum ākṛṣya pūrvavat kumbhakād anu /
śanais tu ghrāṇarandhrābhyāṃ recayed anilaṃ sudhīḥ //
jihvayā vāyum ākṛṣya pūrvavat kuṃbhakād anu |
śanais tu ghrāṇarandhrābhyāṃ recayed anilaṃ sudhīḥ ||
kākacañcuvad āsyena śītalaṃ salilaṃ pibet |
prāṇaṃ prāṇavidhānajño yogī bhavati nirjaraḥ ||
jihvayā vāyum ākṛṣya pūrvavat kumbhakād anu |
śanair aśītiparyantaṃ recayed anilaṃ sudhīḥ ||
jihvayā vāyum ākṛṣya pūrvavat kumbhakād anu |
śanais tu ghrāṇārandhrābhyāṃ recayed anilaṃ suddhīḥ ||
jihvayā vāyum ākṛṣya pūrvavat kumbhakād anu |
śanais tu ghrāṇarandhrābhyāṃ recayed anilaṃ sudhīḥ ||
kākacañcuvad āsyaṃ ca kṛtvā vāyuṃ sasūtkṛtam |
ādāya nāsārandhreṇa punas taṃ śvasanaṃ tyajet ||
śītalīkaraṇākhyo ’yaṃ yogas tu jvarapittahṛt |
गुल्मप्लीहादिकान्दोषान् ज्वरं पित्तं क्षुधां तृषां ।
विषाणि शीतली नाम कुम्भकोऽयं निहन्ति च ॥
gulmaplīhādikān doṣān jvaraṃ pittaṃ kṣudhāṃ tṛṣāṃ /
viṣāṇi śītalī nāma kumbhako’yaṃ nihanti ca //
An antecedent to a cooling practice involving the tongue can be found in the Kaulajñānanirṇaya (6.23–24), which mentions a point between the two front teeth that is cool to touch with the tongue:
dvaurājadantamadhyasthaṃ bindurūpaṃ vyavasthitam |
amṛtaṃ taṃ vijānīyād valīpalitanāśanam ||
śītalasparśasaṃsthāne rasanāṃ kṛtvā tu buddhimān |
valīpalitanirmuktaḥ sarvavyādhivivarjitaḥ ||
उदस्य कुम्भीरथह शातकुम्भजाः
udasya kumbhīr athaha śātakumbhajāḥ
gulmaplīhādikā doṣāḥ kṣayaṃ yānti pittaṃ jvaraṃ |
viṣāṇi śītalī nāma kuṃbhako ’yaṃ nihanti ca ||
gulmaplīhodaraṃ doṣaṃ jvarapittakṣudhātṛṣāḥ |
viṣāṇi śītalī nāma kumbhako ’yaṃ nihanti ca ||
°tṛṣāḥ ] °tṛṣā J,n1; °tṛṣaḥ T,t1
gulmaplīhodaraṃ cāpi vātapittaṃ kṣudhāṃ tṛṣām |
viṣāṇi śītalī nāma kumbhako vinihanti ca ||
gulmaplīhādikān doṣān jvaraṃ pittaṃ kṣudhāṃ tṛṣām |
anyāṃś ca śītalī nāma kumbhako ’yaṃ nihanti hi ||
अथ भस्त्रिका ।
ऊर्वोरुपरि चेद्धत्ते उभे पादतले तथा ।
पद्मासनं भवेत्सम्यक् सर्वपापप्रणाशनम् ॥
atha bhastrikā /
ūrvor upari ced dhatte ubhe pādatale tathā /
padmāsanaṃ bhavet samyak sarvapāpapraṇāśanam //
ūrvor upari ced dhatte ubhe pādatale tathā |
padmāsanaṃ bhavet samyak sarvapāpapraṇāśanam ||
bhastrikā
ūrvor upari saṃsthāpya ubhe pādatale tathā |
padmāsanaṃ bhavet samyak sarvapāpapraṇāśanam ||
atha bhastrikā
ūrvor upari cādhatte ubhe pādatale tathā |
padmāsanaṃ bhavet samyak sarvapāpapraṇaśanam ||
सम्यक्पद्मासनं बद्ध्वा समग्रीवोदरः सुधीः ।
मुखं संयम्य यत्नेन प्राणं घ्राणेन रेचयेत् ॥*
samyak padmāsanaṃ baddhvā samagrīvodaraḥ sudhīḥ /
mukhaṃ saṃyamya yatnena prāṇaṃ ghrāṇena recayet //*
tataḥ padmāsanaṃ baddhvā samagrīvodaraḥ sudhīḥ |
mukhaṃ saṃyamya yatnena prāṇaṃ ghrāṇena recayet ||
samyak padmāsanaṃ badhvā samagrīvodaraḥ sudhīḥ |
mukhaṃ saṃyamya yatnena prāṇaṃ ghrāṇena recayet ||
samyak padmāsanaṃ baddhvā samagrīvodaraḥ śanaiḥ |
mukhaṃ saṃyamya yatnena prāṇaṃ ghrāṇena recayet ||
यथा लगति हृत्कण्ठकपाले सस्वनं ततः ।
वेगेन पूरयेत्किंचित् हृत्पद्मावधि मारुतम् ॥
yathā lagati hṛtkaṇṭhakapāle sasvanaṃ tataḥ /
vegena pūrayet kiṃcit hṛtpadmāvadhi mārutam //
Most witnesses have hṛtkaṇṭhe, which we have understand as a dual accusative. One would expect kapāla also to be in the accusative, but we have understood it as a locative sg. with sasvanam.
yathā lagati kaṇṭhāt tu kapāle sasvanaṃ tataḥ |
vegena pūrayet kiṃ cit hṛtpadmāvadhi mārutam ||
yathā lagati hṛtkaṇṭhe kapālāvadhi pūrayet |
vegena pūrayet samyag hṛtpadmāvadhi mārutam ||
yathā lagati hṛtkaṇṭhakapāleṣu ca sasvanam |
vegena pūrayet kiñ cit hṛtpadmāvadhi mārutam ||
पुनर्विरेचयेत्तद्वत्पूरयेच्च पुनः पुनः ।
यथैव लोहकाराणां भस्त्रा वेगेन चाल्यते ॥
punar virecayet tadvat pūrayec ca punaḥ punaḥ /
yathaiva lohakārāṇāṃ bhastrā vegena cālyate //
punar virecayet tadvat pūrayec ca punaḥ punaḥ |
yathaiva lohakārāṇāṃ bhastrā vegena cālyate ||
yathaiva lohakārāṇāṃ bhastrī vegena cālyate |
bhastrī ] bhastrā n4
punar virecayet tadvat pūrayitvā punaḥ punaḥ |
yathaiva lohakārāṇāṃ bhastrā vegena cālyate ||
punar virecayet tadvat pūrayec ca punaḥ punaḥ |
yathaiva lohakārāṇāṃ bhastrā vegena cālyate || 113 ||
तथैव स्वशरीरस्थं चालयेत्पवनं सुधीः ।
यदा श्रमो भवेद्देहे तदा सूर्येण पूरयेत् ॥
tathaiva svaśarīrasthaṃ cālayet pavanaṃ sudhīḥ /
yadā śramo bhaved dehe tadā sūryeṇa pūrayet //
Most of the witnesses (including α) have dhiyā at the end of the second verse quarter, but the manuscripts of the source text and the Haṭharatnāvalī have sudhīḥ. Since the subject of the simile is bhastrā, one would expect the subject of cālayet, which must be different, to be stated (as is the case with sudhīḥ).
tathaiva svaśarīrasthaṃ cālayet pavanaṃ sudhīḥ |
yadā śramo bhaved dehe tadā sūryeṇa pūrayet |
tathaiva svaśarīrasthaṃ cālayet pavanaṃ sudhīḥ ||
yathā śramo bhaved dehe tathā sūryeṇa pūrayet |
tathaiva svaśarīrasthaś cālyate pavano dhiyā |
yathā śramo bhaved dehe tathā vegena pūrayet ||
tathaiva svaśarīrasthaṃ cālayet pavanaṃ dhiyā |
yadā śramo bhaved dehe tadā sūryeṇa recayet ||
यथोदरं भवेत्पूर्णं पवनेन तथा लघु ।
धारयेन्नासिकां मध्यातर्जनीभ्यां विना दृढम् ॥
yathodaraṃ bhavet pūrṇaṃ pavanena tathā laghu /
dhārayen nāsikāṃ madhyātarjanībhyāṃ vinā dṛḍham //
Only two of the collated witnesses (J7, V15) have madhyātarjanībhyāṃ (`with the middle and index fingers’) and this reading is not well attested by the manuscripts of the source text and testimonia. To hold the nose without the middle and index fingers is consistent with the way alternate nostril breathing is done in modern yoga (e.g., Iyengar 1991: 443–444). However, the reading of many manuscripts suggests that the nose was held by all the fingers of both hands, except the index fingers (nāsikāmadhye tarjanībhyāṃ vinā), which seems highly impracticable, or that the nose was held by only the index fingers of both hands (nāsikāmadhye tarjanībhyāṃ tathā). It is likely that scribes changed madhyātarjanībhyāṃ to madhye tarjanībhyāṃ or madhyaṃ tarjanībhyāṃ because of the pāda break.
yathodaraṃ bhavet pūrṇaṃ pavanena tathā laghu |
dhārayan nāsikā madhyātarjanībhyāṃ vinā dṛḍhaṃ |
yathodaraṃ bhavet pūrṇaṃ pavanena tathā laghu ||
dhārayen nāsikāṃ madhyātarjanībhyāṃ vinā dṛḍham |
23c madhyā ] madhye N,n1,n3,n4,J,T,t1
yathodaraṃ bhavet pūrṇaṃ pavanena tathā laghu |
dhārayen nāsikāṃ madhyatarjanībhyāṃ vinā dṛḍham ||
yathodaraṃ bhavet pūrṇaṃ pavanena tathā laghu |
dhārayen nāsikāmadhye tarjanībhyāṃ vinā dṛḍham ||
कुम्भकं पूर्ववत्कृत्वा रेचयेदिडयानिलम् ।
वातपित्तश्लेष्महरं शरीराग्निविवर्धनम् ॥
kumbhakaṃ pūrvavat kṛtvā recayed iḍayānilam /
vātapittaśleṣmaharaṃ śarīrāgnivivardhanam //
शतं चैका च हृदयस्य नाड्यस्
तासां मूर्धानमभिनिःसृतैका
तयोर्ध्वमायन्नमृतत्वमेति
विष्वङ्ङन्या उत्क्रमणे भवन्ति
śataṃ caikā ca hṛdayasya nāḍyas
tāsāṃ mūrdhānam abhiniḥsṛtaikā
tayordhvam āyann amṛtatvam eti
viṣvaṅṅ anyā utkramaṇe bhavanti
kumbhakaṃ pūrvavat kṛtvā recayed iḍayānilam ||
kaṇṭhotthitānalaharaṃ śarīrāgnivivardhanam |
kumbhakaṃ pūrvavat kṛtvā recayed iḍayānilam ||
vātapittaśleṣmaharaṃ śarīrāgnivivardhanam |
kumbhakaṃ pūrvavat kṛtvā recayed iḍayā tataḥ |
vātapittaśleṣmaharaṃ śarīrāgnivivardhanam ||
kumbhakaṃ pūrvavat kṛtvā recayed iḍayā śanaiḥ |
vātapittaśleṣmaharaṃ śarīrāgnivivardhanam ||
कुण्डलीबोधकं वज्रं पापघ्नं सुखदं शुभम् ।
ब्रह्मनाडीमुखे संस्थकफाद्यर्गलनाशनम् ॥
kuṇḍalībodhakaṃ vajraṃ pāpaghnaṃ sukhadaṃ śubham /
brahmanāḍīmukhe saṃsthakaphādyargalanāśanam //
The reading vajraṃ in the first verse quarter is an emendation based on the manuscripts of the Gorakṣaśataka, the source text for this verse. Some manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā have readings close to vajraṃ, such as vipra (V1, P15) and vakra (G11), which suggest that vajraṃ was changed at an early stage of the transmission. The α group have cakraṃ, which could be understood as a weapon (i.e., the discus often associated with Viṣṇu), but such a meaning would be rather unusual in yoga texts, where the term cakra is used so frequently in contexts of the yogic body.
शतं चैका च हृदयस्य नाड्यस्
तासां मूर्धानमभिनिःसृतैका
तयोर्ध्वमायन्नमृतत्वमेति
विष्वङ्ङन्या उत्क्रमणे भवन्ति
śataṃ caikā ca hṛdayasya nāḍyas
tāsāṃ mūrdhānam abhiniḥsṛtaikā
tayordhvam āyann amṛtatvam eti
viṣvaṅṅ anyā utkramaṇe bhavanti
kuṇḍalībodhakaṃ vajraṃ pāpaghnaṃ śubhadaṃ sukham |
brahmanāḍīmukhāntaḥsthakaphādyargalanāśanam ||
brahmanāḍīmukhe saṃsthakaphādyargalanāśanam |
kuṇḍalībodhanaṃ kuryāt pāpaghnaṃ sukhadaṃ śubham |
brahmanāḍīmukhe saṃsthaṃ kapāṭārgalanāśanam ||
kuṇḍalībodhanaṃ sarvadoṣaghnaṃ sukhadaṃ śubham |
brahmanāḍīmukhāntasthakaphādyargalanāśanam ||
गुणत्रयसमुद्भूतग्रन्थित्रयविभेदकम् ।
विशेषेणैव कर्तव्यं भस्त्राख्यं कुम्भकं त्विदम् ॥
guṇatrayasamudbhūtagranthitrayavibhedakam /
viśeṣeṇaiva kartavyaṃ bhastrākhyaṃ kumbhakaṃ tv idam //
In the first verse quarter, nearly all of the manuscripts, including the α group, have °gātrasamudbhūta° (`arisen in the limbs/body’), which is rather meaningless here since the three knots are in the central channel. It is probable that samyaggātra° is a corruption of guṇatraya°, which is attested by the manuscripts of the source text, the Gorakṣaśataka, two of the available manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā (N21, Bo1) and the Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā. In the Gorakṣaśataka, it is stated clearly that each of the knots arise from one of the three guṇas: brahmagranthi from rajas (78cd), viṣṇugranthi from sattva (79cd) and rudragranthi from tamas (80cd). When the verses on bhastrā were extracted from the Gorakṣaśataka without the context of the knots and guṇas, the meaning of guṇa-traya-sam-udbhūta-granthi-traya° (`the three knots that have arisen from the three guṇas’) was lost early in the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā.
guṇatrayasamudbhūtagranthitrayavibhedakam |
viśeṣeṇaiva kartavyaṃ bhastrākhyaṃ kuṃbhakaṃ tv idam ||
viśeṣenaiva kartavyaṃ bhastrākhyaṃ kumbhakaṃ tv idam ||
samyaggātrasamudbhūtagranthitrayavibhedanam |
viśeṣeṇaiva kartavyaṃ bhastrākhyaṃ kumbhakaṃ tv idam ||
samyaggātrasamudbhūtagranthitrayavibhedanam |
viśeṣeṇaiva karttavyaṃ bhastrākhyaṃ kumbhakaṃ tv idam ||
guṇatrayasamudbhūtagranthitrayavibhedakam |
viśeṣeṇaiva karttavyaṃ bhastrākhyaṃ kumbhakaṃ svayam ||
अथ भ्रामरी ।
वेगोद्घोषं पूरकं भृङ्गनादं
भृङ्गीनादं रेचकं मन्दमन्दम् ।
योगीन्द्राणामेवमभ्यासयोगा-
च्चित्ते जाता काचिदानन्दलीला ॥
atha bhrāmarī /
vegodghoṣaṃ pūrakaṃ bhṛṅganādaṃ
bhṛṅgīnādaṃ recakaṃ mandamandam /
yogīndrāṇām evam abhyāsayogā-
c citte jātā kācid ānandalīlā //
In the first two pādas we are understanding the usually masculine pūraka and recaka to be neuter nominatives. When explaining this verse, Brahmānanda (Jyotsnā 2.68) supplies the gerund kṛtvā with pūrakaṃ and kuryāt with recakaṃ, but it is unlikely that the author intended this. The compound vegodghoṣaṃ (close to vegoghoṣaṃ in α1) is rather unusual. We have understood it according to the commentator Bālakṛṣṇa’s gloss: `an inhalation in which sound is produced by force’ (vegena sañjāta udghoṣo yasmin pūrake). Many manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā, including the α group, have ānandamūrcchā at the end of the verse, instead of ānandalīlā, which we have adopted and which is supported by β2 and the γ group, as well as the most important testimonia (i.e.~the Haṭharatnāvalī, Yogacintāmaṇi and Yuktabhavadeva). The reading ānanda-mūrcchā is probably the result of dittography as the heading atha mūrcchā follows this verse. It has persisted in the transmission because ānandamūrcchā makes some sense by itself (`swooning through bliss’), although when it is read with the rest of the verse quarter, the meaning is somewhat odd (`swooning through bliss arises in the mind’).
atha bhrāmarī---
vegodghoṣaṃ pūrakaṃ bhṛṅganādaṃ
bhṛṅgīnādaṃ recakaṃ mandamandam |
yogīndrāṇāṃ nityam abhyāsayogāc
citte jātā kā cid ānandalīlā ||
līlā ]°mūrcchā N,n1,n2,n3,n4,J,T,t1
bhramarī—
vegodghoṣaṃ pūrakaṃ bhṛṅganādaṃ
bhṛṅgīnādaṃ recakaṃ mandamandam |
yogīndrāṇāṃ nityam abhyāsayogāc
citte jātā kācid ānandalīlā ||
atha bhrāmarī---
vegodghoṣaṃ pūrakaṃ bhṛṃganādaṃ
recakaṃ mandamandam |
yogīndrāṇāmevamabhyāsayogāc
citte jātā kācid ānandalīlā ||
vegākṛṣṭiṃ pūrakaṃ bhṛṅganādaṃ
bhaṅgīnādaṃ recakaṃ mandaṃ mandaṃ |
yogīdrāṇām evam abhyāsayogac
cite jātā kācid ānandamūrchā ||
vegodghoṣam iti vā pāṭhaḥ |
aliśabdayutaṃ vegāt pūrayet kumbhayet tataḥ |
sāliśabdāc chanai rekāt bhrāmarīkumbhako muneḥ ||
ānandalīlāṃ kurute bhrāmarīkumbhako muneḥ || 169 ||
anilaṃ mandavegena bhrāmarīkumbhakaṃ caret |
mandaṃ mandaṃ recayed vāyuṃ bhṛṅganādaṃ tato bhavet || 7.10 ||
antaḥsthaṃ bhramarīnādaṃ śrutvā tatra mano nayet |
samādhir jāyate tatra ānandaḥ so ’ham ity ataḥ || 7.11 ||
अथ मूर्छा ।
पूरकान्ते गाढतरं बद्ध्वा जालन्धरं शनैः ।
रेचयेन्मूर्छनाख्येयं मनोमूर्छासुखप्रदा ॥
atha mūrchā /
pūrakānte gāḍhataraṃ baddhvā jālandharaṃ śanaiḥ /
recayen mūrchanākhyeyaṃ manomūrchāsukhapradā //
The Jālandhara lock is explained at 3.67–70.
atha mūrcchā---
pūrakānte gāḍhataraṃ baddhva jālandharaṃ śanaiḥ |
recayen mūrcchanākhyo ’yaṃ manomūrcchāsukhapradā ||
mūrchā—
pūrakānte gāḍhataraṃ bandho jālandharaḥ śanaiḥ |
recayen mūrchanākhyo ’yaṃ manomūrchāsukhapradā ||
atha mūrcchā---
pūrakānte gāḍhataraṃ baddhvā jālandharaṃ śanaiḥ ||
recayen mūrcchanākhyeyaṃ manomūrcchāsukhapradā || 120 ||
āpūrya kumbhitaṃ prāṇaṃ badhvā jālandharaṃ śanaiḥ |
recayen mūrcchanākumbho manomūrcchāsukhapradā ||
अथ प्लावनी । (β1, β2, ε3 and χ)
अन्तःप्रवर्तितोद्गारमारुतापूरितोदरः ।
पयस्यगाधेऽपि सुखात् प्लवते पद्मपत्रवत् ॥
इति प्लावनीकुंभकं । (α1, α2, ε1 and ε2)
atha plāvanī / (β1, β2, ε3 and χ)
antaḥpravartitodgāramārutāpūritodaraḥ /
payasy agādhe’pi sukhāt plavate padmapatravat //
iti plāvanīkuṃbhakaṃ / (α1, α2, ε1 and ε2)
The heading atha plāvanī is not found in α1 (which follows the description with plāvanīkumbhakaṃ), but we have adopted it to be consistent with the other kumbhaka descriptions. We have understood udgāramāruta to refer to the breath of eructation, i.e.~the nāga breath as described in e.g.~Vivekamārtaṇḍa 36. V19, P28, the Yogacintāmaṇi and the Haṭharatnāvalī omit this verse and accordingly do not mention plāvinī in verse 2.44, substituting it with kevala.
antaḥpravarttitādhāramārutāpūritodaraḥ |
payasy agādhe ’pi sukhāt plavate padmapatravat ||
ayam eva plāvinī kumbhako’pi |
yatheṣṭaṃ pūrayed vāyuṃ baddhe jālandhare dṛḍhe |
hṛdi dhṛtvā jale suptvā plāvinīkumbhako bhavet || 171 ||
plāvanīkumbhakaṃ lakṣayati antar iti |
antaḥsañcāritenāpānavāyunā pūritam udaraṃ yasyeti vigrahaḥ |
अथ केवलकुम्भकम् ।
प्राणायामस्त्रिधा प्रोक्तो रेचपूरककुम्भकैः ।
सहितः केवलश्चेति कुम्भको द्विविधो मतः ॥
atha kevalakumbhakam /
prāṇāyāmas tridhā prokto recapūrakakumbhakaiḥ /
sahitaḥ kevalaś ceti kumbhako dvividho mataḥ //
The import of the name sahita, “accompanied”, is that kumbhaka is accompanied by inhalation and exhalation, and of kevala, “isolated”, that it is not.
प्राणः स्वदेहजो वायुरायामस्तन्निरोधनम्
बहिर्यद्रेचनं वायोरुदराद्रेचकः स्मृतः
निष्क्रम्य नासाविवरादशेषं
प्राणं बहिः शून्यमिवानिलेन
निरुच्छ्वसंस्तिष्ठति रुद्धवायुः
स रेचको नाम महानिरोधः
बाह्यादापूरणं वायोरुदरे पूरको हि सः
बाह्ये स्थितं प्राणपुटेन वायुम्
आकृष्य तेनैव शनैः समन्तात्
नाडीश्च सर्वाः परिपूरयेद्यः
स पूरको नाम महानिरोधः
सम्पूर्य कुम्भवद्वायोर्धारणं कुम्भको भवेत्
न रेचको नैव च पूरको 'त्र
नासापुटान्तस्थितमेव वायुम्
सुनिश्चलं धारयते क्रमेण
कुम्भाख्यमेतत्प्रवदन्ति तज्ज्ञाः
आरेच्यापूर्य वा कुर्यात्स वै सहितकुम्भकः
prāṇaḥ svadehajo vāyur āyāmas tannirodhanam
bahir yad recanaṃ vāyor udarād recakaḥ smṛtaḥ
niṣkramya nāsāvivarād aśeṣaṃ
prāṇaṃ bahiḥ śūnyam ivānilena
nirucchvasaṃs tiṣṭhati ruddhavāyuḥ
sa recako nāma mahānirodhaḥ
bāhyād āpūraṇaṃ vāyor udare pūrako hi saḥ
bāhye sthitaṃ prāṇapuṭena vāyum
ākṛṣya tenaiva śanaiḥ samantāt
nāḍīś ca sarvāḥ paripūrayed yaḥ
sa pūrako nāma mahānirodhaḥ
sampūrya kumbhavad vāyor dhāraṇaṃ kumbhako bhavet
na recako naiva ca pūrako 'tra
nāsāpuṭāntasthitam eva vāyum
suniścalaṃ dhārayate krameṇa
kumbhākhyam etat pravadanti tajjñāḥ
ārecyāpūrya vā kuryāt sa vai sahitakumbhakaḥ
prāṇaś ca dehajo vāyur āyāmaḥ kumbhakaḥ smṛtaḥ |
sa eva dvividhaḥ proktaḥ sahitaḥ kevalas tathā ||
prāṇāyāmas tribhiḥ prokto recapūrakakumbhakaiḥ || 2 ||
prāṇāyāmas tridhā prokto recapūrakakumbhakaiḥ |
bahir virocanaṃ vāyor udarād recakaḥ smṛtaḥ ||
bāhyād āpūraṇaṃ vāyor udare pūrakaḥ smṛtaḥ |
saṃpūrṇakuṃbhavad vāyor dhāraṇaṃ kumbhako bhavet |
sahitaḥ kevalaś ceti kumbhako dvividho mataḥ ||
atha kevalaḥ
prāṇāyāmas tridhā prokto recapūrakakumbhakaiḥ |
sahitaḥ kevalaś ceti kumbhako dvividho mataḥ ||
विरेच्यापूर्य यत्कुर्यात् स वै सहितकुम्भकः ।
यावत्केवलसिद्धिः स्यात् तावत्सहितमभ्यसेत् ॥
virecyāpūrya yat kuryāt sa vai sahitakumbhakaḥ /
yāvat kevalasiddhiḥ syāt tāvat sahitam abhyaset //
We have adopted the Vasiṣṭhasaṃhitā’s reading, which is very close to that of δ1 (ārecyāpūrya yat kuryāt) and δ3 (ārecyāpūrya yaḥ kuryāt) and similar to α2 (recapūrya y[a]t kāryaḥ). It is the only one that makes sense of 2.73ab. It appears that the relative pronoun dropped out of the first verse quarter early in the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā and scribes have tried in various unsuccessful ways to restore some sense. Cf.~Marcinowska-Rosól & Sellmer 2021, p. 102f.
आरेच्यापूर्य वा कुर्यात्स वै सहितकुम्भकः
ārecyāpūrya vā kuryāt sa vai sahitakumbhakaḥ
आरेच्यापूर्य वा कुर्यात्स वै सहितकुम्भकः
ārecyāpūrya vā kuryāt sa vai sahitakumbhakaḥ
virecyāpūrya yaṃ kuryāt sa vai sahitakumbhakaḥ
sahitaṃ kevalaṃ cātha kumbhakaṃ nityam abhyaset ||
yāvat kevalasiddhiḥ syāt tāvat sahitam abhyaset |
28a virecyāpūrya ] recyavāpūrya yat la, ārecyāpūrya yaḥ śa
recya cāpūrya yaḥ kuryāt sa vai sahitakumbhakaḥ ||
sahitaṃ kevalaṃ cātha kumbhakaṃ nityam abhyaset |
yāvat kevalasiddhiḥ syāt tāvat sahitam abhyaset ||
sahito recapūrābhyāṃ tasmāt sahitakumbhakaḥ |
yāvat kevalasiddhiḥ syāt tāvat sahitam abhyaset |
sahitaṃ kevalaṃ vātha kuṃbhakaṃ nityam abhyaset |
yāvat kevalasiddhis syāt tāvat sahitam abhyaset ||
recya vā pūrakaḥ kāryaḥ śanaiḥ sahitakumbhakaḥ |
yāvat kevalasiddhiḥ syāt sahitaṃ tāvad abhyaset ||
रेचकं पूरकं मुक्त्वा सुखं यद्वायुधारणम् ।
प्राणायामोऽयमित्युक्तः स वै केवलकुम्भकः ॥
recakaṃ pūrakaṃ muktvā sukhaṃ yad vāyudhāraṇam /
prāṇāyāmo’yam ity uktaḥ sa vai kevalakumbhakaḥ //
On this verse, see Marcinkowska-Rosół and Sellmer 2020: 102–105.
recanaṃ pūraṇaṃ muktvā sukhaṃ yad vāyudhāraṇam |
prāṇāyāmo ’yam ity uktaḥ sa vai kevalakumbhakaḥ ||
recakaṃ pūrakaṃ muktvā sukhaṃ yad vāyudhāraṇam |
prāṇāyāmo ’yam ity uktaḥ sa vai kevalakumbhakaḥ ||
atha kevalaḥ---
recakaṃ pūrakaṃ muktvā sukhaṃ yad vāyudhāraṇam |
prāṇāyāmo ’yam ity uktaḥ sa vai kevalakumbhakaḥ ||
recakaṃ pūrakaṃ muktvā yat sukhaṃ vāyudhāraṇam |
prāṇāyāmo ’yam ity uktaḥ sa vai kevalakumbhakaḥ ||
recakaṃ pūrakaṃ muktvā yad vāyudhāraṇam |
prāṇāyāmo ’yam ity uktaḥ sa vai kevalakumbhakaḥ ||
केवले कुम्भके सिद्धे रेचपूरकवर्जिते ।
न तस्य दुर्लभं किंचित् त्रिषु लोकेषु विद्यते ॥
kevale kumbhake siddhe recapūrakavarjite /
na tasya durlabhaṃ kiṃcit triṣu lokeṣu vidyate //
kevale kumbhake siddhe recapūrakavarjite |
na tasya durlabhaṃ kiṃ cit triṣu lokeṣu vidyate ||
kevale kumbhake siddhe recapūraṇavarjite |
na tasya durlabhaṃ kiṃ cit triṣu lokeṣu vidyate ||
kevale kumbhake siddhe recapūrakavarjite |
na tasya durlabhaṃ kiñ cit triṣu lokeṣu vidyate ||
kevale kumbhake siddhe recapūraṇavarjite |
na tasya durlabhaṃ kiṃ cit triṣu lokeṣu vidyate ||
kevale kumbhake siddhe recapūrakavarjite |
na tasya durlabhaṃ kiñcit triṣu lokeṣuṃ vidyate ||
शक्तः केवलकुम्भेन यथेष्टं वायुधारणम् ।
राजयोगपदं चैव लभते नात्र संशयः ॥
śaktaḥ kevalakumbhena yatheṣṭaṃ vāyudhāraṇam /
rājayogapadaṃ caiva labhate nātra saṃśayaḥ //
śaktaḥ kevalakumbhena yatheṣṭaṃ vāyudhāraṇam |
etādṛśo rājayogo kathito nātra saṃśayaḥ ||
śaktaḥ kevalakumbhena yatheṣṭaṃ vāyudhāraṇam |
rājayogapadaṃ samyak labhate nātra saṃśayaḥ ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām–
śaktaḥ kevalakumbhena yatheṣṭaṃ vāyudhāraṇe |
rājayogapadaṃ caiva labhate nātra saṃśayaḥ || 59 ||
हठं विना राजयोगो राजयोगं विना हठः ।
न सिध्यति ततो युग्ममा निष्पत्तेः समभ्यसेत् ॥
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ /
na sidhyati tato yugmam ā niṣpatteḥ samabhyaset //
On the niṣpatti stage see 4.23–25.
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ |
na sidhyati tato yugmam āniṣpatteḥ samabhyaset
[middle hemistich not in mss. I, III, IV, VII, IX, X, XII, XIV--XVI]
tasmāt pravartate yogī haṭhe sadgurumārgataḥ ||
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ |
vyāptiḥ syād avinābhūtā śrīrājahaṭhayogayoḥ ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ |
na sidhyati tato yugmaṃ manīṣy etau samabhyaset |
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogaṃ rājayogaṃ vinā haṭham |
ye vai caranti tān manye prayāsaphalavarjitān iti ||
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ |
na sidhyati tato yugmam āniṣpatteḥ samācaret ||
कुम्भितप्राणरेचान्ते कुर्याच्चित्तं निराश्रयम् ।
एवमभ्यासयोगेन राजयोगपदं व्रजेत् ॥
kumbhitaprāṇarecānte kuryāc cittaṃ nirāśrayam /
evam abhyāsayogena rājayogapadaṃ vrajet //
The reading kumbhitaḥ, which is attested by α1 and the testimonia, does not make sense here because the subject must be the yogi (prānaḥ would be unmetrical). In other texts, the word kumbhita is used to qualify the breath and means `retained’ (e.g., Yogabīja 94, Kumbhakapaddhati 127, Yuktabhavadeva 8.32, etc.).
kumbhitaḥ prāṇarecānte kuryyāc cittaṃ nirāmayam ||
evamabhyāsayogena rājayogapadaṃ vrajet || 128 ||
kumbhitaḥ prāṇarecānte kuryyāc cittaṃ nirāśrayam |
evamabhyāsayogena rājayogaṃ labhet punaḥ || 60 ||
nirāśrayaṃ saṃkalparahitam ||
tad eva visadayati kumbhakam iti || kevalakumbhakābhyāsena cittaṃ dagdhaparṇavat nirvāsanaṃ bhavatītyarthaḥ || anyad vyākhyātam || 67 ||
कुम्भकाद्वर्धते वायुस् ततोऽग्निश्च प्रवर्धते ।
बुद्धा कुण्डलिनी तस्मात् सैव द्वारं प्रयच्छति ॥ (Γ)
kumbhakād vardhate vāyus tato’gniś ca pravardhate /
buddhā kuṇḍalinī tasmāt saiva dvāraṃ prayacchati // (Γ)
कुम्भकात्कुण्डलीबोधः कुण्डलीबोधतो भवेत् ।
अनर्गला सुषुम्णा च हठसिद्धिश्च जायते ॥
kumbhakāt kuṇḍalībodhaḥ kuṇḍalībodhato bhavet /
anargalā suṣumṇā ca haṭhasiddhiś ca jāyate //
kumbhakāt kuṇḍalībodhaḥ kuṇḍalībodhato bhavet |
anargalaḥ suṣumṇānto haṭhasiddhiś ca jāyate ||
anargalaḥ ] L, antargataḥ N
kumbhakāt kuṇḍalībodhaḥ kuṇḍalībodhato bhavet |
anargalā suṣumnā ca haṭhasiddhiśca jāyate ||
kumbhakāt kuṇḍalībodhaḥ kuṇḍalībodhato bhavet |
anargalā suṣumṇā ca haṭhasiddhiḥ prajāyate || iti ||
kumbhakaprāṇāyāmāt bodho jāgaraṇam | suṣumṇā anargalā bādhakarahitā bhavati | tato yogasiddhir bhavati iti ||
वपुःकृशत्वं वदने प्रसन्नता
नादस्फुटत्वं नयने सुनिर्मले ।
आरोग्यता बिन्दुजयोऽग्निदीपनं
नाडीविशुद्धिर्हठसिद्धिलक्षणम् ॥
vapuḥkṛśatvaṃ vadane prasannatā
nādasphuṭatvaṃ nayane sunirmale /
ārogyatā bindujayo’gnidīpanaṃ
nāḍīviśuddhir haṭhasiddhilakṣaṇam //
vapuḥkṛśatvaṃ vadane prasannatā
nādaspuṭatvaṃ nayane ca nirmale |
arogatā bindujayo ’gnidīpanaṃ
nāḍīṣu śuddhir haṭhasiddhilakṣaṇam ||
vapuḥkṛśatvaṃ vadane prasannatā
nādasphuṭatvaṃ nayane sunirmale |
arogitā bindujayo ’gnidīpanaṃ
nāḍīviśuddhir haṭhasiddhilakṣaṇam ||
vapuḥkṛśatvaṃ vadane prasannatā
nādasphuṭatvaṃ nayane ca nirmale |
arogatā bindujayo’gnidīpanaṃ
nāḍīviśuddhir haṭhasiddhilakṣaṇam ||
सशैलवनधात्रीणां यथाधारो ऽहिनायकः ।
सर्वेषां योगतन्त्राणां तथाधारो हि कुण्डली ॥
saśailavanadhātrīṇāṃ yathādhāro ’hināyakaḥ /
sarveṣāṃ yogatantrāṇāṃ tathādhāro hi kuṇḍalī //
The plural °dhātrīṇām is hard to construe. Only this world has mountains and forests, but we want a plural for the comparison with °tantrāṇām. Brahmānanda (Jyotsnā 3.1) understands °dhātrīṇām to refer to the different regions of the earth, even though the world (dhātrī) is a single entity (dhātryā ekatve ’pi deśabhedād bhedam ādāya bahuvacanam). A similar comment occurs in the Yogaprakāśikā 5.1 (yathā samastadvīpādisahitapṛthvī ādhāraḥ phaṇīndras tathā samastayogādhāraḥ kuṇḍalīty āha saśaileti). The author of the Haṭharatnāvalī circumvented this issue by adopting the reading °dhātryāḥ.
saśailavanadhātryās tu yathādhāro ’hināyakaḥ |
aśeṣayogatantrāṇāṃ tathādhāro hi kuṇḍalī ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
saśailavanadhātrīṇāṃ yathādhāro ’hināyakaḥ |
sarveṣāṃ yogatantrāṇāṃ tathādhāro hi kuṇḍalī ||
tatra haṭhapradīpikāyām--
saśailavanadhātrīṇāṃ yathādhāro ’hināyakaḥ |
sarveṣāṃ yogatantrāṇāṃ tathādhāro hi kuṇḍalī ||
सुप्ता गुरुप्रसादेन यदा जागर्ति कुण्डली ।
तदा सर्वाणि पद्मानि भिद्यन्ते ग्रन्थयोऽपि च ॥
suptā guruprasādena yadā jāgarti kuṇḍalī /
tadā sarvāṇi padmāni bhidyante granthayo’pi ca //
The usual meaning of jāgarti would be “is wakeful” rather than “awakens”, which explains the variant bodhitā.
suptā guruprasādena yadā jāgarti kuṇḍalī |
tadā sarvāṇi padmāni bhidyante granthayo ’pi ca ||
suptā guruprasādena bodhitā sukhadā bhavet |
tathā sarvāṇi padmāni bhidyante granthayo ’pi ca ||
suptā guruprasādena yadā jāgarti kuṇḍalī |
tadā sarvāṇi padmāni bhidyante granthayo ’pi ca ||
प्राणस्य शून्यपदवी* तदा राजपथायते ।
तदा चित्तं निरालम्बं तदा कालस्य वञ्चनम् ॥
prāṇasya śūnyapadavī* tadā rājapathāyate /
tadā cittaṃ nirālambaṃ tadā kālasya vañcanam //
prāṇasya śūnyapadavī tathā rājapathāyate |
tathā cittaṃ nirālambaṃ tathā kālasya vañcanam ||
शून्यपदवीति किम् ।
सुषुम्णा शून्यपदवी ब्रह्मरन्ध्रमहापथः ।
श्मशानं शाम्भवी मध्यमार्गश्चेत्येकवाचकाः ॥
śūnyapadavīti kim /
suṣumṇā śūnyapadavī brahmarandhramahāpathaḥ /
śmaśānaṃ śāmbhavī madhyamārgaś cety ekavācakāḥ //
avadhūtīpadaṃ ke cic chmaśānaṃ ca mahāpatham |
ke cid vadanti ādhārāṃ suṣumnāṃ ca sarasvatīm ||
mahāpathaṃ śmaśānaṃ ca suṣumnāpy ekam eva hi ||
nāmnāṃ matāntare bhedaḥ phale bhedo na vidyate |
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
suṣumṇā śūnyapadavī brahmarandhraṃ mahāpatham |
śmaśānī śāṃbhavī madhyamārgaś cety ekavācakā iti ||
prāṇasya śūnyapadavī mahārandhraṃ mahāpatham |
śmaśānaṃ śāmbhavī madhyamārgaś cety ekavācakam ||
तस्मात्सर्वप्रयत्नेन प्रबोधयितुमीश्वरीम् ।
ब्रह्मद्वारमुखे सुप्तां मुद्राभ्यासं समाचरेत् ॥
tasmāt sarvaprayatnena prabodhayitum īśvarīm /
brahmadvāramukhe suptāṃ mudrābhyāsaṃ samācaret //
tasmāt sarvaprayatnena prabodhayitum īśvarīm |
brahmadvāramukhe suptāṃ mudrābhyāsaṃ samācaret ||
tasmāt sarvaprayatnena prabodhayitum īśvarīm |
brahmadvāramukhe suptāṃ mudrābhyāsaparo bhavet ||
tasmāt sarvaprayatnena prabodhayitum īśvarīm |
brahmadvāramukhe suptāṃ mudrābhyāsaṃ samācaret ||
महामुद्रा महाबन्धो महावेधश्च खेचरी ।
उड्डियानं मूलबन्धो बन्धो जालन्धराभिधः ॥
mahāmudrā mahābandho mahāvedhaś ca khecarī /
uḍḍiyānaṃ mūlabandho bandho jālandharābhidhaḥ //
mahāmudrā mahābandho mahāvedhaś ca khecarī |
jālandharo mūlabandho viparītakṛtis tathā ||
mahāmudrā mahābandho mahāvedhas tṛtīyakaḥ |
uḍḍiyānaṃ mūlabandho bandho jālandharābhidhaḥ ||
mahāmudrā mahābandho mahāvedhaś ca khecarī |
uḍḍiyānaṃ mūlabandho bandho jālandharābhidhaḥ ||
mahāmudrā mahābandho mahāvedhaś ca khecarī |
uḍyānaṃ mūlabandhaś ca bandho jālandharas tathā ||
करणी विपरीताख्या वज्रोली शक्तिचालनम् ।
इदं मुद्रादिदशकं जरामरणनाशनम् ॥
karaṇī viparītākhyā vajrolī śakticālanam /
idaṃ mudrādidaśakaṃ jarāmaraṇanāśanam //
uḍyānaṃ caiva vajrolī daśamaṃ śakticālanam |
idaṃ hi mudrādaśakaṃ mudrāṇām uttamottamam ||
karaṇī viparītākhyā vajrolī śakticālanam |
sampradāyā khecarī sā daśa mudrāḥ prakīrtitāḥ ||
karaṇī viparītākhyā tathā vai śakticālanam |
etad dhi mudrānavakaṃ jarāmaraṇavarjitam ||
viparītakṛtiś caiva vajrolī śakticālanam |
idaṃ hi mudrādaśakaṃ mudrāṇām uttamomam ||
आदिनाथोदितं दिव्यम् अष्टैश्वर्यप्रदायकम् ।*
वल्लभं सर्वसिद्धानां दुर्लभं मरुतामपि ॥
ādināthoditaṃ divyam aṣṭaiśvaryapradāyakam /*
vallabhaṃ sarvasiddhānāṃ durlabhaṃ marutām api //
ādināthoditaṃ divyam aṣṭaiśvaryapradāyakam |
vallabhaṃ sarvasiddhānāṃ durlabhaṃ marutām api ||
ādināthoditaṃ samyagaṣṭaiśvaryapradāyakam |
vallabhaṃ sarvasiddhendradurlabhaṃ marutām api ||
गोपनीयं प्रयत्नेन यथा रत्नकरण्डकम् ।
कस्यचिन्नैव वक्तव्यं कुलस्त्रीसुरतं यथा ॥
gopanīyaṃ prayatnena yathā ratnakaraṇḍakam /
kasyacin naiva vaktavyaṃ kulastrīsurataṃ yathā //
gopanīyaṃ prayatnena yathā ratnakaraṇḍakam |
kasyacin naiva vaktavyaṃ kulastrīsurataṃ yathā ||
gopanīyaṃ prayatnena jarāmaraṇanāśanam |
kasyacinnaiva vaktavyaṃ kulastrīsurataṃ yathā ||
वज्रोली त्वमरोली च सहजोली त्रिधा मताः ।
एतेषां लक्षणं वक्ष्ये कर्तव्यं च विशेषतः ॥ (β2, βω and η2)
vajrolī tv amarolī ca sahajolī tridhā matāḥ /
eteṣāṃ lakṣaṇaṃ vakṣye kartavyaṃ ca viśeṣataḥ // (β2, βω and η2)
vajrolī cāmarolī ca sahajolī tridhā matā |
eteṣāṃ lakṣaṇaṃ vakṣye kartavyaṃ ca viśeṣataḥ ||
vajrolī ] vajrolir v.l.• cāmarolī ] amaroliś v.l.• sahajolī ] sahajolis v.l.
तत्र महामुद्रा ।
पादमूलेन वामेन योनिं संपीड्य दक्षिणम् ।
पादं प्रसारितं धृत्वा कराभ्यां पूरयेन्मुखे ॥
tatra mahāmudrā /
pādamūlena vāmena yoniṃ saṃpīḍya dakṣiṇam /
pādaṃ prasāritaṃ dhṛtvā karābhyāṃ pūrayen mukhe //
pādamūlena vāmena yoniṃ saṃpīḍya dakṣiṇam |
pādaṃ prasāritaṃ dhṛtvā karābhyāṃ pūrayen mukhe ||
dhṛtvā ] kṛtvā v.l.
yoniṃ saṃpīḍya vāmena pādamūlena yatnataḥ |
savyaṃ prasāritaṃ pādaṃ karābhyāṃ dhārayed dṛḍham ||
pādamūlena vāmena yoniṃ sampīḍya dakṣiṇam |
pādaṃ prasāritaṃ kṛtvā karābhyāṃ pūrayen mukham ||
mukham ] mukhe v.l.
pādamūlena vāmena yoniṃ saṃpīḍya dakṣiṇam |
pādaṃ prasāritaṃ dhṛtvā karābhyāṃ pūrayen mukham ||
pādamūlena vāmena yoniṃ sampīḍya dakṣiṇam |
pādaṃ prasāritaṃ kṛtvā karābhyāṃ dhārayed dṛḍham ||
कण्ठे बन्धं समारोप्य धारयेद्वायुमूर्ध्वतः ।
यथा दण्डाहतः सर्पो दण्डाकारः प्रजायते ॥
kaṇṭhe bandhaṃ samāropya dhārayed vāyum ūrdhvataḥ /
yathā daṇḍāhataḥ sarpo daṇḍākāraḥ prajāyate //
The instruction to hold the breath upwards (ūrdhvataḥ) is somewhat vague. In a commentarial passage on this verse in Yuktabhavadeva 7.187, Bhavadevamiśra clarifies this by saying, `one should hold it higher than the heart’ (hṛdayād ūrdhvato dhārayet).
kaṇṭhe bandhaṃ samāropya dhārayed vāyum ūrdhvataḥ |
yathā daṇḍāhataḥ sarpo daṇḍākāraḥ prajāyate ||
kaṇṭhe bandhaṃ samāropya pūrayed vāyum ūrdhvataḥ ||
yathā daṇḍāhataḥ sarpo daṇḍākāraḥ prajāyate |
kaṇṭhe bandhaṃ samāropya dhārayed vāyum ūrdhvataḥ |
yathā daṇḍāhataḥ sarpo daṇḍākāraḥ prajāyate ||
kaṇṭhe bandhaṃ samāropya dhārayed vāyum ūrdhvataḥ |
yathā daṇḍāhataḥ sarpo daṇḍākāraḥ prajāyate ||
ऋज्वीभूता तथा शक्तिः कुण्डली सहसा भवेत् ।
तदासौ मरणावस्था जायते द्विपुटाश्रिता ॥
ṛjvībhūtā tathā śaktiḥ kuṇḍalī sahasā bhavet /
tadāsau maraṇāvasthā jāyate dvipuṭāśritā //
This verse is taken from the Amaraugha, which uses the alchemical imagery of the Amṛtasiddhi to describe the stilling of kuṇḍalinī in the central channel. Drawing on Hellwig 2009:238–240, Mallinson and Szanto (2021:21) note that “In alchemical texts māraṇa (“killing”) involves heating a substance and thereby changing its state, usually through calcination or oxidation, so that it becomes inert. In the Amṛtasiddhi māraṇa and other derivatives of the root mṛ, “die”, are used to denote the stilling or stopping of either the breath or Bindu.” Thus when kuṇḍalinī is said to be in the state of maraṇa the meaning is that she is stilled. The dvipuṭa or “vessel with two halves” in which this occurs is the same as the Amṛtasiddhi’s saṃpuṭa, which, drawing on Hellwig 2009:342, Mallinson and Szanto (2021:22) say “consists of two puṭas joined together to form a sealed crucible for heating reagents without evaporation”. In the yoga of the Amṛtasiddhi, the bodily saṃpuṭa is formed by applying locks at the top and bottom of the central channel, i.e.~constricting the perineal region and the throat. In the Haṭhapradīpikā it is formed by pressing the perineum with the heel and constricting the throat. As Birch (2019: 971) notes, it is unlikely that later non-Buddhist authors understood maraṇāvasthā and dvipuṭa according to the alchemical metaphors of the Amṛtasiddhi. Later commentators take dvipuṭa as the two nostrils (e.g., Yuktabhavadeva 7.187, dvināsāpuṭa); the iḍā and piṅgalā channels (e.g., Jyotsnā 3.27, puṭayor dvayam iḍāpiṅgalayor yugmam); or the in and out flows of the breath (e.g., Yogaprakāśikā 5.16–17, vāyor bahirnirgamanam antaḥpraveśa iti yat puṭadvayaṃ tam). How these commentators understood asau māraṇāvasthā is less clear. Brahmānanda seems to take it as the death of prāṇa, or in other words, the absence of the breath, in the two nostrils (maraṇāvasthā jāyate kuṇḍalībodhe sati suṣumnāyāṃ praviṣṭe prāṇe dvayoḥ puṭayoḥ prāṇaviyogāt). Bhavadeva thought that kuṇḍalinī, along with prāṇa and apāna, remains in the two nostrils while the breath is being held (evaṃ vāyudhāraṇāyāṃ kriyamāṇāyāṃ vyākulā bhūtā kuṇḍalinī apānaprāṇābhyāṃ saha nāsāpuṭadvayāśritā bhavati). Others, such as Śivānanda and Bālakṛṣṇa, favour the reading tadā sā maraṇāvasthāṃ harate dvipuṭāśritām (or dvipuṭāśrayām), which is present in group 2 and 3 manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā. Bālakṛṣṇa understands this to mean that the great seal destroys death (maraṇāvasthāṃ harate mahāmudreti bhāvaḥ) but it could also mean that the awakened kuṇḍalinī destroys death, which is usually dependent on the in and out breaths.
ṛjvībhūtā tathā śaktiḥ kuṇḍalī sahasā bhavet |
tadāsau maraṇāvasthā jāyate dvipuṭāśritā ||
ṛjvībhūtā tathā śaktiḥ kuṇḍalī sahajā bhavet ||
tathā sā maraṇāvasthā jāyate dvipuṭīsthitā |
ṛjvībhūtā tathā śaktiḥ kuṇḍalī sahajā bhavet |
tathāsau maraṇāvasthāṃ harate dvipuṭāśrayām ||
dvipuṭā ] em., dvipaṭā° L, dvipadā° N.
ṛjvībhūtā tathā śaktiḥ kuṇḍalī sahasā bhavet |
tadāsau maraṇāvasthā jāyate dvipuṭāśritā ||
* ततः शनैः शनैरेव रेचयेन्न तु वेगतः ।
इयं खलु महामुद्रा महासिद्धैः प्रदर्शिता ॥
* tataḥ śanaiḥ śanair eva recayen na tu vegataḥ /
iyaṃ khalu mahāmudrā mahāsiddhaiḥ pradarśitā //
tataḥ śanaiḥ śanair eva recayen na tu vegataḥ |
iyaṃ khalu mahāmudrā mahāsiddhaiḥ pradṛśyate ||
महाक्लेशादयो दोषा हीयन्ते मरणादयः ।
महामुद्रां च तेनैव वदन्ति विबुधोत्तमाः ॥
mahākleśādayo doṣā hīyante maraṇādayaḥ /
mahāmudrāṃ ca tenaiva vadanti vibudhottamāḥ //
This verse might be explaining the name of mahāmudrā through assonance with mahākleśādayo, doṣā and maraṇādayaḥ in the first line.
mahākleśādayo doṣā bhidyante maraṇādayaḥ |
mahāmudrāṃ tu tenaiva vadanti vibudhottamāḥ ||
mahākleśādayo doṣā ] mahārogā mahākleśā v.l.
bhidyante ] jīryante v.l.
mahākleśā yato doṣā jīryante maraṇādayaḥ |
mahāmudrāṃ ca tenaiva vadanti vibudhottamā iti ||
mahākleśā yato doṣā jīryante maraṇādayaḥ |
mahāmudrā ca tām eva vadanti vibudhottamāḥ ||
चन्द्राङ्गे तु समभ्यस्य सूर्याङ्गे पुनरभ्यसेत् ।
यावत्तुल्या भवेत्संख्या ततो मुद्रां विसर्जयेत् ॥
candrāṅge tu samabhyasya sūryāṅge punar abhyaset /
yāvat tulyā bhavet saṃkhyā tato mudrāṃ visarjayet //
The terms candrāṅga and sūryāṅga are unusual and not used in other yoga texts outside the context of mahāmudrā. In Jyotsnā 3.15, Brahmānanda glosses candrāṅga as vāmāṅga (`the left side of the body’) and sūryāṅga as dakṣāṅga (`the right side of the body’) and goes on to explain the sequence of practice as follows: This is the sequence in the [practice]. Joining the heel of the bent left leg with the region of the perineum and holding the big toe of the extended right leg with bent index fingers bent is the practice, that is, the practice on the left side of the body (vāmāṅga). In this practice, the inhaled breath remains on the left side of the body. Joining the heel of the bent right leg with the region of the perineum and holding the big toe of the extended left leg with bent index fingers is the practice, that is, the practice on the right side of the body. In this practice, the inhaled breath remains on the right side of the body. atrāyaṃ kramaḥ | ākuñcitavāmapādapārṣṇiṃ yonisthāne saṃyojya prasāritadakṣiṇapādāṅguṣṭham ākuñcitatarjanībhyāṃ gṛhītvābhyāso vāmāṅge ’bhyāsaḥ | asminn abhyāse pūrito vāyur vāmāṅge tiṣṭhati | ākuñcita-dakṣa-pāda-pārṣṇiṃ yonisthāne saṃyojya prasārita-vāma-pādā-ṅguṣṭham ākuñcita-tarjanībhyāṃ gṛhītvābhyāso dakṣāṅge ’bhyāsaḥ | asminn abhyāse pūrito vāyur dakṣāṅge tiṣṭhati |
candrāṅge tu samabhyasya sūryāṅge punar abhyaset |
yāvat tulyā bhavet saṅkhyā tato mudrāṃ visarjayet ||
candrāṅgena samabhyasya sūryāṅgenābhyaset tataḥ |
yāvat tulyā bhavet saṃkhyā tato mudrāṃ visarjayet ||
न हि पथ्यमपथ्यं वा रसाः सर्वेऽपि नीरसाः ।
अपि भुक्तं विषं घोरं पीयूषमिव जीर्यते ॥
na hi pathyam apathyaṃ vā rasāḥ sarve’pi nīrasāḥ /
api bhuktaṃ viṣaṃ ghoraṃ pīyūṣam iva jīryate //
na hi pathyam apathyaṃ vā rasāḥ sārve ’pi nīrasāḥ |
api bhuktaṃ viṣaṃ ghoraṃ pīyūṣam iva jīryati ||
jīryati] jīryate v.l., jāyate v.l.
na hi pathyam apathyaṃ vā rasāḥ sarve ’pi nīrasāḥ |
api bhuktaṃ viṣaṃ ghoraṃ pīyūṣam iva jīryate ||
na hi pathyam apathyaṃ vā rasāḥ sarve ’pi nīrasāḥ |
api bhuktaṃ viṣaṃ ghoraṃ pīyūṣam iva jīryati ||
iha pathyam apathyaṃ vā sarasaṃ nirasaṃ ca vā |
api bhuktaṃ viṣaṃ ghoraṃ pīyūṣam iva jīryati ||
क्षयकुष्ठगुदावर्तगुल्माजीर्णपुरोगमाः ।
तस्य दोषाः क्षयं यान्ति महामुद्रां तु योऽभ्यसेत् ॥
kṣayakuṣṭhagudāvartagulmājīrṇapurogamāḥ /
tasya doṣāḥ kṣayaṃ yānti mahāmudrāṃ tu yo’bhyaset //
kṣayakuṣṭagudāvarttagulmājīrṇajvaravyathāḥ |
tasya doṣāḥ kṣayaṃ yānti mahāmudrāṃ tu yo ’bhyaset ||
tasya doṣāḥ ] sarvarogāḥ v.l., rogās tasya v.l.
kṣayakuṣṭhagudāvartagulmājīrṇapurogamāḥ |
doṣāḥ sarve kṣayaṃ yānti mahāmudrāṃ tu yo ’bhyaset ||
kṣayakuṣṭhagudāvartagulmaplīhapurogamāḥ |
tasya doṣāḥ kṣayaṃ yānti mahāmudrāṃ ca yo ’bhyaset ||
kṣayakuṣṭhagudāvarttagulmājīrṇapurogamāḥ |
tasya rogāḥ kṣayaṃ yānti mahāmudrāṃ tu yo’bhyaset ||
कथितेयं महामुद्रा महासिद्धिकरी नृणाम् ।
गोपनीया प्रयत्नेन न देया यस्य कस्यचित् ॥
kathiteyaṃ mahāmudrā mahāsiddhikarī nṛṇām /
gopanīyā prayatnena na deyā yasya kasyacit //
Manuscripts of three groups (α, β and γ), which are important stemmatically, have the reading jarāmṛtyuvināśinī (and J5 has nṛṇāṃ mṛtyuvināśinī) for the second verse quarter. While this reading is possible, the play on mahāsiddhi and mahāmudrā seems more likely original, as seen in the source text, the Vivekamārtaṇḍa (without significant variants), and the η and ε groups. In Jyotsnā 3.18, Brahmānanda understands mahāsiddhi as referring to `great siddhis,’ but in other works it can mean liberation (Mallinson 2012).
kathiteyaṃ mahāmudrā mahāsiddhikarī nṛṇām |
gopanīyā prayatnena na deyā yasya kasya cit ||
kathiteyaṃ mahāmudrā jarāmṛtyuvināśinī |
gopanīyā prayatnena na deyā yasya kasya cit ||
kathiteyaṃ mahāmudrā mahāsiddhikarī nṛṇām |
gopanīyā prayatnena na deyā yasya kasya cit ||
अथ महाबन्धः ।
पार्ष्णिं वामस्य पादस्य योनिस्थाने नियोजयेत् ।
वामोरूपरि संस्थाप्य दक्षिणं चरणं तथा ॥*
atha mahābandhaḥ /
pārṣṇiṃ vāmasya pādasya yonisthāne niyojayet /
vāmorūpari saṃsthāpya dakṣiṇaṃ caraṇaṃ tathā //*
The seated position for mahābandha described in this verse is not in the Amṛtasiddhi (chapter 12) or Amaraugha (25cd–27). The Amṛtasiddhi instructs the same position for mahāmudrā and mahābandha, and the Amaraugha does not comment on the posture of mahābandha, implying that its posture is the same as mahāmudrā.
pārṣṇiṃ vāmasya pādasya yonisthāne niyojayet ||
vāmorūpari dakṣiṇañ ca caraṇaṃ saṃsthāpya
pārṣṇiṃ vāmasya pādasya yonisthāne niyojayet |
vāmorūpari saṃsthāpya dakṣiṇaṃ caraṇaṃ tathā ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
vāmāṅghripārṣṇibhāgena yonisthānaṃ nipīḍayet |
vāmorupari saṃsthāpya dakṣiṇaṃ caraṇaṃ tathā ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
pārṣṇiṃ vāmasya pādasya yonisthāne niyojayet |
vāmorūpari saṃsthāpya dakṣiṇaṃ caraṇaṃ tathā ||
pārṣṇivāmasya pādasya yonisthāne niyojayet |
vāmorupari saṃsthāpya dakṣiṇaṃ caraṇaṃ tathā ||
पूरयित्वा मुखे वायुं हृदये चिबुकं दृढम् ।
निभृत्य योनिमाकुञ्च्य मनो मध्ये नियोजयेत् ॥
pūrayitvā mukhe vāyuṃ hṛdaye cibukaṃ dṛḍham /
nibhṛtya yonim ākuñcya mano madhye niyojayet //
The referent of madhye is uncertain. The verse is derived from the Amaraugha, and the Amṛtasiddhi makes no mention of a place to focus the mind in its treatment of mahābandha (it does however instruct the yogi to place the mind at the catuṣpatha in its teachings on mahāmudrā). Bhavadevamiśra (7.196), Brahmānanda (3.20) and Bālakṛṣṇa (5.24) take it to mean the central channel. It could also plausibly mean the region between the chest and perineum, or perhaps the place between the eyebrows. At 3.24 this practice is said to make the mind reach Kedāra, which is sometimes located between the eyebrows (see Mallinson 2007:214 n.285, Birch 2019: 967 n.57).
pūrayitvā mukhe vāyuṃ cibukaṃ hṛdaye dṛḍham |
nibhṛtya yonim ākuñcya mano madhye niyojayet ||
nibhṛtya ] nibhṛtaṃ v.l.
pūrayen mukhato vāyuṃ hṛdaye cibukaṃ dṛḍham |
nibhṛtya yonim ākuñcya mano madhye niyojayet ||
nibhṛtya ] niṣpīḍya v.l.
pūrayitvā tato vāyuṃ hṛdaye cibukaṃ dṛḍham |
niḥpīḍya yonim ākuṃcya mano madhye niyojayet ||
pūrayitvā mukhe vāyuṃ hṛdaye cibukaṃ tathā |
niḥpīḍya yonim ākuñcya mano madhye niyojayet ||
pūrayitvā tato vāyuṃ cibukaṃ dṛḍham |
niḥkṣipya yonim ākuñcya mano madhye niyojayet ||
धारयित्वा यथाशक्ति रेचयेदनिलं शनैः ॥
सव्याङ्गे च समभ्यस्य दक्षिणाङ्गे समभ्यसेत् ॥ *
dhārayitvā yathāśakti recayed anilaṃ śanaiḥ //
savyāṅge ca samabhyasya dakṣiṇāṅge samabhyaset // *
This section in the description of mahābandha has been subject to various revisions in the manuscript groups. The shortest version occurs in α1 and α2, as well as the β group and the Haṭharatnāvalī, which omit verses 3.21 and 3.22. This omission results in the somewhat odd juxtaposition of two lines stating that this is mahābandha. Verse 3.21 is in the γ group and some manuscripts of the β and η groups. It is a composite of hemistichs from the Dattātreyayogaśāstra (62cd, 134cd). The first is taken from a description of padmāsana, and may have been included by Svātmārāma in his description of mahābandha to make it clear that the breath is held for as long as possible after the inhalation. The second hemistich is from a passage on mahāmudrā, and it echoes a similar statement on mahāmudrā in Haṭhapradīpikā 3.15. It also occurs in the α group after 3.22.
dhārayitvā yathāśakti recayed iḍayā śanaiḥ ||
...
vāmāṅgena samabhyasya dakṣiṇāṅgena cābhyaset ||
recayec ca śanair evaṃ mahābandho ’yam ucyate ||
ayaṃ yogo mahābandhas sarvasiddhipradāyakaḥ |
savyāṅge ca samabhyasya dakṣiṇāṅge samabhyaset ||
dhārayitvā yathāśakti recayed anilaṃ sudhīḥ |
मतमत्र तु केषांचित् कण्ठबन्धं विसर्जयेत् ।
राजदन्तबिलं तत्र जिह्वयोत्तम्भयेदिति ॥*
matam atra tu keṣāṃcit kaṇṭhabandhaṃ visarjayet /
rājadantabilaṃ tatra jihvayottambhayed iti //*
This verse expresses an alternative to the application of the chin lock in mahā-bandha (mentioned in 3.20). It is found in all groups but is notably absent in α1 and α2, and the β group. At present we cannot be certain if this verse was written by Svātmārāma because it does not reflect textual teachings on mahābandha in so far as no other text known to us advocates the use of the tongue rather than the chin lock in mahābandha. If the verse was composed by Svātmārāma, it was omitted early in the transmission by someone who did not agree with the alternative teaching. This verse occurs in the Yogacintāmaṇi in the middle of a quotation attributed to Īśvara. The other verses of the quoted passage are found in the Śivasaṃhitā (4.37–42), but the verse in question is not reported in the critical edition of the Śivasaṃhitā (2018). The verse is absent in another passage on mahābandha that the author of the Yogacintāmaṇi cites and attributes to the Haṭhapradīpikā. We do not find the idea of lifting up the rājadantabila with the tongue in other works, but Vivekamārtaṇḍa 126ab instructs the yogi to press it with the tip of the tongue and Dattātreyayogaśāstra 36 (found at Haṭhapradīpikā 1.46) instructs the yogi in padmāsana to lift up the `root of the uvula’ (rājadantamūla) with the tongue.
saṃpīḍya rasanāgreṇa rājadantabilaṃ mahat |
nāsāgre vinyased rājadantamūlaṃ ca jihvayā |
uttabhya cibukaṃ vakṣasy āsthāpya pavanaṃ śanaiḥ ||
matam atra tu keṣāṃ cit kaṇṭhabandhaṃ vivarjayet |
rājadantadvayaṃ tatra jihvayottambhayed iti ||
rājadantadvayaṃ tatra jihvayonnamayed iti ||
अयं खलु महाबन्धो महासिद्धिप्रदायकः ।
कालपाशमहाबन्धविमोचनविचक्षणः ॥*
ayaṃ khalu mahābandho mahāsiddhipradāyakaḥ /
kālapāśamahābandhavimocanavicakṣaṇaḥ //*
ayaṃ khalu mahābandho mahāsiddhipradāyakaḥ |
kālapāśamahābandhavimocanavicakṣaṇaḥ ||
ayaṃ khalu mahābandho mahāsiddhipradāyakaḥ |
kālapāśamahābandhavimocanavicakṣaṇaḥ ||
अयं च सर्वनाडीनामूर्ध्वंगतिविबोधकः ।
त्रिवेणीसङ्गमं धत्ते केदारं प्रापयेन्मनः ॥
ayaṃ ca sarvanāḍīnām ūrdhvaṃgativibodhakaḥ /
triveṇīsaṅgamaṃ dhatte kedāraṃ prāpayen manaḥ //
The reading ūrdhvaṃgatibodhakaḥ (`initiates an upward flow’) is found in the source (Amaraugha 25) and all Haṭhapradīpikā witnesses except the Jyotsnā (where the line is found earlier). While the Amaraughaprabodha has the reading ūrdhvaṃgativiśodhanaḥ (`purification of the upward flow’), the Amṛtasiddhi (12.14) states that the chin-lock prevents the upward flow (ūrdhvaṃgatinirodhakaḥ) in all the channels. The Amaraugha is referring to the idea (likely accepted by Svātmārāma) that the root lock creates an upward flow in all the channels that prevents the elements and essences of the body from escaping (cf.~Amṛtasiddhi 12.8–10). Triveṇī and Kedāra are pilgrimage sites, the former at Prayāga where the Gaṅgā and Yamunā meet, the latter in the Himālaya, near the source of the Gaṅgā. The bodily triveṇī is located in the navel or heart by earlier Śaiva works (Birch 2019: 967). Here it may be the same as the trikūṭa and located between the eyebrows (Mallinson 2007: 209 n.259). Brahmānanda, who does not identify a location for Triveṇī, understands Kedāra to be between the eyebrows. In the Khecarīvidyā it is located on the back of the head above the nape of the neck (Mallinson 2007:214 n.285). For other references on the location of Kedāra, see Birch 2019:967 n.57.
ayaṃ ca sarvanāḍīnām ūrdhvaṃgativibodhakaḥ |
triveṇīsaṅgame dhatte kedāraṃ prāpayen manaḥ ||
ayaṃ ca sarvanāḍīnām ūrdhvagativibodhakaḥ |
triveṇīsaṅgamaṃ dhatte kedāraṃ prāpayen manaḥ ||
ayaṃ tu sarvanāḍīnām ūrdhvaṃgamanarodhakaḥ |
triveṇīsaṃgamaṃ dhatte kedāraṃ prāpayen manaḥ ||
ayaṃ hi sarvanāḍīnām ūrdhvaṃ gativibodhakaḥ |
triveṇīsaṃgamaṃ dhatte kedāraṃ prāpayen manaḥ ||
रूपलावण्यसंपन्ना यथा स्त्री पुरुषं विना ।
महामुद्रामहाबन्धौ निष्फलौ वेधवर्जितौ ॥
rūpalāvaṇyasaṃpannā yathā strī puruṣaṃ vinā /
mahāmudrāmahābandhau niṣphalau vedhavarjitau //
This verse, which is from the Amaraugha and similar to verses in the Amṛtasiddhi and Śivasaṃhitā, is stating that the great seal, lock and piercing should be practised together. This can be done as a sequence as shown in this video.
rūpalāvaṇyasampannā yathā strī puruṣaṃ vinā |
mahāmudrāmahābandhau niṣphalau vedhavarjitau ||
°bandhau niṣphalau vedhavarjitau ] °bandho niṣphalo vedhavarjitaḥ v.l.
mahāmudrāmahābandhau niṣphalau vedhavarjitau |
tasmād yogī prayatnena karoti tritayaṃ kramāt ||
guṇarūpavatī nārī niṣphalā puruṣaṃ vinā |
mahāmudrāmahābandhau vinā vedhena niṣphalau ||
rūpalāvaṇyasampannā yathā strī puruṣaṃ vinā |
mahāmudrāmahābandhau niṣphalau vedhavarjitau ||
°mahābandhau ] mahābandho v.l.
atha mahāvedhaḥ—
rūpalāvaṇyasaṃpannā yathā strī puruṣaṃ vinā |
mahāmudrāmahābandhau niṣphalau vedhavarjitau ||
atha mahāvedhaḥ -
mahāmudrāmahābandhau niṣphalau vedavarjitau |
rūpalāvaṇyasampannā yathā strī puruṣaṃ vinā ||
अथ महावेधः ।
महाबन्धस्थितो योगी कृत्वा पूरकमेकधीः ।
वायूनां गतिमावृत्य निभृतं कण्ठमुद्रया ॥
atha mahāvedhaḥ /
mahābandhasthito yogī kṛtvā pūrakam ekadhīḥ /
vāyūnāṃ gatim āvṛtya nibhṛtaṃ kaṇṭhamudrayā //
We are not certain of the meaning of nibhṛtam, which is found in all of the collated witnesses and important testimonia. We have understood it as an adverb meaning `firmly.’
punar āsphālayet kaṭyāṃ susthiraṃ kaṇṭhamudrayā |
vāyūnāṃ gatim ārudhya kṛtvā pūrakakumbhakau ||
ārudhya ] āvṛtya, āśritya v.l.
mahābandhasthito yogī kukṣim āpurya vāyunā |
sphicau saṃtāpayed dhīmān vedho ’yaṃ kīrtito mayā ||
mahābandhasthito yogī kṛtvā pūrakam ekadhīḥ |
vāyūnāṃ gatim ākṛṣya nibhṛtaṃ kaṇṭhamudrayā ||
ekadhīḥ ] ekadhā v.l.
mahābandhe sthito yogī kṛtvā pūrakam ekadhā |
vāyūnāṃ gatim āvṛtya nibhṛtaṃ kaṇṭhamudrayā ||
mahābandhasthito yogī kṛtvā pūrakam ekadhā |
vāyunāṃ gatim āvṛtya nibhṛtaṃ kaṇṭhamudrayā ||
समहस्तयुगो भूमौ स्फिजौ संताडयेच्छनैः ।
पुटद्वयं समाक्रम्य वायुः स्फुरति सत्वरं ।
बन्धेनानेन योगीन्द्रः साधयेत्सर्वमीप्सितम् ॥ (Γ)
samahastayugo bhūmau sphijau saṃtāḍayec chanaiḥ /
puṭadvayaṃ samākramya vāyuḥ sphurati satvaraṃ /
bandhenānena yogīndraḥ sādhayet sarvam īpsitam // (Γ)
The term puṭadvaya is referring back to the dvipuṭa mentioned in verse 3.12. On the alchemical meaning and other interpretations by later commentators, see the note to 3.12. The greyscale hemistich added to this verse in the γ group is taken from the Śivasaṃhitā (4.42ab) in the section on mahābandha.
samahastayugo bhūmau samapādayugas tathā |
[vedhayet kramayogena catuṣpīṭhaṃ tu vāyunā ||
āsphālayen mahāmeruṃ vāyuvajrāgnikoṭibhiḥ | ]
puṭadvayaṃ samākṛṣya vāyuḥ sphurati satvaram ||
samākṛṣya ] samākramya v.l.
mahābandhasthito bhūmau sphicau santāḍayec chanaiḥ |
samahastayugo bhūmau sphicau saṃtāḍayec chanaiḥ |
ayam eva mahāvedhaḥ siddhido ’bhyāsato bhavet
samahastayugo bhūmau sphijau saṃtāḍayec chanaiḥ |
puṭadvayaṃ samākramya vāyuḥ sphurati madhyagaḥ ||
nyastahastayugo bhūmau sphicau santāḍayec chanaiḥ |
jaṃghādvayaṃ samākṛṣya vāyuḥ spharati satvaram ||
सोमसूर्याग्निसंबन्धो जायते चामृताय वै ।
मृतावस्था समुत्पन्ना ततो मृत्युभयं कुतः ॥
somasūryāgnisaṃbandho jāyate cāmṛtāya vai /
mṛtāvasthā samutpannā tato mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ //
The α and γ groups have °saṃbandhāj, which is possible but somewhat awkward (i.e., `because of the union of the moon, sun and fire, the state of a dead person, which has arisen, leads to immortality’). The adopted reading °saṃbandho, which is supported by ε2, Yuktabhavadeva 7.200 and Jyotsna 3.28, makes better sense but its meaning is not as clear as the formulation in the source text (i.e., Amaraugha 30). The compound mṛtāvasthā (`the state of death’) likely refers to a dead person in the sense that the yogi appears as if dead when the moon, sun and fire have united. In the version found in Jyotsnā 3.28 and η1, η2 and ε3, the final verse quarter has been rewritten to say that the yogi then exhales the breath (tato vāyuṃ virecayet). This implies that mṛtāvasthā is a breath retention (kumhaka), which is apparent in Brahmānanda’s explanation: The state of death that has arisen is the state of one who has died, [that is,] of one who is devoid of the breath because of the absence of movement of prāṇa in the iḍā and piṅgalā channels. Then, immediately after that [state], [the yogi] exhales the breath, [that is,] he gradually releases it through the nostrils.mṛtasya prāṇaviyuktasyāvasthā mṛtāvasthā samutpannā bhavati, iḍāpiṅgalayoḥ prāṇasañcārābhāvāt | tatas tadanantaraṃ vāyuṃ virecayen nāsikāpuṭābhyāṃ śanais tyajet |
somasūryāgnisaṃbandhaṃ jānīyād amṛtāya vai |
mṛtāvasthā samutpannā tato mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ ||
°saṃbandhaṃ ] °saṃbandhāj, °saṃbandhā v.l.
somasūryāgnisandhānaṃ jāyate cāmṛtāyate |
mṛtāvasthāsamutpannaṃ tato mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ ||
°samutpannaṃ ] °samutpannā v.l.
somasūryāgnisambandho jāyate cāmṛtāya ca |
samutpannā mṛtāvasthā tato vāyuṃ virecayet ||
महावेधोऽयमभ्यासान्महासिद्धिप्रदायकः ।
वलीपलितवेपघ्नः सेव्यते साधकोत्तमैः ॥
mahāvedho’yam abhyāsān mahāsiddhipradāyakaḥ /
valīpalitavepaghnaḥ sevyate sādhakottamaiḥ //
In the third verse quarter, the reading °vedhaghnaḥ (`cures wounds’ ?) in α and the other groups, the exception being γ (°vegaghnaḥ), is strange as it does not seem related to the other two symptoms of old age (i.e., wrinkles and grey hair) that this mudrā can cure. It is perhaps a misreading of °vepaghnaḥ, which occurs in some manuscripts in the β (J1, N12), ε (J14) and δ (J3, N16, N18) groups, as well as the Yogacintāmaṇi and Jyotsnā. The meaning of vepa, `trembling,’ is consistent with wrinkles and grey hair.
ayam eva mahāvedhaḥ siddhido ’bhyāsato bhavet ||
mahāvedho ’yam abhyāsān mahāsiddhipradāyakaḥ |
valīpalitavepaghnaḥ sevyate sādhakottamaiḥ ||
mahāvedho ’yam abhyasto mahāsiddhipradāyakaḥ |
valīpalitavepaghnaḥ sevyate sādhakottamaiḥ ||
एतत्त्रयं महागुह्यं जरामृत्युविनाशनम् ।
वह्निवृद्धिकरं चैव अणिमादिगुणप्रदम् ॥
etat trayaṃ mahāguhyaṃ jarāmṛtyuvināśanam /
vahnivṛddhikaraṃ caiva aṇimādiguṇapradam //
etat trayaṃ mahāguhyaṃ jarāmṛtyuvināśanam |
vahnivṛddhikarañ caiva aṇimādiguṇapradam ||
°guhyaṃ ] °guṇyaṃ v.l.
etat trayaṃ mahāguhyaṃ jarāmṛtyuvināśanam |
vahnivṛddhikaraṃ caiva hy aṇimādiguṇapradam ||
etat trayaṃ mahāguptaṃ jalāmṛtyuvināśanam |
vahnivṛddhikaraṃ caiva aṇimādiguṇapradam ||
bandhatrayaṃ mahāguhyaṃ jarāmṛtyuvināśanam |
vahnivṛddhikaraṃ caiva aṇimādiguṇapradam ||
अष्टधा क्रियते चैतद्यामे यामे दिने दिने ।
पुण्यसंभारसम्भावि पापौघभिदुरं सदा ॥
aṣṭadhā kriyate caitad yāme yāme dine dine /
puṇyasaṃbhārasambhāvi pāpaughabhiduraṃ sadā //
aṣṭadhā kriyate caiva yāme yāme dine dine |
puṇyasañcayasambhāvi pāpaughabhiduraṃ sadā ||
caiva ] caitad v.l.
aṣṭadhā kriyate caitat yāme yāme dine dine |
puṇyasaṅghātasandhāyī pāpaughabhiduraḥ sadā ||
aṣṭadhā kriyate caiva yāme yāme dine dine |
puṇyasaṃbhārasandhāyi pāpaughabhiduraṃ sadā ||
aṣṭadhā kriyate caiva yāme yāme dine dine |
puṇyasambhārasandhāyi pāpaughabhiduraṃ sadā ||
सम्यक्शिक्षावतामेव स्वल्पं प्रथमसाधने ।
वह्निस्त्रीपथसेवानामादौ वर्जनमादिशेत् ॥* *
samyakśikṣāvatām eva svalpaṃ prathamasādhane /
vahnistrīpathasevānām ādau varjanam ādiśet //* *
samyakśikṣāvatām eva svalpaṃ prathamasādhane |
vahnistrīpathasevānām ādau varjanam ācaret ||
samyakśikṣāvatām eva svalpaṃ prathamasādhane ||
samyak śikṣāvatām evaṃ svalpaṃ prathamasādhanam |
vahnistrīpathisevānām ādau varjanam ācaret ||
नासनं सिद्धसदृशं न कुम्भं केवलोपमम् ।
न खेचरीसमा मुद्रा न नादसदृशो लयः ॥ (Ω)
nāsanaṃ siddhasadṛśaṃ na kumbhaṃ kevalopamam /
na khecarīsamā mudrā na nādasadṛśo layaḥ // (Ω)
अथ खेचरी ।
छेदनचालनदोहैः कलां क्रमेण प्रवर्धयेत्तावत् ।
सा यावद्भ्रूमध्यं स्पृशति तदा खेचरीसिद्धिः ॥*
atha khecarī /
chedanacālanadohaiḥ kalāṃ krameṇa pravardhayet tāvat /
sā yāvad bhrūmadhyaṃ spṛśati tadā khecarīsiddhiḥ //*
Various versions of this verse have been transmitted in āryā, gīti and anuṣṭubh metres. We have adopted a version close to α2, which has a slight metrical fault: chedanacālanadohaiḥ kalāṃ krameṇa pravardhayet tāvat |sā yāvad bhrūmadhyaṃ viśati tadānīṃ khecarīsiddhiḥ || The emendation of tadānīṃ to tadā renders the verse an āryā. The word krameṇa is well attested by manuscripts of the α, β, η and ε groups, which all have unmetrical or corrupted versions. The meaning of kalā as `tongue’ is not attested by any Sanskrit dictionary but kalā occurs in the sense of the tongue in a subsequent verse of this chapter (Cf.~3.35a) and it is glossed by Brahmānanda with jihvā in Jyotsnā 3.33 and 3.37.
haṭhapradīpikāyām ||
chedanacālanadohaiḥ kalāṃ krameṇa vardhayet tāvat |
yāvad iyaṃ bhrūmadhye spṛśati tadānīṃ khecarīsiddhiḥ ||
yāvad iyaṃ bhrūmadhye spṛśati ] sā yāti yāvad bhrūmadhyaṃ spṛśati hi v.l.
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
chedanacālanadohair jihvāṃ saṃvardhayet tāvat |
yāvad iyaṃ bhrūmadhyaṃ spṛśati tadā khecarī siddhiḥ ||
haṭhapradīpikāmate tu –
chedanacālanadohaiḥ krameṇa jihvāṃ pravardhayet tāvat |
sā yāvad bhrūmadhyaṃ spṛśati tadā khecarīsiddhiḥ ||
स्नुहीपत्त्रनिभं शस्त्रं सुतीक्ष्णं स्निग्धनिर्मलम् ।
समादाय ततस्तेन रोममात्रं समुच्छिदेत् ॥ (ε3, Ω and χ)
snuhīpattranibhaṃ śastraṃ sutīkṣṇaṃ snigdhanirmalam /
samādāya tatas tena romamātraṃ samucchidet // (ε3, Ω and χ)
कृत्वा सैन्धवपथ्यादिचूर्णिताभ्यां प्रघर्षयेत् ।
पुनः सप्तदिने प्राप्ते रोममात्रं समुच्छिदेत् ॥ (ε3, Ω and χ)
kṛtvā saindhavapathyādicūrṇitābhyāṃ pragharṣayet /
punaḥ saptadine prāpte romamātraṃ samucchidet // (ε3, Ω and χ)
एवं क्रमेण षण्मासं नित्ययुक्तं समाचरेत् ।
षण्मासाद्रसनामूलशराबन्धं विनश्यति ॥ (ε3, Ω and χ)
evaṃ krameṇa ṣaṇmāsaṃ nityayuktaṃ samācaret /
ṣaṇmāsād rasanāmūlaśarābandhaṃ vinaśyati // (ε3, Ω and χ)
अथ वागीश्वरीधाम शिरो वस्त्रेण वेष्टयेत् ।
शनैरुत्कर्षयेद्योगी कालवेलाविधानवित् ॥ (Ω)
atha vāgīśvarīdhāma śiro vastreṇa veṣṭayet /
śanair utkarṣayed yogī kālavelāvidhānavit // (Ω)
वितस्तिप्रमितं दैर्घ्यं विस्तारं चतुरङ्गुलम् ।
मृदुलं धवलं प्रोक्तं वेष्टिताम्बरलक्षणम् ॥ (Ω)
vitastipramitaṃ dairghyaṃ vistāraṃ caturaṅgulam /
mṛdulaṃ dhavalaṃ proktaṃ veṣṭitāmbaralakṣaṇam // (Ω)
पुनः षण्मासमात्रेण पुनः संकर्षणात्प्रिये ।
भ्रूमध्यावधि वर्धेत तिर्यक्कर्णबिलावधि ॥ (Ω)
punaḥ ṣaṇmāsamātreṇa punaḥ saṃkarṣaṇāt priye /
bhrūmadhyāvadhi vardheta tiryakkarṇabilāvadhi // (Ω)
अधस्ताच्चिबुकं मूलं प्रयाति क्रमकारिता ।
क्रोशादूर्ध्वं च क्रमति तिर्यक्संख्यावधि प्रिये ॥ (Ω)
adhastāc cibukaṃ mūlaṃ prayāti kramakāritā /
krośād ūrdhvaṃ ca kramati tiryaksaṃkhyāvadhi priye // (Ω)
पुनः संवत्सराद्देवि द्वितीया चैव लीलया ।
ब्रह्मरन्ध्रान्तमावृत्य तिष्ठेत्परमवन्दिते ॥ (Ω)
punaḥ saṃvatsarād devi dvitīyā caiva līlayā /
brahmarandhrāntam āvṛtya tiṣṭhet paramavandite // (Ω)
स्वतालुमूलं संघृष्य सप्तवासरमात्मनि ।
स्वगुरूक्तप्रकारेण मलं सर्वं विशोषयेत् ॥ (Ω)
svatālumūlaṃ saṃghṛṣya saptavāsaram ātmani /
svagurūktaprakāreṇa malaṃ sarvaṃ viśoṣayet // (Ω)
अङ्गुल्यग्रेण संघृष्य जिह्वां तत्र निवेशयेत् ।
शनैः शनैर्मस्तकाच्च महावज्रकपाटभित् ॥ (Ω)
aṅgulyagreṇa saṃghṛṣya jihvāṃ tatra niveśayet /
śanaiḥ śanair mastakāc ca mahāvajrakapāṭabhit // (Ω)
पूर्वबीजयुतां विद्यां व्याख्यातामतिदुर्लभाम् ।
अस्याः षडङ्गं कुर्वीत तया षट्चक्रभिन्नया ॥ (Ω)
pūrvabījayutāṃ vidyāṃ vyākhyātām atidurlabhām /
asyāḥ ṣaḍaṅgaṃ kurvīta tayā ṣaṭcakrabhinnayā // (Ω)
खे निरस्तसकलक्रियाक्रमे
या चितिश्चरति शाश्वतोदये ।
सा शिवत्वसमवायकारिणी
खेचरी च भवखेदहारिणी ॥ (Ω)
khe nirastasakalakriyākrame
yā citiś carati śāśvatodaye /
sā śivatvasamavāyakāriṇī
khecarī ca bhavakhedahāriṇī // (Ω)
क्रमेणैव प्रकर्तव्याभ्यासेन वरवर्णिनि ।
युगपद्यतते तस्य शरीरं विलयं व्रजेत् ॥ (Ω)
krameṇaiva prakartavyābhyāsena varavarṇini /
yugapad yatate tasya śarīraṃ vilayaṃ vrajet // (Ω)
तस्माच्छनैः शनैः कार्योऽभ्यासो न युगपत्प्रिये ।
एवं वर्षत्रयं कृत्वा ब्रह्मद्वारं विशेद्ध्रुवम् ॥ (Ω)
tasmāc chanaiḥ śanaiḥ kāryo’bhyāso na yugapat priye /
evaṃ varṣatrayaṃ kṛtvā brahmadvāraṃ viśed dhruvam // (Ω)
सट्चक्राणि विभिद्य शक्तिभुजगीं प्रोत्थाप्य मूलस्थितां
भित्त्वा ग्रन्थित्रयं च पश्चिमशिराप्राकाररूपं महत् ।
नीत्वा प्राणमतः शिरोबिलमलं निर्मथ्य चित्तेन तत्
लिङ्गं यः पिबतीन्दुमण्डलगलन्मुक्तः स साक्षाच्छिवः ॥ (Ω)
saṭcakrāṇi vibhidya śaktibhujagīṃ protthāpya mūlasthitāṃ
bhittvā granthitrayaṃ ca paścimaśirāprākārarūpaṃ mahat /
nītvā prāṇam ataḥ śirobilam alaṃ nirmathya cittena tat
liṅgaṃ yaḥ pibatīndumaṇḍalagalan muktaḥ sa sākṣācchivaḥ // (Ω)
नित्यं यस्तूर्ध्वजिह्वो यदि पिबति पुमान्सप्तधारामृतौघं
सुस्वादं शीतलाङ्गं दुरितभयहरं क्षुत्पिपासानिवारि ।
पिण्डस्थैर्यं हि तस्माद्भवति मृतपथा मृत्युरोगाद्भवन्ति
दौर्भाग्यं याति नाशं प्रसरति सकलं याति कालं भ्रमित्वा ॥ (Ω)
nityaṃ yas tūrdhvajihvo yadi pibati pumān saptadhārāmṛtaughaṃ
susvādaṃ śītalāṅgaṃ duritabhayaharaṃ kṣutpipāsānivāri /
piṇḍasthairyaṃ hi tasmād bhavati mṛtapathā mṛtyurogād bhavanti
daurbhāgyaṃ yāti nāśaṃ prasarati sakalaṃ yāti kālaṃ bhramitvā // (Ω)
तीक्ष्णकं हरते व्याधिं कटुकं कुष्ठनाशनम् ।
घृतस्वादूपमं चैव अमरत्वं लभेद्ध्रुवम् ॥ (Ω)
tīkṣṇakaṃ harate vyādhiṃ kaṭukaṃ kuṣṭhanāśanam /
ghṛtasvādūpamaṃ caiva amaratvaṃ labhed dhruvam // (Ω)
मधुस्वादूपमं चैव शास्त्रमुद्गिरते बहु ।
लड्डुषण्डकपाद्यानि पक्वान्नानि अनेकशः ॥ (Ω)
madhusvādūpamaṃ caiva śāstram udgirate bahu /
laḍḍuṣaṇḍakapādyāni pakvānnāni anekaśaḥ // (Ω)
दिव्यकल्पं रमेन्नित्यं उत्कृष्टो जायते ध्रुवम् ।
तन्मयत्वमवाप्नोति कोशकारीव कीटकः ॥ (Ω)
divyakalpaṃ ramen nityaṃ utkṛṣṭo jāyate dhruvam /
tanmayatvam avāpnoti kośakārīva kīṭakaḥ // (Ω)
कपालकुहरे जिह्वा प्रविष्टा विपरीतगा ।
भ्रुवोरन्तर्गता दृष्टिर् मुद्रा भवति खेचरी ॥*
kapālakuhare jihvā praviṣṭā viparītagā /
bhruvor antargatā dṛṣṭir mudrā bhavati khecarī //*
kapālakuhare jihvā praviṣṭā viparītagā |
bhruvor antargatā dṛṣṭir mudrā bhavati khecarī ||
dattātreyas tu ||
kapālakuhare jihvā praviṣṭā viparītagā |
bhruvor antargatā dṛṣṭir mudrā bhavati khecarī ||
skandapurāṇe—
kapālakuhare jihvā praviṣṭā viparītagā |
bhruvor antargatā dṛṣṭir mudrā bhavati khecarī ||
atha khecarī -
kapālakuhare jihvā praviṣṭā viparītagā |
bhruvor antargatā dṛṣṭir mudrā bhavati khecarī ||
कलां पराङ्मुखीं कृत्वा त्रिपथे परिवर्तयेत् ।
सा भवेत्खेचरी मुद्रा व्योमचक्रं तदुच्यते ।
रसनामूर्ध्वगां कृत्वा* क्षणार्धं यदि तिष्ठति ।
क्षणेन मुच्यते योगी व्याधिमृत्युजरादिभिः ॥
kalāṃ parāṅmukhīṃ kṛtvā tripathe parivartayet /
sā bhavet khecarī mudrā vyomacakraṃ tad ucyate /
rasanām ūrdhvagāṃ kṛtvā* kṣaṇārdhaṃ yadi tiṣṭhati /
kṣaṇena mucyate yogī vyādhimṛtyujarādibhiḥ //
We have adopted the version of 2.35 in α2 and α3 (α1 omits 2.35 and the greyscaled verses). This version is also attested by the γ and η groups. The additional hemistich gives vyomacakra as an alternative name for khecarīmudrā. This alternative name does not occur in any of the source texts known to be have been used by Svātmārāma, but it may have been inspired by the name nabhomudrā for khecarīmudrā in the Vivekamārtaṇḍa (40).
rasanām ūrdhvagāṃ kṛtvā kṣaṇārdhaṃ yadi tiṣṭhati |
kṣaṇena mucyate yogī vyādhimṛtyujarādibhiḥ ||
kalāṃ parāṅmukhīṃ kṛtvā tripathe parivartayet |
sā bhavet khecarī mudrā vyomacakraṃ tad ucyate ||
rasanām ūrdhvagāṃ kṛtvā kṣaṇārdhaṃ yadi tiṣṭhati |
viṣayair mucyate yogī vyādhimṛtyujarādibhiḥ ||
jihvāṃ parāṅmukhīṃ kṛtvā kṣaṇārddhaṃ yadi tiṣṭhati |
kṣaṇena mucyate yogī vyādhimṛtyujarādibhiḥ ||
न रोगो मरणं तस्य न निद्रा न क्षुधा तृषा ।
न च मूर्छा भवेत्तस्य यो मुद्रां वेत्ति खेचरीम् ॥*
na rogo maraṇaṃ tasya na nidrā na kṣudhā tṛṣā /
na ca mūrchā bhavet tasya yo mudrāṃ vetti khecarīm //*
na rogo maraṇaṃ tandrā na nidrā na kṣudhā tṛṣā |
na ca mūrchā bhavet tasya yo mudrāṃ vetti khecarīm ||
tandrā ] tasya v.l.
na rogo maraṇaṃ tasya na nidrā na kṣudhā tṛṣā |
na ca mūrcchā bhavet tasya yo mudrāṃ vetti khecarīm ||
na rogo maraṇaṃ tasya na nidrā na kṣudhā tṛṣā |
na ca mūrcchā bhavet tasya yo mudrāṃ vetti khecarīm ||
na rogo maraṇaṃ tasya na nidrā na tṛṣā kṣudhā |
na ca mūrcchā bhavet tasya yo mudrāṃ vetti khecarīm ||
पीड्यते न स रोगेण लिप्यते न च कर्मणा ।
बाध्यते न च कालेन यो मुद्रां वेत्ति खेचरीम् ॥
pīḍyate na sa rogeṇa lipyate na ca karmaṇā /
bādhyate na ca kālena yo mudrāṃ vetti khecarīm //
pīḍyate na sa rogeṇa lipyate na ca karmaṇā |
bādhyate na sa kālena yo mudrāṃ vetti khecarīṃ ||
pīḍyate na sa rogeṇa lipyate na ca karmaṇā|
bādhyate na ca kālena yo mudrāṃ vetti khecarīm||
piḍyate na sa rogeṇa na ca lipyeta karmaṇā |
bādhyate na sa kālena yo mudrāṃ vetti khecarīm ||
pīḍyate na sa rogeṇa lipyate na sa karmaṇā |
bādhyate na sa kālena yasya mudrāsti khecarī ||
चित्तं चरति खे यस्माज् जिह्वा चरति खे गता ।
तेनैषा खेचरी नाम मुद्रा सिद्धैर्नमस्कृता ॥
cittaṃ carati khe yasmāj jihvā carati khe gatā /
tenaiṣā khecarī nāma mudrā siddhair namaskṛtā //
cittaṃ carati khe yasmāj jihvā carati khe gatā |
tenaiṣā khecarī nāma mudrā siddhair namaskṛtā ||
37c tenaiṣā ] tenaiva, teneyaṃ v.l.37cd nāma mudrā ] mudrā sarva° v.l.
cittaṃ carati khe yasmāj jihvā carati khe gatā |
tenaiṣā khecarī nāma mudrā siddhair niṣevitā ||
cittaṃ carati khe yasmāj jihvā carati khe yataḥ |
teneyaṃ khecarī mudrā sarvasiddhair namaskṛtā ||
खेचर्या मुद्रितं येन विवरं लम्बिकोर्ध्वतः ।
तस्य न क्षरते बिन्दुः कामिन्याश्लेषितस्य च ॥
khecaryā mudritaṃ yena vivaraṃ lambikordhvataḥ /
tasya na kṣarate binduḥ kāminyāśleṣitasya ca //
khecaryā mudritaṃ yena vivaraṃ lambikordhvataḥ |
na tasya kṣarate binduḥ kāminyāliṅgitasya ca ||
na tasya kṣarate binduḥ ] binduḥ kṣarati no tasya, tasya na kṣarate binduḥ v.l.
°āliṃgitasya ] °āśleṣitasya v.l.
khecaryā mudritaṃ yena vivaraṃ lambikordhvataḥ |
na tasya kṣarate binduḥ kāminyāliṅgitasya ca ||
khecaryā mudritaṃ yena vivaraṃ lambikordhvataḥ |
na tasya kṣarate binduḥ kāminyāliṃgitasya ca ||
चलितोऽपि यदा बिन्दुः संप्राप्तो योनिमण्डलम् ।
व्रजत्यूर्ध्वं हतः शक्त्या निबद्धो योनिमुद्रया ॥*
calito’pi yadā binduḥ saṃprāpto yonimaṇḍalam /
vrajaty ūrdhvaṃ hataḥ śaktyā nibaddho yonimudrayā //*
The third quarter of this verse has been subjected to much rewriting. Most of the collated manuscripts, including α2 (α1 is illegible here and α3 is missing this verse quarter), have the reading haṭhāt śaktyā. This reading only makes sense if one infers that śaktyā is referring to khecarīmudrā, so that the second line means `blocked by yonimudrā, semen goes up forcefully by the power [of khecarīmudrā].’ The reading hi tacchaktyā of two delta manuscripts (K3 and C7) and the Yogacintāmaṇi), appears to be an attempt to render more clearly the meaning `by the power of khecarī.’ Such an interpretation suggests that yonimudrā blocks bindu’s downward course and khecarī causes it to go upwards forcefully. A manuscript of an early recension of the Vivekamārtaṇḍa (ms.~no.~4110) has hataḥ śaktyā, which is attested by three Haṭhapradīpikā manuscripts on lower branches of the stemma (i.e.~ of δ group and C2 and P4 of group 7a ??). The participle haṭaḥ makes sense of the instrumental śaktyā, rendering the meaning `struck by kuṇḍalinī.’ Alternatively, the word haṭaḥ (as well as the other variants kṛtaḥ, kṛte, and even haṭhāt) may derive from hṛtaḥ, which is attested by Haṭhapradīpikā manuscripts from group 4a (i.e., , and N13). The reading hṛtaḥ śaktyā renders the verse as saying that semen goes up, carried by kuṇḍalinī. In Jyotsnā 3.43, Brahmānanda explains `yonimudrā’ as `taking the form of contracting the penis’ (yonimudrayā meḍhrākuñcanarūpayā). He may have had in mind the practice of contracting and drawing the urethra upwards, which is described below in the section on vajrolimudrā (Haṭhapradīpikā 3.82). The author of the Yogaprakāśikā (5.66) says that yonimudrā is well-known in treatises on mantra (yonimudrayeti mantraśāstraprasiddhayety arthaḥ | °prasidhyayety ed.). This is consistent with the Śivasaṃhitā’s teaching on yonimudrā, where it is described as activating the perineum (yoni) by contracting it (4.2) to bring about success in mantra repetition (5.12). Later compendiums on yoga reiterate the role of yonimudrā in mantra practice (e.g., the Yogacintāmaṇi f.~65r, citing the Pārameśvaratantra, and Haṭhatattvakaumudī 33.12). The Haṭhayogasaṃhitā (43–48) teaches a different version of yonimudrā in its reportoire of twenty-five mudrās. In this work, yonimudrā is supposed to awaken kuṇḍalinī and consists of sitting in siddhasana, blocking the ears, eyes, nose and mouth with the thumbs, index, middle and ring fingers, uniting praṇa and apāna, meditating on the six cakras and repeating the mantra huṃ haṃsa. Manuscripts of the main groups, including α, β and γ, have an additional hemistich after 3.40, which seems to say that the tongue is in the cavity of the skull by means of a mudrā for uniting the kalās (kapālakuhare jihvā kalāsandhānamudrayā). This hemistich likely derives from a marginal note that was explaining ūrdhvajihvaḥ in the next verse. The compound kalāsandhānamudrayā may have been added as some form of dittography or as a gloss on yonimudrā, which is not described elsewhere in the text. In a slightly modified form, this line appears in a verse in the six-chapter version of the Haṭhapradīpikā (f. 112r–112v):
kapālakuhare jihvā kalāsaṃdhānavarjitā |
brahmarandhragatā nityāṃ tasya siddhi na dūrataḥ ||
calito ’pi yadā binduḥ saṃprāptaś ca hutāśanam |
gacchaty ūrdhvaṃ hataḥ śaktyā nibaddho yonimudrayā ||
53c gacchaty ] vrajaty v.l.53d hataḥ ] tanaṃ, hṛtas, kṛte, kṛtaḥ, tadā, gatā v.l.• nibaddho ] niruddho v.l.
svakaṃ binduṃ ca saṃbodhya liṅgacālanam ācaret |
daivāc calati ced ūrdhvaṃ nibaddho yonimudrayā ||
calito ’pi yadā binduḥ saṃprāptaś ca hutāśanam |
vrajaty ūrdhvaṃ hi tacchaktyā niruddho yonimudrayā ||
calito’pi mahābinduḥ samprāpte’pi hutāśanam |
vrajaty ūrdhvaṃ haṭhaḥ śaktyā nibaddho yonimudrayā ||
कपालकुहरे जिह्वा कलासंधानमुद्रया । (α1, α3, β2, βω, Γ, ε2 and ε3)
kapālakuhare jihvā kalāsaṃdhānamudrayā / (α1, α3, β2, βω, Γ, ε2 and ε3)
ऊर्ध्वजिह्वः स्थितो भूत्वा सोमपानं करोति यः ।
मासार्धेन न संदेहो मृत्युं जयति योगवित् ॥
ūrdhvajihvaḥ sthito bhūtvā somapānaṃ karoti yaḥ /
māsārdhena na saṃdeho mṛtyuṃ jayati yogavit //
ūrdhvajihvaḥ sthito bhūtvā somapānaṃ karoti yaḥ |
māsārdhena na sandeho mṛtyuṃ jayati yogavit ||
ūrdhvajihvaḥ sthito bhūtvā ] ūrdhvajihvas tato bhūtvā, ūrdhvaṃ jihvāṃ sthiraṃ kṛtvā, ūrdhvāṃ jihvā sthirāṃ kṛtvā v.l.
ūrdhvajihvaḥ sthiro bhutvā somapānaṃ karoti yaḥ |
māsārdheṇa na saṃdeho mṛtyuṃ jayati yogavid ||
ūrdhvajihvaḥ sa medhāvī somapānaṃ karoti yaḥ |
māsārddhena na sandeho mṛtyuṃ jayati yogavit ||
नित्यं सोमकलापूर्णं शरीरं यस्य योगिनः ।
तक्षकेणापि दष्टस्य विषं तस्य न सर्पति ॥*
nityaṃ somakalāpūrṇaṃ śarīraṃ yasya yoginaḥ /
takṣakeṇāpi daṣṭasya viṣaṃ tasya na sarpati //*
In the context of poison, takṣaka refers to one of the three kings of the snakes (nāga), the other two being Śeṣa and Vāsuki (Mani 1975: 782–783). The verb sarpati is well attested by the manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā and testimonia. It can take an object, which in this case is the yogi’s body.
nityaṃ somakalāpūrṇaṃ śarīraṃ yasya yoginaḥ |
takṣakenāpi daṣṭasya viṣaṃ tasya na pīḍayet ||
pīḍayet ] pīḍyate, sarpati, bādhyate v.l.
nityaṃ somakalāpūrṇaṃ śarīraṃ yasya yoginaḥ |
takṣakenāpi daṣṭasya viṣaṃ taṃ na ca sarpati ||
nityaṃ somakalāpūrṇaṃ śarīraṃ yasya yoginaḥ |
takṣakenāpi daṣṭasya viṣaṃ tasya na sarpati ||
इन्धनानि यथा वह्निस्तैलवर्तिं च दीपकः ।
तथा सोमकलापूर्णं देही देहं न मुञ्चति ॥*
indhanāni yathā vahnis tailavartiṃ ca dīpakaḥ /
tathā somakalāpūrṇaṃ dehī dehaṃ na muñcati //*
indhanāni yathā vahnis tailavartiṃ ca dīpakaḥ |
tathā somakalāpūrṇaṃ dehī dehaṃ na muñcati ||
°vartiṃ ca ] °vartīva, °vartti ca v.l.
indhanāni yathā vahnis tailavartī ca dīpakaḥ |
nityaṃ somakalāpūrṇaṃ dehī dehaṃ na muñcati ||
गोमांसं भक्षयेन्नित्यं पिबेदमरवारुणीम् ।
कुलीनं तमहं मन्ये इतरे कुलघातकाः ॥
gomāṃsaṃ bhakṣayen nityaṃ pibed amaravāruṇīm /
kulīnaṃ tam ahaṃ manye itare kulaghātakāḥ //
gomāṃsaṃ bhakṣayen nityaṃ pibed amaravāruṇīṃ |
kulīnaṃ tam ahaṃ manye anye tu kulaghātakāḥ ||
gomāṃsaṃ bhakṣayen nityaṃ pibed amaravāruṇīm |
kulīnaṃ tam ahaṃ manye netarān kulaghātakān ||
गोशब्देनोदिता जिह्वा तत्प्रवेशो हि तालुनि ।
गोमांसभक्षणं तत्तु महापातकनाशनम् ॥
gośabdenoditā jihvā tatpraveśo hi tāluni /
gomāṃsabhakṣaṇaṃ tat tu mahāpātakanāśanam //
gośabdenoditā jihvā tatpraveśo hi tāluni |
gomāṃsabhakṣaṇaṃ tat tu mahāpātakanāśanaṃ ||
gośabdenoditā jihvā tatpraveśo hi tāluni |
gomāṃsabhakṣaṇaṃ tat tu mahāpātakanāśanam ||
जिह्वाप्रवेशसंभूतवह्निनोत्पादितः खलु ।
चन्द्रात्स्रवति यः सारः सा स्यादमरवारुणी ॥ *
jihvāpraveśasaṃbhūtavahninotpāditaḥ khalu /
candrāt sravati yaḥ sāraḥ sā syād amaravāruṇī // *
jihvāpraveśasaṃbhūtavahninotthāpitā khalu |
candrāt sravati yaḥ sāraḥ sā syād amaravāruṇī ||
jihvāpraveśasaṃbhūtavahninotpāditaḥ khalu |
candrāt sravati yaḥ sāraḥ sā syād amaravāruṇī ||
मूर्ध्नः षोडशपत्त्रपद्मगलितं प्राणादवाप्तं हठा-
दूर्ध्वास्यो रसनां नियम्य विवरे शक्तिं परां चिन्तयेत् ।
उत्कल्लोलकलाजलं च विमलं धारामृतं यः पिबेत्
निर्दोषः स मृणालकोमलतनुर्योगी चिरं जीवति ॥*
mūrdhnaḥ ṣoḍaśapattrapadmagalitaṃ prāṇād avāptaṃ haṭhā-
d ūrdhvāsyo rasanāṃ niyamya vivare śaktiṃ parāṃ cintayet /
utkallolakalājalaṃ ca vimalaṃ dhārāmṛtaṃ yaḥ pibet
nirdoṣaḥ sa mṛṇālakomalatanur yogī ciraṃ jīvati //*
The meaning of prāṇāt (`from the breath’) in the first verse quarter is not easy to understand without the context of this verse in the source text, the Vivekamārtaṇḍa. In the verse preceding this one in the Vivekamārtaṇḍa (117), the breath, on reaching the “great lotus”, is said to turn into nectar (amṛta). In Jyotsnā 3.51, Brahmānanda says that there is a variant prāṇaiḥ (`by means of the breaths’), which is easier to understand than prāṇāt. He nonetheless accepts prāṇat and understands it as being a means (prāṇāt sādhanabhūtād avāptam). He also understands the sixteen-petalled lotus to be the lotus in the throat, into which the nectar drips.
mūrdhnaḥ ṣoḍaśapatrapadmagalitaṃ prāṇād avāptaṃ haṭhād
ūrdhvāsyo rasanāṃ niyamya vivare śaktiṃ parāṃ cintayet |
utkallolakalājalaṃ ca vimalaṃ dhārāmayaṃ yaḥ piben
nirdoṣaḥ sa mṛṇālakomalatanur yogī ciraṃ jīvati ||
118b niyamya ] nidhāya, vidhāya v.l.• cintayet ] cālayet v.l.118c utkallolakalājalaṃ ] ca vimalaṃ dhārāmayaṃ ] (from HP); utkallolakalākalaṃ, utkallolajalākulaṃ, utkallolajalāmṛtaṃ, tat kallolakalājalaṃ, tat kallolajalākulaṃ v.l.• ca vimalaṃ ] suvimalaṃ v.l.• dhārāmayaṃ ] (from HP); jīvākulaṃ, jihvākulaṃ, dhārājalaṃ vl 118d tanur ] vapur v.l.
utkallolakalāmṛtaṃ ca vimalaṃ dhārāmṛtaṃ yaḥ pibet |
nirdoṣaḥ sa mṛnālakomalatanur yogī ciraṃ jīvati ||
utkallola° ] tatkallola° v.l., °tanur ] °vapur v.l.
mūrdhnaḥ ṣoḍaśapadmapatragalitaṃ prāṇād avāptaṃ haṭhād
ūrdhvāsyo rasanāṃ niyamya vivare śaktiṃ parāṃ cintayan |
tatkallolakalājalaṃ ca vimalaṃ jihvākulaṃ yaḥ piben
nirdoṣaḥ sa mṛṇālakomalatanur yogī ciraṃ jīvati ||
mūrdhnaḥ ṣoḍaśapatrapadmagalitaṃ prāṇād avāptaṃ haṭhāt
ūrdhvāsyo rasanāṃ niyamya vivare śaktiṃ parāṃ cintayet |
tatkallolakalājalaṃ suvimalaṃ dhārāmṛtaṃ yaḥ pibet
nirddoṣaḥ sa mṛṇālakomalatanur yogī paraṃ jīvati ||
cintayet ] cintayan v.l.
ūrdhvaṃ ṣoḍaśapatrapadmagalitaṃ prāṇād avāptaṃ haṭhād
ūrdhvāsyo rasanāṃ niyamya kuhare śaktiṃ parāṃ cintayan |
utkallolakalājalaṃ suvimalaṃ dhārāmṛtaṃ yaḥ piben
nirddoṣaḥ sa mṛṇālakomalavapur yogī ciraṃ jīvati ||
ūrdhvaṃ ] mūrdhvaṃ v.l.
चुम्बन्ती यदि लम्बिकाग्रम् अनिशं जिह्वा रसस्यन्दिनी
सक्षारा कटुकाथ दुग्धसदृशी मध्वाज्यतुल्याथवा ।
व्याधीनां हरणं जरान्तकरणं शास्त्रागमोदीरणं
तस्य स्यादमरत्वमष्टगुणवत्सिद्धाङ्गनाकर्षणम् ॥
cumbantī yadi lambikāgram aniśaṃ jihvā rasasyandinī
sakṣārā kaṭukātha dugdhasadṛśī madhvājyatulyāthavā /
vyādhīnāṃ haraṇaṃ jarāntakaraṇaṃ śāstrāgamodīraṇaṃ
tasya syād amaratvam aṣṭaguṇavat siddhāṅganākarṣaṇam //
cumbantī yadi lambikāgram aniśaṃ jihvā rasasyandinī
sakṣārā kaṭukātha dugdhasadṛśā madhvājyatulyāthavā |
vyādhīnāṃ haraṇaṃ jaropaśamanaṃ śāstrāgamodīraṇaṃ
tasya syād amaratvaṃ aṣṭaguṇitaṃ siddhāṅgānākarṣaṇam ||
128a rasasyandanī ] rasaspandanī VTG, rasāsvādinī A 128c jaropaśamanaṃ ] AGBGL; jarāpaharaṇaṃ V, jarāntakaranaṃ TGP • °odīraṇaṃ ] VA; °odgīraṇaṃ TGBGL, °occāraṇaṃ GP
cumbantī yadi lambikāgram aniśaṃ jihvā rasasyandinī
sakṣārā kaṭukāmladugdhasadṛśaṃ madhvājyatulyaṃ yadā |
vyādhīnāṃ haraṇaṃ jarāntakaraṇaṃ śāstrāgamoddhāraṇaṃ
tasya syād iha siddhir aṣṭaguṇitā siddhāṅgaṇākarṣaṇam ||
cumbantī yadi lambikāgram aniśaṃ jihvā rasasyandinī
sakṣārā kaṭukāmladugdhasadṛśī madhvājyatulyāthavā |
vyādhīnāṃ haraṇaṃ jarāmbutaraṇaṃ śāstrāgamodgīraṇaṃ
tasya syād amaratvam aṣṭaguṇitaṃ siddhāṅganākarṣaṇam ||
cumbantī yadi lambikāgram anilaṃ jihvā rasasyandinī
sakṣārā kaṭukāmladugdhasadṛśāṃ madhvājyatulyā tathā |
vyādhīnāṃ haraṇaṃ jarāntakaraṇaṃ śāstrāgamodgīraṇaṃ
tasya syād amaratvam aṣṭaguṇavat siddhāṅganākarṣaṇam ||
एकं सृष्टिमयं बीजं एका मुद्रा च खेचरी ।
एको देवो निरालम्ब एकावस्था मनोन्मनी ॥
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījaṃ ekā mudrā ca khecarī /
eko devo nirālamba ekāvasthā manonmanī //
eka[ṃ] sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījaṃ ek[ā] mudrā tu khecarī |
dvāv etau jñāyate yena so pi śāntapade sthitam ||
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījam ekā mudrā ca khecarī |
dvāv ekaṃ yo vijānāti sa vai pūjyaḥ kulāgame ||
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījam ekā mudrā ca khecarī |
eko devo nirālambaḥ ekāvasthā manonmanī ||
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījam ekā mudrā ca khecarī |
eko devo nirālamba ekāvasthā manonmanī ||
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījaṃ ekā mudrā ca khecarī |
eko devo nirālamba ekāvasthā manonmanī ||
सुषिरं ज्ञानजनकं पञ्चस्रोतःसमन्वितम् ।
तिष्ठते खेचरी मुद्रा तस्मिन्शून्ये निरञ्जने ॥ (βω, η2 and χ)
suṣiraṃ jñānajanakaṃ pañcasrotaḥsamanvitam /
tiṣṭhate khecarī mudrā tasmin śūnye nirañjane // (βω, η2 and χ)
पाताले यद्विशति सुषिरं मूले तदस्ति
तत्त्वं चैतत्प्रवदति सुधीस्तन्मुखं निम्नगानाम् ।
चन्द्रात्सारः स्रवति* वपुषस्तेन मृत्युर्नराणां
तं बध्नीयात्सुकरणमृदा नान्यथा कायसिद्धिः ॥ *
pātāle yad viśati suṣiraṃ mūle tad asti
tattvaṃ caitat pravadati sudhīs tan mukhaṃ nimnagānām /
candrāt sāraḥ sravati* vapuṣas tena mṛtyur narāṇāṃ
taṃ badhnīyāt sukaraṇamṛdā nānyathā kāyasiddhiḥ // *
This verse occurs in various places in the different recensions of the text. It is here in the α2 and α3 manuscripts, in chapter four (4.8*3) in α1 and the delta group, after 3.39 in β1 and β2, and in both the third and fourth chapters in the γ manuscripts. It must have entered the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā at an early stage, and has moved around, perhaps because the name of the technique alluded to is not stated and the meaning of the first half of the verse is somewhat vague without its original context (we are yet to identify a source). The first verse quarter has many variants among the witnesses. α2 has:
yat prāleyaṃ pihitasukhire merumūle yad astī
tasmiṃs tattvaṃ pravadati sudhīs tan mukhaṃ nimnagānām
yat prāleyaṃ pihitasuṣiraṃ merumūrdhny asti tathyaṃ
tasmiṃs tattvaṃ pravadati sudhīs tan mukhaṃ nimnagānām
°suṣiraṃ ] K1, °sukhire α2. °mūrdhny ] P8. °mūle α2. asti tathyaṃ ] K1, yad astī α2.
“That cool liquid by which the aperture is filled at the top of Meru and exists as the truth, the wise [yogi] says that is the source of [all] rivers.”
pātāle yad viśati suṣiraṃ merūmūlaṃ tad asti
tattvaṃ caitad vadati sudhā tanmukhaṃ nimnagānām |
candrāt sāraṃ sravati vapuṣas tena mṛtyur narāṇāṃ
tad badhnīyāt sukharatimṛdur nānyathā kāryasiddhiḥ ||
tat pātālād viyati śikhare merumūle tad asti
tattvaṃ caitat pravadati sudhīḥ saṃmukhe nimnagānām |
candrāt sāraḥ sravati vapuṣas tena mṛtyur narāṇām
tad badhnīyāt svakaraṇamṛdā nānyathā kāyasiddhiḥ ||
pātāle yad viśati suṣiraṃ merumūle yad asti
tadvac caitat pravadati sudhīs tanmukhaṃ nimnagānām |
candrāt sāraḥ sravati vapuṣas tena mṛtyur narāṇām
badhnīyāt tat sukaraṇam atho nānyathā kāyasiddhiḥ ||
pātāle yad vitatasuṣiraṃ merumūle tad asmin
tadvac caitat pravadati sudhīs tanmukhaṃ nimnagānām |
candrāt sāraḥ sravati vapuṣas tena mṛtyur narāṇāṃ
taṃ badhnīyāt sukaraṇamṛdā nānyathā kāyasiddhiḥ ||
अथ मूलबन्धः* ॥
पार्ष्णिभागेन संपीड्य योनिमाकुञ्चयेद्गुदम् ।
अपानमूर्ध्वमाकृष्य मूलबन्धोऽयमुच्यते ॥
atha mūlabandhaḥ* //
pārṣṇibhāgena saṃpīḍya yonim ākuñcayed gudam /
apānam ūrdhvam ākṛṣya mūlabandho’yam ucyate //
pārṣṇibhāgena saṃpīḍya yonim ākuñcayed gudam |
apānam ūrdhvam ākṛṣya mūlabandho ’yam ucyate ||
pārṣṇibhāgena sampīḍya yonim ākuñcayed gudaṃ |
apānam ūrdhvam ākuñcya mūlabandho ’yam ucyate ||
pārṣṇibhāgena saṃpīḍya yonim ākuñcayed gudam |
apānam ūrdhvam ākṛṣya mūlabandho ’yam ucyate ||
अधोगतिमपानं वै ऊर्ध्वगं कुरुते बलात् ।
आकुञ्चनेन तं प्राहुर्मूलबन्धं तु योगिनः ॥
adhogatim apānaṃ vai ūrdhvagaṃ kurute balāt /
ākuñcanena taṃ prāhur mūlabandhaṃ tu yoginaḥ //
adhogatim apānaṃ vai ūrdhvagaṃ kurute balāt |
ākuñcanena taṃ prāhur mūlabandhaṃ tu yoginaḥ ||
53a °gatiṃ ] TU; °gataṃ G 53c ākuñcanena taṃ ] GU ākuñcane ca tat T
53d mūlabandhaṃ tu yoginaḥ ] T; mūlabandho yam ucyate GU
adhogatim apānaṃ vai ūrdhvagaṃ kurute balāt |
ākuñcanena taṃ prāhur mūlabandhaṃ hi yoginaḥ ||
adhogatam apānaṃ ca tad ūrdhvaṃ kurute haṭhāt |
ākuñcanena taṃ prāhur mūlabandhaṃ tu yoginaḥ ||
गुदं पार्ष्ण्या तु संपीड्य वायुमाकुञ्चयेद्बलात् ।
वारं वारं यथा चोर्ध्वं समायाति समीरणः ॥
gudaṃ pārṣṇyā tu saṃpīḍya vāyum ākuñcayed balāt /
vāraṃ vāraṃ yathā cordhvaṃ samāyāti samīraṇaḥ //
The instruction to `contract the wind’ (vāyum ākuñcayet) is odd (especially with samīraṇaḥ in the fourth pāda) and not found in other texts. Mallin-son has adopted yonim for vāyum (cf.~Haṭhapradīpikā 3.50d) in his edition of this verse in its source text, the Dattātreyayogaśāstra, which is not found in the manuscripts of that text but is in the Haṭhapradīpikā’s delta manuscripts. In the context of the root lock, vāyum ākuñcayet can be understood as an instruction to contract apāna-vāyu, which is mentioned in the previous verse (3.51a). Instructions to contract apāna-vāyu are found in other yoga texts, such as Yoga-tārā-valī 7b (ākuñcanaiḥ śaśvad apānavāyoḥ), Śiva-saṃhitā 4.84cd (apāna-vāyum ākuñcya balād...), Śiva-yoga-pradīpikā 2.53ab (athordhva-madhya-sthira-bandha-nābhyām ākuñcanād ūrdhvam apānavāyoḥ) and Yukta-bhava-deva 7.297 (ādhāra-kamale suptāṃ cālayet kuṇḍalīṃ dṛḍhām | apāna-vāyum ākṛṣya balād ākuñcya buddhimān). In Jyotsnā 3.63, Brahmānanda understands vāyu in this verse as apāna when he says that `one should contract the wind, apāna’ (vāyum apānam ākuñcayed), which he explains as, `one should pull it by contractions of the anus’ (gudasyā-kuñcanenā-karṣayet). In the same vein, Bhava-deva-miśra glosses `pulling apāna’ (apānā-karṣaṇam) as `contracting the anus’ (gudā-kuñcanam), when commenting on `having pulled apāna-vāyu and forcefully contracted it ...’ (apāna-vāyum ākṛṣya balād ākuñcya...) in Yukta-bhava-deva 297 and 301.
gudaṃ pārṣṇyā tu saṃpīḍya yonim ākuñcayed balāt |
vāraṃ vāraṃ yathā cordhvaṃ samāyāti samīraṇaḥ ||
yonim ] from Jyotsnā, vāyum codd.
gudaṃ pārṣṇyā tu sampīḍya vāyum ākuñcayed balāt |
bāraṃ bāraṃ yathā cordhvaṃ samāyāti samīraṇaḥ ||
gudaṃ pārṣṇyā ca saṃpīḍya vāyum ākuñcayed balāt |
vāraṃ vāraṃ yathā cordhvaṃ samāyāti samīraṇaḥ ||
gudaṃ pārṣṇyā tu saṃpīḍya vāyum ākuñcayed balāt |
vāraṃ vāraṃ tathā cordhvaṃ samāyāti samīraṇaḥ ||
gudaṃ pārṣṇyā tu saṃpīḍya vāyum ākuñcayed balāt |
vāraṃ vāraṃ yathā cordhvaṃ samāyāti samīraṇaḥ ||
प्राणापानौ नादबिन्दू मूलबन्धेन चैकताम् ।
गत्वा योगस्य संसिद्धिं यच्छतो नात्र संशयः ॥
prāṇāpānau nādabindū mūlabandhena caikatām /
gatvā yogasya saṃsiddhiṃ yacchato nātra saṃśayaḥ //
Since the term nāda usually means `internal sound’ in Haṭha and Rājayoga texts, it is possible that bindu here was understood by some to have the tantric connotations of sonic and visual foci (Mallinson 2007:219 n.325) or two levels of sonic emanation in mantroccāra, where nāda is an unvoiced sound and bindu is the slightly coarser sound of inner murmuring (see Tāntrikābhidhānakośa vol. 3, 2013: 278–279). However there is a passage in the Amaraugha (10–12) where nāda and bindu are paired and it is clear that bindu means generative fluid.
prāṇāpānau nādabindū mūlabandhena caikatām |
gatvā yogasya saṃsiddhiṃ yacchato nātra saṃśayaḥ ||
145c gatvā yogasya saṃ° ] gacchato yogasaṃ° M1A
145d yacchato ] gacchato M1, kurute AM2, gachate pi
prāṇāpānau nādabindū mūlabandhena caikatām |
gatau tadā yogasiddhiṃ prāpnoty eva na saṃśayaḥ ||
prāṇāpānau nādabindū mūlabandhena caikatām |
gatvā yogasya saṃsiddhiṃ gacchato nātra saṃśayaḥ ||
अपानप्राणयोरैक्यं क्षयो मूत्रपुरीषयोः ।
युवा भवति वृद्धोऽपि सततं मूलबन्धनात् ॥*
apānaprāṇayor aikyaṃ kṣayo mūtrapurīṣayoḥ /
yuvā bhavati vṛddho’pi satataṃ mūlabandhanāt //*
The diminishing of urine and faeces as a result of success in yoga is mentioned in the Amanaska (1.50c) and Dattātreyayogaśāstra (80a).
apānaprāṇayor aikyaṃ kṣayo mūtrapurīṣayoḥ |
yuvā bhavati vṛddho ’pi satataṃ mūlabandhanāt ||
apānaprāṇayor aikyaṃ kṣayo mūtrapurīṣayoḥ |
yuvā bhavati vṛddho ’pi satataṃ mūlabandhanāt ||
अपाने चोर्ध्वगे जाते संप्राप्ते वह्निमण्डलं ।
तदानलशिखा दीर्घा वर्धते वायुनाहता ॥
apāne cordhvage jāte saṃprāpte vahnimaṇḍalaṃ /
tadānalaśikhā dīrghā vardhate vāyunāhatā //
apāne cordhvage jāte saṃprāpte vahnimaṇḍalam |
tato ’nalaśikhā dīrghā vardhate vāyunāhatā ||
54a °maṇḍalam ] from Haṭhapradīpikā witnesses, maṇḍale codd.
apāne cordhvage jāte prayāte vahnimaṇḍale |
tathānalaśikhādīptir vāyunā preritā yathā ||
apāne cordhvage jāte saṃprāpte vahnimaṇḍale |
tathānalaśikhā dīrghā vardhate vāyunāhatā ||
ततो यातौ वह्न्यपानौ प्राणमुष्णस्वरूपकम् ।
तेनात्यन्तप्रदीप्तस्तु ज्वलनो देहजस्तथा ॥
tato yātau vahnyapānau prāṇam uṣṇasvarūpakam /
tenātyantapradīptas tu jvalano dehajas tathā //
The second verse quarter has been rewritten in the α manuscripts as prāṇamūlasvarūpakam, which is similar to η1 (prāṇamūlasvarūpakau) and the Haṭharatnāvalī (mūlarūpasvarūpakau). Manuscripts from the delta group, as well as the Yogacintāmaṇi, have prāṇam uktasvarūpakam or prāṇam uktasvarūpakau. It appears that the intention behind these rewrites was to avoid the reading in the source text, `prāṇa is hot by nature’ (prāṇam uṣṇasvarūpakam), which was likely accepted by Svātmārāma because it is in some witnesses of the β, γ and ε groups. References to prāṇa being hot by nature (and apāna being cold) occur in other works, such as Mokṣopāya 6.85.111-112 and Haṭhatattvakaumudī 4.14, 41.2. The commentators, Bālakṛṣṇa (Yogaprakāśikā 5.85) and Brahmānanda (Jyotsnā 3.67) accept the idea that prāṇa is hot by nature.
tato yātau vahnyapānau prāṇam uṣṇasvarūpakam |
tenātyantapradīptena jvalano dehajas tathā ||
dehajas ] T; dehagas GU
yātāyātau vahnyapānau mūlarūpasvarūpakau |
tenābhyantaḥ pradīptas tu jvalano dehajas tathā || 2.64 ||
tato yātau vahnyapānau prāṇam uktasvarūpakau |
tenātyantapradīptas tu jvalano dehajas tathā ||
तेन कुण्डलिनी सुप्ता संतप्ता संप्रबुध्यते ।
दण्डाहता भुजङ्गीव निश्वस्य ऋजुतां व्रजेत् ॥
tena kuṇḍalinī suptā saṃtaptā saṃprabudhyate /
daṇḍāhatā bhujaṅgīva niśvasya ṛjutāṃ vrajet //
tena kuṇḍalinī suptā saṃtaptā saṃprabudhyate |
daṇḍāhatā bhujaṃgīva niśvasya ṛjutāṃ vrajet ||
daṇḍāhatā bhujaṅgīva niścitaṃ ṛjutām iyāt |
niścitaṃ ] niśvasya T,P,t1
tena kuṇḍalinī suptā satataṃ saṃprabodhyate |
daṇḍāhatabhujaṅgīva niścitam ṛjutāṃ vrajet ||
बिलं प्रविष्टेव ततो ब्रह्मनाड्यन्तरं व्रजेत् ।
तस्मान्नित्यं मूलबन्धः कर्तव्यो योगिभिः सदा ॥
bilaṃ praviṣṭeva tato brahmanāḍyantaraṃ vrajet /
tasmān nityaṃ mūlabandhaḥ kartavyo yogibhiḥ sadā //
bile praviṣṭe ca tato brahmanāḍyantaraṃ vrajet |
tasmān nityaṃ mūlabandhaḥ kartavyo yogibhiḥ sadā ||
57a bile ] bil*e*T, bila° G2U, bilaṃ G1 • °praviṣṭe ca tato ] T; °praveśato yatra GU
bilaṃ praviṣṭeva tato brahmanāḍyantaraṃ vrajet |
tasmān nityaṃ mūlabandhaḥ kartavyo yogibhiḥ sadā ||
bilaṃ praviṣṭeva tathā brahmanāḍyantaraṃ vrajet |
tasmān nityaṃ mūlabandhaḥ kartavyo yogipuṅgavaiḥ ||
praviṣṭeva ] praviṣṭaiva v.l.
अथोड्डियानम् ।
बद्धो येन सुषुम्णायां प्राणस्तूड्डीयते यतः ।
तस्मादुड्डीयनाख्योऽयं योगिभिः समुदाहृतः ॥
athoḍḍiyānam /
baddho yena suṣumṇāyāṃ prāṇas tūḍḍīyate yataḥ /
tasmād uḍḍīyanākhyo’yaṃ yogibhiḥ samudāhṛtaḥ //
baddho yena suṣumṇāyāṃ prāṇas tūḍḍīyate yataḥ |
tasmād uḍḍīyaṇākhyo ’yaṃ yogibhiḥ samudāhṛtaḥ ||
58c baddho ] em.~from HP; vajro G, bandho TU 58d yataḥ ] TU; tataḥ G
baddho yena suṣumnāyāṃ prāṇas tūḍḍiyate yataḥ |
tasmād uḍḍiyānākhyo ’yaṃ yogibhiḥ samudāhṛtaḥ ||
baddho yena suṣumṇāyāṃ prāṇas tūḍḍīyate yataḥ |
tasmād uḍḍiyānākhyo ’yaṃ yogibhiḥ samudāhṛtaḥ ||
baddho yena suṣumṇāyāṃ prāṇas tūḍḍīyate tataḥ|
tasmād uḍḍīyānākhyo ’yaṃ yogibhiḥ samudāhṛtaḥ||
उड्डीनं कुरुते यस्माद् अविश्रान्तं महाखगः ।
उड्डियानं तदेव स्यात्तत्र बन्धो विधीयते ॥
uḍḍīnaṃ kurute yasmād aviśrāntaṃ mahākhagaḥ /
uḍḍiyānaṃ tad eva syāt tatra bandho vidhīyate //
In the Vivekamārtaṇḍa this verse is preceded by a passage on mūlabandha, so the likely meaning of the fourth verse quarter is that (mūla)bandha is to be performed in this practice. The β group and many other manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpika have `the root [lock] is applied’ (mūlaṃ vidhīyate), which appears to be an attempt to clarify the meaning of the original verse.
uḍḍīṇaṃ kurute yasmād aviśrāntaṃ mahākhagaḥ |
uḍḍiyānaṃ tad eva syāt tatra bandho vidhīyate ||
43b aviśrāntaṃ ] em.~from HP; aviśrānta VTU, aviśrānto G
uḍḍīnaṃ kurute yasmād aviśrāntaṃ mahākhagaḥ |
uḍḍiyānaṃ tad eva syāt tatra bandho ’bhidhīyate ||
uḍḍīnaṃ kurute yasmād aviśrāntaṃ mahākhagaḥ |
uḍḍiyānaṇ tad eva syān mūlabandho ’bhidhīyate ||
उदरे पश्चिमं तानं नाभेरूर्ध्वं च कारयेत् ।
उड्डियानो ह्यसौ बन्धो मृत्युमातङ्गकेसरी ॥
udare paścimaṃ tānaṃ nābher ūrdhvaṃ ca kārayet /
uḍḍiyāno hy asau bandho mṛtyumātaṅgakesarī //
The variant spelling tāṇa (for tāna) reflects vernacular pronunciation (see e.g.~Molesworth 1857 s.v.~tāṇa).
udare paścime tāṇaṃ nābher ūrdhvaṃ ca kārayet |
uḍḍīyāno hy asau bandho mṛtyumātaṅgakesarī ||
udare paṣcimaṃ tānaṃ nābher ūrdhvaṃ tu kārayet |
uḍyānākhyo’tra bandho’yaṃ mṛtyumātaṅgakesarī ||
udare paścimaṃ tānaṃ nābher ūrdhvaṃ ca dhārayet |
uḍḍiyāno hy asau bandho mṛtyumātaṅgakesarī ||
udare paścimaṃ tānaṃ nābher ūrdhvaṃ samācaret |
uḍḍiyāno hy asau bandho mṛtyumātaṅgakesarī ||
उड्डियानं तु सहजं गुरुणा कथितं सदा ।
अभ्यसेदस्ततन्द्रस्तु वृद्धोऽपि तरुणो भवेत् ॥
uḍḍiyānaṃ tu sahajaṃ guruṇā kathitaṃ sadā /
abhyased astatandras tu vṛddho’pi taruṇo bhavet //
At the end of the second pāda sadā is attested by witnesses of α, η, ε and delta groups, as well as the Dattātreyayogaśāstra. We have understood the first line to mean that even though the basics of the practice of uḍḍiyāna are easy, it still needs to be taught by the guru. Some witnesses read yathā for sadā, perhaps as a deliberate substitution of the more difficult sadā, making the verse mean that uḍḍiyāna is easy in the way that is taught by the guru.
uḍḍiyāṇaṃ tu sahajaṃ guruṇā kathitaṃ sadā |
abhyased astatandras tu vṛddho ’pi taruṇo bhavet ||
141d guruṇā ] guṇaughāt pi
guruṇā sahajaṃ proktaṃ vṛddho ’pi taruṇo bhavet |
bāhyoḍyāṇaṃ ca kurute bāhyālaṅkāravardhanam ||
uḍḍiyānaṃ tu sahajaṃ guruṇā kathitaṃ yathā |
abhyaset tad atandras tu vṛddho ’pi taruṇāyate ||
uḍḍiyāṇaṃ tu sahajaṃ guruṇā kathitaṃ sadā |
abhyased asvatantras tu vṛddho ’pi taruṇo bhavet ||
नाभेरूर्ध्वमधश्चापि तानं कुर्यात्प्रयत्नतः ।
षण्मासमभ्यसन्मृत्युं जयत्येव न संशयः ॥
nābher ūrdhvam adhaś cāpi tānaṃ kuryāt prayatnataḥ /
ṣaṇmāsam abhyasan mṛtyuṃ jayaty eva na saṃśayaḥ //
nābher ūrdhvam ataḥ paścāt tānaṃ kuryāt prayatnataḥ || 142 ||
ṣaṇmāsam abhyasen mṛtyuṃ jayaty eva na saṃśayaḥ |
142c ataḥ paścāt ] PT, adhaś cāpi cett.
nābher ūrdhvam adhaś cāpi tānaṃ paścimam ācaret |
uḍyānabandha eṣaḥ syāt sarvaduḥkhaughanāśanaḥ ||
nābher ūrdhvam adho vāpi tānaṃ kuryāt prayatnataḥ |
ṣaṇmāsam abhyasen mṛtyuṃ jayaty eva na saṃśayaḥ ||
nābher ūrdhvam adho vāpi tānaṃ kuryāt prayatnataḥ |
ṣaṇmāsam abhyasen mṛtyuṃ jayaty eva na saṃśayaḥ ||
nābher ūrdhvam adhaś cāpi tānaṃ nirbharam ācaret |
uḍḍiyāno hy ayaṃ bandhaḥ sarvaduḥkhaughanāśanaḥ ||
सति वज्रासने पादौ कराभ्यां धारयेद्दृढम् ।
गुल्फदेशसमीपे च कन्दं तत्र प्रपीडयेत् ॥
sati vajrāsane pādau karābhyāṃ dhārayed dṛḍham /
gulphadeśasamīpe ca kandaṃ tatra prapīḍayet //
In Haṭhapradīpikā this verse seems to instruct the yogi to press the bulb (kanda) with the feet while holding them with the hands. The adopted reading of the source text, the Gorakṣaśataka, which is only found in witness T (and there in the singular jānu, which has been emended to the dual jānū in Mallinson’s edition) says that it is the knees that are to be held, which would still allow for the feet to press the bulb. In the Yuktabhavadeva (7.224), Bhavadevamiśra says that the bulb is near the navel and the legs are held near the ankles, suggesting that the bulb is pressed by using the hands to pull the feet into the lower abdomen. Holding the ankles with the hands and pressing the kanda with the feet is also the view of Brahmānanda (Jyotsnā 3.114), who follows the Yogayājñavalkya (4.14, 4.16) in thinking that the place of the kanda is nine fingerbreadths above the middle of the body, which is two fingerbreaths above the anus (Jyotsnā 3.113). In the Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā (f.~36r), Sundaradeva explains that the yogi presses the kanda in the navel by performing uḍḍiyānabandha, along with the root and chin locks, at the end of kumbhaka and the beginning of exhalation. It is thus the backward stretch in the abdomen (udare paścimatāna) that presses the kanda in the navel.
sati vajrāsane jānū karābhyāṃ dhārayed dṛḍham ||
gulphadeśasamīpe ca kandaṃ tatra prapīḍayet |
59c jānū ] em.; pādau GU, jānu T, prādau V
sati vajrāsane pādau karābhyāṃ dhārayed dṛḍham |
gulphadeśasamīpe ca udaraṃ tat prapīḍayet ||
dṛḍham āsanaṃ baddhvā gulphadeśasamīpe karābhyāṃ pādau datvā nābhisamīpasthaṃ kandaṃ pīḍayann udare paścimatāṇaṃ tathā kuryād yathā vāyuḥ kukṣisandhiṃ na gacchaty evam uḍḍiyānabandho jarāmṛtyuvināśanaḥ sampadyate ||
tathā coktaṃ haṭhapradīpikāyām |
sati vajrāsane pādau karābhyāṃ dharayed dṛḍhaṃ |
gulphadeśasamīpe ca kandaṃ tatra nipīḍayet ||...
siddhāsane sthitvā hastābhyāṃ pādau gulphapradeśasamīpe dṛḍhaṃ dhṛtvā tunde nālotthāna[ṃ] sādhu vidhāya samāhitamanasā sudṛḍhamūlabandhajālandharabandhavatābhyāsinā sādhakena recakādau kuṃbhakānte udare paścimatāne kriyamāṇe nitarāṃ tadā tatra nābhikandanipīḍane paścimatānena sati nābhikandotthānāḍaya urdhvamukhā vikasitā viralā vimalā asaṃhatā vāyugrahasamarthā bhavanti tadā sakuṃbhitaḥ prāṇavāyuḥ śanaiḥ [||]
पश्चिमं तानमुदरे कारयेद्धृदये गले ।
शनैः शनैर्यथा प्राणस्तुन्दसंधिं न गच्छति ॥
paścimaṃ tānam udare kārayed dhṛdaye gale /
śanaiḥ śanair yathā prāṇas tundasaṃdhiṃ na gacchati //
In 3.65b, the reading gale (`in the neck’) is very well attested by manuscripts of the source text, the Gorakṣaśataka, and the Hathapradīpikā (including all three α witnesses). Its meaning is not entirely clear to us as the `backward stretch’ (paścimaṃ tānam) usually occurs above and below the navel when the uḍḍiyāna lock is applied, as stated above in verse 3.61. In 3.65, the mention of the stretch in the chest (hṛdaya) may also be consistent with 3.61 in so far as `above the navel’ might include the lower region of the chest. Drawing on x-ray experiments on uḍḍiyānabandha conducted at the Kaivalyadhama Yoga Institute and published in the Yoga Mīmāṃsā Journal (e.g.~vol.1, issues 1-2), Dr M. M. Gore (2005:144) mentions a sub-atmospheric (negative) pressure in visceral cavities, such as the oesophagus and stomach, as a physiological effect of applying uḍḍiyāna. So, it may be possible that a `backward stretch’ in the throat was intended in 3.65b. However, we have not seen the neck mentioned in this regard in any other premodern work and the absence of ca suggests that gale may be a corruption. The alternative reading cibukaṃ hṛdi in manuscripts of the Hathapradīpikā on lower branches of the stemma and in the testimonia is a reference to jālandharabandha and appears to be a patch. In his edition of the Gorakṣaśataka, Mallinson has adopted the emendation gate suggested by Dr Sathyanaryanan, which he understands to mean that the rearward stretch reaches as far as the heart.
paścimaṃ tānam udare dhārayed dhṛdaye gate |
śanaiḥ śanair yathā prāṇas tundasaṃdhiṃ na gacchati ||
60d dhārayedd°] GU; kārye*raṃ*T, kuryāñ ca V dhṛdaye gate] em.~Sathyanarayanan; dhṛdaye gale GUT, civukaṃ hṛdi V
paścimaṃ tānam udare kārayec cibukaṃ hṛdi |
śanaiḥ śanair yathā prāṇas tundasiddhiṃ na gacchati ||
paścime tānam udare ku[r]yac c[a] cibukaṃ hṛdi |
śanaiḥ śanair yathā prāṇaḥ kandasaṃdhi[ṃ] nigacchati ||
yathābhyāsānurūpaṃ kandasaṃdhiṃ kandagatanāḍisaṃghavimalavivaraprānteṣu nigachati nitarāṃ gacchati tathā tathā kuṃbhakavṛddhiḥ sukharūpodbhavati sādhakasya yenoḍḍīyānena bandhena vāyuḥ proḍḍīyāste brahmanāḍyāṃ yato ’sau uḍḍīyānākhyaḥ smṛto bandha ārthaḥ sevyas tasmād yogibhiḥ siddhasevyaḥ ||
paścimaṃ tānam udare kārayec cibukaṃ hṛdi |
śanaiḥ śanairyathā prāṇaḥ skandhasaṅge na gacchati ||
uktalakṣaṇe vajrāsane baddhe satī gulphadeśasamīpena meḍhraṃ vā prapīḍayet cibukaṃ hṛdi kṛtvā prāṇasyordhvasañcalanaṃ kārayet tena prāṇ[a]ḥ skandhasandhiṃ gacchatīty arthaḥ ||
सर्वेषामेव बन्धानाम् उत्तमो ह्युड्डियानकः ।
उड्डियाने दृढे बन्धे मुक्तिः स्वाभाविकी भवेत् ॥
sarveṣām eva bandhānām uttamo hy uḍḍiyānakaḥ /
uḍḍiyāne dṛḍhe bandhe muktiḥ svābhāvikī bhavet //
sarveṣām eva bandhānāṃ hy uttamo hy uḍḍiyānakaḥ |
uḍḍiyāne dṛḍhe bandhe mūlaḥ svābhāviko bhavet ||
sarveṣām eva bandhānām uttamo hy uḍḍiyāṇakaḥ |
uḍḍiyāṇe dṛḍhe bandhe mūlaṃ svābhāvikaṃ bhavet ||
uḍḍīyānabandham upasamharati sarveṣām iti || mūlam iti mūlabandho ’nāyāsena sidhyatīty arthaḥ ||
अथ जालन्धरः ।
कण्ठमाकुञ्च्य हृदये स्थापयेच्चिबुकं दृढम् ।
बन्धो जालन्धराख्योऽयं अमृताव्ययकारकः ॥
atha jālandharaḥ /
kaṇṭham ākuñcya hṛdaye sthāpayec cibukaṃ dṛḍham /
bandho jālandharākhyo’yaṃ amṛtāvyayakārakaḥ //
Manuscripts of the α, β, η and delta groups have sthāpayed dṛḍham icchayā (`one should place it firmly as desired’) in the second verse quarter, which is also well-attested in the transmission of the source text, the Dattātreyayogaśāstra. This reading seems secondary because, in a subsequent verse (3.69), contracting the throat is the main feature of jālandharabandha, so it seems contradictory to say that it may be done `as one likes’ in 3.67b. The word icchayā may have crept in to this verse because someone wanted to make this practice optional in light of 3.22, or it might be a corruption of hṛdaye sthāpayed dṛḍhaṃ niścayam which is found in some other manuscripts.
kaṇṭham ākuñcya hṛdaye sthāpayec cibukaṃ dṛḍham |
jālandharo bandha eṣa amṛtāvyayakārakaḥ ||
138b sthāpayec cibukaṃ dṛḍham] HRPTPT; sthāpayed dṛḍhayā dhiyā YTU, sthāpayed dṛḍham icchayā cett.
kaṇṭham ākuñcya hṛdaye sthāpayec cibukaṃ dṛḍham |
bandho jālandharākhyo ’yaṃ jarāmṛtyuvināśakaḥ ||
kaṇṭham ākuñcya hṛdaye sthāpayed dṛḍham icchayā |
bandho jālandharākhyo ’yam amṛtāvyayakārakaḥ ||
kaṇṭham ākuñcya hṛdaye sthāpayed dṛḍham icchayā |
bandho jālandharākhyo ’yam amṛtāvyayakārakaḥ ||
amṛtāvyaya°] amṛtavyaya° v.l.
बध्नाति हि शिराजालमधोगामिनभोजलम् ।
ततो जालन्धरो बन्धः कण्ठदुःखौघनाशनः ॥
badhnāti hi śirājālam adhogāminabhojalam /
tato jālandharo bandhaḥ kaṇṭhaduḥkhaughanāśanaḥ //
badhnāti hi śirājālam adhogāminabhojalam |
tato jālandharo bandhaḥ kaṇṭhaduḥkhaughanāśanaḥ ||
badhnāti hi śirājālaṃ nādho yāti nabhojalam |
tato jālandharo bandhaḥ kaṇṭhasaṅkocane kṛte ||
badhnātīha śirājālam adhogāminabhojalam |
tato jālandharaḥ proktaḥ kaṇṭhe duḥkhaughanāśanaḥ ||
badhnāti hi śirājālaṃ nādho yāti nabhojalam |
tato jālandharo bandhaḥ kaṇṭhaduḥkhaughanāśanaḥ ||
जालन्धरे कृते बन्धे कण्ठसंकोचलक्षणे ।
न पीयूषं पतत्यग्नौ न च वायुः प्रधावति ॥
jālandhare kṛte bandhe kaṇṭhasaṃkocalakṣaṇe /
na pīyūṣaṃ pataty agnau na ca vāyuḥ pradhāvati //
jālandhare kṛte bandhe kaṇṭhasaṃkocalakṣaṇe |
na pīyūṣaṃ pataty agnau na ca vāyuḥ pradhāvati ||
pradhāvati ] ; prakupyati AGT
jālandhare kṛte bandhe kaṇṭhasaṃkocalakṣaṇe |
na pīyūṣaṃ pataty agnau na ca vāyuḥ prakupyati ||
jālandhare kṛte bandhe kaṇṭhasaṃkocalakṣaṇe |
na pīyūṣaṃ pataty agnau na ca vāyuḥ prakupyati ||
कण्ठसंकोचनेनैव द्वे नाड्यौ स्तम्भयेद्दृढं ।
मध्यचक्रमिदं ज्ञेयं षोडशाधारबन्धनम् ॥
kaṇṭhasaṃkocanenaiva dve nāḍyau stambhayed dṛḍhaṃ /
madhyacakram idaṃ jñeyaṃ ṣoḍaśādhārabandhanam //
The import of the second line of this verse is obscure to us. In Jyotsnā 3.73, Brahmānanda thinks that the middle cakra (madhyacakra) is viśuddha cakra. The main reason for this appears to be that this cakra is located in the throat and the salient feature of the jālandhara lock is contracting the throat. However, he also seems to connect the viśuddha cakra to the sixteen supports (ṣoḍaśādhāra) at the end of this verse, perhaps because this cakra has sixteen petals (as mentioned in 3.47). On the meaning of ādhāra in yogic contexts, see entry no.~3 in the Tāntrikābhidhānakośa vol.~1 2000: 191.
kaṇṭhasaṃkocanaṃ kṛtvā dve nāḍyau stambhayed dṛḍham |
rasanāpīḍyamānās tu ṣoḍaśaś cordhvagāminī ||
madhyacakram idaṃ jñeyaṃ ṣoḍaśādhārabandhanam |
kaṇṭhasaṅkocanenaiva dve nāḍye kumbhayed dṛḍham |
kaṇṭhasaṃkocanekaṇṭhasaṃkocane nanaiva dvināḍyo stambhayed dṛḍham~|
ayaṃ bandho mayā proktaḥ ṣoḍaśādhārabandhanam ||
kaṇṭhasaṅkocanaṃ kṛtvā cibukaṃ hṛdaye nyaset |
jālandhare kṛte bandhe ṣoḍaśādhārabandhanam ||
बन्धत्रयमिदं श्रेष्ठं महासिद्धैर्निषेवितम् ।
सर्वेषां हठतन्त्राणां साधनं योगिनो विदुः ॥ *
bandhatrayam idaṃ śreṣṭhaṃ mahāsiddhair niṣevitam /
sarveṣāṃ haṭhatantrāṇāṃ sādhanaṃ yogino viduḥ // *
bandhatrayam idaṃ śreṣṭhaṃ mahāsiddhaiś ca sevitam |
sarveṣāṃ yogatantrāṇāṃ sādhanaṃ yogino viduḥ ||
bandhatrayam idaṃ śreṣṭhaṃ mahāsiddhaniṣevitam |
sarveṣāṃ haṭhatantrāṇāṃ sādhane yoginām iti ||
idaṃ bandhatrayaṃ śreṣṭhaṃ marujjayasusiddhadam |
sarveṣāṃ yogatantrāṇāṃ sādhanaṃ yogino viduḥ ||
अधस्तात्कुञ्चनेनाशु कण्ठसंकोचने कृते ।
मध्ये पश्चिमतानेन स्यात्प्राणो ब्रह्मनाडिगः ॥ (Γ, η1 and η2) *
adhastāt kuñcanenāśu kaṇṭhasaṃkocane kṛte /
madhye paścimatānena syāt prāṇo brahmanāḍigaḥ // (Γ, η1 and η2) *
मूलस्थानं समाकुञ्च्य उड्डियानं तु कारयेत् ।
इडां च पिङ्गलां बद्ध्वा वाहयेत्पश्चिमं पथम् ॥
mūlasthānaṃ samākuñcya uḍḍiyānaṃ tu kārayet /
iḍāṃ ca piṅgalāṃ baddhvā vāhayet paścimaṃ patham //
mūlasthānaṃ samākuñcya uḍḍiyānaṃ tu kārayet |
iḍāṃ ca piṅgalāṃ baddhvā vāhayet paścimaṃ pathaṃ ||
mūlasthānaṃ samākṛṣya uḍḍiyānaṃ tu kārayet |
iḍāṃ ca piṅgalāṃ baddhvā vāhayet paścime pathi ||
mūlasthānaṃ samākuñcya uḍyānaṃ tu kārayet |
iḍāṃ ca piṃgalāṃ baddhvā vāhayet paścimāpathaṃ ||
mūlasthānaṃ mārgasaṃkocanaṃ vidhāya uḍyānam udarasaṃkocanaṃ tataḥ | iḍāṃ piṃgalāṃ baddhvā kaṇṭhasaṃkocanena paścimapathaṃ pṛṣṭhavaṃśamārge pavanaṃ vāhayet kuryāt ||
अनेनैव विधानेन सेवयेत्पवनो लयम् ।
ततो न जायते मृत्युर्जरारोगादिकं तथा ॥
anenaiva vidhānena sevayet pavano layam /
tato na jāyate mṛtyur jarārogādikaṃ tathā //
anenaiva vidhānena prayāti pavano layam |
tato na jāyate mṛtyur jarārogādikaṃ tathā ||
anenaiva vidhānena sevayet pavanālayam |
tato na jāyate mṛtyur jarārogādikaṃ tathā ||
यत्किञ्चित्स्रवते चन्द्रादमृतं दिव्यरूपि च ।
तत्सर्वं ग्रसते सूर्यस्तेन पिण्डं विनाशि च ॥ *
yat kiñcit sravate candrād amṛtaṃ divyarūpi ca /
tat sarvaṃ grasate sūryas tena piṇḍaṃ vināśi ca // *
The α group do not have 3.73*1 and 3.73*2 in the third chapter (but rather in the fourth) and other manuscripts omit them as well (notably the η group). It appears that they have been inserted at the beginning of the section on viparītakaraṇī as a kind of preamble, which is unusual as the other techniques in this chapter do not have such introductions.
atha viparītakaraṇī–
yat kiñ cit sravate candrād amṛtaṃ divyarūpi ca |
tatsarvaṃ grasate sūryas tena piṇḍaṃ vināśi ca ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
yat kiṃ cin sravate candrād amṛtaṃ divyarūpi ca |
tat sarvaṃ grasate sūryas tena piṇḍaṃ vināśi ca ||
nābhimūle vaset sūryas tālumūle ca candramāḥ |
amṛtaṃ grasate sūryas tato mṛtyuvaśo naraḥ ||
तत्रास्ति करणं दिव्यं सूर्यस्य मुखबन्धनम् ।
गुरूपदेशतो ज्ञेयं न तु शास्त्रार्थकोटिभिः ॥
tatrāsti karaṇaṃ divyaṃ sūryasya mukhabandhanam /
gurūpadeśato jñeyaṃ na tu śāstrārthakoṭibhiḥ //
tatrāsti divyaṃ karaṇaṃ sūryasya mukhabandhanam |
gurūpadeśato jñeyaṃ na tu śāstrārthakoṭibhiḥ ||
tatrāsti karaṇaṃ divyaṃ sūryasya mukhabandhanam |
gurūpadeśato jñeyaṃ na tu śāstrārthakoṭibhiḥ ||
अथ विपरीतकरणी ।
ऊर्ध्वं नाभिरधस्तालुरूर्ध्वं भानुरधः शशी ।
करणी विपरीताख्या गुरुवाक्येन लभ्यते ॥
atha viparītakaraṇī /
ūrdhvaṃ nābhir adhas tālur ūrdhvaṃ bhānur adhaḥ śaśī /
karaṇī viparītākhyā guruvākyena labhyate //
ūrdhvaṃ nābhir adhas tālur ūrdhvaṃ bhānur adhaḥ śaśī |
karaṇī viparītākhyā guruvākyena labhyate ||
ūrdhvaṃ nābhir adhas tālur ūrdhvaṃ bhānur adhaḥ śaśī |
karaṇī viparītākhyā guruvākyena labhyate ||
ūrdhvanābhir adhastālur ūrdhvabhānur adhaḥśaśī |
karaṇī viparītākhyā sarvavyādhivināśinī ||
ūrdhvaṃ nābhir adhas tālur ūrdhvaṃ bhānur adhaḥ śaśī |
karaṇī viparītākhyā guruvaktreṇa gamyate ||
करणी विपरीताख्या सर्वव्याधिविनाशिनी ।
नित्यमभ्यासयुक्तस्य जठराग्निविवर्धनी ॥
karaṇī viparītākhyā sarvavyādhivināśinī /
nityam abhyāsayuktasya jaṭharāgnivivardhanī //
karaṇaṃ viparītākhyaṃ sarvavyādhivināśanam |
nityam abhyāsayuktasya jaṭharāgnir vivardhate ||
karaṇī viparītākhyā sarvavyādhivināśinī |
nityam abhyāsayuktasya jaṭharāgnivivardinī ||
nityam abhyāsayuktasya jaṭharāgnivivardhanam ||
आहारो बहुलस्तस्य संपाद्यः साधकस्य तु ।
अल्पाहारो यदि भवेदग्निर्देहं दहेत्क्षणात् ॥
āhāro bahulas tasya saṃpādyaḥ sādhakasya tu /
alpāhāro yadi bhaved agnir dehaṃ dahet kṣaṇāt //
Svātmārāma has removed the vocative from the Dattātreyayogaśāstra, changing sāṃkṛte dhruvam to sādhakasya tu.
āhāro bahulas tasya saṃpādyaḥ sāṃkṛte dhruvam |
alpāhāro yadi bhaved agnir dehaṃ dahet kṣaṇāt ||
āhāro bahulas tasya sampādyaḥ sādhakena vai |
alpāhāro yadi bhaved deham agnir dahet kramāt ||
āhāro bahulas tasya saṃpādyaḥ sāṃkṛte dhruvam |
alpāhāro yadi bhaved agnir dāhaṃ karoti vai ||
asyāṃ kriyamāṇāyāṃ sādhakasya bhakṣyaṃ bahulaṃ sampādyam anyathā pravṛddho jāṭharānalo dhātuṃ dahatīti ||
अधःशिराश्चोर्ध्वपादः क्षणं स्यात्प्रथमे दिने ।
क्षणाच्च किंचिदधिकमभ्यसेच्च दिने दिने ॥
adhaḥśirāś cordhvapādaḥ kṣaṇaṃ syāt prathame dine /
kṣaṇāc ca kiṃcid adhikam abhyasec ca dine dine //
adhaḥśirāś cordhvapādaḥ kṣaṇaṃ syāt prathame dine ||
kṣaṇāc ca kiṃ cid adhikam abhyasec ca dine dine |
adhaḥ śiraś cordhvapādau kṣaṇaṃ syāt prathame dine |
kṣaṇāc ca kiñ cid adhikam abhyasec ca dine dine ||
cordhvapādau ] cordhvapādaḥ v.l.
adhaḥśirāś cordhvapādaḥ kṣaṇaṃ syāt prathame dine |
kṣaṇāc ca kiñ cid adhikam abhyasec ca dine dine ||
sa ca prathamadine kṣaṇamātraṃ vidheyā dvitīyadine | kiñcidadhikaṃ kālam evaṃ yāmaparyantaṃ vidheyā |
वलिश्च पलितं चैव षण्मासोर्ध्वं न दृश्यते ।
याममात्रं तु यो नित्यमभ्यसेत्स तु कालजित् ॥
valiś ca palitaṃ caiva ṣaṇmāsordhvaṃ na dṛśyate /
yāmamātraṃ tu yo nityam abhyaset sa tu kālajit //
We have adopted the reading ṣaṇmāsordhvaṃ in the second verse quarter. It is attested by manuscripts of the Dattātreyayogaśāstra (the source text) and the Jyotsnā (3.82). It makes good sense and explains the rather odd readings in α and other manuscripts, ṣaṇmāsārdhān, ṣaṇmāsārdhaṃ and ṣaṇmāsārdhe. The γ and delta groups have a different verb as well, ṣaṇmāsārdhena naśyati. The original reading was likely ṣaṇmāsordhvaṃ na dṛśyate because the compound ṣaṇmāsārdha (`half of six months’) is very strange and dṛśyate is better attested.
valiś ca palitaṃ caiva ṣaṇmāsordhvaṃ na dṛśyate ||
yāmamātraṃ hi yo nityam abhyaset sa tu kālajit |
°māsordhvaṃ na ] °māsāṃ hi na M1, °māsāc ca na AM2, °māsārdhān na YTU, °māsān na tu HR , °māsārddhena Yogacintāmaṇi 150b kālajit ] yogavit πDYŚPT
valitaṃ palitaṃ caiva ṣaṇmāsān na tu dṛśyate |
yāmamātraṃ tu yo nityam abhyaset sa tu kālajit ||
valiś ca palitaṃ caiva ṣaṇmāsārdhe na dṛśyate |
yāmamātraṃ tu yo nityam abhyaset sa tu kālajit ||
valitaṃ palitaṃ caiva ṣaṇmāsārdhān na dṛśyate |
yāmamātraṃ tu yo nityam abhyaset sa tu kālajit ||
ūrdhvapādo hy adhomastakaḥ syāt kṣaṇaṃ
vāsare ’thādime ’bhyāsaṃ vṛddhyā dhayet |
evam abhyāsato yāmamātraṃ sadā
mṛtyujit syāj jarājic ca ṣaṇmāsataḥ ||
अत्रत्या वज्रोली ग्रन्थान्ते लिखिता । क्रमप्राप्ताप्यत्र त्यक्ता । असाधारणप्राण्यनुष्ठेयत्वात्तस्याः । (Δ) *
अथ वज्रोली ।*
स्वेच्छया वर्तमानोऽपि योगोक्तैर्नियमैर्विना ।
वज्रोलीं यो विजानाति स योगी सिद्धिभाजनम् ॥
atratyā vajrolī granthānte likhitā / kramaprāptāpy atra tyaktā / asādhāraṇaprāṇyanuṣṭheyatvāt tasyāḥ / (Δ) *
atha vajrolī /*
svecchayā vartamāno’pi yogoktair niyamair vinā /
vajrolīṃ yo vijānāti sa yogī siddhibhājanam //
In manuscripts of the delta group, the vajrolī section is placed at the end of the work and the following comment is inserted at this place in the third chapter:
svecchayā varttamāno ’pi yogoktaniyamair vinā |
vajroliṃ yo vijānāti sa yogī siddhibhājanaḥ ||
152d °bhājanaḥ ] °mān bhavet M1AM2, °bhājanam YTU
svecchayā vartamāno ’pi yogoktaniyamair vinā |
mukto bhaved gṛhastho’pi vajrolyabhyāsayogataḥ ||
svasthaṃ yo vartamāno ’pi yogoktair niyamair vinā |
karaṇī viparītākhyā śrīnivāsena lakṣitā ||
svecchayā vartamāno ’pi yogoktaniyamair vinā |
vajrolyabhyāsayogena yogī siddhim avāpnuyāt ||
svecchayā varttamāno ’pi yogoktair niyamair vinā |
vajrolīṃ yo vijānāti sa yogī siddhibhājanam ||
vajrolīṃ kathayiṣyāmi gopitāṃ sarvayogibhiḥ|
tyaktayogoktaniyamā yayā sidhyanti yoginaḥ ||
svecchayā varttamāno ’pi yogoditaiḥ
sadvidhānair vinā sādhakaḥ sābalaḥ |
mucyate ’sau suvajrolikābhyāsataḥ
sarvasiddhyāspadaṃ yāti bhūmaṇḍale ||
तत्र वस्तुद्वयं वक्ष्ये दुर्लभं यस्य कस्य चित् ।
क्षीरं चैकं द्वितीयं तु नारी च वशवर्तिनी ॥
tatra vastudvayaṃ vakṣye durlabhaṃ yasya kasya cit /
kṣīraṃ caikaṃ dvitīyaṃ tu nārī ca vaśavartinī //
On the possible referents of kṣīra, see Mallinson 2024 on Dattātreyayogaśāstra 154. According to Brahmānanda (Jyotsnā 3.84), the compound vaśavartinī, which we have translated as `an obedient woman,’ could be a wife (vaśavartinī svādhīnā nārī vanitā). In 3.83, the reading bhāryābhage in V1, V3 and J10 supports Brahmānanda’s view that the woman is the yogi’s wife.
tatra vastudvayaṃ vakṣye durlabhaṃ yena kena cit |
kṣīraṃ caikaṃ dvitīyaṃ ca nārī ca vaśavartinī |
atra vastudvayaṃ manye durlabhaṃ yasya kasyacit |
kṣīram ekaṃ dvitīyaṃ tu nārī svavaśavarttinī ||
tatra vastudvayaṃ vakṣye durlabhaṃ yasya kasya cit |
kṣīraṃ caikaṃ dvitīyaṃ tu nārī ca vaśavarttinī ||
मेहनेन शनैः सम्यगूर्ध्वाकुञ्चनमभ्यसेत् ।
पुरुषो वापि नारी वा वज्रोलीसिद्धिमाप्नुयात् ॥
mehanena śanaiḥ samyag ūrdhvākuñcanam abhyaset /
puruṣo vāpi nārī vā vajrolīsiddhim āpnuyāt //
The Haṭhatattvakaumudī says that this upward contraction of the urethra, which is the method by which fluids are drawn up it, is done in the region of apānavāyu and the anus (gudadeśa). Brahmānanda states that this practice is done immediately after sex (strīsaṅgānantaram).
apānamārgataḥ samyag ūrdhvakuñcanam abhyaset |
puruṣo vāpi nārī vā vajrolīsiddhibhājanam ||
apānamārgato gudadeśena ūrdhvam upari kuñcanaṃ saṃkocanam ūrdhvam ākarṣaṇaṃ vā abhyaset || iti ||
mehanena śanaiḥ samyag ūrdhvākuñcanam abhyaset |
puruṣo ’py athavā nārī vajrolīsiddhim āpnuyāt ||
mehanena śanaiḥ samyag ūrdhvaṃ kuñcanam abhyaset |
ūrdhvaṃ yathā syāt tathā bindor ākarṣaṇaṃ meḍhreṇābhyased ity arthaḥ ||
यत्नतः शरनालेन फूत्कारं वज्रकन्दरे ।
शनैः शनैः प्रकुर्वीत वायुसंचारकारणात् ॥
yatnataḥ śaranālena phūtkāraṃ vajrakandare /
śanaiḥ śanaiḥ prakurvīta vāyusaṃcārakāraṇāt //
tatas tu śaranālena phūtkāraṃ vajrakandare |
śanaiḥ śanaiḥ prakurvīta vāyusaṃcārakāraṇāt ||
haṭhapradīpikākāras tu
yatnataḥ śaranālena phūtkāraṃ vajrakandare |
śanaiḥ śanaiḥ prakurvīta vāyusaṃcārakāraṇāt ||
taduktaṃ haṭhapradīpikāyāṃ
yantritaḥ śaranālena phūtkāraṃ vajrakandare |
śanaiḥ śanaiḥ prakurv[ī]ta vāyusaṃcārakāraṇād iti ||
asyārthaḥ ||
ṣoḍaśāṃgulamānāṃ 16 tu prakuryād vaṃśanālikāṃ sūkṣmā’g[r]amūlāntāṃ li[ṃ]gachi[dra]mukhe datvā svāsye ’nu tanmukhaṃ dhṛtvā phūtkāram ante syāḥ k[u]ryād bāḍhaṃ muhur muhuḥ pratyahaṃ tena vivṛtaṃ liṅgadvāraṃ kramād bhavet [|]
tato †nālyānayāto† yam alpaṃ phūtkārato ’ntare [|]
liṅgara[n]dhreṇa gṛhṇīyāt kramavṛddhyā susādhakaḥ [|]
liṃgachidre ’tha vivṛte kṣīrākṛṣṭiṃ tato bhajed iti [|]
vajrakandare liṅgachidre [||]
yatnataḥ śaranālena phūtkāraṃ vajrakandare |
śanaiḥ śanaiḥ prakurvīta vāyusañcārakāraṇāt ||
śareti meḍhranālenety arthaḥ || vāyusañcārakāraṇam iti bindor ākarṣaṇaṃ kāraṇam ity arthaḥ
rasanālena phūtkāraṃ vāyoḥ sañcārakāraṇāt ||
kuryāt śanaiḥ śanair yogī yāvac chaktiḥ prajāyate |
नार्या भगे पतद्बिन्दुमभ्यासेनोर्ध्वमाहरेत् ।
चलितं च स्वकं बिन्दुमूर्ध्वमाकृष्य रक्षयेत् ॥
nāryā bhage patadbindum abhyāsenordhvam āharet /
calitaṃ ca svakaṃ bindum ūrdhvam ākṛṣya rakṣayet //
tadbhage patitaṃ bindum abhyāsenordhvam āharet |
calitaṃ ca tathā bindum ūrdhvam ākṛṣya rakṣayet ||
nāryā bhagāt patadbindum abhyāsenordhvam āharet ||
calitaṃ ca nijaṃ bindum ūrdhvam ākṛṣya rakṣayet |
nārībhage pated bindum abhyāsenordhvam āharet |
calitaṃ ca nijaṃ bindum ūrdhvam ākṛṣya rakṣayet ||
nāryā bhage patadbindum abhyāsenordhvam āharet |
calitaṃ ca svayaṃ bindum ūrdhvam ākṛṣya rakṣayet ||
nārīsaṃyoge bindupatanaṃ syād ity āśaṅkya nirasyati nāryā iti || patato bindor ūrdhvam āhared āhīyamāṇaṃ svayaṃ calitaṃ bindum ākṛṣyety anvayaḥ ||
apānam ākuñcya tato ’balenordhvaṃ dugdham ākṛṣṭividhikrameṇa |
samabhyasen niścalam alpam alpaṃ bhage patadbindum athārdhvam āharet ||
tato maithunakāle tu patadbinduṃ samunnayet ||
{[}...] patadbindum apānena huṃ huṃkārasahitena balād ūrdhvam ākṛṣya kiñcit kālaṃ vilambya ramet punaḥ || yadā tu na dhārayituṃ śakyate tadā bahiḥskhalitena bindunā saha prasvedenāṅgaṃ marddayet ||
एवं द्तु रक्षयेद्बिन्दुं मृत्युं जयति योगवित् ।
मरणं बिन्दुपातेन जीवितं बिन्दुधारणात् ॥
evaṃ tu rakṣayedd binduṃ mṛtyuṃ jayati yogavit /
maraṇaṃ bindupātena jīvitaṃ bindudhāraṇāt //
evaṃ ca rakṣito bindur mṛtyuṃ jayati tattvataḥ |
maraṇaṃ bindupātena jīvanaṃ bindudhāraṇāt ||
maraṇaṃ bindupātena jīvanaṃ bindudhāraṇāt ||
evaṃ saṃrakṣayed binduṃ mṛtyuṃ jayati yogavit ||
maraṇaṃ bindupātena jīvitaṃ bindudhāraṇāt |
evaṃ bindau sthire jāte mṛtyuṃ jayati sarvathā ||
maraṇaṃ bindupātena jīvanaṃ bindudhāraṇāt |
evaṃ saṃrakṣayed binduṃ mṛtyuṃ jayati yogavit |
maraṇaṃ bindupātena jīvanaṃ bindudhāraṇāt ||
सुगन्धि योगिनो देहं जायते बिन्दुधारणात् ।*
यावद्बिन्दुः स्थिरो देहे तावन्मृत्युभयं कुतः ॥
sugandhi yogino dehaṃ jāyate bindudhāraṇāt /*
yāvad binduḥ sthiro dehe tāvan mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ //
The omission of 3.85ab in the η group and δ3 is likely to be the result of haplography (bindudhāraṇāt is repeated). The readings mṛtyubhayaṃ (α3, β, η) and kālabhayaṃ (α2, γ) are well attested by the main manuscript groups, but mṛtyubhayaṃ is in the important witnesses of the source text, the Vivekamārtaṇḍa.
yogino ’ṅge sugandhaḥ syāt satataṃ bindudhāraṇāt ||
yāvad binduḥ sthito dehe tāvad mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ |
sugandhir yogino dehe jāyate bindudhāraṇāt ||
sugandho yogino dehe jāyate bindudhāraṇāt |
yāvad binduḥ sthiro dehe tāvat kālabhayaṃ kutaḥ ||
tathā coktaṃ granthāntare –
calitaṃ tu svakaṃ bindum ūrdhvam ākuñcya rakṣayet |
sugandho yogināṃ dehe jāyate bindudhāraṇād || iti ||
चित्तायत्तं नृणां शुक्रं शुक्रायत्तं हि जीवितम् ।
तस्माच्छुक्रं मनश्चैव रक्षणीयं प्रयत्नतः ॥
cittāyattaṃ nṛṇāṃ śukraṃ śukrāyattaṃ hi jīvitam /
tasmāc chukraṃ manaś caiva rakṣaṇīyaṃ prayatnataḥ //
cittāyattaṃ nṛṇāṃ śukraṃ śukrāyattaṃ ca jīvitam |
tasmāc chukraṃ manaś caiva rakṣanīyaṃ prayatnataḥ ||
cittāyattaṃ nṛṇāṃ śukraṃ śukrāyattaṃ ca jīvitam |
tasmāc cittaṃ ca śukraṃ ca rakṣaṇīyaṃ prayatnataḥ ||
ऋतुमत्या ऽप्येवं स्त्रिया बिन्दुं च रक्षयेत् ।
मेढ्रेणाकर्षयेदूर्ध्वं सम्यगभ्यासयोगतः ॥
ṛtumatyā ’py evaṃ striyā binduṃ ca rakṣayet /
meḍhreṇākarṣayed ūrdhvaṃ samyagabhyāsayogataḥ //
We have understood the reading of ṛtumatyā as qualifying striyāḥ (i.e.,`a menstruating woman’). Alternatively, the term ṛtumati could mean a post-pubescent woman.
ṛtumatyā rajo ’py evaṃ rajo binduṃ ca rakṣayet ||
ṛtumatyā rajo ’py evaṃ bijaṃ binduṃ ca rakṣayet |
meḍhreṇākarṣayed ūrdhvaṃ samyagabhyāsayogavit || 59 ||
अयं योगः पुण्यवतां धन्यानां तत्त्वशालिनाम् ।
निर्मत्सराणां सिध्येत न तु मत्सरशालिनाम् ॥ *
ayaṃ yogaḥ puṇyavatāṃ dhanyānāṃ tattvaśālinām /
nirmatsarāṇāṃ sidhyeta na tu matsaraśālinām // *
This verse is omitted in α2 and α3 (and the folio on which it would be found is missing in α1).
ayaṃ yogaḥ puṇyavatāṃ dhanyānāṃ tattvaśalinām |
nirmatsarāṇāṃ sidhyeta na tu mātsaryaśālinām ||
ayaṃ yogaḥ puṇyavatāṃ dhanyānāṃ tattvaśālinām |
nirmatsarāṇāṃ sidhyeta na tu matsaraśālinām ||
ayaṃ yāgaḥ puṇyavatāṃ dhīrāṇāṃ tattvadarśinām |
nirmatsarāṇāṃ sidhyeta na tu mātsaryaśālinām ||
अथ सहजोली । (γ2, η2 and χ)
सहजोली चामरोली वज्रोल्या एव भेदतः ॥
atha sahajolī / (γ2, η2 and χ)
sahajolī cāmarolī vajrolyā eva bhedataḥ //
These two pādas introduce the practices of sahajolī and amarolī, which are described in the verses that follow it. The α and β groups omit the headings for sahajolī and amarolī. Since 3.88 introduces these practices, the headings are probably not original.
vajrolir amaroliś ca sahajolis tridhā matā |
sahajolyamarolī ca vajrolyā bhedato bhavet |
atha sahajoliḥ -
sahajolī cāmarolī vajrolyā eva bhedataḥ ||
sahajoliś cāmarolir vajrolyā bheda eva te |
जलेषु भस्म निक्षिप्य दग्धगोमयसम्भवं ।
वज्रोलीमैथुनादूर्ध्वं स्त्रीपुंसोः स्वाङ्गलेपनम् ॥
jaleṣu bhasma nikṣipya dagdhagomayasambhavaṃ /
vajrolīmaithunād ūrdhvaṃ strīpuṃsoḥ svāṅgalepanam //
Some manuscripts, including α2 and α3 (missing in α1), omit 3.89ab. We have included it because in the Dattātreyayogaśāstra, the source of this verse, 3.89ab specifies the substance mentioned in 3.89cd that the man and woman are supposed to rub into their bodies after sexual intercourse. In the Dattātreyayogaśāstra’s teaching on sahajolī (163 and 181–183) a rag is used to wipe up the residue of a mixture of semen and sweat that has been rubbed into the body, and then soaked in a paste of water and ash before being rubbed over the body. Although the plural in 3.89a is awkward, jaleṣu was probably the result of Svātmārāma removing the pronoun from the compound tajjale in the Dattātreyayogaśāstra’s verse because it has no referent in the Haṭhapradīpikā’s compilation.
tajjale bhasma saṃkṣipya dagdhagomayasaṃbhavam |
vajrolīmaithunād ūrdhvaṃ strīpuṃsor aṅgalepanam ||
182a tajjale bhasma saṃkṣipya ] M2; tajjale bhasmasāt kṣipya M1, tajjale bhasma saddravyaṃ A
jale subhasma nikṣipya dagdhagomayasaṃbhavam |
vajrolīmaithunād ūrdhvaṃ strīpuṃsoś cāṅgalepanam ||
jale subhasma nikṣipya dagdhagomayasambhavam ||
vajrolī maithunād ūrdhvaṃ strīpuṃsoḥ svāṅgalepanam |
आसीनयोः सुखेनैव मुक्तव्यापारयोः क्षणम् ।
सहजोलीरियं प्रोक्ता श्रद्धेया योगिभिः सदा ॥
āsīnayoḥ sukhenaiva muktavyāpārayoḥ kṣaṇam /
sahajolīr iyaṃ proktā śraddheyā yogibhiḥ sadā //
We have understood the repha in sahajolīr iyam as a hiatus bridge. Elsewhere the nominative of this name is found only as sahajolī or sahajoliḥ.
āsīnayoḥ sukhenaiva muktavyāparayoḥ kṣaṇam |
sahajolī ca saṃproktā śraddheyā yogibhiḥ sadā ||
āsīnayoḥ sukhenaiva muktavyāpārayoḥ kṣaṇam |
sahajolir iyaṃ proktā kartavyā yogibhiḥ sadā ||
āsīnayoḥ sukhenaiva muktavyāpārayoḥ kṣaṇāt ||
sahajolir iyaṃ proktā śraddheyā yogibhiḥ sadā
अयं शुभकरो योगो भोगे भुक्तेऽपि मुक्तिदः ॥
ayaṃ śubhakaro yogo bhoge bhukte’pi muktidaḥ //
This line is absent in α2, α3 and γ1 (missing in α1). It may have been adapted from Dattātreyayogaśāstra 179cd (tasmād ayaṃ vakṣyamāṇo bhoge bhukte ’pi muktidaḥ).
ayaṃ śubhakaro yogī bhogayukto’pi muktidaḥ ||
अथ अमरोली । (γ2, Δ, ε3, η2 and χ)
पित्तोल्बणत्वात्प्रथमाम्बुधारां
विहाय निःसारतयान्त्यधाराम् ।
निषेव्यते शीतलमध्यधारा
कापालिकैः खण्डमतैरमर्याः ॥ *
atha amarolī / (γ2, Δ, ε3, η2 and χ)
pittolbaṇatvāt prathamāmbudhārāṃ
vihāya niḥsāratayāntyadhārām /
niṣevyate śītalamadhyadhārā
kāpālikaiḥ khaṇḍamatair amaryāḥ // *
We understand `Kāpālikas of the Khaṇḍa school’ (kāpālikair khaṇḍamataiḥ) to be referring to followers of the Khaṇḍakāpālika who is mentioned in the list of siddhas given at 1.5–9, pace Marcinkowska-Rosół and Sellmer (2021: 105–108) who understand khaṇḍamataiḥ to mean `whose doctrine is defective’.
athāmarolī
vihāya nityāṃ prathamāṃ ca dhārāṃ
vihāya niḥsāratayāntyadhārām |
niṣevyate śītalamadhyadhārāṃ
kāpālikaiḥ khaṇḍamatair anarghyām ||
vihāya nityāṃ ] pittolbaṇatvāt v.l.
anarghyām ] anarghyā
athāmarolī –
pittolbaṇatvāt prathamāṃ ca dhārāṃ
vihāya niḥsāratayāntyadhārām |
niṣevyate śītamadhyadhārā
kāpālikaiḥ khaṇḍamate ’marolī ||
pittolvaṇatvāt prathamāmbudhārāṃ
niṣevyate śītalamadhyadhārā |
vihāya niḥsāratayāntyadhārāṃ
kāpālike khaṇḍamate ’marolī ||
अमरीं यः पिबेन्नित्यं नस्यं कुर्वन् दिने दिने ।
वज्रोलीं चाभ्यसेदेवममरोलीति कथ्यते ॥*
amarīṃ yaḥ piben nityaṃ nasyaṃ kurvan dine dine /
vajrolīṃ cābhyased evam amarolīti kathyate //*
amarīṃ yaḥ piben nityaṃ nasyaṃ kurvan dine dine ||
vajrolīm abhyasec ceyam amarolīti kathyate |
181a abhyaset ceyam] em.; abhyasec chrayam M1, abhyaset yeyam A, abhyasec caivam M2
amarīṃ yaḥ piben nityaṃ nasyaṃ kuryād dine dine |
vajrolīm abhyasen nityam amarolīti kathyate ||
amarīṃ yaḥ piben nityaṃ nasyaṃ kurvan dine dine |
vajrolīm abhyaset samyag amarolīti kathyate ||
पुंसो बिन्दुं समाकृष्य सम्यगभ्यासपाटवात् ।
यदि नारी रजो रक्षेद्वज्रोल्या सा हि योगिनी ॥
puṃso binduṃ samākṛṣya samyagabhyāsapāṭavāt /
yadi nārī rajo rakṣed vajrolyā sā hi yoginī //
In the first verse quarter, the gerund samākṛṣya (γ) has been adopted, instead of samākuñcya, as it yields a better meaning and is used similarly to ākṛṣya in 3.83. Verses 3.92*1–3 have been greyscaled because they are absent in α3 (and missing in α1), and appear to have been added to the text from the Dattātreyayogaśāstra’s section on vajrolī to provide further details of how a woman practises vajrolī to those found in 3.93–94. The verses are present in α2 after verse 3.87ab where the verse quarter vajrolyā saha yoginī occurs twice (also at 3.93b), which suggests that the version of vajrolī in α2 has been subject to further revision. The fact that 3.92*1–3 are in groups β, γ and η indicates that they were added early in the transmission of the Haṭhapradīpikā.
yadi nārī rajo rakṣed vajrolyā sā hi yoginī ||
puṃso binduṃ samākuñcya samyagabhyāsapāṭavāt |
yadi nārī rajo rakṣed vajrolyā sā’pi yoginī ||
तस्याः किंचिद्रजो नाशं न गच्छति न संशयः ।
तस्याः शरीरे नादस्तु बिन्दुतामेव गच्छति ॥
tasyāḥ kiṃcid rajo nāśaṃ na gacchati na saṃśayaḥ /
tasyāḥ śarīre nādas tu bindutām eva gacchati //
On why this verse is in greyscale, see the note to 3.92*1. On nāda and bindu see the note to 3.53.
tasyās tadā rajo nāśaṃ na gacchati na saṃśayaḥ |
tasyāḥ śarīre nādas tu bindutām eva gacchati || 174 ||
tasyāḥ śarīre nādas tu bindutām eva gacchati |
tasyāḥ kiñ cid rajo nāśaṃ na gacchati na saṃśayaḥ |
tasyāḥ śarīre nādaś ca bindutām eva gacchati ||
स बिन्दुस्तद्रजश्चैव एकीभूय स्वदेहजौ ।
वज्रोल्याभ्यासयोगेन सर्वसिद्धिं प्रकुर्वतः ॥
sa bindus tad rajaś caiva ekībhūya svadehajau /
vajrolyābhyāsayogena sarvasiddhiṃ prakurvataḥ //
On why this verse is in greyscale, see the note to 3.92*1.
sa bindus tad rajaś caiva ekībhūya svadehagau |
vajrolyābhyāsayogena sarvasiddhiḥ prajāyate || 175 ||
sa bindus tad rajaś caiva ekīkṛtya svadehajau ||
vajrolyabhyāsayogena yogasiddhiḥ kare sthitā |
sa bindus tad rajaś caiva ekībhūya svadehagau |
vajrolyabhyāsayogena sarvasiddhiṃ prayacchataḥ ||
रक्षेदाकुञ्चनेनोर्ध्वं या रजः सा हि योगिनी । (α2, α3, γ2, η2 and χ) *
अतीतानागतं वेत्ति खेचरी च भवेद्ध्रुवम् ॥
rakṣed ākuñcanenordhvaṃ yā rajaḥ sā hi yoginī / (α2, α3, γ2, η2 and χ) *
atītānāgataṃ vetti khecarī ca bhaved dhruvam //
atītānāgataṃ vetti khecarī vā bhaved dhruvam |
rakṣed ākuñcanād ūrdhvaṃ yā rajaḥ sā hi yoginī |
atītānāgatajñānaṃ khecarī ca bhaved dhruvam ||
देहसिद्धिं च लभते वज्रोल्यभ्यासयोगतः ।
अयं शुभकरो योगो भोगे भुक्तेऽपि मुक्तिदः ॥
dehasiddhiṃ ca labhate vajrolyabhyāsayogataḥ /
ayaṃ śubhakaro yogo bhoge bhukte’pi muktidaḥ //
dehasiddhiṃ ca labhate vajrolyabhyāsayogataḥ |
tasmād ayaṃ vakṣyamāṇo bhoge bhukte ’pi muktidaḥ
179d bhoge bhukte ’pi muktidaḥ ] conj.; bhoge bhukte tv abhuktidaḥ M1, bhogo yogaś ca muktidaḥ AM2
sarveṣām eva yogānām ayaṃ yogaḥ śubhaṅkaraḥ |
tasmād ayaṃ variṣṭho ’sau bhuktimuktiphalapradaḥ ||
dehasiddhiṃ ca labhate vajrolyabhyāsayogataḥ |
ayaṃ puṇyakaro yogo bhoge bhukte ’pi muktidaḥ ||
तस्मात्पुण्यवतामेव अयं योगः प्रसिध्यति ॥*
tasmāt puṇyavatām eva ayaṃ yogaḥ prasidhyati //*
This verse is not in α and γ, and seems like an unnecessary repetition of 3.101.
कुटिलाङ्गी कुण्डलिनी भुजङ्गी शक्तिरीश्वरी ।
अकुण्डल्य्रुन्धती चेति शब्दाः पर्यायवाचकाः ॥
kuṭilāṅgī kuṇḍalinī bhujaṅgī śaktir īśvarī /
kuṇḍalyarundhatī ceti śabdāḥ paryāyavācakāḥ //
The α3 manuscript has a significantly shorter and more coherent version of śakticālana. It omits five introductory verses, of which three are from the Vivekamārtaṇḍa or one of its longer recensions and three have no known source, including one that contains a list of synonyms for kuṇḍalinī. This section is missing in α1 (3.83–3.98) and α2 adds these verses (except 3.94*6) after 3.97, which suggests that they have been inserted from elsewhere. Generally speaking, it appears that some redactors have taken the section on śakticālana in the Haṭhapradīpikā as an opportunity to add material on kuṇḍalinī, in particular her location, shape, and soteriological importance.
phaṇī kuṇḍalinī nāgī cakrī vakrī sarasvatī |
lalanā rasanā kṣatrī lalāṭī śaktiḥ śaṃkhinī ||
rajvī bhujaṅgī śeṣā ca kuṇḍalī sarpiṇī maṇiḥ |
ādhāraśaktiḥ kuṭilā karālī prāṇavāhinī ||
aṣṭavakrā ṣaḍādhārā vyāpinī kalanādharā ||
kurīty evaṃ ca vikhyātāḥ śabdāḥ paryāyavācakāḥ ||
kuṇḍalāṅgī kuṇḍalinī bhujaṅgī śaktir īśvarī |
kuṭilārundhatī devī śabdāḥ paryāyavācakāḥ ||
kuṭilāṃgī kuṇḍalinī bhujaṅgī śaktir īśvarī |
kuṇḍaly arundhatī devī śabdāḥ paryāyavācakāḥ ||
उद्घाटयेत्कपाटं तु यथा कुञ्चिकया हठात् ।
कुण्डलिन्या तथा योगी मोक्षद्वारं विभेदयेत् ॥*
udghāṭayet kapāṭaṃ tu yathā kuñcikayā haṭhāt /
kuṇḍalinyā tathā yogī mokṣadvāraṃ vibhedayet //*
udghāṭayet kapāṭaṃ tu yathā kuñcikayā haṭhāt |
kuṇḍalinyā tathā yogī mokṣadvāraṃ vibhedayet ||
haṭhayoge
udghāṭayet kapāṭaṃ tu yathā kuñcikayā haṭhāt |
kuṇḍalinyā tathā yogī mokṣadvāraṃ vibhedayet ||
tathā coktaṃ haṭhapradīpikāyāṃ |
udghāṭayet kapāṭaṃ tu yathā kuñcikayā haṭhāt |
kuṇḍalinyā tathā yogī mokṣadvāraṃ vibhedayet ||
येन मार्गेण गन्तव्यं ब्रह्मस्थानं निरामयम् ।
मुखेनाच्छाद्य तद्द्वारं प्रसुप्ता परमेश्वरी ॥
yena mārgeṇa gantavyaṃ brahmasthānaṃ nirāmayam /
mukhenācchādya taddvāraṃ prasuptā parameśvarī //
yena mārgeṇa gantavyaṃ brahmasthānaṃ nirāmayam |
mukhenācchādya taddvāraṃ prasuptā parameśvarī ||
yena dvāreṇa gantavyaṃ brahmasthānaṃ nirāmayam |
mukhenācchādya taddvāraṃ prasuptā parameśvarī ||
yena mārgeṇa gaṃtavyaṃ brahmasthānaṃ nirāmayaṃ |
mukhenācchādya taddvāraṃ prasuptā parameśvarī ||
कन्दोर्ध्वं कुण्डली शक्तिः सुप्ता मोक्षाय योगिनाम् ।
बन्धनाय च मूढानां यस्तां वेत्ति स योगवित् ॥
kandordhvaṃ kuṇḍalī śaktiḥ suptā mokṣāya yoginām /
bandhanāya ca mūḍhānāṃ yas tāṃ vetti sa yogavit //
kandordhvaṃ kuṇḍalī śaktir suptā mokṣāya yoginām |
bandhanāya ca mūḍhānāṃ yas tāṃ vetti sa yogavit ||
suptā mokṣāya yoginām ] VTvlH; aṣṭadhā kuṃḍalīkṛtā A, aṣṭadhā kuṇḍalākṛtiḥ GLGPk, śubhamokṣāpradāyinī GB, śubhā mokṣapradāyinī GP, aṣṭadhā kuṭilīkṛtā T
kandordhve kuṇḍalī śaktir buddhā mokṣāya yoginām |
bandhanāya ca mūḍhānāṃ yas tām vetti sa yogavit ||
kandordhvaṃ kuḍalī śakti suptā mokṣāya yogināṃ |
bandhanāya ca mūḍhānāṃ yas taṃ vetti sa yogavit ||
अम्भोधिशैलद्वीपानामाधारः शेषकुण्डली ।
अशेषयोगतन्त्राणामाधारः कुण्डली तथा ॥
ambhodhiśailadvīpānām ādhāraḥ śeṣakuṇḍalī /
aśeṣayogatantrāṇām ādhāraḥ kuṇḍalī tathā //
This verse is similar to 3.1.
ambhodhiśailadvīpānām ādhāraḥ śeṣakuṇḍalī |
aśeṣayogatantrāṇām ādhāraḥ kuṇḍalī tathā ||
कुण्डली कुटिलाकारा सर्पवत्परिकीर्तिता ।
सा शक्तिश्चालिता येन स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥
kuṇḍalī kuṭilākārā sarpavat parikīrtitā /
sā śaktiś cālitā yena sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //
kuṇḍalī kuṭilākārā sarpavat parikīrtitā |
sā śaktiś cālitā yena sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ ||
अथ शक्तिचालनम् ।
गङ्गायमुनयोर्मध्ये बालरण्डा तपस्विनी ।
बलात्कारेण गृह्णीयात् तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् ॥
atha śakticālanam /
gaṅgāyamunayor madhye bālaraṇḍā tapasvinī /
balātkāreṇa gṛhṇīyāt tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam //
The referent of bālaraṇḍā tapasvinī, here is unclear. In some manuscripts this verse is followed by one in which bālaraṇḍā is identified as sarasvatī, which in the context of śakticālana could refer to the tongue. She could also bekuṇḍalinī, who in 3.94*5 is located at the navel, which is said to be the location of Viṣṇu (e.g.~Dhyāna-bindū-paniṣat 28-30). In his commentary on this verse in the Bodhasāra (1906: 137), Divākara says that the seizing of kuṇḍalinī itself is the highest state of Viṣṇu (... bālaraṇḍāṃ ... gṛhṇīyād vaśīkuryāt tat tasyā vaśīkaraṇam eva viṣṇor vyāpana-lakṣa-nasya paramā-tmanaḥ paramaṃ kevalaṃ ... padaṃ svarūpaṃ jñeyam). Verse 3.95*1, which has no known source, simply identifies the technical terms in 3.95, namely, gaṅgā, yamunā and bālaraṇḍā as iḍā, piṅgalā and sarasvatī. It is absent in the α manuscripts and probably crept into the text as a marginal note early in the transmission.
gaṅgāyamunayor madhye vahaty eṣā sarasvatī |
tāsāṃ tu saṃgame snātvā dhanyo yāti parāṃ gatim
gaṅgāyamunayor madhye bālaraṇḍā tapasvinī |
balātkāreṇa gṛhṇīyāt tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam ||
gaṅgāyamunayor madhye bālāraṇḍā tapasvinī |
balād ākṛṣya gṛhnīyāt tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam ||
इडा भगवती गङ्गा पिङ्गला यमुना नदी ।
इडापिङ्गलयोर्मध्ये बालरण्डा सरस्वती ॥ (β2, βω, γ2, η1, η2 and χ)
iḍā bhagavatī gaṅgā piṅgalā yamunā nadī /
iḍāpiṅgalayor madhye bālaraṇḍā sarasvatī // (β2, βω, γ2, η1, η2 and χ)
पुच्छं प्रगृह्य भुजगीं सुप्तामुद्बोधयेदभीः ।
निद्रां विहाय सा ऋज्वी ऊर्ध्वमुत्तिष्ठते हठात् ॥
pucchaṃ pragṛhya bhujagīṃ suptām udbodhayed abhīḥ /
nidrāṃ vihāya sā ṛjvī ūrdhvam uttiṣṭhate haṭhāt //
pucche pragṛhya bhujagīṃ suptām udbodhayed abhīḥ |
nidrāṃ vihāya sā ṛjvī ūrdhvam uttiṣṭhate haṭhāt ||
pucchaṃ pragṛhya bhujagīṃ suptām udbodhayed abhi |
nidrāṃ vihāya sā ṛjvī ūrdhvam uttiṣṭhate haṭhāt ||
परिस्थिता चैव फणावती सा
प्रातश्च सायं प्रहरार्धमात्रं ।
प्रपूर्य सूर्यात्परिधानयुक्त्या
प्रगृह्य नित्यं परिचालनीया ॥
paristhitā caiva phaṇāvatī sā
prātaś ca sāyaṃ praharārdhamātraṃ /
prapūrya sūryāt paridhānayuktyā
pragṛhya nityaṃ paricālanīyā //
Verses 3.96*1–2 are absent in α1 and α2. They introduce the idea of awakening kụṇḍalinī by moving the tongue with a cloth, which is a practice called sarasvatīcālana in the Gorakṣaśataka (16–25). These verses do not have a known source and are somewhat obscure unless one is one aware of the more coherent explanation of this practice in the Gorakṣaśataka. In his Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā (see testimonia), Sundaradeva makes sense of this verse by equating the tongue with kuṇḍalinī. This enables him to understand the reference to the cloth (paridhāna) as the technique of wrapping the tongue in a cloth and milking it, which is a practice called sarasvatīcālana in the Gorakṣaśataka (16–25). This interpretation also makes sense of the next verse in the Haṭhapradīpikā (3.11), which describes the cloth.
paristhitā caiva phaṇāvatī sā
prātaś ca sāyaṃ praharārdhamātram |
prapūrya sauryā paridhānamuktā
pragṛhya niryāti vicālitā sā ||
tadvidhim āha |
paristhitā caiva phaṇāvatī sā
prātaś ca sāyaṃ praharārdhamātraṃ |
prapūrya sūryāt paridhānayuktā
pragṛhya tīrthāt paricālanīyā ||
paridhān[a]yukteti dvādaśāṅgulapramitasitasūkṣmacaturaṅgulavisṛtaśuddhavastrakhaṇḍena dṛḍhaṃ veṣṭatā sā prasiddhā [ph]aṇāvatī suṣumṇātmakā arundhatī jihvaiva kuṇḍalinī || uktaṃ ca ||
arundhatī bhavej jihvā dhruvo nāsāgramaṇḍalam iti ||
tāṃ jihvāṃ laṃbikāyogenordhvaṃ tālvantarbhrūmadhyadeśe vihitāṃ tatas tīrthād bhrūmadhyāt pragṛhya adhaḥ kṛtvā tasyā gurūpadiṣṭavartmanā cālanaṃ vidheyam iti saṃketaḥ [|] cālanaṃ tu khecarī mudrā sādhanavad vidheyaṃ [|] tīrthaṃ bhrūmadhyaḥ [|]
paristhitasyeha phaṇāvatī sā
prātastu sāyaṃ praharārdhamātram |
prapūrya sūryāt paridhānayuktā
pragṛhya niryāt paricālanīyā ||
वितस्तिप्रमितं दीर्घं विस्तारे चतुरङ्गुलम् ।
मृदुलं धवलं प्रोक्तं वेष्टनाम्बरलक्षणम् ॥
vitastipramitaṃ dīrghaṃ vistāre caturaṅgulam /
mṛdulaṃ dhavalaṃ proktaṃ veṣṭanāmbaralakṣaṇam //
This verse was likely added to explain `by the method of the cloth’ (paridhānayuktyā) in the previous verse. One would expect to read caturaṅgulavistāram in the second verse quarter, and the current reading is probably a result of the metre.
dvādaśāṅguladairghyaṃ cāmbaraṃ caturaṅgulam
vitastipramitaṃ dairghyaṃ vistāre caturaṅgulam |
mṛdulaṃ dhavalaṃ proktaṃ veṣṭanāmbaralakṣaṇam ||
yogabīje—
vitastipramitaṃ dīrgha[ṃ] vistāraṃ caturaṅgulam |
mṛdulaṃ dhavalaṃ proktaṃ veṣṭanādhāralakṣaṇam ||
vitastipramitaṃ dīrghaṃ vistāre caturaṅgulam |
mṛdulaṃ dhavalaṃ sūkṣmaṃ veṣṭanāmbaralakṣaṇam ||
* वज्रासनस्थितो योगी चालयित्वा तु कुण्डलीम् ।
कुर्यादनन्तरं भस्त्रीं कुण्डलीमाशु बोधयेत् ॥
* vajrāsanasthito yogī cālayitvā tu kuṇḍalīm /
kuryād anantaraṃ bhastrīṃ kuṇḍalīm āśu bodhayet //
Bhastrī or bhastrikā kumbhaka is taught at 2.60–68.The reference to vajrāsana may be pointing to the practice of uḍḍiyāna, which was described earlier in the chapter and is supposed to awaken kuṇḍalinī. The contraction of the sun mentioned in the next verse supports this.
vajrāsanasthito yogī cālayitvā tu kuṇḍalīm |
kuryād anantaraṃ bhastrāṃ kuṇḍalīṃ āśu bodhayet ||
vajrāsanasthito yogī cālayitvā tu kuṇḍalīm |
sūryād anantaraṃ bhastrā kuṇḍalīm āśu bodhayet ||
vajrāsanasthito yogī cālayitvā tu kuṃḍalīṃ |
sūryād anantaraṃ bhastrī kuṃḍalīm āśu bodhayet ||
भानोराकुञ्चनं कुर्यात् कुण्डलीं चालयेत्ततः ।
मृत्युवक्त्रगतस्यापि तस्य मृत्युभयं कुतः ॥
bhānor ākuñcanaṃ kuryāt kuṇḍalīṃ cālayet tataḥ /
mṛtyuvaktragatasyāpi tasya mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ //
In Jyotsnā 3.116, Brahmānanda understands bhānor ākuñcanaṃ as a contraction of the navel, whereas Sundaradeva in his Haṭhasaṃketacandrikā (see testimonia) interprets it as drawing prāṇa through the sun channel (sūryanāḍyākarṣaṇa), thereby intensifiying the bodily fire.
bhānor ākuñcanaṃ kuryāt kuṇḍalīṃ cālayet tataḥ |
mṛtyuvartmagatasyāpi tasya mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ ||
mṛtyuvartma° ] mṛtyuvaktra°, mṛtyuvajra°, mṛtyupadma° v.l.
bhānor ākuñcanaṃ kuryāt kuṇḍalīṃ cālayet tataḥ |
mṛtyuvaktragatasyāpi tasya mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ ||
bhānor ākuñcanaṃ kuryāt kuṃḍalīṃ cālayet svataḥ |
mṛtyuvakragatasyāpi tasya mṛtyu[bha]yaṃ kutaḥ ||
asyārthaḥ sūryanāḍyākarṣaṇena vahneḥ prācuryaṃ tasmāj jvalanatejasā apānavāyvākarṣaṇena vā kuṇḍalyābodho bhavati [|] tasya śakticālanakṛtābhyāsasya mṛtyubhayaṃ kuta iti [||]
नासादक्षिणमार्गवाहिपवनो प्राणेऽतिदीर्घीकृते
चन्द्राम्भःपरिपूरितामृततनुः प्राग्घण्टिकायास्तथा ।
सिञ्चन्कालविशालवह्निवशगान्भ्रूरन्ध्रनाडीगणां-
स्तत्कायं कुरुते पुनर्नवतरं जीर्णद्रुमस्कन्धवत् ॥ *
nāsādakṣiṇamārgavāhipavano prāṇe’tidīrghīkṛte
candrāmbhaḥparipūritāmṛtatanuḥ prāg ghaṇṭikāyās tathā /
siñcan kālaviśālavahnivaśagān bhrūrandhranāḍīgaṇāṃ-
s tat kāyaṃ kurute punar navataraṃ jīrṇadrumaskandhavat // *
Verse 3.98*1 is absent in the α group. It is very close to a verse in the Amaraughaśāsana, which is likely to be its source. Its import of rejuvenating the body by flooding it with nectar is not directly connected with the verses proceeding it.
nāsāpaścimamārgavāhapavanāt prāṇe ’tidīrghīkṛte
candrāmbupratisāraṇāṃ sukṛtinaḥ prāg ghaṇṭikāyāḥ pathaḥ |
siñcan kālaviśālavahnivaśagaṃ bhūtvā sa nāḍīśataṃ
tat kāryaṃ kurute punar navatanuṃ jīrṇadrumaskandhavat ||
pratisāraṇānantaraṃ śaṅkhasāraṇā kathyate
nāḍīśataṃ ] nāḍīgataṃ, nāḍīgaṇaṃ v.l.
nāsādakṣiṇamārgavāhipavano ghrāṇe ’tidīrghīkṛtaḥ
candrābhaḥparipūritāmṛtatanuḥ prāg ghaṇṭikāyās tataḥ |
bhindan kālaviśālavahnivaśagān bhrūrandhranāḍīgaṇān
taṃ kāyaṃ kurute punar navataraṃ jīrṇadrumaskandhavat ||
nāsādakṣiṇamārgavāhipavano ghrāṇe tidī[r]ghīkṛtaś
caṃdrāṃ’bhaḥparipūritā’mṛtatanuḥ prāgh ghaṃṭikāyās tataḥ [|]
bhindan kālaviśālavahnivaśagān bh[r]ū[ran]dhranāḍīgaṇāṃs
taṃ kāyaṃ kurute punar navataraṃ jīrṇadrumaskandhavat [||]
dakṣiṇe ghrāṇe nāsikāyām atidī[r]ghīkṛtaś ciraṃ kuṃbhakīkṛtaḥ prāk prathamaṃ caṃdrāṃ’bhaḥparipūritā’mṛtatanuḥ sādhakaḥ kartā pūrvam iḍayā dhṛtakuṃbhakenātisukhakarasudhopamena saṃtṛptiṃ samupagataḥ satatas tadanantaraṃ sūryanāḍyā cirāyā kalitaṃ kuṃbhauṣṇyātīkṣṇatarakuṃ tenaivauṣṇasvabhāvād ghaṇṭikāyāṃ jatruṇaḥ pañcamy arthaḥ tatsaṃbadhikān ity arthaḥ [|] evaṃvidhān kālabījān bh[r]ūrandhragataśirāpuñjān bhindan saṃchedayan svaṃ nijaśarīraṃ punar navataraṃ kuruta iti asyārthaḥ {|}
कुण्डलीं चालयित्वा तु कुर्याद्भस्त्रीं विशेषतः ।
एवमभ्यस्यतो नित्यं यमिनः शङ्कते यमः ॥
kuṇḍalīṃ cālayitvā tu kuryād bhastrīṃ viśeṣataḥ /
evam abhyasyato nityaṃ yaminaḥ śaṅkate yamaḥ //
Verses 3.98*2–3 are absent in the α group and have no known source. They elaborate further on the instruction to practise bhastrī kumbhaka in 3.97. The practice of other kumbhakas for moving kuṇḍalinī is mentioned in 3.98*3. The reading abhyāsato in 3.98*2c, which is attested by manuscripts of the γ group and the testimonia, is possible but seems to be a later corruption of the participle, abhyasyato.
kuṇḍalīṃ cālayitvā tu kuryād bhastrāṃ viśeṣataḥ |
evamabhyāsato nityaṃ yaminaḥ śaṅkate yamaḥ ||
kuṃḍalīṃ cālayitvā tu kuryād bhastrīṃ viśeṣataḥ |
evamabhyāsato nityaṃ yaminaḥ śaṃphate manaḥ ||
तदाभ्यसेत्सूर्यभेदमुज्जायीं चापि शीतलीम् ।
एवमभ्यासयुक्तस्य यमस्तु यमिनः कुतः ॥
tadābhyaset sūryabhedam ujjāyīṃ cāpi śītalīm /
evam abhyāsayuktasya yamas tu yaminaḥ kutaḥ //
On why this verse is in greyscale, see the note to 3.98*2.
tadābhyaset sūryabhedam ujjāyīṃ cāpi śītalīm |
evam abhyāsayuktasya yamas tu yaminaḥ kutaḥ ||
tadābhyaset sūryabhedam ujjāyīṃ vāpi śītalīm |
evamabhyāsayuktasya yamas tu yaminaḥ kutaḥ ||
मुहूर्तद्वयपर्यन्तं निर्भरं चालनादसौ ।
ऊर्ध्वमाकृष्यते किंचित् सुषुम्णागतकुण्डली ॥
muhūrtadvayaparyantaṃ nirbharaṃ cālanād asau /
ūrdhvam ākṛṣyate kiṃcit suṣumṇāgatakuṇḍalī //
muhūrtadvayaparyantaṃ nirbhayaś cālayed imām |
ūrdhvam ākṛṣyate kiṃcit suṣumnā kuṇḍalīgatā ||
22c nirbhayaś ] YL ; nirbharaś T, nirbhayāc GU 23a ākṛṣyate YL ; ākarṣayet TGU 23b suṣumnā kuṇḍalīgatā ] TG; suṣumnāṃ kuṇḍalīgatāṃ U, suṣumnā kuṇḍalīyutā YL
gurūpadeśavidhinā tasya mṛtyubhayaṃ kutaḥ |
muhūrtadvayaparyantaṃ vidhinā śakticālanam ||
muhūrtadvayaparyantaṃ nirbhītaś cālayed asau |
ūrdhvam ākṛṣyate kiṃ cit suṣumṇāṃ kuṇḍalīgatām |
ṣaṇmāsāc cālanenaiva śaktis tasyordhvagā bhavet ||
kuṇḍalīgatām ] kuṇḍalī gatā v.l.
muhūrtadvayaparyantaṃ nirbhayaś cālayed imām |
ūrdhvam ākṛṣyate kiṃcit suṣumnā kuṇḍalīyutā ||
muhūrtadvayaparyantaṃ nirbharaṃ cālanād dhi vai |
muhūrtadvayaparyantaṃ nirbharaṃ cālanād asau |
ūrdhvam ākṛṣyate kiṃcit suṣumnākuṇḍalīgatam ||
ku[ṇ]ḍalyās tadānīṃ gatam upari yātaṃ kiṃ cit svalpamātra abhyāsasadṛśam ity arthaḥ [|] akṛṣyate uccaiḥ karoti [|]
तेन कुण्डलिनी तस्याः सुषुम्णायाः समुद्धृता ।
जहाति तस्मात्प्राणोऽयं सुषुम्णां व्रजति स्वतः ॥
tena kuṇḍalinī tasyāḥ suṣumṇāyāḥ samuddhṛtā /
jahāti tasmāt prāṇo’yaṃ suṣumṇāṃ vrajati svataḥ //
We have supplied `mouth’ (mukha) in our translation on the basis of the reading found in the source text (the Gorakṣaśataka).
tena kuṇḍalinī tasyāḥ suṣumnāyā mukhaṃ dhruvam |
jahāti tasmāt prāno’yaṃ suṣumnāṃ vrajati svataḥ ||
tadā kuṇḍalinī tasyāḥ suṣumṇāyā mukhaṃ dhruvam |
jahāti tasmāt prāṇo ’yaṃ suṣumṇāṃ vrajati svataḥ ||
tena proktaśakticālanena vidhinā kuṇḍalinī tasyāḥ suṣumṇāyāḥ samuddhṛtā jahāti tasmāt prāṇo [’]yaṃ suṣumṇāṃ vrajati svataḥ [|] suṣumṇāyā antaḥ kiṃ cit tatka[r]tṛkordhvākarṣaṇena samyag ūrdhvavihitā yadā kuṇḍalī bhūry antaḥ praviṣṭety arthaḥ [|] tadāyaṃ va[hny]āpānamanobhiḥ sārdhaṃ vijitaḥ kuṃḍalīpadaṃ prāptaḥ prāṇavāyuḥ svataḥ svasmāt pārthivarājasavikāraśoṣam iti śeṣaḥ [|] jahāti kuṃḍalībodhe suṣumṇāṃtaḥ pātaprabhāvād vigatāśeṣabāhyavāhaprasaṃ[ga] iti bhāvaḥ || tasmād dhetoḥ suṣumṇaṃ gacchatīti kevalakuṃbhako bhavatīty arthaḥ ||
तस्मात्संचालयेन्नित्यं शब्दगर्भामरुन्धतीम् ।
तस्याः संचालनेनैव योगी रोगैः प्रमुच्यते ॥
tasmāt saṃcālayen nityaṃ śabdagarbhām arundhatīm /
tasyāḥ saṃcālanenaiva yogī rogaiḥ pramucyate //
In the Gorakṣaśataka (26cd–27ab), the source text, this verse occurs in a passage on sarasvatīcālana, which is the practice of moving the tongue (i.e.~sarasvatī) by wrapping a cloth around it and tugging it in order to raise kuṇḍalinī. In the Gorakṣaśataka, sarasvatī is also called arundhatī and, since the tongue is instrumental for speech and sarasvatī is the name of a Goddess identified with speech (vāc), the Gorakṣaśataka’s reading of śabdagarbhāṃ sarasvatīm makes good sense. However, it seems that Svātmārāma has changed 3.101b to read śabdagarbhām arundhatīm and has understood arundhatī as kuṇḍalinī. This is affirmed in longer versions of the Haṭhapradīpikā (3.102??) that contain a verse on synonyms of kuṇḍalinī, which includes arundhatī. We are yet to find arundhatī equated with kuṇḍalinī in a text composed before the Haṭhapradīpikā but this identification is found in subsequent compendiums and commentaries (e.g.~Yogacintāmaṇi f.~78v, Yuktabhavadeva 7.300, Jyotsnā 104, 119, Yogaprakāśikā 5.166).
tasmāt saṃcālayen nityaṃ śabdagarbhāṃ sarasvatīm |
yasyāḥ saṃcālanenaiva yogī rogaiḥ pramucyate ||
sūryeṇa pūrayed vāyuṃ sarasvatyās tu cālayet |
śabdagarbhācālanena yogī rogaiḥ pramucyate ||
tasmāt saṃcālayen nityaṃ śabdagarbhāṃ sarasvatī |
asyāḥ saṃcālanenaivaṃ rogā naśyaṃti niścitaṃ ||
tasmāt saṃcālayen nityaṃ śabdagarbhām arundhatīm ||
yasyāḥ saṃcālanenāśu yogī rogaiḥ pramucyate ||
येन संचालिता शक्तिः स योगी सिद्धिभाजनम् ।
किमत्र बहुनोक्तेन कालं जयति लीलया ॥
yena saṃcālitā śaktiḥ sa yogī siddhibhājanam /
kim atra bahunoktena kālaṃ jayati līlayā //
yena saṃcālitā śaktiḥ sa yogī siddhibhājanaḥ |
kim atra bahunoktena mṛtyuṃ jayati līlayā || 2.123 ||
yena saṃcālitā śaktiḥ śabdagarbhā tv aruṃdhatī |
kim atra bahunoktena tasya kālabhayaṃ na hi ||
yena saṃcālitā śaktiḥ sa yogī siddhibhājanaṃ |
kim atra bahunoktena kālaṃ jayati līlayā ||
ब्रह्मचर्यरतस्यैव नित्यं हितमिताशिनः ।
मण्डलाद्दृश्यते सिद्धिः कुण्डल्यभ्यासयोगतः ॥
brahmacaryaratasyaiva nityaṃ hitamitāśinaḥ /
maṇḍalād dṛśyate siddhiḥ kuṇḍalyabhyāsayogataḥ //
Verse 3.102*1 has been omitted by α1 and α3. It is in α2 at the end of a block of verses (3.94*2–5, 94*7) that is excluded by α3. This block appears after 3.97 and appears to have been inserted from elsewhere. 3.102*1 has no known source and appears to have been added as a general laudatory statement on the benefits of practising with kuṇḍalinī. The meaning of maṇḍalād in 3.102*1c is not clear. Brahmānanda understands it as a period of time (i.e., forty days) but we are yet to find this attested elsewhere.
brahmacaryaratasyaiva nityaṃ hitamitāśinaḥ |
maṇḍalād dṛśyate siddhiḥ kuṇḍalyabhyāsayoginaḥ ||
brahmacaryavratasyaiva kuṃḍalyabhyāsayoginaḥ ||
maṇḍalād dṛśyate siddhir iti yogavido viduḥ ||
brahmacaryajatasyaiva nityaṃ hitamitāṃ śanaiḥ |
maṇḍalād dṛśyate siddhiḥ kuṇḍalyabhyāsayoginaḥ ||
अभ्यासनिःसृतां चान्द्रीं विभूत्या सह मिश्रयेत् ।
तद्धारणं तूत्तमाङ्गे दिव्यदृष्टिप्रदायकम् ॥ *
abhyāsaniḥsṛtāṃ cāndrīṃ vibhūtyā saha miśrayet /
taddhāraṇaṃ tūttamāṅge divyadṛṣṭipradāyakam // *
In the important manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā, including those of α, this verse occurs in the section on śakticālana. This is also the case in the Yogalakṣaṇāvalī, Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā and the longer recensions of the Haṭhapradīpikā with six and ten chapters. However, in the context of śakticālana, the referent of cāndrī is unclear. It appears to be understood as some sort of lunar fluid. Sundaradeva (see the Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā in the testimonia) defines it as a flow of perspiration (gharmadhārā) that arises from exertion in the practice and is emitted from moon in forehead (lalāṭacandra). In Yogaprakāśikā, Bālakṛṣṇa glosses it simply as nectar (sudhā) (5.182). In the Haṭhayogasaṃhitā (p. 41) and Jyotsnā (3.98), this verse is in the section on amarolī, which provides a clear referent of cāndrī as the cool middle flow of urine (see 3.95).
abhyāsaniḥsṛtāṃ cāndrīṃ vibhūtyā saha miśrayet |
taddhāraṇaṃ cottamāṃge divyadṛṣṭipradāyakaṃ ||
abhyāsaniḥsṛtāṃ cāndrīṃ vibhūtyā saha miśrayet [|]
taddhāraṇaṃ tattamāṃge divyadṛṣṭipradāyakaṃ [||] 19
cāndrīṃ lalāṭacandrān niḥsṛtāṃ abhyāse śramajātāṃ gharmadhārāṃ tāṃ vibhūtyā vimiśrayet | tām uttamāṃge śirasi dhārayed asau sādhakasya divyadṛṣṭipradā bhravatīty arthaḥ [|]
abhyāsān niḥsṛtāṃ cāndrīṃ vibhūtyā saha miśrayet |
dhārayed uttamāṅgeṣu divyadṛṣṭiḥ prajāyate ||
द्विसप्ततिसहस्राणां नाडीनां मलशोधने ।
कुतः प्रक्षालनोपायः कुण्डल्यभ्यासतो विना ॥
इति शक्तिचालनम् । (ε2, ε3, η1 and η2)
dvisaptatisahasrāṇāṃ nāḍīnāṃ malaśodhane /
kutaḥ prakṣālanopāyaḥ kuṇḍalyabhyāsato vinā //
iti śakticālanam / (ε2, ε3, η1 and η2)
This verse is omitted by the α group, and was probably added to the original text as a further laudatory statement on the practice of kuṇḍalinī.
dvisaptatisahasrāṇāṃ nāḍīnāṃ malaśodhanam |
kutaḥ prakṣālanopāyaḥ kuṇḍalyabhyāsato vinā ||
dvisaptatisahasrāṇāṃ nāḍīnām api śodhanaṃ |
asatkalpaṃ smṛtaṃ siddhaiḥ kuṃḍalobhyasānād ṛte ||
dvisaptatisahastrāṇāṃ nāḍīnāṃ malaśodhanaṃ |
kutaḥ prakṣālanopāyaḥ kuṃḍalyābhyāsanād ṛte ||
इति मुद्रा दश प्रोक्ता आदिनाथेन शम्भुना ।
एकैका तासु यमिनां महासिद्धिप्रदायिनी ॥*
iti mudrā daśa proktā ādināthena śambhunā /
ekaikā tāsu yamināṃ mahāsiddhipradāyinī //*
Manuscripts of the β, η, and ε groups have a different reading for the second line; `each mudrā is capable of being a cause of all powers’ (kāraṇaṃ sarvasiddhīnāṃ ekaikāpi kṣamaiva sā).
iti mudrā daśa proktā ādināthena śambhunā |
ekaikā tāsu mukhyā syān mahāsiddhipradāyinī ||
iti mudrā nava proktā ādināthena śambhunā |
ekaikā tāsu yamināṃ mahāsiddhipradāyinī ||
राजयोगं विना पृथ्वी राजयोगं विना निशा ।
राजयोगं विना मुद्रा विचित्रापि न राजते ॥
rājayogaṃ vinā pṛthvī rājayogaṃ vinā niśā /
rājayogaṃ vinā mudrā vicitrāpi na rājate //
The Yogaprakāśikā (5.186) interprets the similes in this verse as we have translated them, `Just as without a king [and] moon, the earth and night do not shine...’ (yathā mahīpālaṃ candramasaṃ vinā pṛthvīniśe na rājete...). However, in Jyotsnā 3.126, Brahmānanda interprets the earth (pṛthvī) as āsana because both are connected by the quality of steadiness (sthairyaguṇayogāt), and the night (niśā) as breath retention (kumbhaka) because both are characterised by the absence of movement of people and wind (prāṇasañcārābhāvalakṣaṇaḥ). Brahmānanda’s interpretation seems somewhat far-fetched.
rājayogaṃ vinā pṛthvī rājayogaṃ vinā niśā |
rājayogaṃ vinā mudrā vicitrāpi na rājate ||
मारुतस्य विधिं सर्वं मनोयुक्तं समभ्यसेत् ।
इतरत्र न कर्तव्या मनोवृत्तिर्मनीषिणा ॥
mārutasya vidhiṃ sarvaṃ manoyuktaṃ samabhyaset /
itaratra na kartavyā manovṛttir manīṣiṇā //
mārutābhyasanaṃ kiṃ cin manoyuktaṃ samācaret |
itaratra na kartavyā manovṛttir manīṣiṇā ||
खिलापि मध्यमा नाडी दृढाभ्यासेन योगिनाम् ।
आसनप्राणसंयाममुद्राभिः सरला भवेत् ॥
khilāpi madhyamā nāḍī dṛḍhābhyāsena yoginām /
āsanaprāṇasaṃyāmamudrābhiḥ saralā bhavet //
The reading of khilāpi in the first verse quarter is unusual but well attested by the witnesses including the α group of manuscripts. In the Abhidhānacintāmaṇi (940), khila is defined as something uncultivated such as field (kṣetrādyaprahataṃ khilam) or, as the Amarapadavivṛti (2.1.5) puts it, `not marked by a plough’ (lāṅgalena na likhitam iti khilam). In the context of Haṭhapradīpikā 3.107, qualifying suṣumnā with khila implies that the central channel has yet to be cultivated by a yoga practice.
iyaṃ tu madhyamā nāḍī dṛḍhābhyāsena yoginām |
āsanaprāṇasaṃyāmamudrābhiḥ saralā bhavet ||
उपासने विनिद्राणां राजयोगः समुद्रकः ।
रुद्राणी सा परा मुद्रा भद्रां सिद्धिं प्रयच्छति ॥
upāsane vinidrāṇāṃ rājayogaḥ samudrakaḥ /
rudrāṇī sā parā mudrā bhadrāṃ siddhiṃ prayacchati //
Rudrāṇī may be the mudrā usually called śāmbhavī.
उपदेशं हि मुद्राणां यो धत्ते सांप्रदायिकम् ।
स एवास्तु गुरुः स्वामी साक्षादीश्वर एव सः ॥
upadeśaṃ hi mudrāṇāṃ yo dhatte sāṃpradāyikam /
sa evāstu guruḥ svāmī sākṣādīśvara eva saḥ //
Verses 3.108*1–2 have no known source and are absent in the α group. It is likely both were added to the original text as further praise of those practising the haṭhayogic mudrās.
upadeśaṃ hi mudrāṇāṃ yo datte sāṃpradāyikam |
sa eva śrīguruḥ svāmī sākṣād īśvara eva saḥ ||
तस्य वाक्यपरो भूत्वा योऽभ्यस्यति समाहितः ।
अणिमादिगुणैश्वर्यं जायते कालवञ्चनम् ॥
tasya vākyaparo bhūtvā yo’bhyasyati samāhitaḥ /
aṇimādiguṇaiśvaryaṃ jāyate kālavañcanam //
No version of this verse is entirely satisfactory. See the note on 3.108*1 for why it is in greyscale.
नमः शिवाय गुरवे नादबिन्दुकलात्मने ।
निरञ्जनपदं याति नित्यं यत्रपरायणः ॥
namaḥ śivāya gurave nādabindukalātmane /
nirañjanapadaṃ yāti nityaṃ yatraparāyaṇaḥ //
Verses 4.0*1–4.0*16 are omitted by the α group and are likely not to be original. The first additional verse resembles a maṅgala verse that one might expect to see at the beginning of a text. The second is a verse from the Gorakṣaśataka that introduces the topic of samadhi. Some manuscripts of the β, ε and η groups have the two verses on the synonyms of rājayoga here (on their position in the α group and other manuscripts, see the note to 4.29). The rest of the additional verses (4.0*5–4.0*16) are a motley collection on samādhi, rājayoga, the importance of the guru, dissolving the breath, suṣumṇā, etc. In contrast to this, the α group begins with a cohesive discusson on absorption (4.1–3) that transitions to the gaze (4.4) and a brief discussion of śāmbhavī and khecarī mudrās (4.5–4.8). The main topic of the chapter, which is meditating on the internal sound (nādānusandhāna), begins at 4.9 in the α group (whereas in other groups it begins after fifty or so verses). The emphasis on nādānusandhāna in the fourth chapter of the α group is consistent with the statement in verse 1.56 that nādānusandhāna is the fourth component of Haṭhayoga. Its likely that the term nirañjanapada was understood here as samādhi because nirañjana is included in a list of synonyms of samādhi later in this chapter (4.29). The triad nāda, bindu and kalā occurs in earlier works, in particular Śaiva Tantras, where it appears in contexts of enunciating mantras (mantroccāra, e.g., Kubjikāmatatantra 7.65, Jñānārṇavatantra 2.4, Īśānaśivagurudevapaddhati 18-110, etc.) and sometimes qualifies dieties (e.g., Parākhyatantra 5.156ab) and gurus (e.g., Gurugītā 64). The context can change the meaning of these terms, so we have chosen not to translate them. For a discussion of their various meanings, see Tāntrikābhidhānakośa 2004 vol. 2: 68–73, 2013 vol. 3, 277–279.
namaḥ śivāya gurave nādabindukalātmane |
nirañjanapadaṃ yāti yatra yogī parāyaṇaḥ iti dhyānam || 14 ||
अथेदानीं प्रवक्ष्यामि समाधिक्रममुत्तमम् ।
मृत्युघ्नं तु सुखोपायं ब्रह्मानन्दकरं परम् ॥
athedānīṃ pravakṣyāmi samādhikramam uttamam /
mṛtyughnaṃ tu sukhopāyaṃ brahmānandakaraṃ param //
athedānīṃ pravakṣyāmi samādhikramam uttamam |
mṛtyughnaṃ tu sukhopāyair brahmānandakaraṃ sadā ||
64c tu sukhopāyair ] T; sukhadopāyaṃ GU
राजयोगः समाधिः स्याद् उन्मनी च मनोन्मनी ।
अमरौघो लयस्तत्त्वं शून्याशून्यं परं पदं ॥ (β2, ε2, ε3, η2 and χ)
rājayogaḥ samādhiḥ syād unmanī ca manonmanī /
amaraugho layas tattvaṃ śūnyāśūnyaṃ paraṃ padaṃ // (β2, ε2, ε3, η2 and χ)
अमनस्कं तथाद्वैतं निरालम्बं निरञ्जनम् ।
जीवन्मुक्तिश्च सहजं तुर्यं चेत्येकवाचकाः ॥ (β2, ε2, ε3, η2 and χ) *
amanaskaṃ tathādvaitaṃ nirālambaṃ nirañjanam /
jīvanmuktiś ca sahajaṃ turyaṃ cety ekavācakāḥ // (β2, ε2, ε3, η2 and χ) *
सलिले सैन्धवं यद्वत् साम्यं भजति योगतः ।
तथात्ममनसोरैक्यं समाधिः सोऽभिधीयते ॥
salile saindhavaṃ yadvat sāmyaṃ bhajati yogataḥ /
tathātmamanasor aikyaṃ samādhiḥ so’bhidhīyate //
ambusaindhavayoḥ sāmyaṃ yathā bhavati yogataḥ |
tathātmamanasor aikyaṃ samādhiḥ so’bhidhīyate ||
salile saindhavaṃ yadvat sāmyaṃ bhavati yogavit |
tathātmamanasor aikyaṃ samādhiḥ so ’bhidhīyate ||
ambusaindhavayor aikyaṃ yathā bhavati yogataḥ |
tathātmamanasor aikyaṃ samādhir abhidhīyate ||
tad uktaṃ yogacandrikāyām –
ambusaindhavayor aikyaṃ yathā bhavati yogataḥ |
tathātmanasor aikyaṃ samādhiḥ sa vidhīyate ||
aikyaṃ abhinnatvam | yogataḥ yogābhyāsāt ||
यत्समत्वं द्वयोरेव जीवात्मपरमात्मनोः ।
समस्तनष्टसंकल्पः समाधिः सोऽभिधीयते ॥ (ε2, ε3, η2 and χ) *
yat samatvaṃ dvayor eva jīvātmaparamātmanoḥ /
samastanaṣṭasaṃkalpaḥ samādhiḥ so’bhidhīyate // (ε2, ε3, η2 and χ) *
yat samatvaṃ dvayor atra jīvātmaparamātmanoḥ |
samastanaṣṭasaṃkalpaḥ samādhiḥ so’bhidhīyate ||
tat samatvaṃ bhaved atra jīvātmaparamātmanoḥ |
samastanaṣṭasaṃkalpaḥ samādhiḥ so ’bhidhīyate ||
yat sarvadvandvayor aikyaṃ jīvātmaparamātmanoḥ |
samastanaṣṭasaṃkalpaḥ samādhiḥ so ’bhidhīyate ||
राजयोगस्य माहात्म्यं को वा जानाति तत्त्वतः ।
च्रुx ज्ञानान्मुक्तिः स्थिता सिद्धिच्रुx र् गुरुवाक्येन लभ्यते ॥
rājayogasya māhātmyaṃ ko vā jānāti tattvataḥ /
crux jñānān muktiḥ sthitā siddhicrux r guruvākyena labhyate //
The third verse quarter of this verse has been subject to much revision in the Haṭhapradīpikā and the source text, the Amanaska. Unlike the manuscripts of the Amanaska, those of the Haṭhapradīpikā transmit sthitiḥ or sthite after muktiḥ or mukti. We are unable to make sense of sthiti here, and so have cruxed this verse quarter and emended to muktiḥ sthitā (`liberation has happened’).
rājayogasya māhātmyaṃ ko vā jānāti tattvataḥ |
jñānāt siddhir muktir iti guror jñānaṃ ca labhyate ||
5c jñānāt siddhir muktir iti ] Bl Jb K Ma Va: jñānāt siddhimuktir iti Pa Pc Tr Ua Ea: jñānasiddhir muktir iti Vb Vd: jñānān mukteḥ siddhir iti Ja: jñānāt sidhyati muktir hi AllN (except Na Nm Ve Ea): jñānāt sidhyate muktir hi Ve: jñānāt sidhyanti muktiṃ hi Na: jñānāt sidhyati muktiṃ hi Nm: nānāsiddhir muktir iti Tha: jñānasiddhir bhavaty eva Mb: jñānasiddhimuktisiddhi Pb: jñānāt siddhimuktor iti Je
rājayogasya māhātmyaṃ ko hi jānāti tattvataḥ |
tajjñānī vasate yatra sadeśaḥ puṇyabhājanam ||
दुर्लभो विषयत्यागो दुर्लभं तत्त्वदर्शनम् ।
दुर्लभा सहजावस्था सद्गुरोः करुणां विना ॥
durlabho viṣayatyāgo durlabhaṃ tattvadarśanam /
durlabhā sahajāvasthā sadguroḥ karuṇāṃ vinā //
विविधैरासनैः कुम्भैर्विचित्रकरणैरपि ।
प्रबुद्धायामादिशक्तौ प्राणः शून्ये विलीयते ॥
vividhair āsanaiḥ kumbhair vicitrakaraṇair api /
prabuddhāyām ādiśaktau prāṇaḥ śūnye vilīyate //
In Jyotsnā 4.10, Brahmānanda understands `the void’ (śūnya) as the central channel. In Haṭhapradīpikā 3.4, śūnyapādavī is a synonym of suṣumnā.
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
vividhair āsanaiḥ kumbhair vicitrakaraṇair api |
prabuddhāyām ādiśaktau prāṇaḥ śūnye vilīyate ||
उत्पन्नशक्तिबोधस्य त्यक्तनिःशेषकर्मणः ।
योगिनः सहजावस्था स्वयमेव प्रजायते ॥
utpannaśaktibodhasya tyaktaniḥśeṣakarmaṇaḥ /
yoginaḥ sahajāvasthā svayam eva prajāyate //
utpannaśaktibodhasya tyaktaniḥśeṣakarmaṇaḥ |
yoginaḥ sahajāvasthā svayam eva prajāyate ||
सुषुम्णावाहिनि प्राणे शून्यं विशति मानसे ।
तथा समस्तकर्माणि निर्मूलयति योगवित् ॥
suṣumṇāvāhini prāṇe śūnyaṃ viśati mānase /
tathā samastakarmāṇi nirmūlayati yogavit //
suṣumṇāvāhini prāṇe śūnye viśati mārute |
tathā samastakarmāṇi nirmūlayati yogavit ||
suṣumṇāvāhini prāṇe śūnye viśati mānase |
tadā samastakarmāṇi nirmūlayati marmavit ||
अमराय नमस्तुभ्यं सोऽपि कालस्त्वया हतः ।
पतितं वदने यस्य जगदेतच्चराचरम् ॥
amarāya namas tubhyaṃ so’pi kālas tvayā hataḥ /
patitaṃ vadane yasya jagad etac carācaram //
चित्ते समत्वमापन्ने वायौ व्रजति मध्यमे ।
तदामरौघवज्रोली तदाशाजीवितेऽपि च ॥
citte samatvam āpanne vāyau vrajati madhyame /
tadāmaraughavajrolī tadāśājīvite’pi ca //
The second line of this verse is problematic in both the source text (the Amaraugha) and the manuscripts of the Haṭhapradīpikā. It seems that the ε group has preserved the most plausible version of this line, which is also quite close to the source text. The line was rewritten in η2 and other manuscripts, as well as the Jyotsnā (4.14cd), to include the two variations of vajrolī, namely amarolī and sahajolī.
citte tu sattvam āpanne vāyau vrajati madhyame |
tadāmaraughavajrolis tadāśājīvitasya ca ||
citte tu sattvam ] $beta $ : citte samatvam Ba Ad Ed : cittau samatvam Gb Ta. tadāmaraughavajrolis ] conj. : tadāmaraughavajroli Ga : tadāmaraudhavajrolī Ae : eṣāmarauli vajroli Gb : eṣāmarāli vajroli Ba : eṣāmarauli vajrauli Ta : yeṣāmarāli vajrauli Ad : eṣāmarolī vajrolī Ed. tadāśājīvitasya ca ] $beta $ : tadā meni mameti ca Ba : tadā mati mateti ca Ed : mameti ca mameti ca Ad : tadā meti mameti mateti ca Gb (unmetr.) : mateti mame++ Ta.
ज्ञानं कुतो मनसि जीवति देवि यावत्
प्राणोऽपि जीवति मनो म्रियते न तावत् ।
प्राणो मनो द्वयमिदं विलयं नयेद्यो
मोक्षं स गच्छति नरो न कथंचिदन्यः ॥
jñānaṃ kuto manasi jīvati devi yāvat
prāṇo’pi jīvati mano mriyate na tāvat /
prāṇo mano dvayam idaṃ vilayaṃ nayed yo
mokṣaṃ sa gacchati naro na kathaṃcid anyaḥ //
jñānaṃ kuto manasi jīvati devi yāvat
prāṇo pi jīvati mano mriyate na yāvat |
prāṇo mano dvayam idaṃ vilayaṃ prayāti
mokṣaṃ sa gacchati naro na kathaṃcid anyaḥ ||
devi ] 7970 4340 T00788, kūdṛṣṭi D4345 (unmetr.)
atra śivavākyam |
jñānaṃ kuto manasi jīvati devi tāvat
prāṇo ’pi jīvati mano mriyate na yāvat |
prāṇo mano dvayam idaṃ vilayaṃ nayed yo
mokṣaṃ sa gacchati naro na kathañcid anyaḥ ||
jñānaṃ kuto manasi jīvati durvikalpe
prāṇe ’pi jīvati mano mṛyate na yāvat |
prāṇo mano dvayam idaṃ na vilīyate ’tra
mokṣa na gacchati naro ’tra kathaṃ cid eva ||
रसस्य मनसश्चैव चञ्चलत्वं स्वभावतः ।
रसो बद्धो मनो बद्धं किं न सिध्यति भूतले ॥
rasasya manasaś caiva cañcalatvaṃ svabhāvataḥ /
raso baddho mano baddhaṃ kiṃ na sidhyati bhūtale //
śāstrāntare śivavākyam—
rasasya manasaś caiva cañcalatvaṃ samāsataḥ |
raso baddho mano baddhaṃ kiṃ na sidhyati bhūtale ||
मूर्च्छितो हरते व्याधिं मृतो जीवयति स्वयं ।
बद्धः खेचरतां धत्ते रसो वायुश्च भैरवि ॥
mūrcchito harate vyādhiṃ mṛto jīvayati svayaṃ /
baddhaḥ khecaratāṃ dhatte raso vāyuś ca bhairavi //
The Rasārṇava is the likely source of this verse given the vocative, bhairavi. Similar verses are found in other yoga texts (see Mallinson and Szántó 2021: 57). Disregarding the technical meaning of the terms, the verse plays with apparent contradictions (virodhābhāsa) in saying literally that, when mercury and the breath are unconscious, they cure disease; when dead, they restore life and, when bound, they enable one to fly up.
mūrchito harati vyādhiṃ mṛto jīvayati svayam |
baddhaḥ khecaratāṃ kuryāt raso vāyuś ca bhairavi ||
mūrcchito harate vyādhiṃ baddhaḥ khecaratāṃ nayet |
sarvasiddhikaro līno niścalo muktidāyakaḥ ||
mūrchito harate vyādhiṃ mṛto jīvayati svayam |
baddhaḥ khecaratāṃ dhatte mano vāyuś ca bhairavi ||
इन्द्रियाणां मनो नाथो मनोनाथस्तु मारुतः ।
मारुतस्य लयो नाथस्तं नाथं लयमाश्रयेत् ॥
indriyāṇāṃ mano nātho manonāthas tu mārutaḥ /
mārutasya layo nāthas taṃ nāthaṃ layam āśrayet //
indriyāṇāṃ mano nātho manonāthas tu mārutaḥ |
mārutasya layo nāthaḥ sa layo nādam āśritaḥ ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
indriyāṇāṃ mano nātho manonāthaś ca mārutaḥ |
mārutasya layo nāthaḥ sa layo nādam āśritaḥ ||
सोऽयमेवास्तु मोक्षाख्यो मास्तु वापि मतान्तरे ।
मनःप्राणलयानन्दो नापि कश्चिद्विभिद्यते ॥
so’yam evāstu mokṣākhyo māstu vāpi matāntare /
manaḥprāṇalayānando nāpi kaścid vibhidyate //
Some of the β, ε and η groups have a different version of the second half of this verse, the most plausibe of which is, ’the extraordinary bliss of dissolution of mind and breath arises in me’ (manaḥprāṇalayānando mayi kaścit pravartate). The first person pronoun suggests that this verse derives from a dialogue of some kind before it was changed to the version in the γ and δ manuscripts.
ayam eva tu mokṣākhyo astu vāpi matāntare |
manaḥprāṇalayo nādo na ca kaś cit vibhidyate ||
प्रणष्टोच्छ्वासनिश्वासः प्रध्वस्तविषयग्रहः ।
निश्चेष्टो निर्विकारश्च लयो जयति योगिनाम् ॥
praṇaṣṭocchvāsaniśvāsaḥ pradhvastaviṣayagrahaḥ /
niśceṣṭo nirvikāraś ca layo jayati yoginām //
The fourth verse quarter of this verse differs from that of the North Indian recension of the Amanaska (quoted as the source) but is found in two South Indian manuscripts of the Amanaska (Ad and Cc).
pranaṣṭocchvāsaniśvāsaḥ pradhvastaviṣayagrahaḥ |
niśceṣṭo nirgatārambho hy ānandaṃ yāti yogavit ||
pranaṣṭocchvāsa° ] Jb Pa Va Bl Ja Ad AllSI AllN, pranaṣṭasvāsa° Mb, pranaṣṭāsvāsa° Ua, praṇaśocchvāsa° Ma, pranaṣṭaḥ svāsa° Je Vb, pranaṣṭo śvāsa°ḥ Pc, prāṇastho śvāsa° Pb, pranaṣṭe svāsa° K
praṇaṣṭocchvāsaniḥśvāsa[ḥ] vidhvastaviṣayagrahaḥ |
niśceṣṭo nirgatārambho hy ānandayati yogikaḥ ||
pranaṣṭaśvāsaniḥśvāsaḥ pradhvastaviṣayajvaraḥ |
niśceṣṭo nirvikāraś ca layo jayati yoginā ||
उच्छिन्नसर्वसंकल्पो निःशेषाशेषचेष्टितः ।
स्वावगम्यो लयः कोऽपि जयतां वागगोचरः ॥
ucchinnasarvasaṃkalpo niḥśeṣāśeṣaceṣṭitaḥ /
svāvagamyo layaḥ ko’pi jayatāṃ vāgagocaraḥ //
ucchinnasarvasaṅkalpo niḥśeṣāśeṣaceṣṭitaḥ |
svāvagamyo layaḥ ko ’pi jāyate vāgagocaraḥ ||
jāyate ] AllNI (except Ma Pc), AllSI (except Ad Tha) Ea, jayatāṃ Ma Ad Nb Eb, jayatā Pc, jñāyatāṃ Tha, jagatāṃ AllN (except Nb Nu Ea Eb), japatāṃ Ca, layatāṃ Nu
ucchinnasarvasaṃkalpo nirgatāśeṣaceṣṭakaḥ |
svāvagamyo layaḥ ko ’pi jayatāṃ vāgagocaraḥ ||
यत्र दृष्टिर्लयस्तत्र भूतेन्द्रियसनातनः ।
स्याच्छक्तिर्जीवभूतानां दृष्टिर्लक्ष्ये लयं गता ॥
yatra dṛṣṭir layas tatra bhūtendriyasanātanaḥ /
syāc chaktir jīvabhūtānāṃ dṛṣṭir lakṣye layaṃ gatā //
yatra dṛṣṭir manas tatra bhūtendriyasanātanaṃ |
sā śaktis sarvabhūtānāṃ dṛṣṭir lakṣye layaṃ gatā ||
sā śaktis ] 4340 4345 T00788, sa śāntis 7970
yatra dṛṣṭir manas tatra bhūtendriya sapudgalaḥ
svaśaktijīvabhūtā hi dṛṣṭilakṣair layaṃ gatāḥ
°bhūtā hi ] conj. Hatley, °bhūtāni ABCed
rājayoge—
yatra dṛṣṭir layas tatra bhūtendriyasanātanī |
syāc chaktiḥ sarvabhūtānāṃ dṛṣṭir lakṣeṇa saṃgatā ||
tad uktaṃ haṭhapradīpikāyām–
yatra dṛṣṭir layas tatra bhūtendriyasanātanī |
syāc chaktiḥ sarvabhūtānāṃ dṛṣṭir lakṣeṇa saṃgatā ||
syāc chaktiḥ sarva°] B220, syārā śakti serva° 2244
lakṣeṇa saṃgatā ] 2244, lakṣyakṣayaṃ gatā B220
tathā coktaṃ haṭhapradīpikāyām –
yatra dṛṣṭir layas tatra bhūtendriyasanātanaḥ |
na sā śaktir bhāvabhūtānāṃ dṛṣṭe lakṣe kṣayaṃ gatā ||
वेदशास्त्रपुराणानि सामान्यगणिका इव ।
एकैव शांभवी मुद्रा गुप्ता कुलवधूरिव ॥
vedaśāstrapurāṇāni sāmānyagaṇikā iva /
ekaiva śāṃbhavī mudrā guptā kulavadhūr iva //
See Birch 2013:286 for more parallel verses.
vedaśāstrapurāṇāni sāmānyagaṇikā iva |
ekaiva śāmbhavī mudrā guptā kulavadhūr iva ||
vedaśāstrapurāṇāni sāmānyagaṇikā iva |
ekaiva śāmbhavī mudrā guptā kulavadhūr iva ||
vedaśāstrapurāṇaughāḥ sāmānyagaṇikā iva |
ekaiva śāmbhavī mudrā guptā kulavadhūr iva ||
vedaśāstrapurāṇāni sāmānyagaṇikā iva |
ekaiva śāmbhavī mudrā sarvatantreṣu gopitā || 49.26
अन्तर्लक्ष्यं बहिर्दृष्टिर्निमेषोन्मेषवर्जिता ।
एषा सा शांभवी मुद्रा सर्वतन्त्रेषु गोपिता ॥
antar lakṣyaṃ bahir dṛṣṭir nimeṣonmeṣavarjitā /
eṣā sā śāṃbhavī mudrā sarvatantreṣu gopitā //
See Birch 2013: 287 for more parallel verses.
antar lakṣyaṃ bahir dṛṣṭir nimeṣonmeṣavarjitā |
eṣā hi śāmbhavī mudrā sarvatantreṣu gopitā ||
antar lakṣyaṃ ] AllNI (except Ja K Pb Tr Ua Vb) Tha Vd, antarlakṣya Ad Cc K: antarlakṣaṃ Tr Nw Ve: antarlakṣā Ja Ua Ea Eb, antarlakṣo Na Nq Nu, antarlakṣyo Nb Nm: antaryogaṃ Vb: antarlīno Pb
antar lakṣyaṃ bahir dṛṣṭir nimeṣonmeṣavarjitaḥ |
iyaṃ sā śāṃbhavī mudrā sarvatantreṣu gopitā |
antar lakṣyaṃ bahir dṛṣṭir nimeṣonmeṣavarjitā |
eṣā tu śāmbhavī mudrā sarvaśāstreṣu gopitā ||
अन्तर्लक्ष्यविलीनचित्तपवनो योगी यदा वर्तते
दृष्ट्या निश्चलतारया बहिरधः पश्यन्नपश्यन्नपि ।
मुद्रेयं खलु खेचरी भवति सा युष्मत्प्रसादाद्गुरो
शून्याशून्यविवर्जितं स्फुरति यत्तत्त्वं पदं शांभवम् ॥
antarlakṣyavilīnacittapavano yogī yadā vartate
dṛṣṭyā niścalatārayā bahir adhaḥ paśyann apaśyann api /
mudreyaṃ khalu khecarī bhavati sā yuṣmatprasādād guro
śūnyāśūnyavivarjitaṃ sphurati yat tattvaṃ padaṃ śāṃbhavam //
On the similarity of śāmbhavī and khecarī mudrās in 4.5–7, see the note on 4.8.
antarlakṣyavilīnacittapavano yogī yadā vartate
dṛṣṭyā niścalatārayā bahir adhaḥ paśyan na paśyet sadā |
mudreyaṃ khalu khecarī bhavati sā yuktaprasādāt guroḥ
śūnyāśūnyavivarjitaṃ sphurati yat tattvaṃ padaṃ śāṃbhavaṃ ||
°pavano ] 4340 4345 T00788, °pavane 7970
sā yukta°] 4340 4345, sā yuktā T00788, satyuṣṭa° 7970
prasādād guroḥ ] 4340 4345 T00788, prasādāt guro 7970
yat tattvaṃ ] 7970 4340 4345, cet tatvaṃ T00788
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
antarlakṣyavilīnacittapavano yogī yadā vartate
dṛṣṭyā niścalatārayā bahir asau paśyann apaśyann api |
mudreyaṃ khalu śāṃbhavī bhavati sā yuṣmatprasādād guro
śūnyāśūnyavivarjitaṃ sphurati yat tatvaṃ padaṃ śāṃbhavam ||
antarlakṣyavilīnacittapavano yogī yadā vartate
dṛṣṭyā niścalatārayā bahir asau paśyann apaśyann api |
mudreyaṃ khalu śāmbhavī bhavati sā yuṣmatprasādād guro
śūnyāśūnyavivarjitaṃ bhavati yat tattvaṃ padaṃ śāmbhavam ||1 ||
antarlakṣavilīnacittapavano yogī yadā varttate
dṛṣṭyā niścalatārayā bahir adhaḥ paśyann apaśyann api |
mudreyaṃ khalu śāmbhavī bhavati sā yuṣmatprasādāt guroḥ
śūnyāśūnyavivarjitaṃ sphurati yat tatvaṃ padaṃ śāmbhavam ||
श्रीशांभव्याश्च खेचर्या अवस्थायामभेदता ।
भवेच्चित्तलयानन्दः शून्ये चित्सुखरूपिणि ॥ (χ)
śrīśāṃbhavyāś ca khecaryā avasthāyām abhedatā /
bhavec cittalayānandaḥ śūnye citsukharūpiṇi // (χ)
This line may be authorial because it is explaining the fact that 4.6 and 4.7 teach similar techniques called śāmbhavī mudrā and khecarīmudrā respectively. One would expect a verse on khecarī mudrā to be explaining the insertion of the tongue in the nasopharyngeal cavity (cf.~3.33–48), but the practice of meditating by fixing the gaze is called khecarī mudrā in 4.7 (as attested by α, β and η manuscripts) and manuscripts of the Candrāvalokana, the text from which Svātmārāma borrowed this verse. It is therefore likely that he added 4.8 to explain that śāmbhavī and khecarī mudrās are the same with respect to the gaze.
śrīśāṃbhavyā khecaryāś ca avasthāṃ ca labhed ataḥ |
tāre jyotiṣi saṃyojya kiñ cid uccālayed bhruvau ||
tāre jyotiṣi saṃyojya kiṃ cid unnamayed bhuvau [|]
śrīśāṃbhavyāś ca khecaryā avasthā[ṃ] tu labhed ataḥ ||
unnamayed ] 2244, saṃcālayed B220
unmanīkaraṇaṃ kṣaṇāt ] 2244, unmanīkāralakṣaṇam B220
tu labhed ataḥ ] 2244, labhate daśa B220
तारे ज्योतिषि संयोज्य किंचिदुच्चालयेद्भ्रुवौ ।
पूर्वयोगस्य मार्गोऽयमुन्मनीकरणं क्षणात् ॥
tāre jyotiṣi saṃyojya kiṃcid uccālayed bhruvau /
pūrvayogasya mārgo’yam unmanīkaraṇaṃ kṣaṇāt //
This and the next verse (4.8*1–2) are from the South Indian recension of the Amanaska, a later rewriting of that work which incorporates these verses in an additional passage on Tārakayoga, added here to elaborate on the meditation of fixing the gaze that is taught in 4.4–7.
netre jyotiṣi saṃyojya kiṃ cid unnamayed bhruvau |
pūrvayogasya mārgo ’yam unmanīkārakaḥ kṣaṇāt ||
unnamayed ] Cb Vd: unnamayan Bb Tha: unmīlaye W: unmilayet Uc: unmanaya Pe: unmīlya Cc
tāre jyotiṣi saṃyojya kiṃ cid uccālayed bhruvau |
pūrvayogasya mārgo ’yam unmanīkaraṇaḥ kṣaṇāt ||
tāre jyotiṣi saṃyojya kiṃ cid unnamayed bhuvau |
pūrvayogasya mārgo [’]yam unmanīkaraṇaṃ kṣaṇāt ||
केचिदागमजालेन केचिन्नियमसंकुलैः ।
केचित्तर्केण मुह्यन्ति नैव जानन्ति तारकम् ॥
kecid āgamajālena kecin niyamasaṃkulaiḥ /
kecit tarkeṇa muhyanti naiva jānanti tārakam //
On why this verse is in greyscale, see the note to 4.8*1.
ke cid āgamajālena ke cin nigamasaṅkulaiḥ |
ke cit tarkeṇa muhyanti naiva jānanti tārakam ||
ke cid āgamajālena ke cin niyamasaṃkulāḥ |
ke cit tarkeṇa muhyanti naiva jānanti tārakam ||
ke cid āgamajālena ke cin nigamasaṃkule |
ke cit tarkeṇa muhyanti naiva jānanti tārakam ||
अर्धोद्घाटितलोचनः स्थिरमना नासाग्रदत्तेक्षणः
चन्द्रार्कावपि लीनतामुपनयेन्निष्पन्दभावोऽन्तरे ।
ज्योतीरूपमशेषबाह्यरहितं देदीप्यमानं परं
तत्त्वं तत्पदमेति वस्तु परमं वाच्यं किमत्राधिकम् ॥
ardhodghāṭitalocanaḥ sthiramanā nāsāgradattekṣaṇaḥ
candrārkāv api līnatām upanayen niṣpandabhāvo’ntare /
jyotīrūpam aśeṣabāhyarahitaṃ dedīpyamānaṃ paraṃ
tattvaṃ tat padam eti vastu paramaṃ vācyaṃ kim atrādhikam //
This verse is not in the α manuscripts and was probably added because it elaborates on the gaze. In the Candrāvalokana (i.e., the source text) and the Anubhavanivedana, it follows 4.7, which may explain its position in the γ and δ groups.
ardhotghāṭitalocana[ḥ] sthiramanā nāsāgradattekṣaṇaś
candrārkāv api līnatām upagatau niṣpandarūpaṃ vapuḥ |
jyotīrūpam aśeṣabāhyarahitaṃ dedīpyamānaṃ paraṃ
tatvaṃ tatpadam eti yat tu paramaṃ vācyaṃ kim atrādhikaṃ ||
sthiramanā ] 4340 4345 T00788, sphuramanā 7970
nāsāgradattekṣaṇaś ] 7970 4345 T00788, nāsāgradaṭhattakṣaṇaś 4340
tatvaṃ tatpadam eti yat tu] 4340 4345 T00788, tatvaṃ-n-tatpadam eti yat kṛ 7970
ardhodghāṭitalocanaḥ sthiramanā nāsāgradattekṣaṇaḥ
candrārkāv api līnatām upanayen niḥspandabhāvottare |
jyotīrūpam aśeṣabāhyarahitaṃ dedīpyamānaṃ paraṃ
tatvaṃ tat padam eti vastu paramaṃ vācyaṃ kim atrādhikam ||
ardhodghāṭitalocanaḥ sthiramanā nāsāgradattekṣaṇaś
candrārkāv api līnatām upagatau trispandabhāvāntare |
jyotīrūpam aśeṣabāhyarahitaṃ caikaṃ pumāṃsaṃ param
tattvaṃ tatpadam eti vastu paramaṃ vācyaṃ kim atrādhikam ||2 ||
ardhodghāṭitalocanaḥ sthiramanā nāsāgradattekṣaṇaḥ
candrārkāvapi līnatāmupanayennispandavācyaṃ tataḥ |
jyotīrūpaviśeṣabāhyarahitaṃ dedīpyamānaṃ paraṃ
tatvaṃ tatparamasti vastu paramaṃ vācyaṃ kimatrādhikam || iti ||
पाताले यद्वितयसुषिरं मेरुमूले तदस्मिन्
तत्त्वं चैतत्प्रवदति सुधीस्तन्मुखं निम्नगानाम् ।
चन्द्रात्सारः स्रवति वपुषस्तेन मृत्युर्नराणां
तं बध्नीयात्सुकरणमृदा नान्यथा कायसिद्धिः ॥ (Α, Γ and Δ)
pātāle yadvitayasuṣiraṃ merumūle tad asmin
tattvaṃ caitat pravadati sudhīs tan mukhaṃ nimnagānām /
candrāt sāraḥ sravati vapuṣas tena mṛtyur narāṇāṃ
taṃ badhnīyāt sukaraṇamṛdā nānyathā kāyasiddhiḥ // (Α, Γ and Δ)
For the translation and testimonia, as well as an explanation of the various places and versions of this verse in the text, see 3.49.
यत्किंचित्स्रवते चन्द्राद् अमृतं दिव्यरूपिणः ।
तत्सर्वं ग्रसते सूर्यस् तेन पिण्डं जरायुतं ॥ (Α)
yat kiṃcit sravate candrād amṛtaṃ divyarūpiṇaḥ /
tat sarvaṃ grasate sūryas tena piṇḍaṃ jarāyutaṃ // (Α)
See 3.75, where this verse is also found.
तत्रास्ति करणं दिव्यं सूर्यस्य परिबन्धनं ।
गुरूपदेशतो ज्ञेयं न तु शास्त्रार्थकोटिभिः ॥ (Α)
tatrāsti karaṇaṃ divyaṃ sūryasya paribandhanaṃ /
gurūpadeśato jñeyaṃ na tu śāstrārthakoṭibhiḥ // (Α)
See 3.76, where this verse is also found.
दिवा न पूजयेल्लिङ्गं रात्रौ नैव च पूजयेत् ।
सततं पूजयेल्लिङ्गं दिवारात्रिनिरोधतः ॥
divā na pūjayel liṅgaṃ rātrau naiva ca pūjayet /
satataṃ pūjayel liṅgaṃ divārātrinirodhataḥ //
na divā pūjayel liṅgaṃ na rātrau ca maheśvari |
sarvadā pūjayel liṅgaṃ divārātrinirodhataḥ ||
divā na pūjayel liṃga[ṃ] rātrau naiva prapūjayet [|]
satataṃ pūjayel liṃga[ṃ] divārātrau ca pūjayet [||]
सुषिरं ज्ञानजनकं पञ्चस्रोतःसमन्वितम् ।
तिष्ठते खेचरी मुद्रा तस्मिन्शून्ये निरञ्जने ॥
suṣiraṃ jñānajanakaṃ pañcasrotaḥsamanvitam /
tiṣṭhate khecarī mudrā tasmin śūnye nirañjane //
savyadakṣiṇanāḍīstho madhye carati mārutaḥ |
tiṣṭhati khecarī mudrā tasmin sthāne na saṃśayaḥ ||
सव्यदक्षिणनाडीस्थो मध्ये चलति मारुतः ।
तिष्ठते खेचरी मुद्रा तस्मिन्स्थाने न संशयः ॥
savyadakṣiṇanāḍīstho madhye calati mārutaḥ /
tiṣṭhate khecarī mudrā tasmin sthāne na saṃśayaḥ //
savyadakṣiṇanāḍīstho madhye carati mārutaḥ |
tiṣṭhati khecarī mudrā tasmin sthāne na saṃśayaḥ ||
चित्तं चरति खे यस्माज् जिह्वा चरति खे गता ।
तेनैषा खेचरी नाम मुद्रा सिद्धैर्नमस्कृता ॥
cittaṃ carati khe yasmāj jihvā carati khe gatā /
tenaiṣā khecarī nāma mudrā siddhair namaskṛtā //
See 3.37, where this verse is also found.
इडापिङ्गलयोर्योगे शून्यं चैवानिलं ग्रसेत् ।
तिष्ठते खेचरी मुद्रा तत्र सत्यं पुनः पुनः ॥
iḍāpiṅgalayor yoge śūnyaṃ caivānilaṃ graset /
tiṣṭhate khecarī mudrā tatra satyaṃ punaḥ punaḥ //
Cf.~Rāghavabhaṭṭa ad Śāradātilaka 25.43: suṣumṇāyām eteṣu parvasu iḍāpiṅgalayor yogo bhavatīti jñeyam.
iḍāpiṅgalayor yoge śūnye caivānilaṃ graset |
tiṣṭhate khecarī mudrā tatra satyaṃ punaḥ punaḥ ||
सूर्याचन्द्रमसोर्मध्ये निरालम्बे तले पुनः ।
संस्थिता व्योमचक्रे या सा मुद्रा नाम खेचरी ॥
sūryācandramasor madhye nirālambe tale punaḥ /
saṃsthitā vyomacakre yā sā mudrā nāma khecarī //
The reading tale is suspect, as is nirālambāntare, the conjecture of Brahmānanda.
somasūryadvayor madhye nirālambe tale punaḥ |
saṃsthitā vyomacakre sā mudrā nāma ca khecarī ||
sūryācandramasormadhye nirālambe’nile punaḥ |
saṃsthitā vyomacakre yā sā mudrā nāma khecarī ||
सा मयोद्भेदिता वामा साक्षाच्च शिववल्लभा ।
पूरयेन्मारुतं दिव्यं सुषुम्णा पश्चिमे मुखे ॥
sā mayodbheditā vāmā sākṣāc ca śivavallabhā /
pūrayen mārutaṃ divyaṃ suṣumṇā paścime mukhe //
The referent of mayā is unspecified and no source text has been identified. It most probably refers to a goddess.
sā mayā viditā yā māyā sākṣācchivavallabhā |
pūrayen mārutaṃ divyaṃ suṣumnā paścime mukhe ||
पुरस्ताच्चैव पूर्येत निश्चिता खेचरी भवेत् ।
अभ्यसेत्खेचरीमुद्रामुन्मनी सा प्रजायते ॥
purastāc caiva pūryeta niścitā khecarī bhavet /
abhyaset khecarīmudrām unmanī sā prajāyate //
We have understood niścitā as an adverb. No witnesses have niścitam, but we see no other way of taking niścitā.
अभ्यसेत्खेचरीं तावद्यावत्स्याद्योगनिद्रितः ।
संप्राप्तयोगनिद्रस्य कालो नास्ति कदाचन ॥*
abhyaset khecarīṃ tāvad yāvat syād yoganidritaḥ /
saṃprāptayoganidrasya kālo nāsti kadācana //*
भ्रुवोर्मध्ये शिवस्थानं मनस्तत्र विलीयते ।
ज्ञातव्यं तत्पदं तुर्यं तत्र कालो न विद्यते ॥
bhruvor madhye śivasthānaṃ manas tatra vilīyate /
jñātavyaṃ tat padaṃ turyaṃ tatra kālo na vidyate //
चन्द्रसूर्यद्वयोर्मध्ये मुद्रां दद्याच्च खेचरीम् ।
निरालम्बे महाशून्ये व्योमचक्रे व्यवस्थिताम् ॥
candrasūryadvayor madhye mudrāṃ dadyāc ca khecarīm /
nirālambe mahāśūnye vyomacakre vyavasthitām //
The vyomacakra (’the cakra of space’) is also mentioned in a half-verse that was added to some later recensions of the Haṭhapradīpikā (see 3.35) and states that vyomacakra is another name for khecarīmudrā. In Jyotsnā 4.45, Brahmānanda states that the vyomacakra is associated with all the voids in the middle of the brow (bhrūmadhye sarvakhānāṃ samanvayāt) and, in the Haṭhasaṅketacandrikā (f. 129v), Sundaradeva says that it is called the Brahmarandhra, which is between Iḍā and Piṅgalā (iḍāpiṅgalāntargataṃ brahmarandhrākhyaṃ vyomacakraṃ tat khecarīmudrāṃ śaktiṃ kuryād ...).
candrasūryadvayor madhye muḍādadyā? tu khecarīm |
निरालम्बं मनः कृत्वा न किंचिदपि चिन्तयेत् ।
सबाह्याभ्यन्तरे व्योम्नि घटवत्तिष्ठति ध्रुवम् ॥
nirālambaṃ manaḥ kṛtvā na kiṃcid api cintayet /
sabāhyābhyantare vyomni ghaṭavat tiṣṭhati dhruvam //
nirālambaṃ manaḥ kṛtvā na kiñcid api cintayet || 3 ||
sa bāhyābhyantare yogī ghaṭavat tiṣṭhate priye |
बाह्यवायुर्यदालीनः खस्य मध्ये न संशयः ।
स्वस्थानं गच्छति प्राणः च्रुx सूर्याङ्गे मनसा तथाच्रुx ॥
bāhyavāyur yadālīnaḥ khasya madhye na saṃśayaḥ /
svasthānaṃ gacchati prāṇaḥ crux sūryāṅge manasā tathācrux //
It is hard to make sense of sūryāṅge here (`on the side of the sun’ ?). The terms sūryāṅge and candrāṅge occur in the third chapter (3.15) in the sense of the right and left sides of the body, respectively. However, this meaning does not seem relevant here. Since we are not sure of the meaning of sūryāṅge and since the variant readings with pavana are not clear either, we have cruxed the fourth verse quarter.
bāhyavāyur yathā līnaḥ svasya madhye na saṃśayaḥ |
svasthānaṃ gacchati prāṇaḥ sūryo ’gnau pavane tathā ||
एवमभ्यस्यमानस्य वायुमार्गे दिवानिशम् ।
अभ्यासाज्जीर्यते वायुर् मनस्तत्र विलीयते ॥
evam abhyasyamānasya vāyumārge divāniśam /
abhyāsāj jīryate vāyur manas tatra vilīyate //
Brahmānanda identifies the path of the breath (vāyumārga) with Suṣumṇā.
abhyāsāl līyate vāyuḥ manas tatra vilīyate ||
अमृतं प्लावयेद्देहम् आ पादतलमस्तकम् ।
सिध्यत्येव महाकायो महाबलपराक्रमः ॥
इति खेचरी । (χ)
amṛtaṃ plāvayed deham ā pādatalamastakam /
sidhyaty eva mahākāyo mahābalaparākramaḥ //
iti khecarī / (χ)
siddhaty evaṃ tadā kāyo mahābalaparākramaḥ ||
अथ शाम्भवी । (β1 and ε2)
शक्तिमध्ये मनः कृत्वा शक्तिं च मनमध्यगां ।
मनसा मन आलोक्य तद्ध्यायेत्परमं पदम् ॥
atha śāmbhavī / (β1 and ε2)
śaktimadhye manaḥ kṛtvā śaktiṃ ca manamadhyagāṃ /
manasā mana ālokya tad dhyāyet paramaṃ padam //
In the second verse quarter, mana for mano is for the metre.
śaktimadhye manaḥ kṛtvā manaś śaktes tu madhyamam |
manasā mana ālokya taṃ dhyāyet paramaṃ padaṃ ||
madhyamam ] madhyagaṃ 4340
taṃ dhyāyet ] tad dhyāyet 4340
śaktimadhyo manaḥ kṛtvā śaktiṃ ca svāntamadhyagāṃ |
manasā mana ālokya tad dhyāyet paramaṃ padam ||
खमध्ये कुरु चात्मानम् आत्ममध्ये च खं कुरु ।
सर्वं च खमयं कृत्वा न किंचिदपि चिन्तयेत् ॥
khamadhye kuru cātmānam ātmamadhye ca khaṃ kuru /
sarvaṃ ca khamayaṃ kṛtvā na kiṃcid api cintayet //
khamadhye kuru cātmānam ātmamadhye ca khaṃ kuru |
ātmānaṃ khamayaṃ kṛtvā na kiṃ cid api cintayet ||
khamadhye kuru cātmānam ātmamadhye ca khaṃ kuru |
sarvaṃ ca khamayaṃ kṛtvā na kiṃ cid api cintayet ||
अन्तःशून्यो बहिःशून्यः शून्यकुम्भ इवाम्बरे ।
अन्तःपूर्णो बहिःपूर्णः पूर्णकुम्भ इवार्णवे ॥
antaḥśūnyo bahiḥśūnyaḥ śūnyakumbha ivāmbare /
antaḥpūrṇo bahiḥpūrṇaḥ pūrṇakumbha ivārṇave //
antaḥśūnyo bahiḥśūnyaḥ śūnyakumbha ivāmbare |
antaḥpūrṇo bahiḥpūrṇaḥ pūrṇakumbha ivārṇave ||
antaḥśūnyo bahiḥśūnyaḥ śūnyakumbha ivāmbare |
antaḥpūrṇo bahiḥpūrṇaḥ pūrnakumbha ivārṇave ||
antaḥpūrṇo bahiḥpūrṇaḥ pūrṇakumbha ivāmbhasi |
antaḥśūnyaṃ bahiḥśūnyaṃ śūnyakumbha ivāmbare ||
बाह्यचिन्ता न कर्तव्या तथैवान्तरचिन्तनम् ।
सर्वचिन्तां परित्यज्य न किंचिदपि चिन्तयेत् ॥
bāhyacintā na kartavyā tathaivāntaracintanam /
sarvacintāṃ parityajya na kiṃcid api cintayet //
bāhyacintā na kartavyā tathaivāntaracintanam |
sarvacintāṃ parityajya na kiñcid api cintayet ||
संकल्पमात्रकलनैव जगत्समग्रं
संकल्पमात्रकलना हि मनोविलासः ।
संकल्पमात्रमतमुत्सृज निर्विकल्पं
आश्रित्य निश्चयमवाप्नुहि राम शान्तिम् ॥
saṃkalpamātrakalanaiva jagat samagraṃ
saṃkalpamātrakalanā hi manovilāsaḥ /
saṃkalpamātramatam utsṛja nirvikalpaṃ
āśritya niścayam avāpnuhi rāma śāntim //
saṃkalpajālakalanaiva jagat samagraṃ
saṃkalpajālakalanāt tu manovilāsaḥ |
saṃkalpamātram alam utsṛja nirvikalpam
āśritya niścayam avāpnuhi rāma śāntim ||
कर्पूरमनले यद्वत् सैन्धवं सलिले यथा ।
तथा संधीयमानं च मनस्तत्त्वे विलीयते ॥
karpūram anale yadvat saindhavaṃ salile yathā /
tathā saṃdhīyamānaṃ ca manas tattve vilīyate //
karpūram anale yadvat saindhavaṃ salile yathā |
tathā sandhīyamānaṃ hi manas tatraiva līyate||
ज्ञेयं सर्वं प्रतीतं च तज्ज्ञानं मन उच्यते ।
ज्ञानं ज्ञेयं समं नष्टं नान्यः पन्था द्वितीयकः ॥
jñeyaṃ sarvaṃ pratītaṃ ca tajjñānaṃ mana ucyate /
jñānaṃ jñeyaṃ samaṃ naṣṭaṃ nānyaḥ panthā dvitīyakaḥ //
jñeyaṃ sarvapratītaṃ ca tajjñānaṃ mana ucyate |
jñānaṃ jñeyaṃ samaṃ naṣṭaṃ nānyaḥ panthā dvitīyakaḥ ||
मनोदृश्यमिदं सर्वं यत्किंचित्सचराचरं ।
मनसोऽप्युन्मनीभावे द्वैताभावं प्रचक्षते ॥
manodṛśyam idaṃ sarvaṃ yat kiṃcit sacarācaraṃ /
manaso’py unmanībhāve dvaitābhāvaṃ pracakṣate //
manodṛśyam idaṃ dvaitaṃ yat kiṃ cit sacarācaram |
manaso hy amanībhāve dvaitaṃ naivopalabhyate ||
manodṛśyam idaṃ sarvaṃ yat kim cit sacarācaram |
manaso hy unmanībhāve ’dvaitabhāvaṃ pracakṣate ||
manodṛśyam idaṃ sarvaṃ yat kiṃ cit sacarācaram |
manasas tūnmanībhāvo ’dvaitābhāvaṃ pracakṣate ||
ज्ञेयवस्तुपरित्यागाद् विलयं याति मानसम् ।
मानसे विलयं याते कैवल्यमवशिष्यते ॥
jñeyavastuparityāgād vilayaṃ yāti mānasam /
mānase vilayaṃ yāte kaivalyam avaśiṣyate //
jñeyavastuparityāgād vilayaṃ yāti mānasaḥ |
mānase vilayaṃ yāte kaivalyam upajāyate ||
लयो लय इति प्राहुः कीदृशं लयलक्षणम् ।
अपुनर्वासनोत्थानाल्लयो विषयविस्मृतिः ॥*
layo laya iti prāhuḥ kīdṛśaṃ layalakṣaṇam /
apunarvāsanotthānāl layo viṣayavismṛtiḥ //*
This verse may have been inspired by the Mokṣopāya (e.g.~1.2.2).
layo laya iti prāhuḥ kīdṛśaṃ layalakṣaṇam |
apunarbhavasaṃsthānaṃ layo viṣayavismṛtiḥ ||
śrīdattaḥ |
layo laya iti prāhur īdṛśaṃ lakṣaṇaṃ sphuṭam |
tatra sarvasamādhāne layo viṣayavismṛtiḥ ||
एवं नानाविधोपायाः सम्यक्स्वानुभवान्विताः ।
समाधिमार्गाः कथिताः पूर्वाचार्यैर्महात्मभिः ॥
evaṃ nānāvidhopāyāḥ samyak svānubhavānvitāḥ /
samādhimārgāḥ kathitāḥ pūrvācāryair mahātmabhiḥ //
अथ विश्रान्तिः । (ε2 and ε3) ओर्: इति विश्रान्तिः । (β1 and β2)
सुषुम्णायै कुण्डलिन्यै सुधायै चन्द्रजन्मने ।
मनोन्मन्यै नमस्तुभ्यं महाशक्तिचिदात्मने ॥
atha viśrāntiḥ / (ε2 and ε3) or: iti viśrāntiḥ / (β1 and β2)
suṣumṇāyai kuṇḍalinyai sudhāyai candrajanmane /
manonmanyai namas tubhyaṃ mahāśakticidātmane //
अशक्यतत्त्वबोधानां मूढानामपि संमतम् ।
प्रोक्तं गोरक्षनाथेन नादोपासनमुच्यते ॥
aśakyatattvabodhānāṃ mūḍhānām api saṃmatam /
proktaṃ gorakṣanāthena nādopāsanam ucyate //
श्रीआदिनाथेन सपादकोटि-
लयप्रकाराः कथिता जयन्ति ।
नादानुसंधानकमेकमेव
मन्यामहे मान्यतमं लयानाम् ॥
śrīādināthena sapādakoṭi-
layaprakārāḥ kathitā jayanti /
nādānusaṃdhānakam ekam eva
manyāmahe mānyatamaṃ layānām //
sadā śivoktāni sapādalakṣa-
layāvadhānāni lasantu loke |
nādānusandhānasamādhim ekaṃ
manyāmahe mānyatamaṃ layānām ||
lasantu ] Sa : lasanti Pa : vasanti Ad W Eb Ec Ed : ca santi Ea : hi sarva Ma
loke ] Ma W Eall : bhūmau Ad Pa Sa
śrīādināthena sapādakoṭi-
layaprakārāḥ kathitā jayanti |
nādānusandhānakam eva kāryam
manyāmahe nānyatamaṃ layānām ||
śrīādināthena sapādakoṭi-
layaprakārāḥ kathitā jayantu |
nādānusandhānakam eva kāryaṃ
manyāmahe mānyatamaṃ layānām ||
मुक्तासनस्थितो योगी मुद्रां संधाय शांभवीम् । (Α, β2, Δ and χ)
शृणुयाद्दक्षिणे कर्णे नादमन्तःस्थमेकधीः ॥ (Α, β1, β2, Γ, Δ and χ)
muktāsanasthito yogī mudrāṃ saṃdhāya śāṃbhavīm / (Α, β2, Δ and χ)
śṛṇuyād dakṣiṇe karṇe nādam antaḥstham ekadhīḥ // (Α, β1, β2, Γ, Δ and χ)
We read this verse here rather than at 4.50 because it follows on from the Śāmbhavī section and is unnecessary and repetitive at 4.50 because 4.51-52 explain the practice.
muktāsanasthito yogī mudrāṃ sandhāya śāṃbhavīm |
śṛṇuyād dakṣiṇe karṇe nādam antargataṃ sadā ||
muktāsanasthito yogī mudrāṃ saṃdhāya śāṃbhavīṃ [|]
śṛṇuyād dakṣiṇe karṇe nādam ekāṃtike sudhīḥ [||]
dakṣiṇe karṇe ] B220, dakṣirṇe 2244
ekāṃtike ] 2244, ekāṃtate B220
काष्ठे प्रवर्तितो वह्निः काष्ठेन सह शाम्यति ।
नादे प्रवर्तितं चित्तं नादेन सह लीयते ॥
kāṣṭhe pravartito vahniḥ kāṣṭhena saha śāmyati /
nāde pravartitaṃ cittaṃ nādena saha līyate //
kāṣṭhe pravartito vahniḥ kāṣṭhena saha śāmyati |
nāde pravartitaṃ cittaṃ nādena saha līyate ||
kāṣṭhe pravartito vahniḥ kāṣṭhena saha līyate |
nāde pravartitaṃ cittaṃ nādena saha śāmyati ||
kāṣṭhaiḥ pravartito vahniḥ kāṣṭhena saha śāmyati |
nāde pravartitaṃ cittaṃ nādena saha līyate ||
विस्मृत्य सकलं बाह्यं नादे दुग्धाम्बुवन्मनः ।
एकीभूयाथ सहसा चिदाकाशे विलीयते ॥
vismṛtya sakalaṃ bāhyaṃ nāde dugdhāmbuvan manaḥ /
ekībhūyātha sahasā cidākāśe vilīyate //
vismṛtya sakalaṃ bāhyaṃ nāde dugdhāmbuvan naraḥ |
ekībhūyātha sahasā cidākāśe vilīyate ||
vismṛtya sakalaṃ bāhyaṃ nāde dagdhāṃbuvan manaḥ |
ekībhūtaṃ tanyā cittaṃ rājayogābhidānakaṃ ||
vismṛtya sakalaṃ bāhyaṃ nāde dugdhāṃbuvan manaḥ |
ekībhūyātha sahasā cidākāśe vilīyate ||
vismṛtya sakalaṃ bāhyaṃ nāde dugdhāmbuvan manaḥ |
ekībhūyātha sahasā cidākāśe vilīyate ||
औदासीन्यपरो भूत्वा सदाभ्यासेन संयमी ।
उन्मनीकरणं सद्यो नादमेवावधारयेत् ॥
audāsīnyaparo bhūtvā sadābhyāsena saṃyamī /
unmanīkaraṇaṃ sadyo nādam evāvadhārayet //
audāsīnyaparo bhūtvā sadābhyāsena saṃyamī |
unmanīkaraṇaṃ sadyo nādam evāvadhārayet ||
audāsīnyaparo bhūtvā sadābhyāsena saṃyamī |
unmanīkārakaṃ sadyo nādam eva sadābhyaset ||
udāsīnas tato bhūtvā sadābhyāsena saṃyamī |
unmanīkārakaṃ sadyo nādam evāvadhārayet ||
audāsīnyaparo bhūtvā sadābhyāsena samyamī |
unmanīkaraṇam sadyo nādam evānu [...] yet ||
कीदृशमौदासीन्यम् ।
शीते काले चौपटी वा पटी वा
पथ्याहारे गोपयो वा पयो वा ।
भोज्ये भिक्षावृन्दमारण्यकन्दं
पाणी द्रोणी कापि वा भोज्यपात्रे ॥
kīdṛśam audāsīnyam /
śīte kāle caupaṭī vā paṭī vā
pathyāhāre gopayo vā payo vā /
bhojye bhikṣāvṛndam āraṇyakandaṃ
pāṇī droṇī kāpi vā bhojyapātre //
On caupaṭī in the first pāda, McGregor (1994:s.v.) and Callewaert (2009:s.v.) in their dictionaries of modern and old Hindi both give the meaning "open all around" for caupaṭ. McGregor derives it from Sanskrit catuṣpaṭṭa. Molesworth (1857:s.v.) in his Marathi dictionary gives "A quadrangular expanse or space, esp. as open and extended: also a broad and level tract" for caupaṭṭā
kīdṛśaṃ caudāsīnyam—
śīte kāle kāpaṭī vā paṭī vā pathyāhāre gopayo vā payo vā |
bhakṣye bhikṣāvṛndam āraṇyakandam pāṇau droṇī kā parā bhojapātram ||
śīte kāle dvau paṭī vā paṭī vā pathyāhāre gopayo vā payo vā |
bhakṣye bhojye vṛttim āraṇyakaṃ vā pāṇī droṇī ko ’pi vā bhakṣyapātre ||
audāsīnyaṃ śītakāle paṭī vā pathyāhāro gopayo vā payo vā |
bhojyaṃ bhikṣāvṛndam āraṇyakandaṃ pāṇī droṇī kāpi vā bhojyapātram ||
सर्वचिन्तां समुत्सृज्य सर्वचेष्टां च सर्वदा ।
नाद एवानुसंधानान्नादे चित्तं विलीयते ॥
sarvacintāṃ samutsṛjya sarvaceṣṭāṃ ca sarvadā /
nāda evānusaṃdhānān nāde cittaṃ vilīyate //
The occurrence of two finite verbs in the second hemistich of some witnesses (groups 2 and 3) is infelicitous and perhaps points to an error that arose from the nādam evānusandhānān reading in the group one?? mss. It seems the original reading was probably nāda evānusandhānāt, and the -m- crept in as a hiatus break.
sarvacintāṃ samutsṛjya sarvaceṣṭāṃ ca sarvadā |
nādam evānusandhānān nāde cittaṃ vilīyate ||
sarvaciṃtā[ṃ] parityajya sarvakāle ca sarvadā |
nādam evānusandhatte nāde cittaṃ vilīyate ||
sarvacintāṃ samutsṛjya sarvaceṣṭāvivarjitaḥ |
nādam evānusaṃdadhyān nāde cittaṃ vilīyate ||
आरम्भश्च घटश्चैव तथा परिचयस्तथा ।
निष्पत्तिः सर्वयोगेषु योगावस्था भवन्ति ताः ॥
ārambhaś ca ghaṭaś caiva tathā paricayas tathā /
niṣpattiḥ sarvayogeṣu yogāvasthā bhavanti tāḥ //
ārambhaś ca ghaṭaś caiva paricayaḥ prakīrtitaḥ |
niṣpattiḥ sarvayogeṣu cetasas tasya bhūmikāḥ ||
paricaryaḥ prakīrtitaḥ Ga : tathā paricaya samṛtaḥ Ae (unmetr.) : pracayaś ca tritīyakaḥ Ad Gb : pracayaś ca tṛtīryakaḥ Ba : pracayaṃ ca tritīyakaṃ Ta
cetasas tasya bhūmikāḥ ] $beta $ : yogāvasthā caturvidhā $theta $
ārambhaś ca ghaṭaś caiva paricayas tṛtīyakaḥ |
niṣpannaḥ sarvaśeṣeṣu yogāvasthāḥ prakīrtitāḥ ||
ārambhaś ca ghaṭaś caiva tathā paricayas tathā |
niṣpattiḥ sarvayogeṣu yogāvasthā bhavanti tāḥ ||
īśvaraprokte—
ārambhaś ca ghaṭaś caiva tathā paricayo ’pi ca |
niṣpattiḥ sarvayogeṣu yogāvasthā bhavanti tāḥ ||
ārambhaś ca ghaṭaś caiva tathā paricayas tathā |
niṣpattiḥ sarvayogeṣu yogāvasthā bhavanti tāḥ ||
तत्र आरम्भः ।
ब्रह्मग्रन्थेर्भवेद्भेदादानन्दः शून्यसंभवः ।
विचित्रक्वणको देहेऽनाहतः श्रूयते ध्वनिः ॥
tatra ārambhaḥ /
brahmagranther bhaved bhedād ānandaḥ śūnyasaṃbhavaḥ /
vicitrakvaṇako dehe’nāhataḥ śrūyate dhvaniḥ //
Brahmānanda understands the voids associated with each stage to be places in the body.
brahmagranthes tathā bhedād ānandaḥ śūnyasambhavaḥ |
vicitrakvaṇako dehe ’nāhataḥ śrūyate dhvaniḥ ||
°granthes tathā ] Ga : °granthes tato Ae : °granther bhaved Ba Gb Ta : °granthir bhaved Ad
bhedād ] Ga : bhedāt Ae : vedhād Ba Gb Ta : vedhā Ad
brahmagranthir bhaved bhinna ānandaḥ śūnyasaṃbhavaḥ |
vicitrakṣaṇiko deho ’nāhataḥ śrūyate dhvaniḥ ||
brahmarandhre bhaved bhedo yo nādaḥ sūryasaṃbhavaḥ |
vicitrakvaṇado dehe ’nāhataḥ śrūyate dhvaniḥ ||
yo nādaḥ ] ānandaḥ v.l.
vicitrakvaṇado ] vicitrakvaṇako v.l.
tatra ārambhaḥ –
brahmagranthir bhaved bhinnād ānandaḥ śūnyasambhavaḥ |
vicitrakvaṇiko dehe ’nāhataḥ śrūyate dhvaniḥ ||
दिव्यदेहश्च तेजस्वी दिव्यगन्धस्त्वरोगवान् ।
संपूर्णहृदयः शून्ये त्वारम्भे योगवान्भवेत् ॥
divyadehaś ca tejasvī divyagandhas tv arogavān /
saṃpūrṇahṛdayaḥ śūnye tv ārambhe yogavān bhavet //
divyadehaś ca tejasvī divyagandho hy arogavān |
saṃpūrṇahṛdaye śūnye tv ārambhe yogavān bhavet ||
divyadehaḥ sutejasvī divyagandhas tv arogavān |
saṃpūrṇahṛdaye śūnye tv ārambhe yogavān bhavet ||
tejasvī divyagandhaś ca divyadeho ’py arogavān |
sampūrṇahṛdaye śūnye tv ārambhe yogavān bhavet ||
अथ घटावस्था ।
द्वितीयायां घटीकृत्य वायुर्भवति मध्यगः ।
दृढासनो भवेद्योगी ज्ञानी देवसमस्तदा ॥
atha ghaṭāvasthā /
dvitīyāyāṃ ghaṭīkṛtya vāyur bhavati madhyagaḥ /
dṛḍhāsano bhaved yogī jñānī devasamas tadā //
The name of the second stage, ghaṭa (and the related form ghaṭīkṛtya found in the first pāda of this verse) can be understood in at least three ways, as union, activation or pot (the latter with an alchemical connotation, on which see 3.12 and Mallinson and Szanto 2021:20–23). In the Dattātreyayogaśāstra (verse 90) its primary meaning is union and the united pairs are prāṇa and apāna, jīvātman and paramātman, and nāda and bindu.
dvitīye saṅghaṭīkṛtya vāyur bhavati madhyagaḥ |
dṛḍhāsano bhaved yogī jñānī devasamas tadā ||
dvitīye saṅ- ] $beta $ : dvitīyāyāṃ $theta $
dvitīyāyāṃ ghaṭīkṛtya vāyur bhavati madhyagaḥ |
dṛḍhāsano bhaved yogī kāmadevasamas tadā ||
atha ghaṭāvasthā –
dvitīyāyāṃ ghaṭīṃ kṛtvā vāyur bhavati madhyagaḥ |
dṛḍhāsano bhaved yogī jñānī devasamas tathā ||
विष्णुग्रन्थेस्तदा भेदात् परमानन्दसूचकः ।
अतिशून्ये विमर्दश्च भेरीशब्दस्तदा भवेत् ॥
viṣṇugranthes tadā bhedāt paramānandasūcakaḥ /
atiśūnye vimardaś ca bherīśabdas tadā bhavet //
V3?? and HR have the reading of the Amaraugha (atiśūnye vimardaś ca), which was adapted from the Buddhist concept of a series of four void-like meditative states and moments. In the Amaraugha, two of the moments were left out and two were reinterpreted (as in the case of vimarda, which seems to have be retained with the more general sense of a pounding sound). See Birch 2019: 968–969; Mallinson and Szanto 2021:19–20.
viṣṇugranthes tato bhedāt paramānandasūcakaḥ |
atiśūnye vimardaś ca bherīśabdas tato bhavet ||
atiśūnye ] Ad Gb Ta : atiśūnyo $beta $ Ba
tato ] $beta $ : tathā Ba : tadā Ad Gb Ta
viṣṇugranthir yadā bhinnaḥ paramānandasūcakaḥ |
atiśūnyavibhedaś ca bherīśabdas tadā bhavet ||
viṣṇugranthes tathā bhedaḥ paramānandasūcakaḥ |
atiśūnye vimardaś ca bherīśabdas tathā bhavet ||
viṣṇugranthir yadā bhinnā paramānandasūcikā |
atiśūnyavibhedaś ca bherīśabdas tathā bhavet ||
अथ परिचयावस्था ।
तृतीयायां ततो भित्त्वा विहायोमर्दलध्वनिः ।
महाशून्यं तथा याति सर्वसिद्धिसमाश्रयम् ॥
atha paricayāvasthā /
tṛtīyāyāṃ tato bhittvā vihāyomardaladhvaniḥ /
mahāśūnyaṃ tathā yāti sarvasiddhisamāśrayam //
Here the object of piercing is unspecified, but it is likely to refer to the knot of Viṣṇu mentioned in the previous verse.
tṛtīyāyāṃ tato bhittvā ninādo mardaladhvaniḥ |
mahāśūnyaṃ tato jātaṃ sarvasiddhisamāśrayam ||
bhittvā ninādo ] Ga : bhītvādinādau Ae : bhittvā vipāko Ba Ad Gb Ta
tṛtīyāyāṃ tato bhitvā vimāyo mardaladhvaniḥ |
mahāśūnyaṃ tathā yāti sarvasiddhisamāśrayam ||
tṛtīyāyāṃ tato nityaṃ āviṣkāro marddladhvaniḥ |
mahāśūnyaṃ tato yāti sarvasiddhisamāśrayaḥ ||
atha paricayāvasthā ||
tṛtīyāyāṃ tato jitvā sahajānandasambhavaḥ |
doṣaduḥkhajarāmṛtyuḥ kṣudhānidrāvivarjitaḥ ||
चित्तानन्दं ततो जित्वा सहजानन्दसंभवः ।
दोषदुःखजरामृत्युक्षुधानिद्राविवर्जितः ॥
cittānandaṃ tato jitvā sahajānandasaṃbhavaḥ /
doṣaduḥkhajarāmṛtyukṣudhānidrāvivarjitaḥ //
22a’s cittānāndaṃ tato jitvā is perhaps a patch for the somewhat obscure paramānandarocitvāt in the source text.
paramānandarocitvāt sahajānandasambhavaḥ |
doṣaduḥkhajarāmṛtyukṣudhānidrāvivarjitaḥ ||
40a paramānanda° ] $beta $; cittānandaṃ $theta $ • °rocitvāt ] $beta $; tato jitvā $theta $
cittānandaṃ tato jitvā sahajānandasaṃbhavaḥ |
doṣaduḥkhakṣudhānidrājarāmṛtyuvivarjitaḥ ||
cidānandaṃ tato jitvā paramānandasaṃbhavaḥ |
doṣaduḥkhajarāmṛtyukṣudhānidrāvivarjitaḥ ||
tṛtīyāyāṃ tato jitvā sahajānandasambhavaḥ |
doṣaduḥkhajarāmṛtyuḥ kṣudhānidrāvivarjitaḥ ||
अथ निष्पत्त्यवस्था ।*
रुद्रग्रन्थिं ततो भित्त्वा सर्वपीठगतोऽनिलः ।
निष्पत्तौ वैणवः शब्दः क्वणद्वीणाक्वणो भवेत् ॥
atha niṣpattyavasthā /*
rudragranthiṃ tato bhittvā sarvapīṭhagato’nilaḥ /
niṣpattau vaiṇavaḥ śabdaḥ kvaṇadvīṇākvaṇo bhavet //
The reading we have adopted for the fourth pāda, kvaṇadvīṇākvaṇo, Birch’s conjecture in his edition of the Amaraugha is supported by several testimonia and Amṛtasiddhi 31.2, where it is said that the sound of a vīṇā arises in the fourth stage. The reading śarva, i.e.~Śiva, found in some testimonia and the Jyotsnā makes good sense, but in its description of this stage, the Amṛtasiddhi, which is the ultimate source of this passage has sarva (30.1).
rudragranthiṃ tato bhittvā sarvapīṭhagato ’nilaḥ |
niṣpanno vaiṇavaḥ śabdaḥ kvaṇadvīṇākvaṇo bhavet ||
sarva° ] Ae : sarvaṃ Ga : sattva° $theta $
niṣpanno ] Ga : niṣpannā Ae : niṣpattau Ad Gb T : ++ttau Ba
kvaṇadvīṇākvaṇo ] conj. : kvaṇañ cailakvaṇo S1 : kvaṇañ caiva kvaṇo S2 : kvaṇadvitakvaṇo L3 : kvaṇanvitakvaṇo L2 : kvaṇanvītakva+ L4 : kvaṇatbhakvaṇo L1
rudragranthiṃ tato bhitvā sarvapīṭhagato ’nilaḥ |
niṣṭhāto vaiṇavaḥ śabdaḥ kvaṇadvīṇākvaṇo bhavet ||
rudragranthiṃ tato bhitvā śarvapīṭhagato ’nilaḥ |
niṣpattau vaiṇavaḥ śabdaḥ kvanadvīṇākvaṇo bhavet ||
atha niṣpattiḥ –
rudragranthiṃ tato bhitvā śarvapīṭhagato’nalaḥ |
niṣpanno vaiṇavaḥ śabdo kvaṇadvīṇākvaṇo bhavet ||
एकीभूतं तदा चित्तं राजयोगाभिधायकम् ।
सृष्टिसंहारकर्तासौ योगीश्वरसमो भवेत् ॥
ekībhūtaṃ tadā cittaṃ rājayogābhidhāyakam /
sṛṣṭisaṃhārakartāsau yogīśvarasamo bhavet //
The bahuvrīhi rājayogābhidhānakaṃ means that the mind is called rājayoga, which is very unusual. Perhaps °bhidhāyakaṃ is better, meaning "expresses rājayoga", but it is only in J7 and V3.
ekībhūtaṃ tadā cittaṃ rājayogābhidhānakam |
sṛṣṭisaṃhārakartāsau yogīśvarasamo bhavet ||+
rājayogābhidhānakam ] Ga Ba Ad Gb Ed ; rājayogo ’bhidhīyate Ae
ekībhūtaṃ tathā cittaṃ rājayogābhidhāyakam |
sṛṣṭisaṃhārakartāsau yogīśvarasamo bhavet ||
राजयोगपदप्राप्तौ सुखोपायोऽल्पचेतसाम् ।
सद्यः प्रत्ययसंधायी जायते नादजो लयः ॥ (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3, η2 and χ)
rājayogapadaprāptau sukhopāyo’lpacetasām /
sadyaḥ pratyayasaṃdhāyī jāyate nādajo layaḥ // (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3, η2 and χ)
See 4.32.
अस्तु वा मास्तु वा मुक्तिरत्रैवाखण्डितं महत् ।
लयामृतमयं सौख्यं राजयोगादवाप्यते ॥
astu vā māstu vā muktir atraivākhaṇḍitaṃ mahat /
layāmṛtamayaṃ saukhyaṃ rājayogād avāpyate //
astu vā māstu vā siddhir atraivākhaṇḍitaṃ sukham |
astu vā māstu vā muktir atraivākhaṇḍitaṃ mahat |
layāmṛtaṃ laye saukhyaṃ rājayogād avāpyate ||
astu vā māstu vā muktir atraivākhaṇḍitaṃ mahat |
layāmṛtamayaṃ saukhyaṃ rājayogād avāpyate ||
हठं विना राजयोगो राजयोगं विना हठः ।
न सिध्यति ततो युग्मम् आ निष्पत्तेः समभ्यसेत् ॥*
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ /
na sidhyati tato yugmam ā niṣpatteḥ samabhyaset //*
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ |
na sidhyati tato yugmam āniṣpatteḥ samabhyaset |
tasmāt pravartate yogī haṭhe sadgurumārgataḥ ||
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogaṃ rājayogaṃ vinā haṭham |
ye vai caranti tān manye prayāsaphalavarjitān iti ||
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ |
vyāptiḥ syād avinābhūtā śrīrājahaṭhayogayoḥ ||
haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogo rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaḥ |
na sidhyati tato yugmam āniṣpatteḥ samabhyaset ||
राजयोगमजानन्तः केवलं हठकर्मठाः ।
ये तु तान्कर्षकान्मन्ये प्रयासफलवर्जितान् ॥
rājayogam ajānantaḥ kevalaṃ haṭhakarmaṭhāḥ /
ye tu tān karṣakān manye prayāsaphalavarjitān //
[Aल्त्] हठं विना राजयोगं राजयोगं विना हठं ।
ये वै चरन्ति तामन्ये प्रयासफलवर्जितान् ॥ (Γ and Δ) *
[Alt] haṭhaṃ vinā rājayogaṃ rājayogaṃ vinā haṭhaṃ /
ye vai caranti tāmanye prayāsaphalavarjitān // (Γ and Δ) *
तत्त्वं बीजं हठः क्षेत्रमौदासीन्यं जलं त्रिभिः ।
उन्मनीकल्पलतिका सद्य एवोद्भविष्यति ॥
tattvaṃ bījaṃ haṭhaḥ kṣetram audāsīnyaṃ jalaṃ tribhiḥ /
unmanīkalpalatikā sadya evodbhaviṣyati //
The meaning of tattva here is unclear. It is a synonym for samādhi and unmanī in the next verses. Brahmānanda says that tattva means citta, which works well: the mind grows to the beyond-mind state. The reading smṛtam is also possible and well-attested (groups 2 and 3).
nādo bījaṃ haṭhaḥ kṣetram audāsīnyaṃ jalaṃ smṛtam |
unmanīkalpalatikā sadya evodbhaviṣyati ||
राजयोगः समाधिश्च उन्मनी च मनोन्मनी ।
अमरौघोऽपि चाद्वैतं निरालम्बं निरञ्जनम् ॥
rājayogaḥ samādhiś ca unmanī ca manonmanī /
amaraugho’pi cādvaitaṃ nirālambaṃ nirañjanam //
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
rājayogaḥ samādhiś ca unmanī ca manonmanī |
amaraughaughacāndrīva nirālambaṃ nirañjanam ||
haṭhapradīpikāyāṃ |
rājayogas samādhiś cāpy unmanī ca manonmanī |
amaraugho pi cādvaitaṃ nirālambaṃ niraṃjanaṃ ||
rājayogaḥ samādhiś conmanī ca manonmanī |
śivayogo layas tatvaṃ śūnyāśūnyaṃ nirañjanam |
rājayogaḥ samādhiśca unmanī ca manonmanī |
amaraughālayas tatra śūnyāc chūnya paraṃ padam ||
अमनस्को लयस्तत्त्वं शून्याशून्यं परं पदम् ।
जीवन्मुक्तिश्च सहजं तुर्यं चेत्येकवाचकाः ॥
amanasko layas tattvaṃ śūnyāśūnyaṃ paraṃ padam /
jīvanmuktiś ca sahajaṃ turyaṃ cety ekavācakāḥ //
amanasko layaś caiva śūnyāśūnyaṃ parāparam |
jīvanmuktiś ca sahajaṃ turyaṃ cety ekavācakam iti ||
ama[na]sko layas tatvaṃ śūnyāśūnyaparaṃ padaṃ |
jīvanmuktiś ca sahajaṃ turyaṃ cety ekavācakaṃ ||
amanaskaṃ yathā caitan nirālambaṃ nirañjanam |
jīvanmuktiś ca sahajam ity adir hy ekavācakam ||
उन्मन्यवाप्तये शीघ्रं मार्गौ द्वौ मम संमतौ ।
तत्त्वं परमसौख्यं वा नादोपासनमेव च ॥
unmanyavāptaye śīghraṃ mārgau dvau mama saṃmatau /
tattvaṃ paramasaukhyaṃ vā nādopāsanam eva ca //
unmanyavāptaye śīghraṃ dvau mārgau mama saṃmatau |
tatvaṃ paramasaukhyaṃ vā nādopāsanam eva vā ||
unmanyavāptaye śīghraṃ mārgau dvau mama sammatau |
tatvaṃ paramasākhyaṃ vā nādopāsanam eva vā ||
सौख्यप्रविष्टचित्तानां मूढानामपि संमतम् ।
सद्यआनन्दसंधायी जायते नादजो लयः ॥
saukhyapraviṣṭacittānāṃ mūḍhānām api saṃmatam /
sadyaānandasaṃdhāyī jāyate nādajo layaḥ //
saukhyapraviṣṭacittānāṃ mūḍhānām api saṃmatam |
sadya ānandasandhāyī jāyate nādajo layaḥ ||
sāṅkhye praviṣṭacittānāṃ mūḍhānām api saṃmateḥ |
tasya svānaṃdasa [...] ryo jāyate nādajo layaḥ ||
एकं सृष्टिमयं बीजं एका मुद्रा तु खेचरी ।
एको देवो निरालम्ब एकावस्था मनोन्मनी ॥ (ε3, ε4 and η2)
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījaṃ ekā mudrā tu khecarī /
eko devo nirālamba ekāvasthā manonmanī // (ε3, ε4 and η2)
See 3.48.
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījaṃ yadvīryaṃ sarvamantragam |
ekā mudrā khecarī ca mudraughaḥ prāṇito yayā ||
yad āgamaḥ –
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījam ekā mudrā ca khecarī |
dvāvekaṃ yo vijānāti sa vai pūjyaḥ kulāgame ||
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ [sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījam iti mantravīryarūpam aham iti bījam | mudrā parabhairavīyātmā |] bījam ekā mudrā ca khecarī |
dvāv etau yasya jāyete so’tiśāntapade sthitaḥ ||
ekaṃ sṛṣṭimayaṃ bījam ekā mudrā ca khecarī |
eko devo nirālambaḥ ekāvasthā manonmanī||
śaṅkhadundubhinādaṃ ca na śruṇoti kadācana || 52 ||
kāṣṭhavajjñāyate deha unmanyāvasthayā dhruvam |
शङ्खदुन्दुभिनादं च न शृणोति कदाचन ।
काष्ठवज्जायते देह उन्मन्यावस्थया ध्रुवम् ॥ (β1 β2 βω, ε3, ε4, η2 and χ)
śaṅkhadundubhinādaṃ ca na śṛṇoti kadācana /
kāṣṭhavaj jāyate deha unmanyāvasthayā dhruvam // (β1 β2 βω, ε3, ε4, η2 and χ)
śaṅkhadundubhinādena na śṛṇoti kadācana |
kāṣṭava[j] jñāyate yogī notpattyā vai prajāyate ||
सर्वावस्थाविनिर्मुक्तः सर्वचिन्ताविवर्जितः ।
मृतवत्तिष्ठते योगी स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥ (β1 β2 βω, ε3, ε4, η2 and χ)
sarvāvasthāvinirmuktaḥ sarvacintāvivarjitaḥ /
mṛtavat tiṣṭhate yogī sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ // (β1 β2 βω, ε3, ε4, η2 and χ)
sarvāvasthāvinirmuktaḥ sarvacintāvivarjitaḥ || 51 ||
mṛtavat tiṣṭhate yogī sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ |
sarvāvasthāvinirmuktaḥ sarvacintāvivarjitaḥ |
mṛtavattiṣṭhate yogī sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ ||
न विजानाति शीतोष्णं न दुःखं न सुखं तथा ।
न मानं नापमानं च योगी युक्तः समाधिना ॥ (β1 β2 βω, ε3, ε4 and χ)
na vijānāti śītoṣṇaṃ na duḥkhaṃ na sukhaṃ tathā /
na mānaṃ nāpamānaṃ ca yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā // (β1 β2 βω, ε3, ε4 and χ)
nābhijānāti śītoṣṇaṃ na duḥkhaṃ na sukhaṃ tathā |
na mānaṃ nāpamānaṃ ca yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā ||
अवेध्यः सर्वशस्त्राणामवध्यः सर्वदेहिनाम् ।
अग्राह्यो मन्त्रतन्त्राणां योगी युक्तः समाधिना ॥ (ε3, ε4, η2 and χ)
avedhyaḥ sarvaśastrāṇām avadhyaḥ sarvadehinām /
agrāhyo mantratantrāṇāṃ yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā // (ε3, ε4, η2 and χ)
abhedyaḥ sarvaśastrāṇām avadhyaḥ sarvadehinām |
agrāhyo mantratantrāṇāṃ yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā ||
न गन्धं न रसं रूपं न स्पर्शं न च निस्वनम् ।
नात्मानं न परं वेत्ति योगी युक्तः समाधिना ॥ (βω and χ)
na gandhaṃ na rasaṃ rūpaṃ na sparśaṃ na ca nisvanam /
nātmānaṃ na paraṃ vetti yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā // (βω and χ)
na gandhaṃ na rasaṃ rūpaṃ na ca sparśaṃ na nisvanam |
nātmānaṃ na paraṃ vetti yogī yuktaḥ samādhinā ||
चित्तं न सुप्तं नो जाग्रत् स्मृतिमन्न च नान्यथा ।
नास्तमेति न चोदेति यस्यासौ मुक्त एव सः ॥ (β1 β2 βω, ε3, ε4, η2 and χ)
cittaṃ na suptaṃ no jāgrat smṛtiman na ca nānyathā /
nāstam eti na codeti yasyāsau mukta eva saḥ // (β1 β2 βω, ε3, ε4, η2 and χ)
The first line is corrupt in the Gorakṣaśataka witnesses; its text has been constituted from the Haṭhapradīpikā.
cittaṃ na suptaṃ no jāgrat smṛtiman na ca nānyathā |
nāstam eti na codeti yasyāsau mukta eva sa ||
स्वस्थो जाग्रदवस्थायां सुप्तवद्योऽवतिष्ठते ।
निःस्वासोच्छ्वासहीनश्च निश्चितं मुक्त एव सः ॥ (β1 β2 βω, ε3, ε4 and χ)
svastho jāgradavasthāyāṃ suptavad yo’vatiṣṭhate /
niḥsvāsocchvāsahīnaś ca niścitaṃ mukta eva saḥ // (β1 β2 βω, ε3, ε4 and χ)
sadā jāgradavasthāyāṃ suptavad yo ’vatiṣṭhate |
niśvāsocchvāsahīnas ca niścitaṃ mukta eva saḥ ||
sadā jāgradavasthāyāṃ ] v.l.sadā jāgṛvadasthāyāṃ, sadā jāgrat apasthāyāṃ, sadā jāgradavasther ya, sa jāgras tadavasthāyāṃ, yadā jāgṛdavasthāyāṃ, yo jāgrad yad avasthāyāṃ, svapnajāgradavasthāyāṃ, suptajāgradavasthāyāṃ
svapnajāgradavasthāyāṃ suptavat yo ’avatiṣṭhate |
niśvāsocchvāsahīnaśca niścitaṃ mukta eva saḥ || 11 ||
svapnajāgradavasthāyāṃ suptavat yo ’vatiṣṭhate |
niśvāsocchvāsahīnaś ca niścitaṃ mukta eva saḥ ||64||
sadā jāgradavasthāyāṃ suptavad yo ‘vatiṣṭhate |
niśvāsocchvāsavihīnaś ca niścitaṃ mukta eva saḥ || 55.24 = AY 2.59
sadā jāgradavasthāyāṃ suptavada yo’vatiṣṭhate ||
niḥśvāsocchāsahīnaśca niścitaṃ mukta eva saḥ|
नादानुसंधानसमाधिभाजां
योगीश्वराणां हृदये प्ररूढम् ।
आनन्दमेकं वचसामवाच्यं
जानाति तं श्रीगुरुनाथ एव ॥
nādānusaṃdhānasamādhibhājāṃ
yogīśvarāṇāṃ hṛdaye prarūḍham /
ānandam ekaṃ vacasām avācyaṃ
jānāti taṃ śrīgurunātha eva //
nādānusandhānasamādhibhājāṃ yogīśvarāṇāṃ hṛdaye pragūḍham |
ānandamātraṃ vacasām avācyaṃ jānāti taṃ śrīgurunātha ekaḥ ||
ekaḥ ] Pa : eva Ad
nādānusandhānasamādhibhājāṃ yogīśvarāṇāṃ hṛdaye prarūḍhaṃ |
ānandam ekaṃ vacasām avācyaṃ jānāti tatvaṃ gurunātha eva ||
nādānusandhānasamādhibhājāṃ yogīśvarāṇāṃ hṛdaye prarūḍham |
ānandam ekaṃ vacaso ’py agamyaṃ jānāti taṃ śrīgurunātha eva ||
मुक्तासनस्थितो योगी मुद्रां संधाय शांभवीम् ।
शृणुयाद्दक्षिणे कर्णे नादमन्तर्गतं सदा ॥ (β1, βω, Γ, Δ, ε2, ε3 and η2)
muktāsanasthito yogī mudrāṃ saṃdhāya śāṃbhavīm /
śṛṇuyād dakṣiṇe karṇe nādam antargataṃ sadā // (β1, βω, Γ, Δ, ε2, ε3 and η2)
See 4.10.
muktāsanasthito yogī mudrāṃ sandhāya śāṃbhavīm |
śṛṇuyād dakṣiṇe karṇe nādam antargataṃ sadā ||
muktāsanasthito yogī mudrāṃ saṃdhāya śāṃbhavīṃ [|]
śṛṇuyād dakṣiṇe karṇe nādam ekāṃtike sudhīḥ [||]
dakṣiṇe karṇe ] B220, dakṣirṇe 2244
ekāṃtike ] 2244, ekāṃtate B220
siddhāsane sthito yogī mudrāṃ sandhāya vaiṣṇavīm |
śṛṇuyād dakṣiṇe karṇe nādam antargataṃ sadā ||
सर्वचिन्तां परित्यज्य सावधानेन चेतसा ।
नाद एवानुसंधेयो योगसाम्राज्यमिच्छता ॥*
sarvacintāṃ parityajya sāvadhānena cetasā /
nāda evānusaṃdheyo yogasāmrājyam icchatā //*
sarvacintāṃ parityajya sāvadhānena cetasā |
nādam evānusandhatte yogasāmrājyam icchatā ||
sarvacintāṃ parityajya sāvadhānena cetasā |
nāda evānusandheyaḥ yogasāmrājyasiddhaye ||
sarvacittaṃ parityajya sāvadhānena cetasā |
nāda evānusaṃdheyo yogasāmrājyam icchatā ||
कर्णौ पिधाय तूलेन यं शृणोति ध्वनिं मुनिः ।
तत्र चित्तं स्थिरी कुर्याद् यावत्स्थिरपदं व्रजेत् ॥
karṇau pidhāya tūlena yaṃ śṛṇoti dhvaniṃ muniḥ /
tatra cittaṃ sthirī kuryād yāvat sthirapadaṃ vrajet //
Several witnesses have hastābhyām or hastena here. Blocking the ears with the fingers in order to listen to the inner sounds is attested as early as the Svacchandatantra, in a practice called ṣaṇmukhīkaraṇa, in which the other openings of the head are also blocked with the fingers (Vasudeva 2004: 272 n.66). Śivasaṃhitā 5.36–46 teaches a similar practice. In the Haṭhayogasaṃhitā (p. 68), the practice of blocking the ears with the hands is stipulated for bhrāmarī kumbhaka.
karṇau pidhāya hastena yaḥ śṛṇoti dhvaniṃ muniḥ |
tāvac cittaṃ sthiraṃ kuryād yāvat sthirapadaṃ vrajet ||
karṇau pidhāya tūlena yaḥ śṛṇoti dhvaniṃ yamī |
tatra cittaṃ sthiraṃ kuryād yāvat sthirapadaṃ vrajet ||
karṇau pidhāya hastābhyāṃ yaś śṛṇoti dhvaniṃ muniḥ |
tatra cittaṃ sthiraṃ kuryād yāvat sthirapadaṃ vrajet ||
अभ्यस्यमानो नादोऽयं बाह्यमावृणुते ध्वनिम् ।
पक्षाद्विक्षेपमखिलं जित्वा योगी सुखी भवेत् ॥
abhyasyamāno nādo’yaṃ bāhyam āvṛṇute dhvanim /
pakṣād vikṣepam akhilaṃ jitvā yogī sukhī bhavet //
abhyasyamāno nādo ’yaṃ bāhyam āvartayed dhvanim |
paścād vikṣepam akhilaṃ jitvā yogī sukhī bhavet ||
abhyasyamāno nādo yaṃ bāhyam āvarttayet dhvaniṃ |
pakṣād vikṣepam akhilaṃ jitvā yogī sukhībhavet ||
abhyasyamāno nādo ’yaṃ bāhyam āvṛṇute dhvanim |
pakṣād vipakṣam akhilaṃ jitvā turyapadaṃ vrajet ||
श्रूयते प्रथमाभ्यासे नादो नानाविधो महान् ।
वर्धमाने ततोऽभ्यासे श्रूयते सूक्ष्मसूक्ष्मतः ॥
śrūyate prathamābhyāse nādo nānāvidho mahān /
vardhamāne tato’bhyāse śrūyate sūkṣmasūkṣmataḥ //
śrūyate prathamābhyāse nādo nānāvidho mahān |
vartamāne tato ’bhyāse śrūyate sūkṣmasūkṣmataḥ ||
śrūyate prathamābhyāse nādo nānāvidho bahuḥ |
vardhamāne tato ’bhyāse śrūyate sūkṣmasūkṣmataḥ ||
śrūyate prathamābhyāse nādo nānāvidho bahuḥ |
vardhamāne tato ’bhyāse śrūyate sūkṣmasūkṣmataḥ ||
आदौ जलधिजीमूतभेरीनिर्झरसंभवाः ।
मध्ये मर्दलशंखोत्था घण्टाकाहलजास्तथा ॥
ādau jaladhijīmūtabherīnirjharasaṃbhavāḥ /
madhye mardalaśaṃkhotthā ghaṇṭākāhalajās tathā //
?? more refs there are different options for kāhala, such as a trumpet or drum that looks like datura flower. See Schmidt, Nachträge: "eine Art Trommel (kāhalāsu dhattūrapuṣpākāramukhabherīṣu), Yaśastilakam (commentary).
ādau jaladhijīmūtabherījharjharasaṃbhavaḥ |
madhye mardalaśaṅkhottha ghaṇṭākāhalakās tathā ||
ādau jaladhijīmūtabherīnirjharasaṃbhavāḥ |
madhye marddalaśaṃkhotthā ghaṇṭākāhalakās tathā ||
ādau jaladhijīmūtabherīnirjharasambhavaḥ |
madhye marddalaśaṃkhotthā ghaṃṭākāhalakās tathā ||
अन्ते तु किङ्किणीवंशवीणाभ्रमरनिस्वनाः ।
इति नानाविधा नादाः श्रूयन्ते देहमध्यतः ॥
ante tu kiṅkiṇīvaṃśavīṇābhramaranisvanāḥ /
iti nānāvidhā nādāḥ śrūyante dehamadhyataḥ //
anye tu kiṅkiṇīvṛndavīṇābhramaraniḥsvanāḥ |
iti nānāvidho nādaḥ śrūyate dehamadhyagaḥ ||
ante tu kiṃkiṇīvṛndavīṇābhramaraniḥsvanāḥ |
iti nānāvidhā nādāḥ śrūyante dehamadhyataḥ ||
ante tu kiṃkiṇī vaṃśanādā bhramaraniḥsvanāḥ |
iti nānāvidhā nādāḥ śrūyante yatra madhyataḥ ||
महति श्रूयमाणेऽपि मेघभेर्यादिकध्वनौ ।
तत्र सूक्ष्मात्सूक्ष्मतरं नादमेव परामृशेत् ॥
mahati śrūyamāṇe’pi meghabheryādikadhvanau /
tatra sūkṣmāt sūkṣmataraṃ nādam eva parāmṛśet //
mahati śrūyamāṇe ’pi meghabheryādike dhvanau |
tataḥ sūkṣmāt sūkṣmataraṃ nādam eva parāmṛśet ||
mahati śrūyamāṇe ’pi meghabheryādike svane |
tatra sūkṣmāt sūkṣmataraṃ nādam eva parāmṛśet ||
घनमुत्सृज्य वा सूक्ष्मे सूक्ष्ममुत्सृज्य वा घने ।
तौ त्यक्त्वा मध्यमे स्याद्वा मनो नान्यत्र चालयेत् ॥
ghanam utsṛjya vā sūkṣme sūkṣmam utsṛjya vā ghane /
tau tyaktvā madhyame syād vā mano nānyatra cālayet //
ghanam utsṛjya vā sūkṣmaṃ sūkṣmaṃ pramṛjya vā ghanam |
paraṃ tatraiva niḥkṣipya mano nānyatra cālayet ||
ghanam utsṛjya vā sūkṣme sūkṣmam utsṛjya vā ghane |
ramamāṇam api kṣipraṃ mano nātra pracālayet ||
ghanam utsṛjya vā sūkṣme sūkṣmam utsṛjya vā ghane |
ramamāṇam api kṣiptaṃ mano nānyatra cālayet ||
यत्र कुत्रापि वा नादे लगति प्रथमं मनः ।
तत्रैव तत्स्थिरीभूत्वा तेन सार्धं विलीयते ॥
yatra kutrāpi vā nāde lagati prathamaṃ manaḥ /
tatraiva tat sthirībhūtvā tena sārdhaṃ vilīyate //
yatra kutrāpi vā nāde prathamaṃ viśate manaḥ |
tatraiva susthiraṃ kuryāt tena sārdhaṃ vilīyate ||
yatra kutrāpi vā nāde lagati prathamaṃ manaḥ |
tatraiva susthirībhūtvā tena sārdhaṃ vilīyate ||
yatra kutrāpi vā nāde lagati prathamaṃ manaḥ |
tatra tatra sthirībhūtvā tena sārdhaṃ vilīyate ||
मकरन्दं पिबन्भृङ्गो गन्धान्नापेक्षते यथा ।
नादासक्तं तथा चित्तं विषयान्न हि काङ्क्षते ॥
makarandaṃ piban bhṛṅgo gandhān nāpekṣate yathā /
nādāsaktaṃ tathā cittaṃ viṣayān na hi kāṅkṣate //
makarandaṃ piban bhṛṅgo gandhān nāpekṣate yathā |
nādāsaktaṃ tathā cittaṃ viṣayān na hi kāṅkṣati ||
makarandaṃ pibed bhṛṅgo gandho na prekṣyate yathā |
nādāsaktaṃ tathā cittaṃ viṣayān na hi kāṃkṣate ||
makarandaṃ piban bhṛṃgo gandhaṃ nāpekṣate yathā |
nādāsaktaṃ tathā cittaṃ viśayān naiva kāṃkṣati ||
makarandaṃ piban bhṛṅgo gandhān nāpekṣate tathā |
nādāsaktaṃ sadā cittaṃ viṣayaṃ na hi kāṅkṣati ||
बद्धं विमुक्तचाञ्चल्यं नादगन्धकजारणात् ।
मनःपारदमाप्नोति निरालम्बाख्यखोटतां ॥
baddhaṃ vimuktacāñcalyaṃ nādagandhakajāraṇāt /
manaḥpāradam āpnoti nirālambākhyakhoṭatāṃ //
See Hellwig 2009:204–206 on khoṭa, “lame”, which in alchemy is a technical term use to describe mercury that has been processed many times using the māraṇa technique and no longer moves.
purā matsyendrabodhāya ādināthoditavacaḥ |
manaḥ pākam avāpnoti nirālambākhyaghoṭanam ||
baddhaṃ viyuktaṃ cāpalyaṃ nādagandhakajāraṇāt |
manaḥ pāradam āpnoti nirālambākhyakheṭakam ||
बद्धः सुनादगन्धेन सद्यः संत्यक्तचापलः ।
प्रयाति चेतःसूतेन्द्रः पक्षछिन्न इति प्रथाम् ॥ (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3, η2 and χ)
baddhaḥ sunādagandhena sadyaḥ saṃtyaktacāpalaḥ /
prayāti cetaḥsūtendraḥ pakṣachinna iti prathām // (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3, η2 and χ)
Cf.~Rasendracūḍāmaṇi 16.52--55
evaṃ ca pañcamo grāsaḥ pradātavyo’ṣṭamāṃśataḥ |
sa pātrastho ’gnisaṃtapto na gacchati kathañcana ||16.52||
sa pakṣacchinna ity uktaḥ sa mukto ’khiladurguṇaiḥ |
so’yaṃ niṣevitaḥ sūtas trimāsaṃ rājikāmitaḥ ||16.53||
viḍaṅgatriphalākṣaudraiḥ khe devaiḥ saha saṅgamam |
ghrāṇamātreṇa sūtendraḥ sarvaroganikṛntanaḥ ||16.54||
guṇā ete vinirdiṣṭā rasasya rasavādibhiḥ |
sakalāste guṇāḥ satyā bhairaveṇa prakīrtitāḥ ||16.55||
नादश्रवणतश्चित्तमन्तरङ्गभुजङ्गमः ।
विस्मृत्य सर्वमेकाग्रः कुत्रचिन्न हि धावति ॥
nādaśravaṇataś cittam antaraṅgabhujaṅgamaḥ /
vismṛtya sarvam ekāgraḥ kutracin na hi dhāvati //
The metaphor is that of snake charming: beguiled by the inner sound, the snake that is the mind becomes transfixed. Witnesses of the gamma and delta groups have turaṅgamaḥ instead of bhujaṅgamaḥ, perhaps because forms from dhāv are unusual with the latter, but they are found at e.g.~Padmapurāṇa, Garuḍapurāṇa (refs ??).
nādaśravaṇataś cittam antaraṅgaturaṅgamaḥ |
viśūnyaṃ sarvam ekāgryaṃ kutra cin na hi dhāvati ||
nādaśravaṇataś cittam antaraṃgakuraṃgakaḥ |
vismṛtya viśvam ekāgraḥ kutra cin na hi dhāvati ||
मनोमत्तगजेन्द्रस्य विषयोद्यानचारिणः ।
नियामनसमर्थोऽयं निनादो निशिताङ्कुशः ॥
manomattagajendrasya viṣayodyānacāriṇaḥ /
niyāmanasamartho’yaṃ ninādo niśitāṅkuśaḥ //
The unusual form niyāmana is also found in Rasaśāstra works where it occurs in the context of restraining mercury and is a topic of discussion (e.g.~Rasaprakāśasudhākara 1.23, Ānandakanda 1.4.58–59).
manomattagajendrasya viṣayodyānacāriṇaḥ |
niyāmanasamartho ’yaṃ ninādo niśitāṅkuśaḥ ||
manomattagajendrasya viṣayodyānacāriṇaḥ ||
niyāmanasamartho ’yaṃ ninādo niśitāṅkuśaḥ |
अन्तरङ्गस्य जविनो वाजिनः परिघायते ।
नादोपास्तिरतो नित्यमवधार्यापि योगिना ॥*
antaraṅgasya javino vājinaḥ parighāyate /
nādopāstir ato nityam avadhāryāpi yoginā //*
We understand ninādaḥ, which is the subject of the previous line, as the subject in the first line of this verse. Several witness have paridhāyate instead of parighāyate. The latter is unattested but could mean "is a halter" based on abhidhānī’s meaning of “halter”.
antaraṃgaturaṃgasya vājinaḥ paridhāvataḥ |
nādopāstikhalīnaṃ hi niyāmanakaraṃ dṛḍham ||
नादोऽन्तरङ्गसारङ्गबन्धने वागुरायते ।
अन्तरङ्गकुरङ्गस्य वधे व्याधायतेऽपि च ॥*
nādo’ntaraṅgasāraṅgabandhane vāgurāyate /
antaraṅgakuraṅgasya vadhe vyādhāyate’pi ca //*
Adopt V15 67cd ?? MD: rodhe may be correct. In a drive hunt, the animals are driven in a certain direction (often in a confined space) by means of loud noises, etc., so that another hunter can easily shoot them. JM: yes, adopt, I have altered tr. to "trapping"
nādo ’ntaraṅgasāraṅgabandhane vāgurāyate ||
antaraṅgaturaṅgasya bandhane līyate ’pi ca ||
nādo’ntaraṃgasāraṃgabandhane vāgurāyate |
antaraṃgakuraṃgasya nādo vyādhāyate ’pi ca ||
घण्टादिनादसक्तिस्तब्धान्तःकरणहरिणस्य ।
प्रहरणमतिसुकरं स्याच्छरसंधाता प्रवीणश्चेत् ॥ *
ghaṇṭādinādasaktistabdhāntaḥkaraṇahariṇasya /
praharaṇam atisukaraṃ syāc charasaṃdhātā pravīṇaś cet // *
[Aल्त्1] अनाहतध्वनेरन्तर् ज्ञेयं यत्सूक्ष्मसूक्ष्मकम् ।
मनस्तत्र लयं याति तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् ॥ (ε2, ε3 and η2)
[Alt1] anāhatadhvaner antar jñeyaṃ yat sūkṣmasūkṣmakam /
manas tatra layaṃ yāti tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam // (ε2, ε3 and η2)
anāhatasya śabdasya tasya śabdasya yo dhvaniḥ ||
dhvaner antargataṃ jyotir jyotirantargataṃ manaḥ |
tanmano vilayaṃ yāti tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam ||
anāhatasya śabdasya tasya śabdasya yo dhvaniḥ ||
dhvaner antargataṃ jyotir jyotirantargataṃ manaḥ |
tan mano vilayaṃ yāti tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam ||
anāhatasya śabdasya tasya śabdasya yo dhvaniḥ ||
dhvaner antargataṃ jyotir jyotirantargataṃ manaḥ |
yan mano vilayaṃ yāti tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam ||
anāhatasya śabdasya tasya śabdasya yo dhvaniḥ |
dhvaner antargataṃ jyotir jyotiṣo ’ntargataṃ manaḥ ||
[Aल्त्2] अनाहतस्य शब्दस्य तस्य शब्दस्य यो ध्वनिः ।
ध्वनेरन्तर्गतं ज्ञेयं ज्ञेयस्यान्तर्गतं मनः ।
तन्मनो विलयं याति तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् ॥ (Α, β1 β2 βω, Γ, Δ and χ)
[Alt2] anāhatasya śabdasya tasya śabdasya yo dhvaniḥ /
dhvaner antargataṃ jñeyaṃ jñeyasyāntargataṃ manaḥ /
tan mano vilayaṃ yāti tad viṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam // (Α, β1 β2 βω, Γ, Δ and χ)
तावदाकाशसंकल्पो यावच्छब्दः प्रवर्तते ।
निःशब्दं तत्परं ब्रह्म परमात्मा समीर्यते ॥
tāvad ākāśasaṃkalpo yāvac chabdaḥ pravartate /
niḥśabdaṃ tat paraṃ brahma paramātmā samīryate //
tāvad ākāśasaṃkalpo yāvac chabdaḥ pravartate |
niḥśabdaṃ tatparaṃ brahma paramātmā samīryate ||
tāvad ākāśasaṅkalpo yāvac chabdaḥ pravartate |
niḥśabdaṃ tat parabrahma paramātmā sa gīyate || 15 ||
tāvadākāśasaṅkalpo yāvacchabdaḥ pravatate |
niḥśabdaṃ tatparaṃ brahma paramātmā samīryate ||
यत्किंचिन्नादरूपेण श्रूयते शक्तिरेव सा ।
यस्तच्छ्रोता निराकारः स एव परमेश्वरः ॥
yat kiṃcin nādarūpeṇa śrūyate śaktir eva sā /
yas tacchrotā nirākāraḥ sa eva parameśvaraḥ //
yat kiñ cin nāmarūpeṇa śrūyate śaktir eva sā |
yas tacchrotā nirākāraḥ sa eva parameśvaraḥ ||
yat kiṃ cin nāmarūpeṇa śrūyate śaktir eva sā |
yasya śrottā nirākaraḥ sa eva parameśvaraḥ ||
श्रवणमुखनयननासानिरोधनं चैव कर्तव्यम् ।
शुद्धसुषुम्णासरणौ स्फुटममलः श्रूयते नादः ॥
śravaṇamukhanayananāsānirodhanaṃ caiva kartavyam /
śuddhasuṣumṇāsaraṇau sphuṭam amalaḥ śrūyate nādaḥ //
??Adopt alpha reading mukha°, naiva. HI: it is strongly attested (groups 4c, C6, etc) and more likely explains the change to °saṃrodhanaṃ kāryam
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
śravaṇapuṭanayananāsāpuṭarodhanaṃ kāryam |
śrīśuddhasuṣumṇāsaraṇau sphuṭam amalaḥ śrūyate nādaḥ ||
haṭhapradīpikāyāṃ
śravaṇapuṭanayanayugulanāsāmukharodham eva kartavyaṃ |
śuddhasaṣumṇāśaraṇe sphuṭam amalaḥ śrūyate nādaḥ ||
śravaṇamukhanayananāsānirodhanenaiva kartavyam |
śuddhasuṣumnāsaraṇau sphuṭam amalaṃ śrūyate nādaḥ ||
नादः शक्तिरिति ख्यातो नादज्ञानं सदाशिवः ।
नादज्ञाने च नष्टे त दुन्मन्येवावशिष्यते ॥ (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3 and η2)
nādaḥ śaktir iti khyāto nādajñānaṃ sadāśivaḥ /
nādajñāne ca naṣṭe ta d unmany evāvaśiṣyate // (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3 and η2)
nādaḥ śaktir iti khyāto nādajñānaṃ sadāśivaḥ |
nādajñāne vinaṣṭe ca tad unmany eva śiṣyate ||
नादो यावन्मनस्तावन्नादान्ते तु मनोन्मनी ।
सशब्दं कथितं व्योम निःशब्दं ब्रह्म कथ्यते ॥ (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3 and η2)
nādo yāvan manas tāvan nādānte tu manonmanī /
saśabdaṃ kathitaṃ vyoma niḥśabdaṃ brahma kathyate // (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3 and η2)
nādo yāvan manas tāvan nādānte ca manonmanī |
saśabdaṃ kathitaṃ vāte niḥśabdaṃ brahma kathyate ||
सदा नादानुसंधानात् संक्षीणे वासनाचये ।
निरञ्जने च लीयेते निश्चितं चित्तमारुतौ ॥ (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3, η2 and χ)
sadā nādānusaṃdhānāt saṃkṣīṇe vāsanācaye /
nirañjane ca līyete niścitaṃ cittamārutau // (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3, η2 and χ)
sadā nādānusandhānāt saṃkṣīṇe vāsanā bhavet |
nirañjane vilīneti niścalitaṃ mārutaṃ manaḥ ||
saśabdaś cākṣare kṣīṇe niḥśabdaṃ paramaṃ padam |
sadā nādānusandhānāt saṃkṣīṇā vāsanā bhavet ||
sadā nādānusandhānāt saṃkṣīṇe vāsanākṣaye |
nirañjane ca līyate niścitaṃ cittamārutau ||
नादकोटिसहस्राणि बिन्दुकोटिशतानि च ।
सर्वे तत्र लयं यान्ति यत्र देवो निरञ्जनः ॥ (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3 and η2)
इति नादानुसंधानम् ॥ (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3, η2 and χ)
nādakoṭisahasrāṇi bindukoṭiśatāni ca /
sarve tatra layaṃ yānti yatra devo nirañjanaḥ // (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3 and η2)
iti nādānusaṃdhānam // (β1 β2 βω, ε2, ε3, η2 and χ)
The expression devo nirañjanaḥ (`unadorned god’) refers to Śiva. Compare the quotation in the Śabdakalpadruma, s.v.~dharmaghaṭa: “dots ante yāti paraṃ sthānaṃ yatra devo nirañjanaḥ||" iti bhaviṣyapurāṇoktā dharmaghaṭavratakathā samāptā ||
nādakoṭisahasrāṇi bindukoṭiśatāni ca |
sarve tatra layaṃ yānti yatra devo nirañjana iti ||
nādakoṭisahasrāṇi bindukoṭiśatāni ca |
sarve tatra layaṃ yānti yatra devo nirañjanaḥ ||
nādakoṭisahasrāṇi bindukoṭiśatāni ca ||
sarve tatra layaṃ yānti brahmapraṇavanādake |
सर्वे हठलयोपाया राजयोगपदावधि ।
राजयोगपदं प्राप्य जायतेऽसौ निरञ्जनः ॥ (β1 β2 βω)
sarve haṭhalayopāyā rājayogapadāvadhi /
rājayogapadaṃ prāpya jāyate’sau nirañjanaḥ // (β1 β2 βω)
See 4.74.
काष्ठगोष्ठीप्रपञ्चेन किं सखे श्रूयतामिदम् ।
पुरा मत्स्येन्द्रबोधार्थमादिनाथोदितं वचः ॥
kāṣṭhagoṣṭhīprapañcena kiṃ sakhe śrūyatām idam /
purā matsyendrabodhārtham ādināthoditaṃ vacaḥ //
This verse is likely to be authorial, composed to introduce next two verses, which are from the Candrāvalokana, a dialogue between Matsyendra and Śiva. 1.34 is another probable authorial verse and, like this one, it has the vocative sakhe.
kāṣṭhagoṣṭhīprasaṅgena nādam antargataṃ śṛṇu |
purā matsyendrabodhāya ādināthoditaṃ vacaḥ ||
यावन्नैव प्रविशति चरन्मारुतो मध्यमार्गे
यावद्बिन्दुर्न भवति दृढः प्राणवातप्रबद्धः ।
यावद्व्योम्ना सहजसदृशं जायते नैव तत्त्वं
तावत्सर्वं वदति यदिदं दम्भमिथ्याप्रलापः ॥
yāvan naiva praviśati caran māruto madhyamārge
yāvad bindur na bhavati dṛḍhaḥ prāṇavātaprabaddhaḥ /
yāvad vyomnā sahajasadṛśaṃ jāyate naiva tattvaṃ
tāvat sarvaṃ vadati yad idaṃ dambhamithyāpralāpaḥ //
yāvan naiva praviśati caran māruto madhyamārge
yāvad bindur na bhavati dṛḍhaḥ prāṇavātaprabandhaḥ |
yāvad vyomnā sadṛśa sarasaṃ jāyate nonmanatvaṃ {[}em.~vyomnā sadṛśam arasaṃ?]
tāvat sarvaṃ yadi ca vadate dambhamithyāpralāpaḥ ||
14b prāṇavātaprabandhaḥ ] 4345 : prāṇaghātaprabuddhaḥ 75278 : prāṇavāyuḥ prabuddhaḥ 7970 : prāṇavātaprabuddhaḥ T00788 14d sarvam] 7970, T00788, 75278 : vighnaṃ 4345
haṭhapradīpikāyāṃ—
yāvan naiva praviśati caran māruto madhyamārge
yāvad bindur na bhavati dṛḍhaḥ prāṇavātaprabaddhaḥ |
yāvad vyomnaḥ sahajasadṛśaṃ jñāyate naiva tatvam
tāvat sarvaṃ vadati yad idaṃ dambhamithyāpralāpa iti
yāvan naiva praviśati caran māruto madhyamārgaṃ
yāvat sūkṣmo na bhavati dṛḍhaḥ prāṇavātaprabandhaḥ |
yāvad vyomnā sahajasadṛśaṃ jāyate naiva cittaṃ
tāvat sarvaṃ vadati tad idaṃ dambhamithyāpralāpaḥ ||
ज्ञात्वा सुषुम्णासद्भेदं कृत्वा वायुं च मध्यगम् ।
नीत्वा तमैन्दवे स्थाने प्राणरन्ध्रे निरोधयेत् ॥
jñātvā suṣumṇāsadbhedaṃ kṛtvā vāyuṃ ca madhyagam /
nītvā tam aindave sthāne prāṇarandhre nirodhayet //
jñātvā suṣumnāsadbhedaṃ kṛtvā vāyuṃ ca madhyagam |
kṛtvāsāv aindave sthāne ghrāṇarandhre nirodhayet ||
satbhedaṃ ] 4345, 4340, T00788 : tatbhedaṃ 7970.
kṛtvāsāv aindave ] 7970, 4340, T00788 : kṛtvā*d*baindave 4345
jñatvā suṣumnāṃ tadbhedaṃ kṛtvā vāyuṃ ca madhyagam |
kṛtvāsau baindavasthāne ghraṇarandhre nirodhayet ||
jñātvā suṣumnāṃ tadbhedaṃ kṛtvā vāyuṃ ca madhyagam ||
sthitvāsau baindavasthāne ghrāṇarandhre nirodhayet |
jñātvā suṣumnāsadbhedaṃ kṛtvā vāyuṃ ca madhyagam |
sthitvā sadaiva svasthena prāṇarandhraṃ nirodhayet ||
तथा च वसिष्ठः (α1, α3, β2 and βω)
इडायां पिङ्गलायां च चरतश्चन्द्रभास्करौ ।
चन्द्रस्तामस इत्युक्तः सूर्यो राजस उच्यते ॥*
tathā ca vasiṣṭhaḥ (α1, α3, β2 and βω)
iḍāyāṃ piṅgalāyāṃ ca carataś candrabhāskarau /
candras tāmasa ity uktaḥ sūryo rājasa ucyate //*
iḍāyāṃ piṅgalāyāṃ ca carataś candrabhāskarau |
iḍāyāṃ candramā jñeyaḥ piṅgalāyāṃ raviḥ smṛtaḥ ||
candras tāmasa ity uktaḥ sūryo rājasa ucyate |
iḍāyāṃ piṅgalāyāṃ ca carataś candrabhāskarau ||
iḍāyāṃ candramā jñeyaḥ piṅglāyāṃ raviḥ smṛtaḥ |
candras tāmasa ity uktaḥ sūryo rājasa ucyate ||
iḍāyāṃ piṅgalāyāṃ ca parataś candrabhāskarau ||
iḍāyāṃ piṃgalāyāṃ ca carataś candrabhāskarau |
iḍāyāṃ candramā jñeyaḥ piṃgalāyāṃ raviḥ smṛtaḥ ||
candras tāmasa ity uktas sūryo rājasa ucyate |
तावेव धत्तः सकलं कालं रात्रिंदिवात्मकम् ।
भोक्त्री सुषुम्णा कालस्य गुह्यमेतदुदाहृतम् ॥
tāv eva dhattaḥ sakalaṃ kālaṃ rātriṃdivātmakam /
bhoktrī suṣumṇā kālasya guhyam etad udāhṛtam //
tāv eva sakalaṃ dhattaḥ kālaṃ rātrindivātmakam |
bhoktrī suṣumṇā kālasya guhyam etad udāhṛtam ||
tāv eva dhattaḥ sakalaṃ kālaṃ rātridivātmakam |
bhoktrī suṣumnā kālasya guhyam etad udāhṛtam ||
tāv eva dhattas sakalaṃ kālaṃ rātriṃ divātmakam |
bhoktrī suṣumṇā kālasya guhyam etad udāhṛtam ||
tathā coktaṃ haṭhapradīkāyāṃ–
sūryācandramasau dhattaḥ lagnaḥ kāla rātridinātmakaṃ ||
bhoktrī suṣumnā kālasya guhyate tad udīritaṃ ||
तथा हि सौभद्रं नाम श्लोकचतुष्टयम् ।
षट्चक्रं षोडशाधारं त्रिधा लक्ष्यं गुणत्रयम् ।
शेषं तु ग्रन्थविस्तारं त्रिकूटं परमं पदम् ॥
tathā hi saubhadraṃ nāma ślokacatuṣṭayam /
ṣaṭcakraṃ ṣoḍaśādhāraṃ tridhā lakṣyaṃ guṇatrayam /
śeṣaṃ tu granthavistāraṃ trikūṭaṃ paramaṃ padam //
We do not know why this tetrad of verses is called Saubhadra.
ṣaṭcakraṃ ṣoḍaśādhāraṃ trilakṣaṃ vyomapañcakam |
svadehe ye na jānanti kathaṃ sidhyanti yoginaḥ ||
कुण्डली कुटिलाकारा सर्पवत्परिकीर्तिता ।
सा शक्तिश्चालिता येन स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥
kuṇḍalī kuṭilākārā sarpavat parikīrtitā /
sā śaktiś cālitā yena sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //
यदा कूटं त्रिकूटस्थं चित्तं चित्रं निरन्तरम् ।
कुण्डल्यास्तु प्रयोगेण स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥
yadā kūṭaṃ trikūṭasthaṃ cittaṃ citraṃ nirantaram /
kuṇḍalyās tu prayogeṇa sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //
We are unsure of the referent of kūṭa here. As suggested to us by Sven Sellmer, it may mean the tip of the tongue, which in e.g.~Khecarīvidyā 1.65–67 and 3.16–17, is to be placed at trikūṭa as part of the practice of khecarīmudrā.
द्वासप्ततिसहस्राणि नाडीद्वाराणि पञ्जरे ।
सुषुम्णा शांभवी शक्तिः शेषास्त्वेव निरर्थकाः ॥*
dvāsaptatisahasrāṇi nāḍīdvārāṇi pañjare /
suṣumṇā śāṃbhavī śaktiḥ śeṣās tv eva nirarthakāḥ //*
The compound nāḍīdvāra is not found elsewhere (other than as nāḍīdvāreṇa) and its meaning here is unclear. Brahmānanda understands dvārāṇi to refer to routes by which breath enters the body (dvārāṇi vāyupraveśamārgāḥ) and we have translated nāḍīdvārāṇi accordingly.
sūryā[c]andram asau kṛtvā viditvā karapaṃjare [|]
suṣumṇā śāṃbhavī śaktiḥ śeṣās tv eva nirarthakāḥ ||
dvisaptatisahasrāṇi nāḍīdvārāṇi pañjare ||
suṣumnā śāmbhavī śaktiḥ śeṣās tv anye nirarthakāḥ |
वायुः परिचितो यत्नादग्निना सह कुण्डलीम् ।
बोधयित्वा सुषुम्णायां प्रविशेदविरोधतः ॥
vāyuḥ paricito yatnād agninā saha kuṇḍalīm /
bodhayitvā suṣumṇāyāṃ praviśed avirodhataḥ //
vāyuḥ paricito yatnād agninā saha kuṇḍalīm |
bodhayitvā suṣumnāyāṃ praviśed avirodhataḥ ||
vāyuḥ paricito yasmād agninā saha kuṇḍalīm |
bodhayitvā suṣumnāyāṃ praviśed anirodhataḥ ||
vāyuḥ paricito yasmād agninā saha kuṃḍalī |
bodhayitvā suṣumnāyāṃ praviśed anirodhata iti
सुषुम्णावाहिनि प्राणे सिध्यत्येव मनोन्मनी ।
अन्यथा विविधाभ्यासाः प्रयासायैव योगिनाम् ॥
suṣumṇāvāhini prāṇe sidhyaty eva manonmanī /
anyathā vividhābhyāsāḥ prayāsāyaiva yoginām //
haṭhapradīpikāyām–
suṣumnāvāhinī prāṇe siddhaty eva manonmani |
anyathā vividhābhyāso prayāsāyaiva yoginām ||
suṣumṇāvāhini prāṇe sidhyaty eva manonmanī |
anye ye vividhābhyāsāḥ prayāsā eva yogināṃ ||
पवनो बध्यते येन मनस्तेनैव बध्यते ।
मनश्च बध्यते येन पवनस्तेन बध्यते ॥
pavano badhyate yena manas tenaiva badhyate /
manaś ca badhyate yena pavanas tena badhyate //
Brahmānanda understands yena here to refer to the yogi. We have taken it to refer to a practice.
tathā coktaṃ haṭhapradīpikāyāṃ–
pavano badhyate yena manas tenaiva b[a]dhyate
mānaś ca badhyate yena pavanas tena badhyate [|]
हेतुद्वयं तु चित्तस्य वासना च समीरणः ।
तयोर्विनष्ट एकस्मिन्द्रुतं द्वावपि नश्यतः ॥*
hetudvayaṃ tu cittasya vāsanā ca samīraṇaḥ /
tayor vinaṣṭa ekasmin drutaṃ dvāv api naśyataḥ //*
It is difficult to say whether the Gorakṣaśataka’s reading cittasya was changed to manaso by the author when this verse was borrowed in order to make the terminology consistent with the previous verse, or whether this change occurred at a later time.
hetudvayañ ca cittasya vāsanā ca samīraṇaḥ |
tayor vinaṣṭa ekasmin drutaṃ dvāv api naśyataḥ |
9d drutaṃ dvāv api ] em.; dhṛtaṃ dvāv api T, tasmai dvāv api G1, nasmai dvāv api G2, tad dvāv api vi° U
dve bīje rāma cittasya prāṇaspandanavāsane |
ekasmiṃś ca tayoẖ kṣīṇe kṣipraṃ dve api naśyataḥ ||
hetudvayaṃ hi cittasya vāsanā ca samīraṇaḥ |
tayor vinaṣṭa ekasmiṃs tad dvāv api vinaśyataḥ ||
मनो यत्र विलीयेत पवनस्तत्र लीयते ।
पवनो लीयते यत्र मनस्तत्रैव लीयते ॥*
mano yatra vilīyeta pavanas tatra līyate /
pavano līyate yatra manas tatraiva līyate //*
These verses seem to elevate the possible role of the mind in achieving samādhi (as opposed to the standard Haṭha method of stopping the breath to achieve samādhi).
mano yatra vilīyeta pavanas tatra līyate ||
दुग्धाम्बुवत्संमिलितौ सदैव
तुल्यक्रियौ मानसमारुतौ हि ।
यावन्मनस्तत्र मरुत्प्रवृत्ति-
र्यावन्मरुच्चापि मनःप्रवृत्तिः ॥
dugdhāmbuvat saṃmilitau sadaiva
tulyakriyau mānasamārutau hi /
yāvan manas tatra marutpravṛtti-
r yāvan maruc cāpi manaḥpravṛttiḥ //
Complementing his understanding of the previous verse, Brahmānanda has yatodots tatra in pādas c and d, taking it to mean yatradots tatra and to be referring to cakras.
dugdhāṃbuvat sammilitau sadaiva
tulyakriyau mānasamārutau ca |
yāvan manas tatra marutpravṛttir
yāvan maruc cāpi manaḥpravṛttiḥ |
sadaiva ] NI, S, N : tathaiva Cc : sad eva Na
rājayoge—
dugdhāmbuvat saṃmilitau sadaiva
tulyakriyau mānasamārutau ca |
yāvan manas tatra marutpravṛttir
yāvan marut tatra manaḥpravṛttiḥ ||
dugdhāmbuvat saṃmilitau sadaiva
tulyakriyau mānasamārutau ca |
yāvan manas tatra marutpravṛttis
tatraikanāśād aparasya nāśaḥ ||
तत्रैकनाशादपरस्य नाश
एकप्रवृत्तेरपरप्रवृत्तिः ।*
अध्वस्तयोश्चेन्द्रियवर्गबुद्धि-
र्विध्वस्तयोर्मोक्षपदस्य सिद्धिः ॥
tatraikanāśād aparasya nāśa
ekapravṛtter aparapravṛttiḥ /*
adhvastayoś cendriyavargabuddhi-
r vidhvastayor mokṣapadasya siddhiḥ //
tatraikanāśād aparasya nāśa
ekapravṛtter aparapravṛttiḥ |
adhvastayoś cendriyavargabuddhir
vidhvastayor mokṣapadasya siddhiḥ ||
vargabuddhir ] NI and S : vargavṛttir Pa Tr Va Nb Ea Eb : vargavṛddhiḥ VbVd: vargavṛddhir N : vargavidhi Pc : sargabuddhir Cc: sargaviddhir Nu
tatraikanāśād aparasya nāśaḥ
ekapravṛtter aparapravṛttiḥ |
adhvastayoḥ svendriyavargavṛddhir
vidhvastayor mokṣapadasya siddhiḥ ||
ekapravṛttāv aparapravṛttir
ekasya nāśād aparasya nāśaḥ |
adhvastayor indriyavargavṛttir
vidhvastayoḥ mokṣapadasya siddhiḥ ||
वायुमार्गेण संचारी सकलां लभते महीम् ।
तथाष्टगुणमैश्वर्यं सत्यं सत्यं वरानने ॥
vāyumārgeṇa saṃcārī sakalāṃ labhate mahīm /
tathāṣṭaguṇam aiśvaryaṃ satyaṃ satyaṃ varānane //
vāyuvegena deveśi sakalāṃ bhramate mahīm |
aṣṭadhāguṇam aiśvaryaṃ satyaṃ satyaṃ na cānyathā ||
तथा विश्वरूपाचार्यः ।
यदा संक्षीयते प्राणो मानसं च विलीयते ।
तदा समरसत्वं यत्समाधिः सोऽभिधीयते ॥
tathā viśvarūpācāryaḥ /
yadā saṃkṣīyate prāṇo mānasaṃ ca vilīyate /
tadā samarasatvaṃ yat samādhiḥ so’bhidhīyate //
The six-chapter Vivekamārtaṇḍa is attributed to Viśvarūpa, which perhaps explains the attribution of this verse to him.
yadā saṃkṣīyate prāṇo mānasaṃ ca vilīyate |
tadā samarasatvaṃ ca samādhiḥ so ’bhidhīyate ||
yadā saṃkṣīyate prāṇo mānasaṃ ca pralīyate |
yadā samarasatvaṃ ca samādhiḥ procyate tadā ||
yadā ] tadā
मनःस्थैर्ये स्थिरो वायुस् ततो बिन्दुः स्थिरो भवेत् ।
बिन्दुस्थैर्योदयात्पुत्र पिण्डस्थैर्यं प्रजायते ॥
manaḥsthairye sthiro vāyus tato binduḥ sthiro bhavet /
bindusthairyodayāt putra piṇḍasthairyaṃ prajāyate //
haṭhapradīpikāyām—
manaḥsthairye sthiro vāyus tato binduḥ sthiro bhavet |
bindusthairyād athāpannaṃ piṇḍasthairyaṃ prajāyata iti ||
cittasthairye mārutasusthiraḥ syāt tasmād bindususthiro yogino ’ṃge~|
bindusthairye syād dayā satvam ojaḥ piṇḍasthairyaṃ kāyasampad balaṃ ca || 19 ||
दृष्टिः स्थिरा यस्य विनैव दृश्या-
द्वायुः स्थिरो यस्य विना प्रयत्नात् ।
चित्तं स्थिरं यस्य विनावलम्बात्
स एव योगी स गुरुः स सेव्यः ॥
dṛṣṭiḥ sthirā yasya vinaiva dṛśyā-
d vāyuḥ sthiro yasya vinā prayatnāt /
cittaṃ sthiraṃ yasya vināvalambāt
sa eva yogī sa guruḥ sa sevyaḥ //
dṛṣṭiḥ sthirā yasya vinaiva dṛśyād
vāyuḥ sthiro yasya vinā prayatnāt |
cittaṃ sthiraṃ yasya vināvalambāt
sa eva yogī sa guruḥ sa sevyaḥ ||
vinaiva dṛśyād AllNI AllSI Eb: vinā sudṛśyād Ua: vinā nimeṣād Pb AllN : vinaiva lakṣyād Cc: vinaiva dṛṣṭyād Jb: vinakadṛśyad Ma: vinānaṅgame Nb
dṛṣṭiḥ sthirā yasya vinaiva dṛśyaṃ
vāyuḥ sthiro yasya vinā prayatnaṃ |
cittaṃ sthiraṃ yasya vināvalaṃbaṃ
sa eva yogī sa guruḥ saṃsevyaḥ ||
dṛśyaṃ vinā sthirā dṛṣṭir manaś cālambanaṃ vinā |
vināyāsaṃ sthiro vāyur yasya syāt sa guruḥ priye ||
dṛṣṭiḥ sthirā yasya vinaiva lakṣyāt
vāyuḥ sthiro yasya vinā prayatnāt |
cittaṃ sthiraṃ yasya vināvalambanāt
sa eva yogī sa guruḥ sa sevyaḥ ||
dṛṣṭiḥ sthirā yasya vinaiva dṛśyād
vāyuḥ sthiro yasya vinā prayatnāt |
cittaṃ sthiraṃ yasya vinā’valambāt
sa eva yogī sa guruḥ sa sevyaḥ ||
प्रवेशे निर्गमे वामे दक्षिणे चोर्ध्वमप्यधः ।
न यस्य वायुर्वहति स मुक्तो नात्र संशयः ॥
praveśe nirgame vāme dakṣiṇe cordhvam apy adhaḥ /
na yasya vāyur vahati sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ //
praveśe nirgame vāme dakṣiṇe cordhvam apy adhaḥ |
na yasya vāyur vrajati sa mukto nātra saṃśayaḥ ||
सर्वे हठलयोपाया राजयोगस्य सिद्धये ।
राजयोगसमारूढः पुरुषः कालवञ्चकः ॥
sarve haṭhalayopāyā rājayogasya siddhaye /
rājayogasamārūḍhaḥ puruṣaḥ kālavañcakaḥ //
sarve layahaṭhābhyāsā rājayogasya siddhaye |
rājayogaṃ samārūḍhaḥ puruṣaḥ kālavañcaka iti ||
haṭhapradīpikāyām–
sarve haṭhalayopāyā rājayogasya siddhaye |
rājayogasamārūḍhaḥ puruṣaḥ kālavañcakaḥ ||
sarve haṭhalayopāyā rājayogāya kevalam |
rājayogaṃ samārūḍhaḥ puruṣaḥ kālavañcakaḥ ||
इडा भगवती गङ्गा पिङ्गला यमुना नदी ।
विज्ञेया तद्द्वयोर्मध्ये सुषुम्णा तु सरस्वती ॥ (δ1 and δ3)
iḍā bhagavatī gaṅgā piṅgalā yamunā nadī /
vijñeyā taddvayor madhye suṣumṇā tu sarasvatī // (δ1 and δ3)
त्रिवेणीसंगमो यत्र तीर्थराजः स उच्यते ।
तत्र स्नानं प्रकुर्वीत सर्वपापैः प्रमुच्यते ॥ (δ1 and δ3)
triveṇīsaṃgamo yatra tīrtharājaḥ sa ucyate /
tatra snānaṃ prakurvīta sarvapāpaiḥ pramucyate // (δ1 and δ3)
इति तु सकलयोगशास्त्रसिन्धोः
परिमथितादवकृष्टसारभूतम् ।
अनुभवत हठामृतं यमीन्द्रा
यदि भवतामजरामरत्ववाञ्छा ॥
iti tu sakalayogaśāstrasindhoḥ
parimathitād avakṛṣṭasārabhūtam /
anubhavata haṭhāmṛtaṃ yamīndrā
yadi bhavatām ajarāmaratvavāñchā //
iti tu sakalayogaśāstrasindhoḥ
parimathitād avakṛṣya sārabhūtaṃ [|]
anubhavata haṭhāmṛtaṃ yamīndrā
yadi bhavatām ajarāmaratvavāṃchā [||]
विद्यातीर्थे जगति विबुधाः साधवः सत्यतीर्थे
गङ्गातीर्थे मलिनमनसो योगिनो ज्ञानतीर्थे ।
धारातीर्थे धरणिपतयो दानतीर्थे धनाढ्याः
लज्जातीर्थे कुलयुवतयः पातकं क्षालयन्ति ॥ (η2)
vidyātīrthe jagati vibudhāḥ sādhavaḥ satyatīrthe
gaṅgātīrthe malinamanaso yogino jñānatīrthe /
dhārātīrthe dharaṇipatayo dānatīrthe dhanāḍhyāḥ
lajjātīrthe kulayuvatayaḥ pātakaṃ kṣālayanti // (η2)